Skip to main content

Full text of "Te Karere"

rr) Slops' 




: Kaa>tp 



► x^ 



f. Wahanga XX. Hnr.ut re 2" t C2(k Naiua I f 



t 
t 

* 










t 


' Wtit\ 


";.■':.-:..'. ■;■ ;'?< . 




f -TTT* 5 


% 


9 ^ngMgriM 


\: r 




"^ T -w 


% 


«p i i 




; | (i i- Ii-.-r? _ 


-*<*,.. 


'I 




' IS 


- .<,, ■..-■ - .:,,. 





Kote MAHI KAMURA o te KARETI M. A. C. 
Kotc kai-whukaako ko Erata E.L. Paraone. 



"Kia mahia ta koutou niahi ake e tera, 

e tera: ho o koutou ringaringa the ano 

hei mahi, Kia rite ki ta maiou i ako ai hi 

a koutou." Teharonika 4 : 11. 



T+++++++** : •:.++*+++*+**+'H"M''» 



c 






4i C6 KWRSRfc" 

WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 



Kl TE ETITA 

i le Kauwhau H 

He Panuit 

Ko nga Powhiri Qui Pari ha 

Ko te Hui o Puketapu 

KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 

11 Mo • hu no ti \\ h in o [h ti ,« 

Ko nga '1 uhituhinj \ , 

Kou- Maaka Tuarua 2 \ 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 

•I 
MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Con< erl Recitation 

Intermediate Department , 

Korero a Ngakaa 

\l mi -i Tlit-olo^ir.il ., 

I'ikcli.i Theological 

Postlud< 

Prelude . 

Priraar) Department , 

SUNDAY SCHOOL NOTICE 

• ■ ill be noted, lessons arc now outlined in IV Karere 
forthree Pakeha classes Name!) Hi ■ Primary, Intermedial* 
• iml rheolog cal The n | ikeha Theological has 

already been started in some of the larger branches we hope 
1,,al others Wl11 ,( ' 11 "^ suit. I ntendenc 3 and reach- 

hould meel ;|v soon "" wh< ther they 

enou « n student! new class. When no new 

i lass is started on account of ihe « mallm ss oi the branch ii 
is preferred that theclass tak of Morm m M outline 

1 he "B >ok ol Mormon" is giv n for tin lo anr j - B] .; 

blical Character. " for the mccel. This < hange will 

cut the present Intermediate CI is* in two. 




IQtrptP 



WAHANGA 20 WENERE1, HANUERE 27. 1926. NAMA I 

ffla.ri Agricultural College Hastings. H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, 

> Hahi o Ihu karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. 

Me tuku atu o kouiou reta ki te lu.tr, o te Karere, M. A. C, Hastiigs, H. B. 

Ko te ulu it.o TE KARERE i te Uu e nir* heicni, e (£s). 

Iko fe CiKanfla Ccnci: 

lf»e malua utu mo leu pepa ka vJhiv hi si. 



J. H. Timkini, Tumuaki MtJu.ua 
Maridna K. Ewutuna, Etila. Twfa Wttihna, hiita Boa AiihhuL 

Ko vga Kai-'l uhUMai (cpei ial U ; iters) 
Wiremu A. Koura Reihami H. Karala 



ncabiliuura ifcapati. 



PRELUDE 



Sloicln trith expression. 
S ft. 



Tracy Y. Cannon. 



f- ■* 1 I j 7 • \ ==:t F f ' | - — tr^~^ 




SACRAMENT GEM FOR FEBRUARY, 1926 

[n memory of the broken flesh 
we eat the broken bread; 

And witness with a cup, afresh, 
Our faith in Christ, our Head. 



POSTLUDE 



Soft Hft. 



mrf-tm&SjE 



Mj' il 



m& kJ F ^d 



l l kAKi-Kh 1 lanii< re _';. 1926 



CONCERT RECITATION IOR FEBRUARY, 1926. 

Matthew, 5th chapter, 4Sth verse. 
u Be ye therefore perfect, even as your Father which 
in heaven is perfect.' 1 



KORERO A NdAA.l Uu PEPUKRE, 1926. 

I a Matm, te 5 () n .u' 1 upoko, te 48 nga rarangi. 
"N.i, kia tika koutou, k a pera me to koutou Matua i te 
R jingi e tika ana." 



MAORI TtlhOLUtiiCAL 



Ratapu tuatahi, Pepnere 7, 1926. 

He akoranga mo te ra nono puku. 

A,/ Tiata { V. Witehira 1 w/iakamuori. 

Ko te tiiio putakc tenei akoranga koia tenei ; He aha ahau 
i whakapono ai mehcmea ko tatou nga tangata <• tumanakotia 
nei e te Atua me whakakahorc tatou i <> tatou he me tatou 
ngoikorctanga .' 

I uiua atu te I mere tetahi tangata ki tana liaerc i niohio 
ia ko hra ia liaere ai. Me mohio la kei tc hiahia ia ki te liaerc 
ki aga maunga, ki nga taha moana, ki tc taone, ki te awa, ki 
lira ranei. I te wa ka mohio ia ko hea ia haore ai ka moliio Ia 
me pehea te timata. Ka mohio ano hoki i;i he alia nga mca c 
mini e ia. Ki tc mca he haere roa ka whakaritc i;i i nga mca 
mana i mua tana timatanga. Kngari «• korc ia <• 111 at ait mc 
pi hea, a hei te hea huarahi hci timatanga mchemea horc ia i 
moliio <• anga ana ia ko hea. 

Meite tac nga tau tetahi tangata ki tc 18, 20 ranci e tika 
ana kia wliakaaro ia c, he aha tana mahi nui a taihoa. Ahakon 
ho kamura, he Italian rakau, he kuti hipi, he kai-tango malii, he 
mahita ktrra, he kai-mahi paamu, he parakimetc, he aha ranci. 
! muri te kiteatanga tana mahi nui ka mahi ia i nga mi a 
hei timata i taua mahi. 

Mi it- kite tatou i tctalii tangata hacrc ana i tetahi wahi 



liaiiiirrcj;, 1926 Tk. K.ARERE 



kahore nei ia e niohio ana e anga ana ia ki.hea o taua huarahi, 
ka mea tatou he porangi tera tangata. 

Meit~ kite tatou i tetahi tamaiti i roto i tc kura nui kahore 
e niohio ana he aba ia me ana niahi a taihoa, a i timata ki te 
ako niinita a ka tiini hei kura roia, a i reira hei kaiwea, ka 
mca tatou e kore e oti i taua tamaiti he mahi nui. 

[ tukua mai tatou e te Atua i te rangi ki te whenua. Kua 
homaitia ano hoki e la te Rongo-pai hei whakaatu mai i te 
haurahi ki te rangi he mea kia hoki ai tatou ki reira. Ki te 
tikanga te hahi e kore tatou e hoki ki te rangi engari "kia 
tika tatou, kia pera me to tatou Matua i te rangi e tika ana." 

Km te hiahia te Ariki kia hoki atu tatou ki ko i a ia raka 
noho ai. Koia raka i homaitia ai ano e ia te hahi i tangohia 
ra i nga wa mua. E kore e kitea e tetahi te huarahi ki te 
rangi mehe kahore he mapi. Ko te Rongo-pai te mapi hei 
whakaatu mai i te huarahi ki a tatou. 

Ko te [lunga Tapu kei te hiahia kia riro mai i a ratou te 
mea nui nga manaakitanga, a ka riro mai tenei mea meite 
rapu tatou i nga huarahi o te Ariki, me te u, a taea noatia te 
niutiinga, ehara i te mea hawhe te huarahi; no reira me 
whakareri tatou mo tenei haere roa. Me whaka-u tatou, kaua 
hei poka tat a kei tapepa tatou ki te taha te huarahi a ka 
ngaro. Me ako tatou i a tatou mapi ka tiaki ai i nga wa kat >a 
hei ako i a tatou hei whakaatu hoki mehentea kei tc huarahi 
tika tatou, kahore rarici. 

Ko ni^'A tangata e noho ki a la ko nga niea e haere ana i 
1c tika a tac noa te mutuhga o taua huarahi. Kei te hiahia 
tatou ki te haere kia noho tahi ki to tatou Ariki, no reira ka 
main tatou a taea noatia te mutunga nga huarahi te Ariki. 
Te tikanga tenei he taea e tatou te takahi tatou hara me 
tatou ngoikoretanga taea noatia kia tu hara-kore tatou ki mua 
i a la i to tatou Ariki. .Meite kore tatou niahi i tenei e kore 
o tatou wainia e taea te tupu. 

1 o tatou takahi.katoa e wJiakatata ana tatou ki te vrafci e 
haere nei tatou. la wahi iti te hinu e tahuna ana i roto te 
liiiu.i e whr.katata ana i te tiima ki te wapu. Pera ano hoki 
nga t ' c te Hahi he mea e arahi i a tatou Ida tata ki te 

mulling! <: te huarahi e haere nei talon, ara ko i;ma mut.ung:< 



4 IK KAKKKL II. urn 

koia ko te tino tika 

Te O.an^a m2 te Mahi o nga Apotoro a lh j Karaiti 

Te Kajpapa: Ko (e Kawe.iata Hou 
\,/ Whcmni . Kaa rmta ko'Vokr Watcnei wliakaritc 

Ratapu tuarua, Pepncre 14, WW* 
Akoranga 2 

[ 11-. Petekoha Nga Apiti mai ki te iiaiii 

1. I whakakitea te Wairua Tapu. 

(a) Te ra o te Petekoha. Rewitikuha l'.'I: 15-20. 

(h) Te whakakitcnga o te Wairua Tapu. 3 Niwhai 

12: 1-2. Whakaaturanga i a Matin 3: 11. Te 

iriiringa ki t»' kapura. 
(c) Pororarutanga o nga Ilurai whakaaro i te liomai- 

tanga »> nga reo ke. Vga Mahi 2: B-7. 
Ka vvhakapaea e haurangi ana nga Apotoro. Mahi 

2: 13-15. 

2. [Cauwhautanga tuatahi o t»- Rongo-pai i muri <> te kakenga. 

(a Whakaaturanga mo te poropititanga a Qoere. 

Ho< re 2: ^'i; Nga Mahi 2 : 16-20. 
b Tutukitanga o tetahi wahi Kaore te Wairua 
Tapu i ringihia ki runga ki nga kikokiko katoa. 
Hoere 2: *J.'>. Tirohia t<- Peara Utu Xui mo te 
taha ki a Hohepa Mete me \r Anahera me Moro- 
nai. Rarangi 41 "Nga Tuhituhinga a Hohepa 
Mete." 

(c) Ka whakapaea te iwi Din te ripekatanga i a to 

Karaiti. Nga Mahi 12: 12;i-l2U ; Kuka 23 : 12; 

1 Niwhai 1 1 : 32. 
••Mr aha matou?" \ T ga Main 2; 37, K'»: 30. 
Ka Kauwhau a Pita i nga tikanga tuatahi o te 

K<>iiL r <>-p:ii. 
Whakanuinga ake <» i f?a tuema. Nga Mahi 2: 41-17. 
Ka whakamahj nga Apotoro i nga liomaitanga 
whaka-te-wairua (spiritual Lrir'ts . \^a Mahi 2: 
42-43. 



Han-uere 27, 1926 TE KARERE 



Ratapu tuatoru, Pepuere 21, 1 92<> 
Akoranga 3 

TE MAH] I HlRUHARAMA 

1. Te whakaoranga te tangata kopa tuna whanauiiga mai, 

e to kaha te Tohungatanga. Nga Mahi 3: 1.10; Hoani 
9: 1-3; Arami 15; 3-12; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 
42 : 43, 44, 48. 

(a) Ka kauwhau a Pita ki nga Hurai mo runga i ta 
ratou i ripeka ai (te Karaiti). 

1. I meatia e ratou i roto i te kuaretanga. Nga Mahi 

3: 17; Hoani 16: 3; Ruka 23; 34; 1 Nnvhai 11 : 
28-32. 

2. Ivo te whakaatn ka murua ano ta ratou, engari "kia 

tae mai ra ano nga wa te whakahokinga nga 
mea katoa." Tirohia Nga .Main 3: 19-20. 

2. Pita raua ko lioani i mua i nga Toliunga. 

(a) Nga Ilaruki me te Aranga mai. Matiu 22: 23. 
(h) Uiuinga te mana nga Apotoro. Mahi 4:7; 
Matin 21: 23. 

(c) Te whakahoki a Pita. Mahi 4: 10-12; Hoani 15: L6. 

(d) Ko te whakapono i roto i to kaha o te ingoa te 

Kai-Whakaora. 

1. Iriiringa. Matin 29: L8-20 ; Moronai 7 : 34. 

2. Whakauunga (Confirmation). Moronai 2: 2. 

3. Whakaritenga (Ordination). Ako, me nga [\a\ve. 

107: 40-52; Moronai 3; 2-:). 

4. Whakaoranga. Ilcnii 5: 14; Ako, me nga Kawe, 42: 

44. 
f>. Inoi. Hoani ir> : l(i ; Arami 14; 26; 3 Xiwhai 19:8. 
(i. Pci i nga Rewera. '■> Xiwhai 7: 1!>; Maka 1(>: 17. 
7. \'g;i manaakitanga. Ako, me nga Kawe. L32: 46. 
N. Mo te riri iho (roblike) i a Ilatana. Ako, r.10 n •■.-. 

K&v e, rue to < Aranga I lohepa Mete. 
9. Whakatapunga i te Hakaramete, Moronai te 1 

te 5 nga ivpoko; Akoranga tne nga FCawenatu 

20: 77, 7!). 
10. Vlaronatanga. Ako. me nga Kawe. 132: hi. 






i, I k .. II.. 1,1. 

I\;i riria nga Apotoro kia kaua e kauwhau i a to 

karaiti i rip< katia. Mai ill 
Ka kauwhau ratou i te kupu i runga i te maia. 
.Malii 5: 28-29. Whukariteritea enei rarangi 
tetahi 
I . Te Pita o te w a o te ripekatang 
•_'. Te Pita u te ra o nga Apotoro. Mahi 4: 1 

3. Te putake o te whakahoutanga o tona ngakau h 

Ratapu tuawita, Pepuere 28, 1926 
Akoranga l 
Ik TURE I ) TE WHAKATAPl NGA (CON 

Mahi 4: 32-37; Ako. me nga Kawe. Wahanga 51. 
(a I huihui noa Lho nga uiea katoa a te hunga whakapcno. 

Mahi 4: 32j 3 NTiwhai 26: 19. 
(b) Te whakatapungs me te mahi Tuari. Ruka 16: L-13. 

Waiata 24: 1-2; Ako, me nga Kawe. 5] : L9 ; 4 Niwl ai 

1 : 3. 

M;i te ture <> I • Tiki-o-rangi a Eliona e hanga. Ako 
nga Ka w e. l (, -"> : 5. 
I. Niona ko te hunga ngakau ma. Ako, me nga Kawe. 

97: 16-21. 
■_'. I igakau ma ka kite i te Atua. Matiu 

3. Kia whiwhi ki te rungatiratanga o te Tikitiki-o-rangi, 
me pupn ri tatou i te 1 ure <> te Tiki; iki-o- 
Ako, me nga Kawe. ss : 22. 
(d) Te hokohokouga n nga rawa. Mahi ! : 34-37; 2: !' 

Ako, me nga Kawe, 42; 2! 
(a) To raua ngakau-rua-tanga. Mahi5: 1-2. 
h Ka ni ia <• Pita. 

I. Ka vvhakakiia ratou • llatana kia korero teka. lloa i 

8: 14 : Kenehi 3 
•J. Ka aroha te Atua ki 1" kni-hoa1 u n .. i ' • 

liari I c!k cri'i'.i initi 9 : 7. 

: o Auanaia me I lapaii a. Mahi 5 : 5- 11. 
1. I-; koie to Atua ! akainatautau ki te kin >. 



Hanuerc 27, iy^6 TE KAKEKK 7 

Henri 1 : 13. 
2. "Ko ta to tangata hold i rui ai, ko tenei tana e 
kokoti ai." Karatia 6: 7-9; Arami 41 ; 4-5. 



PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL 
"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" 

First Sunday, February 7, 1926. 
Uniform Fast Day Lessou 

Subject: Why do J believe that if we are to become the 
kind of people the Lord has intended, we must aim at perfec- 
tion 9 

No one would set out for a trip without an objective; in 
the mountains, to the resort, into the city, out into the country, 
for a fishing trip, etc. Once the objective is decided upon, the 
traveller pursues a course that will take him to it. if the trip 
is a long one, more preparations are necessary than when a 
nearby point is the goal. So it all depends on what and where 
our destination is, as to the kind of preparations we make, and 
the course we pursue. 

When a young man readies the age of IS or 20, he wishes 
to have rather clearly in mind what he is going to do in life; 
whether he will go into architecture, or whether he will go into 
business, or become a builder or a tradesman. When his mind 
is made up, he can then concentrate and direct all his energies 
to that end. 

[f a traveller was going through the country, and had no 
destination in mind, and would take any road thai his fancy 
suggested, his sanity would he questioned. 

What would we say of a boy in college who would switch 
from course to course, or from school to school, without pur- 
pose? Would he ever achieve success in any profession? The 
Lord has placed us here upon the earth, and b\ I ica ts of the 
Gospel, has point'"' oul to us the path or course we \\w to 

puisne it' we are to come back into His presence. And to coir. 

and live wit 1 Llim means thai we "must be perfed even as our 
Father in i 1 aven is perfect. " 

ft i the lord's plan thai we do come back to Flim; thai 



<L 



8 1 k KAKI I I. mm M ?7, l< 26 

is why He re-established His Church. No one can travel the 
road back without having a guide-hook, and the Gospel BUp- 
that. 

Latter-da} .^..i., : > waul to enjoy the great esl bl( 
within the gifl of the Lord, viz., to he privileged to find the 
path, and 1 > pursue il 1 1 its vcrj end. Therefore, we 
l» « l a 'c for thai long journey; we must equip ourselves For it ; 
we must in»' make de >i rs; we must not abandon the course; 
\ i« dare not lose our guide-book the Gospel plan. 

Only those who take this entire journey and reach the 
lation are pleasing unto the Lord. We desire to please the 
L > ■■<!. therefore we have s 1 ou1 to reach our Heavenly home 

I . ricctioii. Nothing less will fulfil the Lord's plan as it affects 
La1 ter-day Saints. 

.Just as every step forward brings the traveller nearer his 
g >.•'! ; just as ea< h drop of fuel drives the machines toward the 
mid of the journey so, too, the observance of each and i 
law and requiremcnl embodied in the Gospel plan bring us 

II \-i .-«■.• to our g >;il perfection. 

Intrr duction to Second Year Ljssons. 

The work of the Second Year Theological class for the 
\ ear 1926 will be a study of characters from the < M<l Testament. 
Tl e aim of the course will be two-fold : first, to study the greal 
men and women of the Old Testamenl as individuals. The life 
of each person will be analyzed with the idea of determi 
what there was in the life of thai particular individual which 
made him or her greal among the people with whom he or bIic 
lived. No attempt will be made to conned the history of the 
people of which these characters are a pari, excepl as the lives 
'»f thes? individuals establish such connection. Second, t*« 
study the principles of the Gospel which were given to llm 
world through the individuals studied and to observe the 

:h and development of the principles through the sul 
i|iien1 dispensations. 

The lessons covering the course will be prepared from the 
liihl. . and Bible references will be given as the Lessons are 
published in the "Karere." it follows tint every teacher of 
this department will necessarily become, if no1 already, a sub- 



rLuiueiv 2/, 1 9-0 ii: KAKERE 



scriber to "Te Karere.'' 

Some other books used as helps in the preparation of the 
lessons arc: John Lord's "Beacon Lights of History," Volume 
11.; Geike's "Hours with the Bible"; "Josephus"; Standard 
Church Works, Smith's "Old, Old Tales from an Old, Old 
Book"; Bryan's 1926 Teach or- training Text. 

Second Sunday, February 14, 1926. 
Lesson 1. — Adam: Who He Was. 

Objective: To show Adam's spiritual and physical relation- 
ship to Ood and mankind. 

Adam was a spirit son of God — a spirit brother of Christ 
and mankind — the physical father of mankind. 

References : Genesis, Chapters 1-4; 1 Old Testament. 
Studies. Chapter 1. 

1. The spiritual and physical relationship of Adam to 

1. God the Father. 

2. Jesus Christ, 
.'). Mankind. 

11. The great plan of creation and Adam's earth birth. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Give three sources of proof that Adam actually lived 
and functioned as a man. 

2. Give three reasons why yon think it is necessary to 
understand the spirit life of Adam in order to appreciate his 
earth life to the fullest extent. 

Third Sunday, February 2 1, 1926. 
Lesson 2. — Adam, the First Man. 

Objective: To show thai Adam was the first man and thai 
there was greal purpose in his mission. 
I. Adam born to earth life. 

1. formed physically by the Father. 

2. Eve, a part of him given as ;; companion f:> work 

mil 1 lie purposes of ( Jod. 

•'!. liden, his lirst abode. 
4. The stale of Adam and Eve in Eden. 
II. Th. fall. 

1. How accomplished 



10 I E K H.uii! 

_. The purpose of i he fall. 
I Mven fi "in Kden. 

Questions for Teachers. 
1. Did Adam know and realize the effects of the fall when 
lie partook of i he fruil offered by E\ «• ' 

•J. What w iis the change, physically and spiritually, 
m roughl upon Adam i s e resull of the fall .' 

Fourth Sunday, February 28, I02(i. 
Lesson 3. — Adam Begins Actual Earth Liu. 

Objective: show thai through Adam God began making 

kn )\\ n to man his ureal plan and purpose in tlm earth, 
I. The first iii-rat commandment. 

1 . \n\. ti» be complied w it h. 

2. Adam a father. 

.'5. ( liven dominion over t he earth. 
1 1. The < rospt 1 bestowed upon Adam. 
1 . ( 'onii.iand to \\ orship Uod. 
'J. To make offerings of firstlings of flock. 

His absolute faith in the commandments, as evi- 
denced h.\ the compliance, without knowledge. 
':. Instructed as to the mission of the Son of God. 

4. Mis baptism. 

5. The Holy Ohosl given him. 

Questions fcr Teachers. 

1. Nairn- three elements of greatness thai Adam exempli- 
fied. 

2. Maine the four most important truths made known to 
Adam l>\ God after Adam began his actual earth life. 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 
IH1 BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, February 7. 1926 

Uniform last Day lesson 

'I he Uniform Fast Day 1 this class will be the 

same as those given tor the new I lav.. See page 7. 



Hanuere 27, iy^6 TE KARERti 



Introduction to the Year's Work 

The Book of Mormon is to be the text-book in the Second 
Year, Second Intermediate Department for the coming year. 

It is the aim of the year's work to stimulate a desire within 
every pupil in these classes throughout the Church to read the 
Rook itself, that in their youth they may feel its spirit, and that 
its teachings may bear fruit in their lives. 

With this in mind, the lessons for the year begin at once 
from the text-book. If possible, a Book of Mormon should be 
in the possession of every pupil, in which he can mark striking- 
passages that are to be discussed in the class. This will no 
doubt add to interest in reading the book. 

Ln order to teach the Book of Mormon with real results, 
the teacher must himself glow with interest in his subject. The 
characters who play their parts in the history should be in his 
mind as of those acting before him on that stage with its long- 
ago settings. If this be so, he can flash from his mental pictures 
striking headlines before his pupils in such a way that they will 
be anxious to read the book for themselves. 

We can truly say there is no other book like it in all the 
world. Not only is it a wonderful history ; not only is it full of 
stories of thrilling interest; not only does it teach the Gospel 
of Jesus Christ in its fulness, but it holds forth within itself a 
promise that those who read it with prayerful hearts shall feci 
the spirit of it and know that the things written in it are true. 
(Read Moroni 10: 2-4.) 

There is one thing of which we may be sure in awakening 
a love for the Book of Mormon, and thai is, Hint thai love shall 
grow and strengthen with years. The Book itself never fails to 
fascinate those who study it. President (irant read it in his 
youthful days and this is his testimony: "When 1 was a boy I 
read the Book of Mormon. 1 fell in love with Xephi, who. more 
than any man thai 1ms ever written i r preached whose wor Is 
and utterances I have read, bi iiirr < nly the Saviour— 1ms been 
the guiding star of i\ life. " 

Parley P. Pratl early writer and missionary of the Church, 
writes as Poll >v s of his first reading of the Book of Mormon : 



1 L K \ K •' • I i.4 u. 

•• For the first time uiy < . Mormon 

book of books thai record which reveals the antiquities 
of the *iit w world' back to th reiuoti and which 

Ida the destinh i of its p ople and the world for all 
time to conic-, thai book which contains Lhe fulness of the 

el of b crucified and risen Redeemer; thai book which 
Joseph, and was the means i:. tin 
1 and ! he enl ire course of my future life. 

"I opened it with eagerness, and read its title pag 
read the I several witnesses in relation to the 

manner of its being found and translated. After this I com- 
menced its contents by course. I read all da} ; eating w 
burden, 1 \\,n\ no desire for food; sleep was a burden when 
nighl came, for I preferred reading to sleep. 

"As I read, tin Spirit of the Lord was upon me, and I 
knew and comprehended thai the book was true, as plainly and 
manifestly as a man comprehends and knows thai he exists. 
.My .joy was now full, as it were, and I rejoiced sufficiently i > 

e than pay nie for all the sorrows, sacrifices and toils of my 

life." 

There are many more such testimonies to be found and thai 
might be c ted to aw k n a de in within the boys and g rls 
of io-da\ to read and gel the sp : rh of this wonderful hook. 

The struggles thai Joseph Smith and those who helped him 
went through in the work of publishing the Book of Mormon 
should be briefly reviewed now and .-main during the course, 
with the thoughl in mind thai oul of these struggles and hard- 
ships came a hour, thai Latter-day Saints, young and old, 
should taki greal pride iti reading, with the prayerful desire 
to gain the promised testimony of its divinity. I Read the foot- 
note commencing on page 75, History of the Church, Vol. I.) 

Second Sunday, February I -l, 1926 

Lesson 1. — Lehi and Kis Family Called to Leave Their Heme. 

.• : I. Nephi, Chapters 1 and 2. 
Objective: To teach thai (Jod is near to those w ho call on 
llim. 

Snpplenien arj Ri er iicch Books eontuinintr descriptions 



Hanticre 27, 1^0 TE MAKERS 13 

of Jerusalem and its people long- ago; Canon Farrar's Life of 
Christ; Ben Hur; Bible Dictionaries: II. Chronicles. 36: 17-20; 
Jeremiah 39: 1-9. 

►Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. Make a general assignment for the class to read 

the whole text. 

2. Special assignment for one pupil to tell the story 

of the lesson. 
'■). Striking passages should be memorized by the 

class members, such as I. Nephi 1-20; 2: 9-10. 
4. The teacher should prepare supplementary ma- 
terial — description of Jerusalem — family life 
among the Jews. etc. 
Note: These lessons in the beginning of the Book of Mor- 
mon are more or less familiar to the pupils. The assignment of 
the story to tin 1 pupil should be in the understanding that it 
is to be told in the best possible manner, after real preparation 
by the pupil. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. What strong points in Lchi's character are brought out 
in this lesson : ; 

2. How may a study of the experiences of Lehi be a means 
of strengthening our faith in C>>d.' 

Third Sunday, February 21. 1926 

Lesson 2. — Obtaining- the Brass Platos. 

Text: I. Nophi, Chapters 3, 4. 5. 

Objective: To Heel thai the Lord opens the way for His 
children to keen His commandments. 

Suggi stions on Preparation and Presentation : 

1. Ask all pupils to read the text. 

2. Three special assignments might be made of the 

text. 

(a) The attempts to obtaiu the plates by their 
own efforts. I Chapter .'J. ) 

(b) Success through the guidance of the Lord. 
(Chapter 40 

i <• i The worth of the plates to Lehi 's family . 



1-4 1 1-- KAKfc ui. I lanucie .:, 

I 
The teacher might supplement this lesson with 
ineid inu Mir importance of r< 

keepi arl iele in Sec D 

inent, this is* 
\. Have pupils mark and memorize I. \ephi 3: 7: 

i: 13; 5: 19. 
irge upon the w >rds of NYphi 3: 7 by illustration, 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Name the important things gained by Lehi and his 
family in having the brass plat< s in their possession. 

2. What importance lias been placed upon record-k< 
in our own day? 

Fourth Sunday, February 28, 1926 

Lesson 3. — l3hmael and His Family — Lehi's Dream. 

Texl I Nephi, ( 'hapters 7 and s . 

Objective: To know that Faith gives power, an<l thai 
i Lernal life can be gain* <l by overcoming temptation. 
ingestions on Preparation and Presentation; 
1. Genera] assignments of both chapters to the pupils. 
2. Special assignment of the story in each chapter 

to r pupil. 
'■'>. Have tiie pupils mark in their books and memorize 
such passages as I. Nephi 7 : 12, 13. 
Mote: There may be pupils who could make a fair illustra 
tion of Lehi '-> dream <>n a charl . 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Mention the qualities of character shown by Nephi on 
journey from Jerusalem with the family of Kin lael! 

2. \ T ame som< other importanl dreams given to servants 
of the Lord, as recorded in the scriptures. 



PRIMAL DEPARTMENT 

First Sunday. February 7, 1926. 

I nilorin Fast Ua\ lesson. 

Topic: Wlij do I believe that we hitisl aim al perfection 



Hanuere 27, 1926 TL KARERE 15 

if we are to become the kind of people the Lord has intended I 

Objective : To teach that we should overcome our faults 
and failings and become masters over the physical if we want 
to follow in the footsteps of Jesus. 

Rest Exercise: Lead children to suggest where the Christ- 
mas trees come from. In going after a tree, be careful not to 
take more than one, nor to destroy other trees. 
Suggestions to Teachers. 

It will be necessary to lead the child from his knowledge 
to that which he does not know. Mere are a few suggestions 
as to how to handle the work, and a story may be told to 
Illustrate the thought. 

One Christmas, a little girl received a beautiful doll from 
Santa Ciaus with a note inside of the box which read: "Please 
take care of this baby doll and don't let it get dirty, nor 
broken. You can play with it, but take good care and keep it 
clean for ten years, then I will send for the doll, and it it is 
just as good when 1 send for it ten years from now, you shall 
he considered the cleanest and nicest little girl in the whole 
country." Ten years later the doll was sent for, and this little 
girl had a dream. She dreamt that she went to Santa's home. 
She found her doll in a beautiful parlour where Mr. and Mrs. 
Santa were. She went up to Santa and asked why her doll was 
there. Why weren't other dolls there?" "Well," said Santa, 
"I'll show you." He took her into several other rooms, where 
there were stacks of dolls of all kinds; but they were dirty and 
broken. "When the dolls come back, it they are not just as 
clean as when I send them out, I don't want them to be in the 
same room with me. They have to slay there in these rooms 
until they have been cleaned and prepared." 

Lead the children to sec thai Heavenly Father, when He 
sends the spirits down to this earth, wants them to return as 
perfect as lie sent them out, so they can live with Him in tils 
house. Lend the children to see what they can do to keep 
perfect. No1 to think nor sa^ naught words; to be kind 
happy; always have n s nil , and sing when things go wrouj 
not to gel angry. Lead them Lo see how we can keep our bodies 
clean, which h >lps to keep a clean mind ; that our bodies I 
he kepi ; I . l: i the inside u ii h proper Pood and tho 



f> IL KARERH I lanm 

uglj thoughts make ugly features; liappy, good, kind thoughts 

make | > I « ; i s . il 1 1 r. 

Second Sunday, lebruarj 14, I92(i 

Luke 2: >unday Morning in the Kinder- 

garten," I . - on 35 

Topic : The stop} tit' t lie shepherds. 

Objective: To teaeli thai l>\ giving gifts, we express our 
love for friends and family. 
Res1 Exercise : 

I Hi. why do hells for ( 'h natulan ring, 
Wli\ do little children sing, 
i hi i liis brighl ( 'hristmas Day .' 
The b< lis do ring and children sing 
To say thai Chrial was born on Christmas Day. 
Have the children take presents to poor children and then 
■< peal the above v< rsc and ring bells. 

Suggestions to Teachers. 
The birth of the Saviour was made known to the lowly as 
well .-is the rich and educated, to show the Father's Love was 
for all. Thai He treated all alike is the big theme of thin 
In telling the lesson, when yon reach the part of the 
story where the shepherds heard voices, have someone Rin» 
softly, "Par, Far away on Judea's Plain." It makes the story 
very effeel \\ e. 

Bring it down into the child's life, thai he may share whal 
lie has with someone who hasn't. As the shepherds took a 
laud) (a very simple gifl in comparison with the gifl of tin 
wise mi no matter how small. 

The greatosl joy comes in giving. "It is better to give 
1 1 an to receive. 

Third Sunday, February 21, 1926 

Tex1 : "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson :!ii. 
Matt. •': 111. 

Topic : Tin- Visil of the Wise Men. 

etive: To teach thai wo arc made happier by giving to 



CONTINUED FROM PAGE 17. Through a mistake on the 
part of the editor, this page was overlooked and had to be inserted 
after the rest of the Karere was made up. 

They hated to let him go away, but they did want him 
to be happy and well. 
Ned's departure was a sad one. 

He travelled a long way to a home in a forest. 
Arrived at new home. 
Xed still cried, "Everything is wrong." 
A beautiful little girl, with bright smiling eyes, 

entered. 
She was beautiful and happy. 
Ned stopped crying and looked at her. 
(She was like a fairy. ) 
She came close to Xed and sang, ''Jesus Onee Was a 

Little Child." (Teacher sings.) 
Xed asked her to sing it again. (Teacher and children 

si tig. ) 
Ned asked her, Who is Jesus? 

She tells of the Christ Child sent to earth to show us 
how 7 to be happy, cheerful and helpful, not to be 
selfish, etc. i Tells how we can forget our ugly 
disposition by singing, etc., being happy, doing 
kind deeds, etc.; 
Xed wants to be like Jesus. 

Spends a week in this happy home. 

Seems to be happy, cheerful and helpful. 

He smiles now instead of being cross when things do 

not suit him. 
He feels better all over. 
He learns to speak kindly. 
Back at his own home. 

lie look hack the most priceless gift in the whole 

world, the Christ Spirit - Do and say what is 

right. 

Suggestions: Place strong emphasis on the song in the stor^ 

and the message thai the Christ Child brought to the earth, so 

that the children can't help but apply it in their daily lives. 

Peel it yourselves, teachers; don't merely tell facts, gel the 

message and then give it. Yon ean'i deliver a message unless 

\ on make it yours first. 



Hanuere 2 7, iy^6 TK KAKERK 1 7 

others. 

Suggestions to Teachers. 

The Wise Men's love for Jesus was shown by their taking 
the best presents they had to give to the Christ Child. They 
didn't care for the hardships they knew they would encounter 
on their journey. Their love was so great that they only 
thought of finding the Christ Child and presenting their gifts. 

Bring it down into the child's life and help him to see 
that if we are doing a task that seems hard when it is for 
those we love, we should enjoy doing it. The harder the task. 
if done with a willing spirit, the greater it will prove our true 
love. Lead the children to see what they can do in the home to 
jwove their love for brother, sister and parents. 

Present each child with a picture of the AVise .Men. [I 
these pictures cannot be obtained, then just use cut-outs from 
drawing paper, as the rest of your pictures have been. You 
can obtain patterns from any primary grade teacher. 

Fourth Sunday, February 28, 1926 

Subject: It's what we really do that counts. 
Objective: To teach that if we are to become the kind of 
children the Lord intended, we must do and say what is right. 
Story: The Little Hoy Who Learned to Smile. 
A Beautiful Home. 

Parents and children 

Were all happy except Xed. 

They all tried to please him. 

lie was ill ways cross and unhappy, 

lie felt sick, his head ached, etc 

His parents advertised for someone who could make 
him happy. 

People came from far and near. 

Broughl beautiful pictures, toys, music, money, 

These failed t<> make Nied happy. 
A st ranger appeared I a Ladj 

This Lady could help. 

I te must <>n to her home 

I lis parents lovo£ Idra very much. 



1 8 L'K K.AKJ 14 .• m 



He Morehu no te Whare o lharaira 
\\. K< ) \(;.\ ING< >.\ HIPERU 

I roto i aku tuhituhinga ki a koutou kua whakamarama, 
kua whakaatu aliau ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o oga ingoa 
Maori, ara he mea whai tikanga, vvhai take nga ingoa Maori 
katoa; otira, tera pea, lie moumou tuhituhi kia whakaatu ahau 
ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o nga kupu Ifaori, no te mea U « - i te 
mohio tonu koutou ki to koutou ake rco me te ahuatanga o <» 
■ i ingoa Maori. Ka1 i. 

I i-oto i tenei tuhituhinga ko taku liialiia kia whakaatu ki 
a koutou i te ahuatanga o nga ingoa i to rco Hiperu. Ki taku 
mohio kahore koutou kia mat an ki te tikanga o nga kupu 
Hiperu no reira, e kore e taea te kii he moumou tenei tuhi- 
tuhinga. 

Kua korero koutou i te Paipcra, kua korero koutou i te 
]» ikapuka a Kenehi mo te hanganga o te ao, a kua kite koutou 
k > te ingoa o te tangata tuatahi ko Arama. \a. tera pea, kua 
patai ranei koutou ki a koutou ano he aha te take i whakai- 
ngoatia te tangata tuatahi ko Arama te ingoa. .M<- patai au, I e 
alia te tikanga o taua ingoa .' He aha kihai i whakahuatia tona 
ingoa ko Hohepa, ko Hoani, ko Wiremu ranei'? He aha kia 
wliakahuatia tona ingoa ko Arama .' \'a me rapu e tatou to 
whakahokinga ki enei patai \ 

\] ki ana te karaipiture, "A ka mea a Arama, katahi ano 
ki tenei te wheua o roto o oku wheua, me te kikokiko o roto n 
oku kikokiko: me kua ia he Wahine, nona hoki i tangohia i 
roto i te Tangata." Kenehi 2: 2.3. Xa ka kite tatou i 
ingoa Mao ita tuatahi me te wahine tuatahi. 

u i kahore kia whakamaoritia ana kupu Hiperu ki le 
reo Maori, kua penei te rarangi nei." — : me hua ia he 
fsha, nona hoki i tangohia i roto i te Uh." 

\a. Hie timata te korero i te Paipcra no te rarangi tuatj ' i 
o Kenehi tae atu ki te rarangi I s o te upoko tuarua <> Ke 
kahore v kite ai te kupu Arama, olira i v*>u> i te rarangi 19 ka 
kitea tuatahitia te ingoa Arama. Mi whakahua • • au ngj 
rarangi 18 me 10. "Xa ka mea a Ihowa. te Atua, K kore c pai 
kia n >ho U ; me hanga <• ahau tctahi hoa 



Hanuere 27, 1926 te kakere 19 

pai mona. Xa he mea whakaahu mai na Ihowa, na te Atua, i 
roto i to oneone nga kirelr katoa te parae, me nga manu 
katoa o te rangi; a kawea mai ana e ia ki a Arama, kia kitea 
ai te ingoa e huaina e ia kia ratou : ko a Arama i hua ai ki nga 
mea ora katoa, hei ingoa era mo ratou." 

Na ko Arama (Adam) he ingoa Hiperu. Te wliakamaori- 
tanga tana kupu ko Te Tangata. No reira te rarangi ki 

runga ake ka whakamaoritia penei," ; a kawea mai ana 

e ia ki Te Tangata, kia kitea ai te ingoa e huaina e ia ki a 

ratou: a ko Te Tangata i hua ai . " No reira, ka kite 

tatou ko te tikanga o te ingoa te tangata tuatahi ko Tangata, 
ara ki te reo Hiperu ko Adam (Arama). 

Tera hold, ko tetahi atu wliakamaoritanga 1110 te kupu 
Adam (Arama) ko Kura (Whero), no te mea i whakaaro nga 
Hiperu i harigaa te tangata tuatahi i te oneone whero. (See 
Works of Josephus.) 

Xa, ka whakaaro tatou lie aha i whakahuaina te ingoa o te 
Kai-Whakaora ko Ihu (Jesus). Te whakahoki tenei, ko te 
kupu Jesus he kupu Kariki, tona wliakamaoritanga ko Kai- 
Whakaora. Ki te reo Hiperu ko taua ingoa ko Joshua (Hohua) 
ara k:> Jeshua (Plehua). (Xehemia 3: 13.) Na ko enei kupu 
katoa c taea te wliakamaoritanga ki te reo Pakeha ko Saviour; 
ara ki te reo Maori ko Kai-Whakaora. 

Ko te riuinga o nga ingoa i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito i 
roto i te Paipera Pakeha, he Hiperu aua ingoa. I roto i te 
Kawenata Hon he Kariki te nuinga o nga ingoa. Xa ki te 
Paipera Maori, ko te nuinga o nga ingoa i roto i te Kawenata 
Tawhito he hawhe kaihe Hiperu .Maori; i roto i te Kawenata 
Hon he hawhe kaihe Kariki Maori. 

Ko tenei te ingoa Kai-Whakaora ki nga reo katoa e mohio- 
tia ana a ahail, 

Elipcru— Joshua. Jeshua Samoa — Faaola 

Kariki .Jesus Tahiti Faaora 

Pakeha Saviour Hawaii Mea e Ola 'i 

.Maori Kai-W liakaora Toga Fakamoui 

\'a. e hoa ma. kahoiv ahau e ki ana ko taua tangata a 
Hohua i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito me le Karaiti a Ihu i te 
Kawenata Hon i to tangata kotahi, engari ka rua aua tangata. 



ARERii 






L<> t< ingoa rit t* tonu. 

E ho a ma, kei te mohio ranci koutou ki te tikanga o t«- 
kupu " Aniciic. " lie kupu Uiperu tikanga ara le 

whakamaoritanga o taua kupu. n Amen, ko Pumau, ara ko 
Pono. 

li atu ingoa Hiperu 1 roto i te Kawenata Tawhil 
Deuteronomy Tiut< ko tuna whakamaoritanga ko 

' Te w hakahuatanga ano o te t ure 

Tetahi atu ingoa Hiperu ko Dragon (Tarakona) : ko le 
whakamaoritanga ko ,l Tol]ora, M "Ngarara," "Taniwha." 

lie kupu Hiperu hoki tcnei, r Hallelujah [Iarimii 
whakamaoritanga, "Whakamoemititia koutou i te Ariki." 

Tetahi atu kupu Hiperu, Hosanna (Hohana) ; te whaka- 
maoritanga* "Whakaora Lnaianei." 

I a koutou ,■ korero ana i una karaipiture ka kite koutou i 

korero mo nga kohatu e rim te I rimi me te Tumirae. N'a 
he ingoa Hiperu ano enei, ara 1'iiin and Thummin; k< 
whakamaoritanga ko "Te maramatanga me te tino whakari- 



B karangatia ana te Ariki ko to Arepa, te Omeka i t*oto i 
r.ga karaipiture. He kupu Kariki enei, Alpha and Omega. Ko 
te tikanga o enei kupu e penei ana. K<> te Alpha (Ajvpa 
reta tuatalii o te reo Kariki ; ara penei me te A te ret a tuatahi 
ki te reo Pakeha. Ko te Omega te rota whakamutunga ki te 
reo Kariki; ara rite ana ki te Z ki te reo Pakeha. Ara ko I 

whakamaoritanga o enei kupu Alpha and ft m (Arepa, 

( urn ka ko te A me h Z. Ara te tuatahi me te \\ hakamutunga 
Ko te Ariki ko te tuatahi m< te whakamutuuga, no r< ira la Is i 
1 h tkahual ia te i i < pa, te < mieka. 

Kati. He nni nga kupu mo tenei wa. A taihoa ka tuhituhi 
hakahua i etahi atu ingoa I Mpei 
te w hakamaoritanga <> ana kupu. 

\'a, kia mohio koutou, kahore ahau i tito noa i r.ei kupu. 
ongari kua whiwhi ahau i toku mohiotanga ki ioi 
I liperu no roto i te " Bible Dictiona 

E ki ana te Hunga Tapu ko I iwj Maori he morelm 
whare o Eharaira. Na, ka kite taton ko nga ingoa Maori It- 
men what tikanga whai take; a rite tonu hoki ko nga 
ara ingoa Hiperu he mea whai tikanga, whai tak • hoki. K<> 



Ilamiere 27, 1^6 TE KARLRE 21 

tenei tetahi atu whakaaturanga ko te iwi Maori he Morehu no 
te Whare o Iharaira. 

NA WIREMU A. KOURA. 

Rupert, Idaho. 

Ko te Maaka Tuarua 

E torn nga maaka i roto i te Rongo-pai e kore nei e hapa, 
Ira — 

Tuatahi — I hanga i runga i te Toka o te Whakakitenga. 

Tuarua — I whakararotia ki te mana o te Tohungatanga. 

Tuatoru — I whakakakahatia ki nga Akoranga a te Karaiti. 
Hei te Tohungatanga e whakamarama. He aha te 
Tohungatanga? Ko te mana me te kaha o te Atua kua homai 
ki te tangata kia tnahia nga tikanga te Rongo-pai. Ki te 
kahore taua Tohungatanga ka pehea? E kore nga mahi te 
Rongo-pai e tirohia mai e te Atua, e kore hoki e mana. E rua 
nga patai nei me nga whakautu nei. Ko nga Karaipiture e 
tautoko ana i enei whakautu. Hei u patai tuarua e whaka- 
marama i te tuatahi. 

I te wa c kauwhau ana te Karaiti ka whakamarama la ki 
nga Akonga, i te mea kua kite ke la tera i muri mai i a la he 
maha nga tangata e mahi i nga tikanga te Rongo-pai mana- 
kore — "He tokomaha e mea mai ki a an a taua ra, E te Ariki, 
e te Ariki; kihai koia maton i poropiti i ton ingoa, i pei rewcra 
hoki i runga i ton ingoa? He tini hoki nga mahi uui i meatia 
e matou i runga i ton ingoa?" I pchea te whakautu a te 
Karaiti? I penei, "Ko reira ano ahau mea ai ki a ratou, 
Kahore rawa ahau i mohio ki a koutou; mawehe atu i a an, e 
nga kai-mah] te tutu." Matin 7: 22-23. 

Titiro ki te wa i a Molii te mana te Tohungatanga, tera 
tetahi ropu ko Koraha, ko Ratana, me Apirama tne 1a ratou 
whakaminenga i whakahihi i tr mana i a Mohi, puia mai ana 
te ?'iri a Ihowa ki a ratou mahi hara, whakangaromia ana ratou 
katoa ki rare te whenua nie a ratou taonga katoa. Tauan;ta 
16. 

Tera tetahi mahi rucrekara i>«i rewera i mahia e Paora : 
i te kitenga nga tama tokowhitu me tetahi Hurai, ka hiahin 
hoki ratou Id te pei rewera i runga i te ingoa Ihu Karaiti i 



' kino 

i ; ■ • A 
pa. 

. tapu 
i to A.tua, kin , n i en si 

u'etia, kia 

• 

i! v\ hakaiM 

. •-■ Mill) 

i .Kiiiiiu' ki a 

" lliperu 

! '. la niana i inaroto mai i te Hohi, 

►to mai i tana poropiti ki ;i A K 14; 16 27. 

piH'i ra ii | , i ti- 

urai i 
i ki a tatou ki tc llui 

ienga 
1 

'• tenei 
rapu 
nana. 

; ' . : - ! i take ! io 1( 
: i a ; 1 1 

■ 



Ilanuere 27, i926 TK KAKERE 23 

I tae mai hoki a Molii raua ko Iraria ki runga i te maunga 
ki te whakamana i a te Karaiti ki tc Tohungatanga. Maka 9: 
2-1. Na te Karaiti Ana Aputjro i whakamana. "Kaliore 
kyutou i whiriwhiri i a au, engari naku k out 011 i whiriwliiri, a 
naku ano koutou i mea kia haere, kia whai hua." Hoani 15: 
16. Na nga apotoro etahi atu i whiriwliiri. Nga Mahi ] : 23- 
26; 6: 5-6; 8: 1-3 me etahi atu. Xo te \va i patupatua ai nga 
apotoro i tangohia atu tana Tohungatanga, no te tau 1829 i 
whakahokia mai taua Tohungatanga ki a Hohepa Mete. Xo 
reira enei rarangi karaipiture e- kitea ana ki te kaliore te 
ToJiungatanga e kore nga mahi tapu a te Atua e niana, a ma 
te Tohungatanga ka mana nga mahi o te Rongo-pai. Kua kitea 
lie pono nga vvhakautu ki nga patai e rna raka. 

E te Hunga Tapu, whakahonoretia te mana tapu kei wae- 
nganui i a tat on, kia kaha ki te rapu i 011a tikanga ; he taonga 
hohonu rawa tenei, kaliore oiia timatanga, kaliore ona mutunga. 
lleoi ano, na to koutou teina. 

MAEAEROA. IIORI MAPI. 



i Ko nga Tuhituhinga Cnamata 

IK PUKAPUKA A APP:RAHAMA 

, 1 He mea i t.ingohiirniaj i te "R'estoratyan of the Gospel," 
i tuhia e ( ). J. P. Widtsqe. Na Erii T. Cooper i whakamaori. 

I a Hurae, 1835, ka riro mai ki roto ki nga ringa 1c 
l > oroj)iti o Hohepa Mete etahi -tuhituhinga tino nui, 1 tuku iho 
no 1c \va ra nga tipuna. Tera i tc Ian PS2S, tctalii Wiwi, ko 
Anatonio Heporo tonp ingoa i whakaetia e Mehemeti Arai 
(Mehemet Ali) te kawana Ihipa, kia rapua e Icuci tangata 
nga tukunga ill > onamata i tc whenua Ihipa. K3 lorn nga Ian 
i niuri mai, ana i l< i Ian L831, ka kitea c tenei Heporo nga tonio 
i 1c wahi i In ai telahi laoiic no mua, ko Tepe 1c ingoa (Thebes). 
Tekau ma lain nga tinana tupapaku (mummies), a e man lonn 
••ma 1c pai, i mcalia lici man maana ki Parihi (Paris). I a ia 
hoki aln ana ki Parihi ka peta ia ki Tiriehe (Triest) panghi 
ana c te male, a hei'no ilm ki reira. Ilcoi ka tukua atu nga 
tupapaku n i ki tona vvhanaunga tata ki tona iramutu nei ki n 
llanara (01 amllcr). Ko lona kainga i tenei wn ki Amerikfl am 
Piraterepia (Philadelphia), otira i pohehetia kei Airana ke in, 



24 i i KAKi.i:!. I lunueri ; . 1926 

1 ira i ! uri haere enei tupapaku ki Airana, mai 1 reira ki 
Amerika ki Xiu [aakaara ki a Mikacra Hanara. I t Irohanga 
i ciu'i tupapaku ka kitea i te taha etahi nga tupapaku 
tokorua ho takai pukapuka. I wherahia li<>ki aua pukapuka, 
ano te pai <» nga tuhi, lie vvhoro, he ruangu, ka< •<• ano hoki 
t etahi wahi <> « nei pukapuka kia kino noa. 

I a Hanara e mntekitaki ana i aua tupap. ;u ka ki ake 
tetahi tangata ki a ia kia kimihia e ia te poropiti nga aloro- 
Liona a Hohepa Mete. Il«' marama hoki taua poropiti ki te 
whakamaori i nga tuhi tuhi nga onamata. He tauhou rawa hoki 
a Hanara ki tenei tangata i korero atu nei ki a ia uio te 
poropiti. Otira i uhakakitckite haere a Hanr.ra i nga tupa- 
paku nei i nga taonc nui <> Amerika. me te malia hoki <> nga 
tangata i haere kia kite. 1 ki hoki una tangata matauranga he 
tino tuturu aua tupapaku, he tika hoki nga tokai pukapuka. I 
tuhia lioki etahi ratou he tiwhikete whakapumau i a ratou 
korero he tika aua tupapaku me n.^a tuhituhinga. 

No te toru n tiurae 1835 katalii ano ka tae .1 Hanaro ki 
Katarana me ona tupapaku, i rapua hoki c ia te Poropiti a 
Hohepa Mete. E wl.a nga tinana e ai la te Poropiti, me nga 
\liil.a vvhakairoiro, ara nga tuhituhinga tahito. "I te mea 
ok] a Hanara ka taea e au te whakamaori, lea 

lauria mai e ia kia kite au, kia whakamaori hoki i etahi aua 
tuhituhianga. Xaku hoki i hoatu 1 >- whakamaoritanga, te tu 
i 10 '> te tangata whakaaro rangatira homai ana <■ ia te tiwhi- 
k ic c w hai ake nei nga korero : : 

11 ' Katai ana, 6 rlurae. I8JM. 

" *ll i v hakaatu tenei ki te lnuna katoa e hiahia ana kia 
1 lohio, mo te alma te mohiotanga Elohepa Mete, tamaiti, ki 
te whakamaori i nga tuhituhinga hipiana onamata kei rote 

oku ringa, kua whakakitekitea ioki <■ au ki nga tangafei 
1 ■•■ tan (• nga taonc nunui; »> nga m< I iotangs i kohikohia e au, 
;i : iatau ranei au. kua kitea iho hoi i e au e rite tonu ana te 
matauranga Hohepa Mete, tamaiti, ki to ratou i nga ahua 

• 'M1KAERA II. I1ARANA, 
" c Ko ia te rangatira < ngi Tupapaku [hipiana, 
te U '• kite hoki.' " 

I muri mai i te homaitanga a Hanara i te tiwhikete nei ki 



Hanuere 27, 1926 TE KARERE 25 

a ia ka hokona mai e etahi o nga Hunga Tapu o Katarana nga 
tupapaku nei me nga takai tuhituhinga. I taua ay a ano ka 
timata te whakamaori a te Foropiti i aua tuhituhinga rereke, ko 
Wiremu W. Perepe me Oriwa Kautere ona kai-tuhituhi. Tino 
pupu ake te koa i roto i ratou ngakau i a ratou e whakamoari 
ana ka kitea e ratou ko etahi o enei pukapuka lie tuhituhinga 
na Aperahama. Ko tetahi wahi anake, ara ko te tiniatanga, i 
oti te whakamaori. Ko etahi he tuhituhinga na Hohepa, tera 
i hokona nei e ona tuakana ki nga Ihipa. Ko te wahi i whaka- 
maoritia e whakaatu ana mo nga ahuatanga i pa ki a Apera- 
hama i a ia i te kainga o ona matua koropiko whakapakoko, me 
te ahua hoki o tona putanga mai i reira ano he merekara. E 
whakaatu ana ano hoki i te hanganga te ao me te ahuatanga 
o nga Avairua i mua atu taua hanganga te ao. I whakakitea 
mai ano hoki te ahuatanga o tona matauranga ki te titiro 
whetu. Ko te Pukapuka a Aperahama he mea whakamaori i 
runga i te whakaaturanga te wairua pono. 

Koia tena te nuinga nga tuhituhinga e man na i roto i te 
pukapuka e kiia nei "Ko te Peara Utu Nui." Ko nga puka- 
puka kei reira nei nga tuhituhinga a TTohepa. te ahua, kaore i 
oti te whakamaori. 

I nga hunga tapu tonu hoki nga tupapaku nei, ahakoa 
haere ki hea, man liaere tonu, a tae noa ki te wahi i whaka- 
noho kainga ai ratou, ara i Nawu e kiia nei ko te Ataahua. \ 
Avhakakitekitea hoki i roto i te whare nui na te Poropiti nei i 
hanga. I muri mai i te matenga te Poropiti ka taka enei 
tupapaku me nga takai pukapuka ki roto i nga ringa ona 
whanaunga, a hokona ake. [ riro hoki i tetahi ropu, a i whaka- 
kitea mo tetalii wa ki liana Eui (St. Louis). T hokona hoki e 
taua ropu ki te whare whakakitekite i Tikako (Chicago). 1 te 
Ava i wera katoa ai a Tikako i te tan 1870 ka kainga taua whare 
AYhakakitekite e te alii, ko te whakaaro hoki i wera ana puka- 
puka me nga tupapaku, enei whakaaturanga nga main 
mua. Heoi ano e hoa ma, ko te wahi enei korero tawhito i toe 
mai ki a tatou ko nga tuhituhinga e man na i roto i te Peara 
Utu Nui. Kna whanui ra te mohio-tanga o te Hunga Tapu mo 
nga main a to Atua ki Ona iwi onamata. Ka tapiria atu enei 
ki era atu nga tuhituhinga karaipiture kei roto nei i nga 
ringa o te llalii <> pupuri ana. 




Ko nga kai wh tkattko o te Kareti niton ko ti Tumuaki 

o te Kareti me tona hoa wahine mc ta raua pepi me 

Mi re. Ko te Tumuo i Mihmui ano hoki me tona kai- 

awhina me Harehana\ 



Hanuere 27, IQ26 TE KARERE 2% 



ilvi te i£tita 

Ko te Hui Puketapu 

I te Paraire ka lac mai te Tumuaki te Miliaria, me tona 
hda wahine, me la raua tamaiti, me nga kaumatua Akarana, 
me nga kaumatua Hauraki, me Hemi Whautere, me te 
Tumuaki te Peka Moawhango takiwa Taihape, he tino nui 
nga Hunga Tapu me nga hoa arolia, me te Kuini Maori ara te. 
wahine a te Kingi Maori. I tae mai nga Hunga Tapu pakelia 
Hamutana me nga pakeha Hanatere, me nga rangatira To 
Kuiti, he hunga waho katoa ratou. 

Ao ake i te ata te Rahoroi ka timata to matou Hui Pariha, 
10 a.m. Xa te Tumuaki Takiwa i whakahaere to matou karakia 
kauwhau. Xa Erata Elarehana i whakahaere nga himene, te 7 
me te 11. Na Erata Skinner te inci whakapuare. 1 muri tena 
ko nga kai-kauwhau. Tuatahi ko Karena Takoro, he mihi ki 
te Tumuaki Mihana hou me tona hoa wahine me ta raua tamaiti 
me nga kaumatua, tae atu ki nga Hunga Tapu i tae mai ki tenei 
Hui Pariha, I muri tena ko Poutu P. Kupa, he mihi ki nga 
pononga a te Atu a, mo be mihi ano ki nga hoa aroha, me te 
whakamarama i nga tikanga te Rongo-p.ai iliu Karaiti. I. 
muri tmia ko Tukino Hakopa, he Tumuaki in no te Peka 
Moawhango. E tino whakapono ana in koia tenei ko te hahi 
Iliu Karaiti. E whakapono ana in ki a Hohepa Mete ko te 
poropiti pono a 1" Al na. 

Kaati, i muri ko Hemi Whautere, "E te Hunga Tapu me 
nga hoa aroiia, kaore ah an e mohio ana me pewhea he korero 
mnku. Kaati, ka inoi ake ahau ki te Atua kin awhinatia mai 
ahau he men e whai kaha ai ahau ki te kauwhan i ota 1 i atu 
take. Kaati, me korero e ahau i toku taenga atu ki te Tense- 
para Hawaiki. Kaati, i rongo korero ahau i enei mea katoa. 
Kaati, no taku taenga atu ki Hawaiki ka kite kanohi ahau." 
Kaati, pau katoa i a in nga malii tc Temepara. K ki ana i 
tino tapu nga mahi te Temepara Hawaiki. Pau katoa i .- 
'••1 te whakamarama \\>j:;\ turc katoa tenei hahi. Kaati, he tino 
"iii nga take i whakamaramatia e in. Kore i mutu te hiahia 
nun tangata ki nun kauwhau a Hemi Whautere. I muri 
1r| in ko Ki«) Tarawhiti, he tautoko i nun kupn katon l;nn 



ik K VR£R£ Hanuere 27, 1^26 

ill, 1 1, oi ;iii<>, 

■ lia Wuikatn. mi tirata Paapiti, 
\. i- Awe Ponga, Hekeretari n te llui. 



lie Kauwhau Haere 

Ki T i. 1 koe i roto i te .Merc Kirihii 

I iapi \ul 1 kiu • i. Ma te Al ua koe e t iaki 

i roto i tan malii uui. Kaati tena. 

\ T o i ka haere maua ki Poke - takiv n 

hi Pukekohe. Ka uui nga Maori u nei whenua. I 

nga mea e wliakarongo mai ana ki nun kauwha 
whanau tino pai. Kaliore e kai \vai])iro, tupeka f'ol.i. 
alma te kauwliau ki a raton penei. 

I haere mai a te Karaiti ki te ao nei ki tc vvli ! 
huarahi te Atua. Ka oti i a !;i te tinana maoi 

katia, kua tae la ki te hunga wairua, kua oti ki te 

wairua, kua ara mai fa, kua kake ki te Rangi. Ka to u enei 
mea tino nunui kua oti i a la. fleoi ano la 1 ari i 

Tana hokinga tuarua mai ki te ao 1110 ake ak Kn 

1 ga liahi katoa nei kotahi ano te Atua. Ko ta a Atua nei ano, 

T'ona rereketanga tirohia nga hua te [fahi llui 
Ra M ui-i \Yi 
rieoi ano ka mutu riga kauw hau i run 
tono mai ratou kia lioki atu ki te tirotiro i a 

I I 'i ano ka mutu, ua ta koulou mok ii tiu! ine t( 
• to i t< R raiti. 



Tii 



Ii c I' a 11 u i t n n g a M at 1 : 1 
ii ) \\i Til) R \ 1 1\; \ 

Ka "6 ona tau. 
! ; . te Hunga Tapu, e nga hoa aroha >puna 

t rnariki a tenei tangata, tenei a H. I . K tirm kua in x» i te 
m >enga roa. 

He tangita mhiotia nuitia am i 1 •• rtira Maori 

inga ne>, tae atu ki ng 1 P.ikehn mnhi pan mil 

1 1 ; t in ; ita n >hio k te win i n% \ nv»hi ihu- 

i 1 i, mi'ii hipi, mahi kiu. I! 1 1 n-rati whanui ona 

laro i ng 1 tunga mil 1 nui e 



Hanuere 27. 19-6 IE KAKEKK 31 

pa ana ki ona iwi me ana tamariki, me nga tikanga whaka- 
ono hoki. Ko ona whakaaro whdnui e kore mwa e taea te 
miu. Mate atu ia me ona whakaaro rangatira katoa. Ka 
iui te taugi te arona ki a ia. 

Te ahua o tona matt nga. 
I te ata o te 24 o Tinema i ahua rereke tona ahua, haere 
ia ki te takuia, tirohia ana e te takuia, kei tona ateate tona 
mate, vm hok ki te kainga takoto ai, whakangaa ai. 1 tae 
mai ia ki te taone i Hastings haereere ai a ahiahi noa. Ka 
eke ,i ^anga ka, ka hoki ki Koparakore, tae atu ki te Paki- 
paki kua ah a taumaha tona tinana. Ka mea ia kia tu te 
k .. 1 ona hekenga atu ki r«ro o te kaa — hemo noa atu. 
. e w.iak 1 ponotanga o tenei tangata ki te Hani o 
L iu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. 
i lino rapu . e tenei tanga te pono o tenei hahi. Mo te. 
t, .1 va roa, n iku atu i te tekau tau ia e whinwhiri ana. Ka 
in.i k roio i te Hahi o Ihu Karaiti, e rima tonu nga wiki o 
to ia ir iritanga ka mate nei ia. Ko nga whakaaro o tenei 
tangata ki ana tamariki mokopuna kia urn ki roto i te Hahi 
o ihu K >rait . 

Ona whakaaro. 
Kua mohio noa atu ia ka mate ia. Tona whakaaro kia 
l ut ; 'uii o^ia tamariki mokopuna i le ra o te Kirihimete. He 
>u.a*e kortro ana i mua o tona matenga. Tona whakaaro 
. a hangiia toratau whare-kai kia nui ai to ratau marae mo 
ga karangaranga Hui Par. ha, Hui Tau ranei, me etahi atu 
hui. 

Rokohangi ka mate, otira kua mohio ke ona tamariki 
mokopuna ki ona wh.ikaaro. Ki.a tautokona hoki e ratou 
kia hang ina taua whare. 

Te tapuketanjja ki Te Haukc, Koparakore. 
Ko nga whakahaere katoa o te whiunara o tenei tangata 
1 1 Timuaki o te Peka o Korongata, Rawiri Kamau me te 
Hunga Tapu kato,) i whakahaere. No te 27 o Tinema i ta- 
pu»etia. Nt r a kai-kauwhau o tenei karakia nui ko Wiremu 
Takana, ko Eld r Sells, Timuaki o te K;mti, ko Paraire 
Tomo na. Na Reupena Parahi i whakahaere nga hm.ene 
me te ko^ea. Na Wiremu fak ma i whak tapu te rua. Nuku 
atu i te lorn ttrkau ng 1 motokaa, motorc i\ i hacie ki te la_ 
puketanga o tenei langa. 

Tino nui te aroha me te tangi o te Hunga Tapu mo te 
matenga o trnei tangata, otira ko te Atua kei te mohio ki 
taua t ng.ia e man ai Ia. Heoi ano, kia ora ona whamiu- 
nga. Na Rawiri Kamau 




Kote MAUI KAMURA o te KARETI M.A.C. 
Kote kai-whak lako ko Erata R.L. Paraone. 



K»» nga Powliiri Hui Pat ilia 



NO WAIKATO 
Ki Te Karere: Mau e panui atu tenei powhiri ki nga 
Hunga Tapu o te motu nei ki rma iwi ki nga reo ki nua hui- 
huinga tangata e noho mai na ki nga pito e wha o te motu 
nei. He powhiri atu tenei ki a kontou ka lu to ma ton Hui 
Pari ha ki te Peka <> Hoeotainui a te 20 me te 21 o nga r.i o 
Pepuere. No reira, haere mai ki te whakarongo, ki te whi- 
rl whin hoki 1 nga tikanga pai me n^ra tikanga tika me nga 
tikanga pono hoki ki te aroaru o to t a toil Mama nni i te Ra- 
ngi. Kia whangai hoki tatou tinana ki n^a mea whaka- 
te-wairua. Katahi ano hoki ka tu tetahi Hui Pariha ki taua 
takiwa Waikato, no reira haere mai. 

kei te tino moliio matou tera ka tae mai to tatou Tu- 
muaki Mihana ki te whenua e karangatia ana ko "Waikato 
Taniwharau, hei Piko hei Taniwfia hei Piko hei Taniwha." 

E hoa ma kia matara to ngakau kia hohoro kia rite ai 
ki tenei kupu, "Kai maata whiwhia maua riro ke." No reira, 
e te marama, Haere mai, Haere mai, ki to tatou huinga. 

Na Reberi D. Paapiti, Tumuaki Takiwa 



Hanuere 2j, 1920 n: KARERE $$ 

NO TE TAl RAWHITI 

He powhiri atu tcnei na matou ki nga Hunga Tapu me 
nga hoa c.roha o te motu nei kia haere mai ki to maiou Hui 
Pariha e tu nei ki Tamata-o-Tapuhi, Waiapu, a te 6 me te 7 
o nga ra o Pepuere, 1926. Haere mai e nga kai-kauwhau 
katoa o te Mihana nei. Haria mai to koutou matauianga 
nui. (Ma ia tangata, ma ia tangata, ano hoki e man mai 
i tona ake kakahu moe.) 

E penei ana te whakaaro a te iwi nei o te Tai Rawhiti, 
"Kua kore te Hahi Momona te kake haere i runga i te motu 
nei." No reira, haere mai, e hoa ma, ki te awhina i a matou 
ki te whakaatu atu ki a ratou e kaha tonu ana tatou. Ki ta 
matou whakaaro ka tae mai te Tumuaki Mihana me tona hoa 
wahine ki to matou Hui Panha. No reira haere mai, haere 
mai. 

Na L. S. Tamihana, Tumuaki Takiwa 

NO NGAPUHI 

Ki Te Karere: Man tenei e panui atu ki nga m;rae katoa 
e tae ai koe. 

Tena ra koutou e nga iwi katoa e noho ana i te Waipou- 
namu me te Ao-tea-roa nei. Tenei maiou te powhiri atu nti 
ki a koutou me haere mai koutou ki ta matou Hui Pari ha o 
te takiwa o Whangarei me te takiwa o Pei Whairangi ka tu 
nei ki Kaikohe, Pei Whairangi, a te 2r, 27, me te 28 p nga 
ra o Pepuere nei. 

Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai. H; tie mai e tt upc ko 
o te ika a Maui Tikitiki o Taranga. Haere mai e te kopu o 
te ika. Haere mai koutou katoa e nga kai-wrakaako era 
atu o o tatou akoranga maha e tau nei i n.nga i cnei motu e 
rua. Ki konei tatou korerorero ai mo nga taha e rua, ara 
mo te taha whaka-te-tinana, me te taha whaka-te-wairua, 
"E kore te rakau pai e ahei te hua i te hua kino, e kore ano 
te rakau kino e hua i te hua ataahua." 

Haere mai ki te hiku o te ika. "E kore te pi ku e ahei le 
man i te tinana, engari ma te hiku e man te linana." Ua< re 
mai kia whivvhi koutou i nga taonga nunui. 

Na reira hat-re mai, haere mai, haen mai. 

Haere mai koutou i runga i nga whakaaro pai, koa; 
i runga lioki i te rangimarie. Kia tae a tinana mai koutou ki 
ta matou Hui \ T li ka tu nei ki N'^.ipui.i. 



i E KAKERE I lanuere 27, [926 

Na reira haere mai, ha< re mai, haere mai. 
\.i o koutou teina, 

na Rinehi K. Tamati, 

Tumuaki Takiwa Whangarei 
na R. K. riwinihana, 

Tumuaki Takiwa Pei Whalrangi 



flDabi ibm Htawbaf, 

AKORANGA MO PEPUERE 

TE WA O MOH1 ( IV roanga atu) 

Wahi Tuarua. Nga wahine te wa. 

I. Ko Miriama. 

(.1). Nga koreroQ tona ahuatanga oranga hoki (Bio- 
graphy). Ona matua no te iwi o Riwai 1 whiriwhiria ki te 
whakarite i rolo 1 nga tikanga whaka-te wairua i whaka- 
ingoatia ai taua Tohungatanga Iti i mini iho. Tona whanau- 
tanga e torn ran e wha tekaq (340) [ >^'» tail i muri 1 te puta- 
n^a mai lharaira e whitu tekau nei n^a wairua i Ihipa. I a 
ia e kotiro ana e waru nga tau, 1 in ia nei heteri tiaki i a 
Mohi i nga pareng 1 6 te awa te Naera (Nile). 1 marena ia 
ki letahi toa o lharaira, o te hapu o Hura ko Hum tona 
ingoa, na ra'ua n'ei koAronaj pupuri ake nga ringaringa o 

Mohi, a toa noa a Inaraira (Ekoruhe I / : I I - 1 ^ ). A he wh.it a 
hoki ia i roto 1 a Inaraira 1 te whakaatu i a Ekoruhe 31 : 2. 
Na ana 1 arahi nga wahine o lharaira i te nn a v waru tekau 
ma whitu ona tau, i roto i te waiata i te kanikani, mo te toa- 
nga he whakautu mo te waiata, na nga tane nei te tuatahi o 
te whakaaturanga. (Tirohia Ekoruhe 15:21). Kotahi ia te 
mea i he ai ia 1 te koratia. ! rirohia Tauanga 121. I mate ia 
i te wa whakamutunga <> ta ratou haeienga i te koraha, ko- 
tahi ran e nn tekau ma rua nga tau. 

(1)). Ona ahuatanga. I roto i te ahua nga mahi me 
tona oranga ka kitea ko Miriama he wahine tino ren ke tona 
ahua. i whanau hoki ia i roto 1 te mataiifa>nga nei ka-i-arahi. 
Tirohia te mohio tana patai ki If wahine rangatira lhipia- 
na i te wahi kaukauranga. Te putake hoki tona kaha ki te 
tu atu ki a Mohi 1 rolo 1 tona (to Miriama) pohehetanga, 'he 
tohu ki te marama. te kaha tona hinengaro, koia nei tona 
ngoittoretanga. He tikanga kua takoto whakakapo i njja 
kanohi ki n^a whakawakanga whaka-te-wairua. I turi hoki 



Hanucre 27, 1926 TE KARERE 35 

ia ki nga komuhumuhutanga a te wairua i ki ai, ata noho 
marie i te wa i kape ai te arero ki ta te Atua i whakawahi ai, 
tatari atu ki te matauranga o te Atua, koia nei kei te kite me 
te marama hoki o tana vvhakarite whakawa, i a era atu ta- 
ngata, a mana nui atu hoki i ta Iharaira katoa ki te whaka- 
haere mo ana i whiriwhiri ai. I roto i enei ahuatanga ko ta 
te tangata whakatikatika he whakahawea ki te Atua. I te 
taha whaka-te-wairua i riro i tenei wahine whakamiharo te 
karangatanga he wahine poropiti. (Tirohia Ekoruhe 15: 20.) 
Te mahi i whiwhi ai ia, i whakaaetia ai hoki e te Atua, i 
runga i tenei whakarite i a ia a tetahi o nga poropiti o Iha- 
raira ko Miriama tetahi o nga kai-whakaputa i a Iharaira. 
(Tirohia Mika b: 3, 4). 

2. Ko Tepora. 

E rua tekau nga tau i hapai ai a Iharaira i te tukino- 
tanga a Iapini kingi o Kanana, he whakawhiu mo to ratou 
tahuritanga atu i te Atua. I karanga ake hoki ki te Atua i 
runga i te wairua maru kia whakaputaina ratou, otira kua 
taka ratou i nga ahuatanga i tu ai hei kai-arahi. Ko te aro- 
ha ki te whenua me te whakapono ki te Atua kua oti te rahui 
ki roto i te ahua me te oranga o Tepora. I whakawhirinaki 
te iwi ki a ia, i whakahaere hoki te Atua i a ia. He wahine 
poropiti ia, a na ana i whakahnere nga mahi i riro ai hei 
take whakaputanga mo Iharaira. (Tirohia Whakariterite 4). 
He whakamarama tenei i te pono o te take ki te mea ka turi, 
a ka kore ranei nga tane e pai ki te arahi, i te mea e hiahia- 
tia ana etahi kai-arahi, ka whakarite kai-arahi te Atua i roto 
o nga wahine. 

3. Te tamahine a Iepeta. 

Nga korero o te putake nana i nui ai tenei wahine kei 
roto i tenei akoranga kaore te Atua e ahuareka ki nga oati 
ma roto i te whakahaere a te tangata. Te ahua i whakaae 
ai te tamahine ki te putake o te oati a tona papa e whakaatu 
ana i tona aroha, whakaiti, a ngohengohe hoki ki nga oati 
whaka-te-wairua. Tona inoi hoki kia tukua kia okioki mo 
tetahi wa kia tangi ai ia mo tona wahinatanga, ehara hoki 
tona pouri i te mea no te whakakahoretanga o tona oranga. 
E whakaatu ana tenei i te tino hiahia o nga tamahine ranga- 
tira o Ihanrra. (Tirohia Whakariterite 11:30-40). Mo tc 
whakatutuLitanga te oati. e kore e taea te tino mohio, e- 
ngari ko te walii maramatanga iti i roto i te rarangi 39 hei 
homai tumanakotanga i runga i tenei ture whakamamae a 




Ko te ropu tamariki kura (student body) o tc Maori 

Agricultural College, ratou ko nga kai-whakaako 

/tic te koka-whangai imatron). 



Hanuere 27 iv- h ^E KARERE 37 

nga Ihipiana i whakahengia nei e te Atua, kihai i tutuki. 

4. Ko Rutu. 

He tauira a Rutu mo te whakaatu 1 te mau o te piripono. 
x\ga tu ahuatanga takijua o te piripono, i roto i te whakaho- 
ki a Ruta ki a Naomi. ( 1 irohia Rutu 1 : L6-17); Te tuatoru 
ko te whakaritenga a Rutu i te whakaaro a Naomi. (Rutu 
3)- 

5. Ko Hurura. 

He poropiti vvahine i Hiruharama e nemo ana i te k-areti 
he vvahine kura i runga 1 nga tikanga whaka-te-atua, a nana 
i hoatu te kupu a te Atua ki te kingi o Hura. (Tifohia K 
Tuarua 22). 

6. Ko Waliati. 

Ahakoa ehara ia i te Iharaira, i whakarite ia i eta hi tika- 
nga nunui i roto 1 nga whakahaere mo Iharaira. Tana wlia- 
kahaerenga i te tikanga whakahoki mai 1 te ngbhengohe kj 
te tane i roto i nga vvhakahaunga tika anake. Ko tana i 
whai ai kia riro ia he vvahine ktiini pai, karauna-kore, i te 
wahine kuim kino, whai karauna. (Tirohia Ehetere I). 

7. Ko Ehetere. 

tie pam 1 te Limatanga ake tona oranga. I whakatupu- 
ri . akt i ro:o i te wa te whakaraunga ki Papurona e te ira_ 
mutu tane p tona papa. I whakaritea hei kujr.i i runga 1 
tona ataahua i ngohengohe tona ki tona matua-whangai 
1 whakaora hoki i te kingi i nga kai-tuku whakamate toko- 
rua, me te whakar U' i tetahi nohopuku mo tona jwi, Ka 
tata te whilkaft^aro 1 tona ake oranga 1 roto i tona mahi wha- 
k iora mo ton.' iwi. Te toanga ki runga ake i te tino hoariri 
o nga Hurai. He v\ ihin [haraira whakaaro. He wahine 
tu p kari, kauie e ngohe tona whakapono e whakawhirinaki 
noa a tu tetahi ki runga ki tona matauranga, e kore hoki e 
taka tona piripono. ( rifbhia Ehetere 2 : 8-9). 

Te kai-arahitanga o nga wahine o roto i te wa o Mohi, 
p ra mo i n/s 1 wa mua atu, ehara i te mm whaka-u ki t e 
t (hung ata n 1 1 1 manakohia iho e te Atua i tau ;l 

ga mai i a Miriama ki te awhina ki te whaka 
i a [haraira, me te w h 1 katutuk itanga i te 
ooropii taie a te poropiti wahine aroh.M pono ki tona 
wh< nua, »i fepora, me te wha k iho 



38 ii karkke Hanuere 27, 1926 

whakaaturanga i whakaritea ai i runga i tona ingoa e te 
wahine poropiti kura e Hurura. I te mea e manaaki ana te 
Atua 1 nga wahine kai-arahi pai, i kino ia ki nga wahine 
mahi raweke i nga mahi o ana pononga. 

NGA PATAIMENGA PUTAKE WHAKAHOK1 

i. Whakaingoatia kia wha nga wahineote wa o Mohi 
i tua atu i nga mea i roto nei i tenet akoranga. 

2. Pehea te whakaahua a ton hinengaro mo Miriama i 
hettri nei mo Mohi. Hrohia Ekoruhe 2:4. 

3 Whakahuatia te waiata whakautu a nga wahine m > 
te waiata a nga tane i te Moan a Whero. 

4. Whakamaramatia te ahua o Miriama ano e kite ani 
koe 1 te whakahaerenga i te Moand Whero. 

5. Pehea te ahua te whakahua i te pohehetanga o 
Miriama inaianei i roto i te Hahi. 

(>. Korerotia a Mi ka 6 : 4 te whakaatu ko Miriama he mt a 
karanga na te Atua ki tona mihana. 

7. Whakaatnr.a kei te karangatia kei te tonoa hoki nga 
wahine tenei wa pera ano me Miriama. 

8. He aha nga tautoko ko Tepora he mea tohn e te ha 

te Atua hei kai-whakarite whakawa mo Iharaira. 

9. Korerotia te whakaatu a Hurura (2 Kingi 22:15-20); 
whakaaturia hoki nga hua tana whakaatu (2 Kingi 2} : 1-T7). 

10. L hea te wahi i whakatakoto ai a Ehetere i tona ora- 
nga ki rnnga ki te aata, kia whakaorangia ai tona iwi. 

1 1. Ma Ehetere te whakaaro kia whakaritea he nohopuku 
e \c iwi. Pehea te k ircro a tana wh.ikaaro mo tona akonga 

1 te kainga me nga ture nga Kurai i roto i te kainga. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO 
TOROTORO HAERE MO PEPUERE. 
rlei korerorerotanga ma nga mema i roto i 9 hui mahi, a 
whakahaere hoki nga mahi. 

Xga pai nga mo te tamaiti a kotiro hoki; korero whaka- 
riterite mo nga take e what ake nei. 

lie pehea te awhina, te pupuri mai ranei a te k ura i te 
tamaiti, kotiro ranei i runga 1 nga tikanga o te ora. 

1. Mo nga kanohi (eyes) kaha. me nga kanohi ngoikore. 

2. Mo nga niho kino. 

$. Mo nga kai kaore i te tika (improper food). 
He mahi tenei ma tatOU ki te tirotiro mo em i aliuatanga, me 
te whak itikatika i ana ahna. 

Ko nga ropu taknta me nga ropn naahi kei te koa tonu 
ki te homai i nga tohutohu ki a tatou i runga 1 enei take, a 
he mahi tenei ma tatou kia ako i enei mea, kia kaua ai a 
tatou tamariki e puritia mai i roto i a ratou mahi o te kura. 

Xa Kora S. Tinikini Na Toke Watene i whakamaori. 



Hanucie 2J, 1926 TE KARERE 



KOTE 

TAU TE HAKI IHU KARAITI 

TE HUNGA TAPU 

NGA RA MURi NEI, 

MIHANA NIL IIRENI. 

Ka tu ki Nuhaka a te 2 me 
te 3 Aperira, 1926. 



\Khki-. 



KO NGA PUXAPUKA HEI HOXONCA 



. etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei I <>. 
fea ki rtu.i mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko Nga mea e hiahia ana ki 
i jjiik.ipnk.i uu- tuku .tin ki 1 liu.\ J2, AiitkUimt 

STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 
Teachers B R ady Reference, Leather 

imeni & kctdy Reference, Leather n i> 

Hook ol Mormon, Cloth 2 1 

, Ball Leather 
•• " •• , Leather 10-O ^150 

Pearl of, Great Price, Cloth., j-u 

DoctrineS Covenants, Cloth =;-o 

. v\ Pearl ol Great Price, Lcuthel 
MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS 
Maori Read} Reference, ( loth 2 

, Leather .> b 

Ko Pe Kaweruta Hon, Cloth 1-9 

" Me Nga riin.cne, Leather 3 in 1 ji-m 

•• Pukapuka a Moromoua. Cloth 5-0 

•' , Leather .. 15-0 

Akoranga Me N^;i Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 3-J 

Leather 15 

( nib iuation of A, B, & C Tracts, L« aiher, Sp< 1 . < Jffer 1 

SJNDAf SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

Restoration of the Gospel 4 

\\ li u Jesos la ugh I 3 p 

Knnlrik.ntt.-ii Plan Book, Keslei & Morris .- 

Sunda) Morning in the Kindergarten, S*ortun 4-0 

SO AZ BOOKS 

Songs ol Zion, Cloth 

Leather 

Desei e1 Song Book:*, Cloth 3 

•• , Leather 
Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 

DDCT7INAL AND REFERENCE WORKS 
A rtii Its ol Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Ttiim/ige 8 ; 
\'i'.,lit\ ol Mormonism | 6 

S niii'ic Aspectsof Mormon am, Xelstm 0-0 

Restoration of the Gospel, M idtsm 40 

u hi ncs y<> 

the V oung, \\\,.i 
lesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 

nt id Is in Church History, Smith o-u 

Bible Read 2-0 

i- tltilln 1 el. Mai is b-0 

KOJ. H. IIVU'IXI TEKAJTA ME TE KAI PANTI HOKI 
M ^ r KORONr,ATA. HASTINGS. H. JR. 




<arra> 



*■ ^Sc<^ 



l-l-l-l-l-l-l 

-l-l-l -l-L-l- 



l-l-l- 
-l-l-l 



WAHANGA XX APERIRA 21, Iy2&> NAMA IV 

KOREROTANGA 




- 1 



-i 



RIPOATA NO WHARE KAURI 

NA IRIPARETE POxMARE 1 Mil 



rE AKORANGA O TE MANAWA 
NA ERUT. KUPA I VVHAKAMAOR] 



TE ATUATANGA O TE KARA1I1 
I I1C KAUWHAU NA TETAH1 NGA AFOTORO 

-l-l-l-l-l-l-i-l- 
- I - I ~ l-l-l -l-l-l-l-l-l- 



CS KflRSRS" 



WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 

Wharangi. 

Kl TE ETITA 

Ik- Ripo.it. i mo te Kareti 1 3 * 

Ko te llui \'ui a Ngati Porou i-') 

Ripoata no te SVhare Kauri i-7 

KO NCA RONCO KORERO 

Kti nga Hokinga atu ki Hiona i lo 

KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 

Te Akoranga oteManawa 137 

Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti ij6 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI I»2 

MAH! KURA HAPATI 

Concert Recitation 1 1 2 

Intermediate I department 121 

Korero .1 Ngakau 1 12 

Maori Theological 1 15 

Mother's 1 )ay Program 1 12 

Pakeha Theologii al 118 

Postlude in 

Prelude 111 

Primary Department 1 23 

Sacramenl Gem 1 1 1 




ffixcpw 



WAHANGA 20 WENErfEl, APERIRA 21 

fflaori agricultural College 



1926. NAMA 4 

Hastings. H. B- 



E tukua atu ana ia rnarama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, 

Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Mini Nei. 

Me tuku atu o koutou reta ki te Etita o te Karere, M. A. C, Hastings, II. B. 

Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni, e (5s). 

Iko te Sikanga Senei: 

flle matua utu mo tcu pepa fcu vtfhiwhi ai. 



J. H. Timkini, Titmnaki Mihana 
Mariana K. Ezvatana, Etita. Tuita Witch ir a, Etita Hoa Awhina. 

Ko te Kai-Rtpoata Te Tuati Meha 

Ko nga Kai-1'uhi-Mai (Special Writers) 
Wlremu A. Kotira tru T. Kupa 



fiDabi ikura ibapau. 

Prelude. 



A IfegrHln. 



Arr. from S.::iurert 
• by T. Y. C. 






p 8ft. 



# * 



SACRAMENT GEM FOR MAY, 1926 

I come to Thee nil penitent, 
I feel Thy love for me; 

Dear Saviour, in this Sacramenl 
I <1<> remember Thee. 
Postlude. 



p soft 8 ft. 






[mm i m m i ■ i ; \ i i 



l E KAfcERE Ap< rira 21, [926 



CONCERT RECITATION FOR WAY, 1926. 

(John, Third < "mpter, l<Hfth Ver 
"Jesus answered, Verily, verily, I say unto thee, E 
a man !>.• born of water and of the spirit he cannol enter into 
I lie kingdom of < lod. " 



KORERO A NGaKaI Ml) MEI 1926; 

I a Lluaui .; : 5. 
"Ka whakahokia c Ihu, lie pono, he pouo taku c men 
ki a koe, Ki te kahorc he tangata e whanau i te \\ ;: i , i tc 
Wairua hoki, c kore ia c ahei tc tomo ki tc rangatiratanga b 
1 • Atua." 



PROGRAM FOR MOTHER'S DAY 9th MAY. 1926. 

The following is a suggested program of items for presenta- 
tion, and it is hoped that all Sunday School Superintendents 
and Teachers will co-operate to make this day of remembrance 
the success it merits. Other items in place of those sir-. 
hereunder may be used; remember (he spirit of the occasion and 
endeavor to preserve it. 

PROG R A M. 

1. Appropriate preliminary music. 10:25 a.m. 

2. Beading of abstrad of minutes. !(>.•".() a.m. 
:!. Notices. 

-!. Opening song: X<>. 93, "O My Pal her," or No. 46, "Love 

al Home." 
:,. Prayer: By member of the Theological Class expressing 

appreciation for God's gifl :<> man a Mother. 

6. Sacramental song: No. 129, "Behold the Grcal Redeemer 

Die." 

7. Administration of Sacrament: Prelude, Gem, Postlude. 
Concert Recitation: ••Hearken unto thy father that begal 

thee and despise n<»t thy mother when she is old."- 
Proverbs, 23:22. 



Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE JJ_3 

9. Singing practice: (To be conducted as a regular song, 
reverently and impressively, and not as a practice), 
No. 23, "Where is My Wandering Boy To-night." 

10. Appropriate remarks (5 minutes) by a member of the 

Superintendence, concerning the origin and purpose of 
Mother's Day. 

11. Primary (Kindergarten) Song: by members of Primary 

or Kindergarten, "Oh, I Had Such a Pretty Dream. 
Mamma." 

12. Recitation by intermediate pupils: "Mother." 

MOTH i: R. 

'.'Who is it knows just what to do, 
When tilings go wrong- and life looks b!ue1 
Who is it sings amid her care, 
And smiles when shadows bring despair? 
Who is it through her changeless day 
Unchanging goes her faithful way? 
Who is it keeps the light, the home, 
Still sweet howe'er her loved may roam? 
Mother. 

' ' Who is it wins the crown she wears, 
When love lays wreath-' upon gray hairs, 
And joys on wings of softest gleam 
Leads home her little ships of dream? 
Who is it, though she goes not down 
Each day to business in the town. 
Still lifts her burden, toils hep share, 
Fulfills her trust and meets her eare 
Mother. " 

13. Speech, by n member of the Theological class on the Life 

of one (or two) of the following Mothers :— -Eve, Sariah, 
Rachel, Hannah (mother of Samuel). Mary (the 
mother of Christ ). 

14. Recitation: by Primary pupils — "Mother — An Acrostic" 

( children, each bearing a large letter: M,0,T,H,E,R.) 

MOTHER— AN ACROSTIC. 
For six children, each carrying a large letter. 

First Child 

Mother's always read} 

To help d fellow out. 
A mother's mho a dandy, 

Of that tin ie i« no doubt. 

Second child 
Our mothei b are nlw a.} - w illing 

'I*., rlo v hate Vi 1 he\ r»nii: 
To help lis in 0U1 |'l;i.\ . 

< >i tio dim wok To plan. 



i4 1 1. k \k, Apt rira il t [926 

Third I hi!.! 
To all mother* in nil 1 

lii- .! ;i \ will r'.i |>e g 
We want tn give th. in honor bcre, 
\ v > o\\ they 're |.i:i- .1 in la aven. 

r'ourtli Child 
I lome n other, 

And we wil 
And love the nam*' of motlior 

On tins and 

Fifth I 
Kadi one here has 

And each will wish to >ay 
That we are glad they're with us 

On this liri 8 l>ay. 

Sixth Child 
K 1 1 :. 11 ■ ! . -i ever, mol hi i s 

Thi t t hougli \\<- 're pomel imea w 
We 11 ally would not grieve you, 

Our love 1- evei strong. 

1"). Song: by [intermediate pupils. No. BO, "Forbid Them 
Not." 

16. Distribution of white flowers to Mothers (also married 

sisters) by little children (girls) dressed in while. After 
distributing the flowers theystand in front and repeat: 
••s.i let out flowers bright and fair, 
A I >\ in- greet ing to you bear, 
And may the fragrant flower* 
Glad welc all 011 M thei '> Oay." 

17. One minute of silence in honor of the Mothers who have 

passed beyond. 

1 duet, or chorus) by Theological Class pupils. 
Select Prom : " Mother Maehree, " "Silver Thcads amonp. 
the Gold," "That's Whal God Made Mothers For," 
"Mot In p Divine," " Dear < Mil Mother of Mine'" 

19. Speech: by one <>f the besl s])eakers I U> minutes ki The 

Place of Mothers in the World." 

20. Response b> ■■• Mother. 

'_ I. Remarks by the Superintendent. 

22. < ''Resting Now Prom Care and Sorrow." 

■J".. Benediction: By a member of the Theological or [ntcr- 
mediate < Hass. 

NOTE. Have children dressed in while wherever possible 

deavour to procure Mothers to hang in eon 

spicuous place; arrange for decorations, flowers, etc. 



Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE 115 



MAORI THHOLOGICAL 



Ratapn tiiatahi, Mci 2, 1926. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. 

Na Tiala W. Witehha i whakamaori. 

Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- 
toria nei e Ihu hei mahi 111a tatou. 

KO TE IRIIRINGA A IHU. 

"Tukua ra aianei; ko te tikanga hold tenei ma taua kia 
whakarite i nga mea tika katoa." Matiu 3: 15. 

Te Whakaatu: J a Matin, te torn nga upoko; i a Maka 
1 : 1-11; i a Ruka 1 : 5-25, 57-80 ; 3 : 2-2 ; i a IToani 1 : 6-36. 

Te Wa: I a Ihu e torn tekau ona tavi. 

Te Wahi: I te Awa Horano. 

Te Take Nui: Tera te iriiringa nunaki he walii no nga 
mahi a te Atua, a me ma hi hold e tetahi na te At 11 a nei i 
whakamana ; a meite kore tatou e mahi i tenei e kore hoki 
tatou e "whakaritc i nga mea tika katoa." 

Ko te iriiringa o Ihu i whakaaturia i roto nga karaipi- 
ture lie nui noa atu te tikanga ki nga tangata e noho i te 
Y7hcnua. Me i wliakaaro nga tangata te ao ki tenei mea, 
me i inoi ratou, me i rapu ratou e, me aha tatou tenei tauira 
kua liomai nei e Ihu, he nui noa atu nga uiano tangala e 
haere kia iriiria ki retc I te Uahi Ihu Karaiti te llunga 
Tapu nga I?a Mui-i Nei. 

Engari ko nga tangata te ao kahorc c wliakaaro ki enei 
mea. Kei te ta ratou manawa ma nga minita e wliakaaro 
ana mo ratou — ko etahi e arahitin ana e ratou ngakau 
whakahihi rae era atu ahua taikaha. Pera me nga matapo e 
aru ana i ratou kai-arahi. 

Korerotia kia polo te ahua IToani me tana mihana mo 
te tai.aa i tutaki ai La ki a te Karaiti i nga parenga llorano. 
lie aha te mea i homai hei mahi ma tatou i roto i tenei tauira? 
He aha te mahi i wail mo nga mea kna neke atu i te 

»/ani tau a kahore ano kia iriiria \ Lie aha te mahi i waihotia 
mai ma nga matua whai tamariki kahorc nei ano i tika te wa 
kia iriiria ;' 

Il<' alia te mahi kua waihotia mai ma ngfl mea kua mate 



__ I !•: KA RERE Apcrira 21, iy26 

nei o ratou tupuna i roto i te ku R o-pai .' 

Kia tino poto te taitna mo enei kia mii ai !•■ tail 1a ma nga 
rue ma o te karaihe hci korero i o ratou nei haringa ma roto 

i:.-ii nei i o ratou iriiringa a in- una pehca hoki i riro mai ai 

i ;i ratou te tutukltanga te kupil \\hau;iari. " K i te pai tetalll 

tangata ki te mea i tana e pai ai, <• matau ia ki te ako, na te 
Atua ranei, he korero naku ake ranei." Ifoaui 7: i7. 

Ratapu tuarua. Mel 9, 1926, 
Ra o nga Whaea. Tirohla Wlur.mgi 1 1 1 

Ratapu tuatoru, Mei 16, 1926 

AKO JIANG A 11. 

"Te Whakatcinga i Hiruhanima." 

1. Ta I *i + a karo o tana mahi minita ki nga Tauiwi. 

Whakaaturauga i tana whakakitenga ki nga Elurai 
i whakataliuritia. Nga Mahi 1 1 : 1-18. 

(b) Te whakapono o nga Ifurai. Ko nga llurai anake c 
W'lliwlii ki te w liakaoranua. Wliakaatu i a li<.ma 
1 : Ki. 

2. r iV whakaaro tukino o llerora Akaripa I. 

ia i Km tukino i nga akonga a te Karaiti, Nga Mahi 
12: 1. 

Whakaiitenga i te Apotoro i a Ucmi kia mate (tuti 
kana <> Uoani); N'ga Mahi \-l: '2. Whakaritea ki le 
wliakaatu i a Moltia, l T poko 17. 
Whakaritenga kia maka a Pitn ki roto i te whare- 
herehere. Nga Mahi Vl. -\-\. 

3. Te wha kaput un pa a merekara u I'itn i t<- wharelierelietv. 

N'ga Mai.i 12: G II. 
,i Ka tvhakaputa a I'ita ki u- wharc <» Mori. Vm 

Main 12: 17. 
b) Ka w h;ik;i\\ l:in;i te Kai-tiaki o ic wliarohoreliere ki 

t«- ritonga <> te ture i nga Roma, n'<> to tukuuga 

kia puta nga herehere. N'ga Mahi L2: l!>. me t<- 

whakaal ti N T ga Mahi 21 : 42, 

(c) Te matengn <> Flerora. Nga Mahi L2: 20-24. 

Ratapu luawha, ,Mci 23, 1926 
AKORANGA 12. 



Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARKRE 117 

"Te whakatahuritanga o Faora, me tana niihana tuatahi." 

1. Tc whakatahuritanga 6 J Faora. 

(a) Tona whakaaro pono ki tc whakahinga i nga 
akonga. Nga JMalii 9: 1-2, me Nga Malii 2*2: 3-5. 

(b) Te haerenga ki Ramahiku me nga ahuatanga i 
tupono kia Arami tamaiti. Mohia, Upoko 27. 

(c) Te tutakitanga o Anania kia Haora i Ramahiku. 
Nga Main 9: 10-]!). 

2. A Pa ova kei Ramahiku me Arapia. 

(a) Nga mea i tupono i Ramahiku. Nga Main 9: 19-25. 

(b) Ka whai i a ia nga whakatoiuga. Nga Mahi 9: 23- 
24, whakavitea tcnei ki te niihana tuatahi a Arami 
tamaiti. Arami, Upoko 14. 

(c) Kei Arapia. Karatia I : 15-JS. 

3. Ka hoki ia ki Ramahiku, a ka oma ki Iliruharama. 

(a) Ka whakatakoto whakaaro nga Hurai ki te whaka- 
mate i a Paora. Nga Main 9; 23-24. 

Ratapu tuarima, Mei 30, 1926 
AKOkaJn&A 13. 

' 'Whakatahuritanga Paora, a tuatahi hoki tana mahi 
mihana haere." Te roanga atu. 

1. Tona haerenga ki Fiiruharama. N T ga Mahi !) : 2(> 27. 

(a) Ka whakamohiotia a Paora c F*anapa ki nga 

Apotoro: Nga .Main 9; 27. 
(I)) Ka whakamaharatia a Paora i roto i tetahi kitenga 

kia haere atu. Nga Mahi 22: 17-21. 
(e) Tc Apotoro ki nga Tauiwi. N T ga Main 9: 1."); 22: 

21. Whakarifcea hoki tc whakaakoranga i te L*uka- 

puka a Moromona ia I Niwhai 10: 11-14. 

2. Tc haerenga Paora ki Tarahu. Nga Mahi !> : 30. 

(a) Tc vvahi i whanan ;ii ia. Tirohia Nga Mahi 21: 39. 

(b) A Tarahu he pa no nga Roma i tc wa i yvhakahu.i 
ai a Paora i a i;i ano he Roma. Nga Mahi F(>: 
37-38; -2-2: 2o-2s. 

(c) 1 noho ia ki tenei wahi t<- whenua mo nga tau 
c 5 c ;ii ki nga whakaatu tona oranga. 

(<1) Ko 1<' ki ;\ nga 1 n i» «_j ;i 1 ;i tik;i \vli:ii-iii;in;i. no tenei 



i [S i E KARERE Aperira 21, [926 

wa i whakaturia ;ii nga hahi ki Hiria me Kirikia 

Malii 15: 41. 



— 0- 



PAKEH4 THK0L0G1CAL 
"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" 

First Sunday, May 4, 1926. 
UniTorm Fast Day Lesson 

The example of Jesus: \vlia1 it bids us do. 
The Baptism of Jesus. 

The incident which forms the basis of to-day's lesson is of 
t e greatest imporl to every living soul. 

It' the world could 1)-' 'brought to a serious, analytical, and 
prayerful consideration of it with the thought in mind "The 
example of Jesus — What it bids us do." what a tremendous 
increase in church membership would follow! 

However, as the greal majority of the peoples of the world 
are "carried about with every wind of doctrine, by the sleight 
of men, and cunning craftiness whereby they lie in wait to 
deceive" we may nol expect such a result so Long as individual 
initiative give3 way to blind following. 

A brief recital of the birth, characteristics and great 
mission of .John (called the "Baptist") and of the epochal 
scene Oil the banks of the Jordan, should make an excellent 
setting for testimonies from those who have Imd the supreme 
joy of having been "born again*' born of waiter and of the 
Spirit — and received the fulfilment of the promise, "If any 
man will do His will, he shall know of the doctrine, whether ii 
be of God/' etc. (John 7: 17,. Then, in application of the 
matter, consider- What does this incident bid us do: As to 
those who ar< old enough but have not yet been baptized; as 
to parents upon whom pests primarily the duty of teaching and 
preparing their children for baptism: as to adults upon whom 
the Spirit of Elijah should be resting, and whose hearts turn to 
their fathers: what does it bid us do? 

Care must be taken that recital of facts and comment upon 
tlie personnel of characters participating in such facts, shall be, 
brief, leaving the major jortion of the time for testimonies and 
making the application. 



Ape lira 21, 1920 IE KARERE 1 19 

Suggested Outline. 

Topic: "Suffer it to be so now, for thus it become th us In 
fulfil all righteousness." (Matt. 3: 15. 

Text: Malt. 3; Mark 1: 1-11; Luko 1 : 5-25, 58-80; 3: 2-22: 
John 1 : 6-36. 

References: "Josus the Christ" (Talmage), pages 121-127: 
''Life of Christ" (Farrar), pages 93-102; "Life of Christ" 
i Papini ), |>;i<ics 54-a7. 

Time : When .Jrsus was i hirty. 

Place: The River Jordan. 

Aim: That baptism by immersion by an authorized servanl 
of God is approved of the Father and necessary in order to 
fulfil all righteousness. 

Outline: 

I. Tin 1 Forerunner. 

1. A child of promise. 

2. His work and characteristics. 

.'1 His declarations as to One mightier than ll<\ 
II. At the Jordan. 

John baptizing. 
Ml. Jesus prt scnts Himself. 

1 . Applies For bapti 

2. John '« denial. 

I Y. " Suiter it i" lie bo now. 

Jesus' re pi j . 
V. The double Baptism. 
< rod 's <ip|H(i\ al. 
Illustration and Application: To be supplied l-\ each 
depari ment suitable to its needs 

Second Sunday, M:i\ k ), 1926 
Mothers' Day Program. Sec page 1 1 2 

iiiini Sunday, M.u 16. 1926 

R< > ! ew Questions. 

I. N'ame an attribute of character that you admire in 
Adam, Enoch, Koah and Abraham, and tell «rhj you admire the 
p I,; icular al 1 ribut< j on Belecl . 

\.-i. tie a gospel truth «>!• doctrine made prominent in 



TE KARERE Aperira 21, 19-0 



tii- llw . . i each of the prophets listed in the foregoing question 
and < ■ ' ' 1 the truths and doctrines so selected. 

Fourth Sunday, May 23, 1926 
1 . on K). Abraham as a Father and Servanl of God. 

( ienesis, ( 'hapter 22. 
etive: To teach that in life and death God is supreme 
will make us equal to every test if our faith in Him is 

■ .!t. 

! upplementary References: All reference works heretofore 
• ;'.- ■ ted. 

ingestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
!. Abraham forced to send Hagar and Fshmael forth. 
Why was this necessary ! 
! . Abraham commanded to sacrifice Isaac. 

1. A supreme test of his faith. 

Walked three days from his home to the mountains 
where sacrifice was to take place. 

2. He obeyed every direction given him, even to the raising 
of the knife to slay his son. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. How do you explain Abraham's great faith.' 

2. Summarize the life of Abraham and enumerate at least, 
ihvee great oustanding atributes of character his life exemplifies. 

Fifth Sunday, May 30, 1926 

Lesson 11. Isaac a Man of Humility, Love and Faith. 

Text • < ienesis 21 :27. 

Objective: To show that God's purposes are carried forward 
by those who arc obedicnl and faithful. 

Supplementary References: Joscphus 13-16-18-22. Vol. 1, 
Hours with the Bible, Geikie, Chapter is. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
1. Isaac a son of promise. 

A link in the chain of posterity through which God has 
accomplished Mis great purposes. 
:'. :.,•(• a \xung man of greatesl obedience and faith. 



Aperira 21, 1920 lh. K.ARERE 121 

1. When told by his father that ho was to he the sacrifice 

according to Clod's command he was 27) years of am 1 , 
hut he never fal+ered. See Josephus, chapter 13. 

2. Zealous in the exercise of every virtue adhering 1o his 

parents and in the worship of God. — Josephns. 

I I I. Isaac in his manhood. 

1. A counterpart of his great father in 

Simple devoutness. 
I). Purity of life. 

2. A contrast in 

His passiveriess of character. 

IV. Isaac blessed of God and known as a strong man to those 
about him. Sec Genesis, chapter 26:13-33. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. What purposes do men like Isaac serve in carrying 
forward Go ! 's work ! 

2. Name three virtues exemplified bv the life of Isaac. 



INTKRMF.DMTE 1)1 PvlM.MI VI 
'I ill. BOOK OF MORMON" 

first Sunday, May 2, 1926 

Uniform Fast hay Lesson 

Sams rs I'akeha Thechgtcal Class. Sec |>a£e 1 18 

General Subjccl : The example of Jesus: whal i1 bids us d<>. 

special Topic: The Baptism of Jesus. 

Le1 the class members relate the incidents connected with 
the baptism of the Saviour. See what they are actually think- 
ing and believing (1) as to its reality, (2) as to its necei 
Why do they think that baptism is an ordinance to which all 
111 a iik i n< I. after the 3 ears of accountability, should submit 1 Lei 
them quote Prom scriptures to Bupporl their b 1 daj 

the teacher is to direct, develop and inspire discussion, nol to 
dispense information. He is trying to find out what the class 
itself, in an independent way. is thinking and believing about 
these fundamentals of our faith. Well thought-out questions 
Prom the teacher should 1<« ep the discussions in the proper line 
of thought. 



i E KARERE Aperira 21, 19:6 



Second Sunday, May 9, 1 920" 
Mothers' Day Program. Sec page 1 ! 2 

1 bird Sunday, May 16, 1926. 

Review Questions. 

i. Tell of some of the difficulties Joseph Smith had in 

.1.: forth the Book of Mormon. 
:. Name two things you like best in Ncphi. 
i. Recite one of the passages you have memorized. 

..Hiite frequently in the review the pupils will be asked to 
[■ lie passages they have memorized. This may be an incentive 
ally make them their own. 

Fourth Sunday, May 20, 1926 
Lesson 10. An expedition Sent Out. —The Story of Zenifr. 

Text: Omni 1:27-30; Mosiah, chapters 7-10. 

Objective: Tc tench that those who trust in the Lord nn.y 
t ;pect His help in times of need. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
il) General assignment of the text. 
I 2 ) special assignment, 

(a) The first expedition. (Omni l;27-30.) 

(b) Amnion's first experiences in Lehj- Nephi. (Mosiah 
Till chap. ) 

(c) The twenty-four i_^< > i < 1 plates. (Mosiah, chap. 2.) 

(d) Zeniff, a righteous king. (Mosiah 7:33; 8:15-18; 
9:17; 10:11. 

Questions fcr Teachers. 
1. Point out characteristics in the La man it es, which plainly 
show they were led by the spirit of Satin. 

•J. What lessons are to be Learned from Zen'ffs struggles? 

Fifth Sunday, May 30, i<)2<> 
Lesson 11, A Wicked King A Prophet's Warning. 

Tc -1 : Mosiah, 1 Itli to 17th chapters. 



Aperira 21, 1926 TK KARKRE I2J 

Objective: To make impressive the fact thai the Lord shows 
His niercy towards His children by inspiring His serVants to 
<-a!l tlie wicked to repentehec. 

Supplementary References: Book of Moses 1 Pearl of Great 
Price), chap. 8:19-24. Acts 6:8-15; 7:50-60. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
1 1 ) General assignment of th:^ text. 
i 2) Special assignment : 

(a) Noah's wicked wa}*s. (Mosiah 11:1-19. 

(b) Abinadi sounds a warning. (Mosiah 11:20429.) 

(c) Trial of Abinadi. (Mosiah, chapter 12.) 

(d) Abinadi spared to deliver bis message. (Mosiah 
13:1-10. 

A b ladi's death. I Mosiah, ITtli cha] 
(3) AH Ihe teachings of Abinadi cannot be covered in the class 
period, bill should be read at home by \hv pupils, and certain 
passages? discussed. Have class mark and memorize Mosiah 
15:15-18. 

Questions fcr Teachers. 

1. Contrast the state of happiness of the people under the 
rule of a kii g like Noah ami one like Benjamin. 

'2. flow did Abinadi show (rue courage? 

3. Name the direct proj h •■ es ^"'i 1 by Abinadi regarding 
the peoj !o of Xoah. 



PKl.MAKY DEPARTMEN1 
lirst Sunday. April 4, 1926, 
Uniform Fast Day Lesson. 

Topic : The I'.apt ism of Jesus M att. 3; li 

Texts: Matt. 3; Mark 1:1 11; Luke I : 5-25. :>7 BO; 3 
.John 1 : 6-36. 

References : "J Tain ag< |>p. 121-127 ; 

" Life of Christ " I Karrar), pp. 93 102; "Litv of < 'hrist " 
pi'ii i. |»|». .'. ' 

Time : When .Jesus v as i hirty, 

! 'lace : LV cr Jordan 

< Jbj( eti /e: 1 ih that Baptism bj imnn i 



I E KARERK .\|m i ir.i 21, 1920 



! » • - tibership in the Kingdom of God. 

-est ions : 
As we read the texl what causes us to think thai John the 
[1 1 ist fell that baptism was necessary for entrance into the 
1 . 1 '/<lom of God ! 

Why did Jesus Ohrist ask to be baptized by John.' Why 
Jesus insist that John baptize lliml 
What causes us to think that JesuR was baptized by immer- 

.;'. ill ' 

Tell in which way Our Rather in Heaven showed His 
■ >proval of Christ's baptism. Lead the children to see that 
us not only taught others what was necessary for salvation. 
Iso set the example. [11 the lesson of Jesus ami Nicodemus 
lie told others what to do, but to-day's lesson shows us how it 
must be performed. Jesus was greater than John, but Jesus 
recognized John's calling. 

Stimulate the children to look forward to the time when 
they will be old enough to he baptized by some one in our 
Church having the righl to baptize. 

Have the children tell how the members in their homes 
were baptized and by whom they were baptized. 

Memory (Jem : Use same suggested for story of Jesus and 
Xecodeiiius. 

Song: "Baptism" page '21 — Francis K. Thomasson's 

Primary and Kindergarten Sonus. 

licst Exercise: The hi*r thought is obedience to law. Let 
the children suggest ways and means by which Heavenly 
Father sends us helpers to prepare the "round for planting; 
the warm wind to melt the snow and to earry off the dead 
leaves from the garden bed; the sun and the rain. After the 
discussion on each topic let the children represent the wind 
blowing, the sun shining and the rain falling. 

Second Sunday, May 9, 1926. 
Mothers' Day Program. See page 1 I 2 

Third Sunday, May 19, 192(> 
Topic: ( liris Feeding the Five Thousand. 



Aperira 21 192b TE KARERE 1 25 

Texts: Matt. 14: 13-21; Mark 61 30-44; Luke 9: 10-18; 
John 6: 1-13. 

References: " Jesus the Christ" (Talmage, pp. 332-335; 
"Life of Christ" (Weed), pp. 172-177; "Sunday Morning in 
the Kindergarten, " Lesson 44. 

Time: The Feast of the Passover. 
Place: On a mouiit near Sea of Cralilec. 
Objective: Seek ye first the kingdom of Cod and all else 
will be added unto you. 

Suggestions: Show picture of Christ feeding the five 
thousand. Lead the children to see thai these people had heard 
of the good works of Jesus and wanted to know more about 
Him. Help them to realize that Jesus was tired, and when He 
found oul that the people wanted more spiritual food, and were 
willing to forget their physical selves to gel it lie U'i\ them 
physically as well as spiritually. 
Memory < fein : 

" 1 'in glad my blessed Saviour 
\V;is once a child like me, 
To show how pure and holy 
1 lis little oii< s mighl be : 
And if I try to follow 
ilis Footsteps here below 
! I" never w ill Forgel me 
I because he loves me s<>. " 

Hniilj II. Mill.-. 
Songsi 'Little Purple Pansy" D. S. S. Book, p. 127. 
"Jesus (Mice Was a Little Child*' Primary So 

Rcsl Exercise: Carrying over the thoughl From last Sun- 
day, lead Ihc children to see thai the ground is ready For 118 to 
,| () our part, l, i the children suggcsl what we do firsl 
the soil, rake, pick ou1 the Btones). After they have suggested 
le1 them sing and dramatize the Following words to the tune of 
"Here We Go Round the Mulherrj Bush": 

"This is the way we dig our ground, dig our ground dig 
our ground. So early Monda; morning. M 

Then change the wrordfi to raking, planting and spri 

melody. 
I,,. i || M . rhildren ftuggest the kind of seeds ih.\ want to 



I 26 TE KARERE A pel ijru 21, L926 

plant. 

Fourth Sunday, May 23, 1926; 

Topic : Tlie Raising of the Daughter of Jairus. 

Time: While preaching to Publicans and Sinners. 

Place : Nazareth. 

Texts: Matt. !) : 18, lit. 23-26; Mark 5: 22-24. 35-43; Luke 
8: 41, 42, 49-56. 

References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Les- 
son 45; "Jesus, the Christ," pp. 313-315; Weed's "Life of 
( Ihrist," chapter 31. 

Objective: To teach that we must have faith and trust in 
the power of God and His servants if we want to be healed. 

Suggestions: Show the picture to the children, let them 
tell what they can see in it. Then let them tell of the members 
of their family, or themselves; of how they have been adminis- 
tered to by elders. Lead them to see even if JesUS was taken 
from the earth, lie left Tlis power to heal with our Elders. 

Show the children how necessary it is to have faith and to 
trust in this wonderful power. And that when we ask to be 
healed we must feel that Heavenly Father will heal us if it is 
best, but sometimes we pray and feel badly when our prayers 
are not answered. We must trust our Heavenly Father an 1 
know that He will give us what is best for us. 

Memory (Jem: Same as last Sunday. 

Songs: "The Heart Garden" — Francis Iv. [Thomasson's 
Kindergarten and Primary Sony Book. 

Rest Exercise: Have children name the kind deeds they 
may do for each other; for brothers and sisters; polish shoes, 
wipe dishes for sister, amuse the baby, etc. Let the children 
dramatize these suggestions. 

Firth Sunday, May MO, 1926 

Topic : Jesus and the Children. 

Time: .Just after .Jesus had delivered His sermon on shores 
of Galilee. 

Place : Borders of Judea. 

s: M itt. !9: 13-15; Mark 10: L3-16 ; Luke IS: 15-17. 



Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE 127 

References: " Jesus the Christ" (Talmajre). pp. 47"). 476; 
Weed's "Life of Christ," chapter 52. 

Objective: To teach that by being pure in heart we shall 
return to the presence of our Heavenly Father. 

Suggestions: Show pictures of Jesus when twelve and then 
as a man. Let children look at them, then tell what they see. 
Then tell the story leading them to see how much Jesus loved 
little children, because they were pure and innocent, and that 
they should always remain pure and free from evil if they want 
to return to Heaven and live with Heavenly Father. Lead 
them to see how they will be blessed if they have pure, clean 
thoughts. If they don't think naughty things they won't be 
naughty; good thoughts make good boys and girls. Stimulate 
them to want to be like our great men and women. All of our 
great men and women, when little children, had good thoughts 
and a great desire to be something worth while. Lead them to 
see that our thoughts make us. The people in penitentiaries 
to-day are there for no other reason than they had the wrong 
kind of thoughts when small. Jesus was great, good and kind 
when a boy, so He couldn't help being the kind of man lie grew 
to be. 

Memory Gem: Same as last Sunday. 

Songs: "Jesus Once Was a Little Child," Primary Soul: 
Book; "Dearest Jesus, May 1 !>><■," I-Yaneis k. Thomasson'fl 

Soii<j Book. 

Rest Exercise: Heavenly Father Loves all the children so 
much, and lie wants to make them happy, so He has given 
them a beautiful place in which to live. Ask children to name 
same of the beautiful things in nature at this season that He 
his given us. Where have the binls been) The little plains 

awakening; the tiers rocking in the warm winds. Lit them 
dramatize them as they Buggesl them. 



Iki tc Etna 



Ripoata No le Whare Kauri 
Ki T< Karen Tena koe, inahau c nanui atu enci kupu 



1-8 TK KARERK Apcrira 21. 1^26 

mania ki nga walii katoa e tae ai koc. E hari ana te ngakau 
in > maua ko Elder E. II. Anderson i tae ki W-hare Kauri ara 
Chatham Islands ki te kauwhau i te Rongo-pai o Ihu Karaiti 
o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Xci, i rite ai te kupu a te 
Karaiti ki ng.\ Hurai, "He hipi atu ano akn, ehara nci i tenei 
koiiiga., me arahi mai ratou ki konei kia urhakakotahitia te 
kahui, kotahi ano hepara." Kei a [loan! te whakamarama 
10: 10. 

No reira, e nga Hunga Tapu, e ki ana ahau he Itonore mii 
tenei ki ta U Atua titiro, ki a tatou ano hold ki nga Hunga 
Tapu. Kua iriiria e maua e ono nga mema hou, e toru kua 
manaakitia ki roto ki te Hahi, a kua whakatungia lioki he 
peka mo ratou. Ko Te Han Mataira te Timuaki o taua peka, 
ara e kiia ana te iugoa o taua peka ko Taupeka. 




Ko etahi o nga Hunga Tapu o te WJiare Kauri 
E hoa ma, i tiuo manaakitia maua e nga tangata tend 
whenua. He hunga tenei kaore i te mohio ki te whakapono. 
E ai ki te titiro te alma ko te atua kei te whakapono ratou 
ko nga whare waipiro. Tino nui atu to ratau hiahia ki tera 
mahi i to ratou ki te whakapono ki te Atua. Ko tenei to atua 
nui kei a ratau ko te waipiro me era atu mahi kino. Otira i 
te mca kua tae maua ki waenganui i a ratau c tino manaakitia 
am maua e rrtau, e vhakarorgo ana etahi o ratou ki a maua 
!: ur.vhnn. Kati : '-i;i nno tetahi mea nui i wliakaritra ki i«- 



Aperira 21, 1926 IE KAKHRE I 29 

peka, ara i te whakatunga i to peka ka whakaritca he 
Kura Hapati mo ratou. Kia mohio ai, <• nga llunira 
Tapu, he lino mahi nui ta maua mahi ko Rider B. II. Anderson 
ki re whakaritc i nga mea katoa e tika ai mo tenei peka i 
tenei taima poto. Ko to maua roa ki tenei wlienua kauwhau 
ai e i-iina nga wiki, otira i to maua liialiia ki tc hoki ki te Bui 
Tau ka tere to maua haere atu i tenei wlienua i roto i nga 
mahi ki te Atua. 

Me whakapau te taima, e nga Hunga Tapu, i tc mea kua 
tino lata tc ra to tatau Ariki Iliu Karaiti. Ki te puta te 
whakahau a te Timuaki tc Mih ana kia haere ki te kauwhau 
i te Rongo-pai, me haere. Kanaka tenei ki, "He raruraru,'- 
ehgari wnakaritea te mahi ki te Atua. Kati tenei, 

XA [RIPARETE FOMARti. 



-0- 



\u) tc 1 1 ui Nui a N^:iti Poroo 
(He ro&nga atu) 

No te Tuiei te LG p nga ra <> LVpuere, i te 3 nga [mora 
te ahiahi ka kawangia te Whare-karakia Men e te Pihope 

Waiapu. Dr. Sedgwick. Kati, i te hui ki Tikitiki ki roto i 
te Whare-karakia, he Diea ata wliiriwhiri te hun<_ra na ana i 
iomo. 1 uru maua kp Rriata Nopera ki tana whiriwhiringa. 

I If tiiuiu mua e npho ana te Kaw ana-Tiana ra. a Sir 
Charles LVrguson, me Lady Alice Kergusou, me tetalii a 
raua lama ; La<ly Pom arc, me te Ai<!r-<|c-( 'amp tc Kawana. 

1 te nohoanga muri mai ko te Hon. Joseph (iordon Uoatea 
(Premier), me .Mrs. Coates, te Hon. Sir Maui rnin;iiv, Miss 
Pomare, Mrs. Sherratt. I te muri mai K. S, William, me era 
atu o nga pakeha rangatira tc Tai Rawhiti. 

Tino papal npa kupu a tc Pihopa. Vo konei ka rongo 
atu tc tauhou, ko tc tangata tuatahi Vgati Porou na ana i 

hopu tc w liakapmi... na ana hoki i man mai ki MM IWl ko 

Taumata-a-kura. Ko tc wrahi i tiria ai te purapura o tc 
whakapono ko Rangitukia, kei tc wahapu Waiapu. 
reira, aranga tonu mai tc Ingoa tc pari ha ko Waiapu, i raro 

i te Pihopa Waiapu. I muri <» te Karakia kawailga ka piki 

katoa atu 1 fa ki tc wahi c tu ana tc Kohatu Whaka* 



IjO TE KARLUE Apcrira 21, [926 

maharatanga. Na fc Kawana-Tianara i takiri te ulii. lie 
mca hattga kia rite te alma ki te hoia. Ko nga korero kei 
runga e penei ana : 

"He wlui' amaliar i:iii; -... ki ngo hoin n !\gati Pormi, 
ki u<>;.\ nic;» i hinga ki te pae <• lo pakangii 
ki 1114a mum lino hoki i ora mai." 

I whai kupn hoki tc Kawana-Tianara. 1 penei etahi 
ana kupu: "Ko nga in at u a o nga tamariki kua hinga atu ra 
ki te marae tc riri kei te hoki rat on whakaaro ki a ratou 
tamariki. Kei te kite ratou i nga wa e pakupaku ana ana 
tamariki na ratou i whakatupu. Ko nga hoa ana tamariki, 
i tipu ug*itahi nci ratou, kei te kite i nga wa i hacreere talii 
ai ratou, i takoro lain ai. Kei t< i rongo ratou i tone! ra i te 
mokemoke. Na reira, e milii ana ahau ki a koutou, mo koutou 
i kaha ki te whakaara i tcnei whakamaharatanga whakaniiharo 
ki a koutou tamariki, ki o koutou hoa aroha. Ahakoa, kua 
ngaro ratou, kei tc ora ano ia ratou. Heoi, kia man tatou ki 
ta ratou whakanro rangatira, ara, kia mahi tatou tetahi mo 
tetahi." 

lie imi atu ra ona kupu papai. No te wa i tangi ai te 
"Last Post," kore i taea te pupuri nga roimata. 

Ka muiu i konei nga mahi tenei ra. Ka tangi te pere, 
ka lmi ngn iwi katoa ki te kai. Ko nga hoia i wchea he kainga 
mo ratou ki roto i te maaki imi. Ko nga mano i haere ano 
ki te taiiia-i'iiuma, i whakamarama ake ra an e T50 tangata 
c eke ana ki runga i nga teepu i te kainga kotahi. 

K<> tc Kawana-Tianara, ko tc Pirimia, ko Pomare, ko te 
Pihopa o Waiapu, ko te Timuaki (Tiata .Jones) Kai-whakawa 
te Kooti Whenua Maori o Nin Tireni, ko te Wiremu, mema 
i te Paremata, n«;a tino manuliiri a nga hoia i ta ratou tina. 
Te alma nuku atu i te 300 nga hoia — Pakeha, Maori. Ko nga" 
apiha whakahaere ko Capt. Tutepuaki Pitt, raua ko Major 
Te Rangihiroa Buck. 

Tino papai nga kupu i pnta i roto i tenei hakari. lie inaha 
an > nga "toast" i whakahonorctia. Ka imitu tc kai, ka hoki 
tc Kawana mc tona ope ki te Matahiia, tc kainga te Wiremu. 
Ko te Pirimia raua ko tona wahine i nolio ih<>. 

No tc po ka tu he kanikani wluikanui i tc Pirimia raua 
ko tona v.ahinc. Ka kitea i ko*.ui te tokomahn tc tamariki 



Aperira 21, 1926 TE KAkERE 131 

Ngati Porou. E koa ana ta':u ngakau, nioku i kite kei 1«- 
tipu taton te Maori. Tera ano tetahi ahua i mini ai ahau ki 
nga taniariki tend iwi, ara poto ratou katoa lie tamariki 
kura anake. I tupono an ki etahi tamariki kei nga tin<> whare 
wananga to matauranga e kura ana. Kaore ter.ei mea te 
kuaretanga i a Ngati Porou. 

Tino pai te kanikani. Kaore lie ahau hianga i kin;). Te 

1 nu lioki o te Piriniia raua ko tona wahine ki te "-I;!//.." I 
karan«;atia ano nga kotiro te Arawa kia vrhakamatakitakia 
nga "Jazz" hou. Ka matakitaki ra tenei tauhou ki nga kani- 
kani o cnei ra. 10 kore rawa e man i te tangata, lieoi ano <■ 
man ai pea ma nga tangata anake kaore e niahi ana. E kore 
e mau i te tangata e nui ana te whakaaru ki 011a kan miraka, 

No te Wencrei te 17 nga ra Pepuere, ka lioki mai 
niaua ko Eriata Nopera ki te whai i te llni Parilia <> Waikato 
i in nei ki Te [Ioe-o-Tainui i te 20, 21 <> Pepuere 1926. 

No te 4 o nga haora te ata ka paheno niai niaua i Tikitiki, 
i te hawhe te 11 1" po ka tae mai tnaua ki Nepia. A.0 ake 
te i'a, te IS, ka haere maua ki Waikato. Kaore i moea te 
kainga. I te ata te Paraire i<- 1!> ka tae ki Huntley, abialii 
rawa atu ka tae ki te marae to hni. I to ata <> te Hatarei 
ka 1 imata te I liii Pariha <> Waikato. 

\.\ TE 11 A II MEHA 



He kipoata mo te Karttl 

lie ripoata mo te almatanga te ora, <> if mate te kura 
.. te M.A.C. 

R 7') nga tamariki kua tae mai kei 1.' kura i tenei tau. 

i\o te iiiii ma te tamaitj kotahi te '.'Hi i i< tau, !<• utu mo ana 

p kapuka i te tau e C2/2 ■, te moni mo n'. r ;i ngahau wlmiupooro 

era hi E2. Ilui katoa ;ii le muni «• tika ma te lamalti te 

£18, 

K te l! mga 1 . 11 in' i' ■;• (uia aroha, tae utu k 
m out ere <» te moa • n nga latua taane, matua vvaliine 1 
tamariki kua tae mai iu! kei tc u v < ' Kia marama te titiro 
ilio 11 p koutou kauohi 1 ic te « liakaaro iho ano i 
hinongaro mohio ki te 1 h ii 1 I 



132 I \i i VKi KE i.i 21, I926 

i te i:.« a ifl 1I1011 ki a i male te mate kai. Ki tc 

korc lie kai mo le koopu u le langata ka mate ia, male rawa. 
M 1 tetal i 11 r,i atu ranci moln kaa, ki te korc lie himi mo roto 
i a ia kore rawa ia < h, i l m . [e riringi ra ano lie liinu. kafahi 
a. 10 kj hacre. Ivei a koutou rami enei alma tangata e ora 
cna in.; tc I:;. a c wiia ■: Mi kn ora ai .' B aku teina, tuahino, me 
i:gj hod aroh.t, kaua tat 011 c noho i roto i te kuaretanga a te 
Aiua vvhakaakoranga. No reira ahan ka tono atu ki a koutou, 
tukua mai nga moni e mohio na koe lici utu mo to tamaiti i 
tukuu i.iai nei e koe ki tc kura. Kaore ho kai niana, e korc 
hoki e tika ko nga lamariki a ntra matua kua ulu hei tango 
kai ma to tamaiti. Ka mate enei alma tamariki mo taliau. K 
Loa ma, Play the game! Ki te waiho koia nei te ahuatanga 
i.!o 1a tat, iii kura. pa tonu inaianei tenei mate te mate whawhati 
lata c ki ana te pakelia "heart failure." Kua kore he kai. 
Ka mutu te nganga. 

1 iiiuri mai tc !lui Tan i tac aliau ki tc titiro i nga kan* • 
nga moni kud tac mai a i,i tamaiti a ia tamaitL Kitea c an e 
C148 nga moni kua tac mai, c £071 1- (» nga mea c toe ana. 
Ka kite ill ■ koutou e te Ilunga Tapu i tc mate Ko te tikanga 
tac tae mai te 61120, ka tika ai kci ohorere koutou v te Hunga 
Tapu ina whakaiiokia atu a koutou tamariki. K kore hoki c 
t-iea te pewhea, e korc hoki e ora i tc hau hei kai. I tc mea 
ko an auake tc mema tc Poari kci kowi, no reira ahau ka 
t iku i 1 n i ripoata ki Tc Karere. Khara i 1< i mea c patipati 
ana ai.au i a koutou, kaore, tuhituhi (onu ahan i te mate ka 
pa I.i te kura me tookn karangatanga he mema mi te Poari 
tc kura. Taku hiahia kia rongo whakautu i roto i Te Karere. 
NA RAWIR1 M. K AIM AT. 



-0 - 



flDabi Ibui Htawbaf. 

\a Toke Wateite i whakamaori. 
KORA S. TIXIKIXI. Tumuaki llui Atawliai. 

AKORANGA MO MEL 
NGA MEA I HOMAI I TE V/A MOHI. 

A. Kga inea whaka-ts-Atua. 

1. Ko nga r i a. c ICotahi Tek*; .1. 



Aperini 21, 1920 



1 b K.AKKRE 



(a) Te Ture Tuatahi: 'Ana tetahi atua ke atu mou ki 
luua atu i a ail." lie mea kia vvhakapaua te ngakau i runga i 
tc pono te karakia ki te atua. 1 whanau nei i runga i Te 
whakaaro pumau, i te aroha whakananukorc, me te pono te 
taea tc whakakorikori. 

(b) Te Tu re Tuarua: "!\ci hanga koe i te whakapakoko 
mou." Ko tenci wkakahaunga, he ture e arai ana i te karakia 
whakapakoko. lie maha nga whakaaturanga mo nga tamariki 
a Iharaira, i roto tc 400 tau i noho ai i Lhipa. I whakapokca 
ratou c nga karakia uga tauiwi. He tikanga hoki i tino tau 
ki to raton alma. Ko tenei wliakahaunga e whakaatu ana kia 
kaua tetahi mea arai kei vvaenganui i te Atua me te hunga e 
koropiko ana kia la. Ta una whakapakoko he whakararuraru 
i nga paanga atu a te wairua. 

(c) Te Ture Tuatoru: "Kei vvhakahuatia noatia e koe te 
in go a o Ihowa <> ion Atua; c kore hoki ;i rhowa »• mea, lie hara- 
korc tc tangata <• whakaahua noa ana i tona ingoa." lie 
karanga whakaatu tenei e tono ana kia hopohopo. E whakaatu 
ana ki te nni <> tc hara te whakanoa i 1c ingoa <» tetahi wairua 
tika. Ko < n"i ahua whakahuatanga katoa, he whakaiti, lie 
whakakino 1 tc Atua. K<> tc kohukohu, he whakahua rorirori 

;i liauraic. i. 

Te Ture Tuawlia: "Km mahara ki te ra hapati kia 
whakatapua." K rua nga tikanga «» tenei wliakahaunga, ko 
ciici "kaua c mahi," ko tc main me te whakaritc mo nga ra e 
one i main ai, 1 kotahi pa mahi mo te taha whaka-te- wairua »• 
w haka-u ana i te take v. hakamul nnga nei. 

Te Ture Tuanma : "Whakahonoretia tou 1 » .• 1 1 > • 1 me tou 
vvhaea." Ko te tuturitanga i roto i tenei vvahi <> nga Ture 
Kotahi Tekau he tono me te kupu whakaari. K rite ana t«- 
whai tikanga <» !.• tutu ki nga matua I." le mntamua i peia atu 
i i« Whenua «» (<■ Kupu Whakaai i 

i I 1; n : ' ' Kaua v pal 11 " E inia nga 1 1 

arai 1 roto i tenei wliakahaunga. I! tiaki ana i te ahua <• t<- 
noho pai a te katoa, n <• arai ana i te hara nni otu i 
katoa, te whakamal taki kon i te oranga o tetahi. K whakaiti 
alio i;i i ;i i;i i !<• i v. i raili i • W li.ik;,i»i ana 1 tc nni i 

!■• w had 1 ikanga hoki <> t< 

I <■ Ture Tn.iw hi! 1; "• l\;: 1,1 , plMTIUU " i\< 



134 TE KARERE Apci ira 21, L926 

c lata tullll ana Li te w 1 1a knit i a he tino pono hoki. 

1 1 1 ) Te Ture Tuawaru: "Kaua c tahae." Ivo t < *i h 1 whaka- 
haunga e avai ana i le tango pokanoa i tetahi mci. He tikanga 
hoki e panai ana i te tohu te rawa-koretanga ; kino atu i to 
te pinono liaci-c. He lure lioki kei runga nei e ta 1 ana te kai- 
Uakitanga nga take taonga katoa. Ko te tango kia kotalii 
hea (share) uuu <» roto i te nninga lie ahuatanga aim no te 
tahai . 

Te Ture Tuaiwa: "Kaua a whakapae teka ki 1 >u hoa." 
ko te whakiiaiii a tenei whakahaunga c arai ana kia kaua e 
takalii oati, u korero whakakinokino, a korero ranei e mama'/ 
ai tetahi. (Co tc korero teka mo era atu tangata kaore c tan 
kia karangatia tona ahuatanga he kai-tangata. Xa konei ano 
i arai ai te A1 ua i tenei m< a. 

( j i Te Ture Tekaii: " Kaua e hiahia." I te mea lie wha??a- 
liau la te ture tuatalii kia tino tika, no rcira ko ta te in ,: i 
whakamutunga kia pono ia\\a. E tika ana kia kiia peneitL . 
koia c hiahia ana. a e whakaaro ana ranei kia whiwhi take-korc 
i:i i tetahi mea, kua tahae ke i roto i tona ngakau. 

X^-.i Ture Kotalii Tekau eJiara i te mea he tino tikanga 
awliina ki te taha karakia anake, lie tikanga awhina ano lioki 
ki nga kawanatanga. 

L>. Era atu ahuatanga. 

(a) Te hoatu i te pai mo te kino. "Ki te tutaki koe ki te 
kin a tou hoa riri, ki tana kaihe ranei e atiti noa atu ana, me 
at a v. hakahoki e koe ki a ia." Ekoruhe 23: 4. 

(b) Te hoatu i tc awiiina mo 1«' kino. "Ki tc kite koe i 
te kaihe o tou hoa riri e takoto ana i raro i tana pikaunga, a. 
1.. ngakau-kore koe ki to whakaara, me ata xrliakaara tahi e 

, n.a. " Ekoruhe 23 : f>. 

( c ) Kia aroha ki tou hoa tata. "Arohaina ton hoa tata 
;• ko koe" Rewitikuha 19: IS. 

C. Mo te korero pukp"_ka. 

(a) \'i;i wli-i korero a Mohi e mohiotia ana kei tc rite 
tonu ki ii" ■. wliai korero a nga tangata matauranga Roma me 
Karilu, ara ki nga whai korero a Teniotini me Hihero. Nga 
tauira Tiuteronomi !) me tc 28 >. 

(I)) Nga Waiata a Rawiri, ko tc 23 mo tc 24 nga mea e 
tino paingia ana. 



Apcrira 21 1 926 TK KARERE 1 J5 

(c) Nga waiata me nga whakatauki a lloromona e tino 
kiia ana he pukapuka whai matauranga. 

(d) Te pukapuka a Hopa, kiia ana. "kaorc lie pukapuka 
whiriwhiri pai atn i roto i tc ao nga pukapuka." 

(e) Nga korero mo Hutu raua ko Ehetere, kci te riterite 
ki nga korero nga pukapuka c kitea ana. 

D. Mo nga korero o nehe. 

(a) Ko te pukapuka nui atu nga pukapuka tr.pu o nehe 
e mohiotis ana a c whakamihi ana lioki tc ao 1110 te nui e era 
korero, a pukapuka hoki he putake hoki no nga whakamara* 
matanga me nga whakaaturanga ko te Paipera Tawliito, e 
tut um ana ko tetahi o nga hua o te Wa Molii. 

E. Nga painga ki te tangata. 

(a) He whakaaturanga whakahe i to oranga te iwi 
mea ana ko te pono ki te Atua te huarahi e piki ai, a ko tc 
tuku ilio ki te hara lie taki mai i te whakaraunga. 

(h) Ko tc whakakahanga i ikm iwi whaka-te-nota i ma 
roto i tc huin.ua nga toto Hiperu. 

(c) Te whakaputanga mai nga wahine tokorua i ora, c 
lino paingia una. 

1. Te whaen nana te poropiti nui atn i whanau mai. 

•J. Te what ;i a tc Tama :i i< Atua. 

NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE HEI WHAKAUTUNGA. 

1. Ilomai he tauira te whakapau katoa <> te ngakau ki 
te korokipo ki te Atua, tc whakaatu i roto tc Turc Tuatahi. 

•J. Homai he tino whakaaturanga i riro nga tamariki a 
lharaira i nga karakia whakapakoko nga Ihipiana. 

:;. lie aha ic mea kua pti tc whakaatu ki te ao i runga 
i tc tikanga tc whakahua poke .' 

4. Ko a wai in.ihi «• malii <■ tatou i roto i nga ra c linol 

'). Whakaaturia ko tc tuku kia tutu nga tamariki lie 
tino tikr.ngu whakav hiu ki ;i ratou 

G, Korero whakaritcritc i !«• hara tc patu whakacnecne 
i poto ' cnei ra. 

7. Korero \ kakariterite, ko tc turc tuaono «• whakaatu 

WaWC ana nm tc tiaki i I ora. Ko tc tnawhiln «• uliakaaln ana 

mo te oranga 1 1 ika ai kia 1 iakina. 

Whakaaturia k<» !«• ni.-ihi <• h 'ala ana : iua ko te tUff 



136 IE KAKKKK AprriKi 21. 

tuawaru. 

9. Elonoa te lure tuaina ki tc korero a bincngaro, "Ko te 
whakahua i nga korero katoa e rongo ai tatou kei raro rawa 
atu i tc vvlmkaaro rangatira." 

. •• lu. Ko tohea i<' wa tahac o 1<- tangata a kaore c man atu 
i tetahi mca .' 

11. Whakaatuna ko tc tnana hoatn i tc pai tnc tc kino 
o nga Karaitiana, rac tc tnahi pai ki tc liunga e kino mai ana 
ki a koutou, me tc aroha Jvi ton hoa lata ano ko ko koc, e tika 
ana kia wfhakaritea i tc Wa o Mohi. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 

NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

m ANGANGA *E HAHI. 

Ko tc Halii a Inn FCaraiti o nga Ra o Mm ri \<i, le tikanga 
lino tika atu o tona vvhakatunga i ninga i tc ao i tcnci wa. 
A. Whakahokinga mai o te Tohungatanga. 

1. Tc Tohungatanga <> Arnna. 
ia' \ T ga Uikona. 

( b) \ T ga Kai-\Vhakaako. 

(c) Nga Piriti. 

id) I lc nialii vvhakaritc ma tcnci ma tcnci, 

2. Tc Tohungatanga o Merckihercke. 
i a ) Nga Apoiora! 

(I>) Nga IVtcrjaka, ara Kai-lvai'w ljau. 
(c) Nga Tohunga Xui illai L'iriti). 
i«lj Nga Wliim Tckaiu 
c ) Nga K;ium;itua. 

F) lie malti \v;bakariic ma tcnci ma tciKii. 
B. Na te mana o te Tohungatanga i whakaturia ai ano te 
Ilahi o Ihu Karaiti. 

1. Xotialica i whakaturia, | I. 

2. I whakaturia ki lica. 

3. Xa wai i whakatu. 

C. Nga tino mana whakahaere o te Hahi. 

J,. Ko tc Tumuakitanga Tuatahi. 

2. Ko t«' Runanga o nga Ap.otoro. 

•'). Ko tc Petcriaka Whakahaere. (Kai-manaaki.) 

-I. Ko uga Tumuaki Tuatahi e Whitu o nga Whitu Tckau. 



Aperira 21, 1926 te karere 137 

5. Ko tc Pihopa AVhakahaere (Tino Pihqpa.) 

(». Ko nga mahi whakarite ma tenei ma tenoi. 

D. Nga Kai Whakalrtere te Takiwa. 

1. Ko to Takiwa. 

(a) Ko tc Tumuaki Takiwa. (10 Ko to Ruminga Xui. 
(c) Ko nga Peteriaka Takiwa. (d) Nga malii ma tenei ma 
tend. 

2. Ko te Peka. 

(a) Ko te Pihvpatanga. {)>) Nga Piriti. (e) Xga Kai 
Whakaako. (d) Nga Rikona. (0) Nga mahi ma tenei ma 
tenei. 

D. Nga tikanga awhina whakahaere. 

1. Ko t<- II ui Atauhai. 

2. Ko !c Kura llapati. 

.'{. Ko nun Uopu tc Miutara. 

4. Ko te Paraimere. ijiopu tamaiiki.) 



Ta te Manawa Akoranga ki a Tatou mo ietahi 
Ture a te Atua 

Improvement Era, Febrmry 1926, na Harold L.Snow. 

Na Kru 1 . Cooler i wnakamaori< 

"Rapa-tapa, rapa-tapa, rapa-tapa," tc ngaangaa a te 
manawa ora ia tane, wahine, tamaiti lioki he tinana ora nei 
o raton, i mnga i te whenua, 

II ■ iti rawa tc whakaaro t<- tungata mo tc mate c pa ki 
a ia ina tu tc mahi a tenei inihini, ahakoa mo tc v. a potO, tenei 
mihini mnpti te tinana, e pupuri nei i te oranga tc tangata. 

(>:ira v 1:1:1 1 j i ana tc manawa ki tc mapu i mnga i nga 
almatangn c pa una ki a ia. Tatou ka titiro i nga tikanga •• u 
tonu ;:i tana mahi. Me tana hoki e tango ana hei whakantu 
1. 10 tana mahi. 

Tuatahi, ko it" a nei O h.iahia ana tc manawa mo tana 

mahi; kia whiwlii mil tonu ia i tc toto lici mapunga. Tuarun 
kia kore lie nawe, kia kore hoki pangia e te mate; 1 ko tc 
inatoru, ko te tikanga tino nni hoki; mo whiwhi tonu ta 
manawa, hei oranga mo 011a wahi akc lv i to wahi whakat 
n n",i toto katon i puta mai i roto i ;i in 



i; v S TE KARERE Aperira 21, 1920 

I te putanga atu te toto i te manawa, kia korereiia ki 
nga wahi katoa te tinana kia whangaia ana wahi ki te kai 
v hua mai ana i roto i te toto, ki te okiliana lioki (oxygen), 
tera nga kcrere e rua e hopu mai ana i te walii whakatckau 
n if toio. ka korcretia atu ano ki nga pareparc te manawa 
whangai ai. 

1 etahi wa ka pangia tcnei tnapu maihara e to male ka 
kuiti liaere nga ara toto. Ka hold iho hoki i te wahi whaka- 
tckau nga toto e koreretia ana he whangai i nga niaihara te 
manawa. K at a hi ka ngoikorc liaere to manawa, ki te liiahia 
te tinana kia omaoma. Kia piki ranei i te ara what a ki te 
porou runga, heoi kua kore e kaha, kua ngoikore kc tenei 
niihini ki te mapu i nga toto whakakaha ki te tinana. 

I tino rite tatou ki te manawa, e malii ana i ia ra, i ia ra, 
i ia marama, i ia niarama ki te v> hakapukai oranga mo tatou 
ko a tatou tamariki. Ko te Kai llomai i nga mea katoa, kci 
te liiahia kia lioatu e tatou te wahi whakatekau nga hua 
a tatou main. Ki te kore tatou e pangia c te mate hopo. Ki te 
kore hoki e rite atu ki nga huarahi toto kua kuiti; kua pangia 
ranei e te mate. K tika ana tatou kia titiro whakainua, ki nga 
manaakitanga hohonu c ahu mai ana i te "Manawa Nui 
Rawa," te putaki mai nga mea pai katoa e tika nci kia 
whiwhi tatou. 

Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti 

HE KAUWHAU NA TETAH1 O NGA APOTORO 

Improvement Era January I9?6 Na Robert Turnbull i whakam: ori. 

Ki te Etita, tena koe. I korero an i tera rangi atu ra i 
te kauhau i kauhautia ai e tetehi nga Apotoro te Tekau 
ma Rua i te liui nui i tu ki te Pa Tote hei whakanui mo te 
pahemotanga te 50 tau mai ano i te timatanga te Miutara. 

Ko te kauhau nei i kauhautia e Krata Orihana V. Witini 
te Tekau ma Rua i te 7 o nga ra Hune 1925. Kci to mohio 
an ka pai nga kai-korero te Karere ki te korero i ana 
korero. 

I korerotia hoki e te kaumatua nei e Witini te pakanga 

nui c pakanga mai nei i roto i te nuinga n<ra hani o Amerika. 

Kci te pakanga I < Id ngj rainita te hahi te Pcreliipatiriana 

i ' "■ ■• ; 1. v >" ' !:"! • : *?. 1 *' hi tnua, I: ) nga tangata kaorft 



Aperira 21 1 926 TE KARERK 1 39 

e whakapono ana i whanau mai a te Karaiti i roto i to wahine 
puhi, a kaore ano hoki whakapono i mahi merekara te 
Karaiti i roto i nga tangata, e tika ana kia hatcpoa atu i te 
Iiahi. 1] ki ana tenei talia ko nga minita e kore e whakapono 
ki te atuatanga te Karaiti me te pono Ana mahi nierekara 
lea whakakorea atn raton i a ratou mahi minita. 

Kci te korero tetehi taha kaore ratou <■ whakapono i 
whanau mai a te Karaiti i rotu i te ])iilii, a kaore hoki i mahi 
mcrekara. Kaore e pai kia akiakina e nga minitia Pcrchipati- 
riana o raton iwi kia whakapono ki nga mea lie. Ko end 
wahanga e rua e mahi ana kia pnta tetehi ki waho o te hahi. 
Ko te wahanga tuatoru e ki ana ko te hahi te mea nui. R 
inca ana ratou he pai rawa me mutu te ngangare, engari ko 
to 1110a pai mo liari ki to kooti o le hahi kia kit en ai ko tewhea 
te mea tika. 

E mea ana a Witini kei le koa tona ngakau kaore e 
ngangare ana te Elunga Tapu nga Ra Muri Nei. Kei te 
whakapono katoa tatou i whanau mai a lira Karaiti i tc 
wahine puhi, a i mahi mcrekara hoki. I tohungia atu e Witini 
Id a ratou te kara nui tc Miutara, i tuhituhia nei ki runga 
te whakatauki to Miutara nei, "K tu ana matou i runga i te 
kotahitanga kia whai whakaaturanga ia tangata matou ki 
1 • Atuatanga lliu Karaiti. M 

I] ki ana i;i koialii anake to huarahi e mohiotia ai 
c tatou ko tc Karaiti he tama na tc Atua. 10 kore tatou 
e tin > mohio ma te korero pukapuka anake, a c kore hoki 
tatou c tin;) moliio ki te ha ere ki nga kura; a e kore ano hoki 
tatou c tino mohio In- tama a te Karaiti na te Atua i roto i 
rtohi a 1 u tangata. 

Ko to ai.i anake <• mohio ai tatOU, C kite ai tatou, ma tc 

ano c whakaatu mai ki a tatou. Ko tenei matauranga 
c liomai ana e 1'' Aiua ki etehi o tatou i roto i t<' moemoea, i tc 
whakakitcngj ranei. Ivatahi tatou ka mohio. 

Ka mea a Ihu ki tetehi Ana akonga nui, "Ko v\ .»i an ki 
;i koe!" Ka whakahokia e Pita. "Ko tc Karaiti koe, k< 

tama a tc Aiua or;i." Katahi a lliu ka mc;i. "Ka koa ko 

llaimona Parahona : chara hoki i '<• kikokiko, i tc toto, nana 

tenei i hura U 1 e koe, engari na loku Mania i t«' rangi " I ;i 

Maliu I.",: 111 IT 



140 



1 E KAKERK 



Api i ira 21 n 20 



X.i ivirn n Pita i moi.io ai- na i< i whakakifpiigii, a lt»ra 

ki tatou i mohio ai ki to uiahi tatou i njra malii v moa ana 

Atua kia rualiia e tatou. Koto u hakaaturanga tino nui e 

•o mai i a tatou ko to V/airua Tapu !<• Kai Whakamarie i 

ci ai to. Kai Whakaora ki Ana akoaga, hoi whakamahara i a 

atou ki njra inea kna paliomo, a ki nga moa hoki i i.r..a i a 

atov.. 

(Tar!a te roanga) 



Ko nga Hokinga atu ki Hiona 




Ko Erata A. Kiiti llarihana 



A peri la 21, I 926 



TE KAKI RE 



141 



Ko Erata A. KEED HALVERSON (A. Riiti Harihana) 
c> Spanish Fork, Utah. I lai mai a ia ki Akarar.a i te 90 n^ r a 
ra o Mane i te tau IQ22 a i \\\ akaritea ki te Kareti ki te mahi 
kai-wiiakaako. J te 12 o n^a ra o Oketopa, K22 ka nukuhia 
atu ki te takiwa o Haur. ki, a whakaritea ana hei tumuaki mo 
taua takiwa i te 1 o n*ja ra o Mei, 1923. I te hokinga atuo 
Angiha T. Raiti i te 120 Mei ,1925, i whakaritea ko ia te kai- 
whakahaere <> te Mih; 1 a i taua w a tai mai ki te taenia mai 
o te tumuaki hou o Tu-nuaki Hoani 1 1. I inikini, i te 10 o nga 
ra o Akuhata. 1925, katahi I a meinga ia te ho 1 haere a te Ti- 
nikim i a ia e tuiio 1 ac rt ai a i 1 •. a \ a hi a te Mil ana. 1 te 
lb o n^H ra o Oketora, 1925, ka whakaritta a Harihana 
hei Tun auk i n.o te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te \} nga ra 
Aperira ka tukua ho.'ioretia kia hoki am kr toiia kainga. 








1 Id, r CI renre I . R;i«n 1 



1 Irvin \V Evi 



KoErata < l\l I \< I I RASMUSSEN (Rahimahana) 
( >g<Jen, U ah. I 1. « mai a ia i \v 20 o nga ra o I lune 1 
a ka whakaritea ki te takiwa oWaikato. I re 3 o nga ra P 

puce- I02p ka nukuhia aln ki te takJWil n II | 

1 1 ".1 ra \p< rirn, 1925, Ka nukuhia ano ki tc takiwa Haki 



142 



1 K KARERE 



Aperira 21, 1920 



Pei. I te 28 nga ra Kune, 1925, i whakaritea a Rahimahana 
hei I umuaki mo te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te 16 o nga ra o 
Oketopa ka nukuhia atu hei Tumuaki mote takiwa oTarana- 
ki. I tukua honoretia atu i te 1 3 o nga rn o Aptr.ra, 1925. 

Ko Erata IRVIN W. EYRE (Erata Ea) Minersv.lle, Ut- 
ah. I tae mai a ia i te 20 o nga ra o llurae, 1923, a ka whaka- 
ritea ki te takiwa o VVhangarei. 1 te 17 o nga ra o Hurae, 

1924. ka nukuhia atu ki te takiva o Mania, a whakaritea ana 
hei Tumuaki mo ta.ua takiwa i ie 17 o nga ra o Akuhr.ta, 1924. 
I te 23 o nga ra o Oketopa, 1024, ka meiega a Ea hei kauma- 
tua haereere mo te takiwa o Ma hi a, a i te >2 o nga raoHunc, 

1925, ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa Wairarapa. Whakaritea 
ana ko ia te Tumuaki o Wairarapa i te 90 nga ra o Hepete- 
ma, 1925, a i te 130 nga ra o Aperira, 1926, ka tukua hono- 
retia kia hoki atu ki H it 11a. 




Ko Erata THOMAS W. HICKMAN (Hikimana) o Og- 

ilen, Utah. I tae mai ia i te 27 o nga ra o Tihema, 1923, a 
whakaritea ana ki te Kareti ki te M. A. C. I a ia e mahi ana 
i te Kareti ko ia h >ki te kai-whakahaere o te mahi wluitu po- 
oro. I te 6 o ng 1 ra o Oketopa, T924, ka nukuhia atu ia ki 
Wairarapa mahi ai, a i te 3 o ng 1 ra o Hune, 1925, nukuhia 
mai a no ki te Kareti. I te 8 o nga ra o Oketopa, 1 925, ka 
whakaritea a Hikimana hei Tumuaki mo te takiwa pakeha o 
Manawatu, a i te 130 nga ra o Aperira, 1 926, ka tukua hono- 
retia atu. 






Aperira 2[, 1926 TE KARERE 



He Panui 

Ki te Etita, Tena koe. Man e panui atu ki te HungaTapu, 
taku pukapuka ''Articles of Faith" i ngaro i te Hui Tau o Nu- 
haka. E rua nga ingoa kei roto; Atawiki Wiapo, Grace Hara- 
tua. Kua mate te kotiro nana i homai ki au he "keep sake''. 
Mehemea kua kitea me tuku mai ki te M. A. C, Hastings, H.B. 

E whakataikiu atu ana au. Na Grace Haratua 



HUI PARIHA 
te takiwa Haki Pei, ka tu ki 

TAHORAITI, TANIWAKA, 

a te 1, mete 2 nga ra 

MEI, 1926. 

(He powhiri tenei.) 

No reira haere mai e te iwi. 

Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai! 



I E KARERE 



Aperira 21, 1920 



KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOXONCA 



Ko enei et ihi o nga pukapuk;i e takoto ana kci te tari o te Miliaria hei ro- 
konga ki nga niea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga una e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72. Auckland. 
STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS 
Teachers Bibles, with^fceady Reference, Leathi 
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather 

Book of Mormon, Cloth 

M " " , Halt' Leather 

•' " " , Leather 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 

" ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 
MA03I BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 

" " " , Leather 

Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 

Me Nga tiimene, Leather 3 in I II 



2 & 



1 0-0 & 



25-0 

II 

;<> 
90 
150 
2-0 

9-u 

2 
3-6 
1-9 
-6 
5-0 
15-0 

5-J 

150 
1 

4-0 
5-0 
?6 
4-6 



" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 

u " " , Leather 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara l.'tu Nui, Cloth 

u 1, u it «< « u^ L ea t| lL . r 

Combination of A,B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 
S JNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Gospel 

What Jesus Taught 

Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 

SONG BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 

11 " " , Leather 

Deseret Song Books, Cloth 

" " • " , Leather 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 

DOCTRINAL AND REF£RENC£ WORKS 
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmuge 
Vitality of Mormonism 
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 
Restoration of the Gospel, IJ idtsoe 
Joseph Smith's Teachings 
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 
Essentials in Church History, Smith 
Bible Ready Reference 
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Morris 6-0 



6 o 
30 
60 
3-o 

8-3 

40 
6-0 
40 
3-6 
46 
8-9 
6-9 
2-0 



KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA) TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A C. KORONCATA. MAS TINGS. M. P. 




arotn> 



j^ T 3^£iE£i££ZE^:i0^iO^ ^L^.i&^s-x^ '■_ 



Wuhanga XX Mei26, 1926 Numa V 



KOREROTANGA 




Ko tc Kmama Rikona Tuaiahi Niu Tim 






"C& KftR£R&" 



WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 



Kl TE ETITA 

He Marenatanga 161 

Ko te Hui Nui a Ngati Porou 165 

Kote Matenga o Metapere Matai 161 

ko te Matenga Tepora Kuru 102 

Ko teTakanga Atu teRongopai 163 

KO NCA RONCO KORERO 

He Ripoata no tc M.A.C. 171 

KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 

E Ono nga Take mo tc \vh;ik itekau 174 

Kote Merekara o nga Karoro 177 

Te Atuatanga o te Kara it i 108 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 158 

MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Concert Recitation 144 

Intermediate Department 151 

Korero a Ngakau 1 44 

Maori Theological 144 

Pakeha Theological 147 

Postlude 143 

Prelude 143 

Primary Department 154 

Sacrament Gem L43 

NA TE ETITA 

He Mihi 1/4 

Ripoata Hui Tau 172 




KSHW 



WaHANGA 20 WENEREI. MEI 26. 1926. NAMA 5 

Mazri w«rkullural Ccllcge Hastings, H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Alihana o Niu Tireni, 

Halii o ihu karaiti o te hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri ISei. 

Tukua juai o kuutou reta ki te Etita c Te Karcre, M.A.C., Hastings. 

Ho l(! ut u mo TE KARERE i to tau e rima herein (.">/-). 

KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. 

file nutua utu mo tcu pcpa kc v?.ii\ hi ai. 

J. 11. Tinikini, Tuniuaki Mtkana 
Mariana K. Ewatana, lJita. Tiala Witihua, hiita Hoa Auhina. 

ho U> Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Mcha 

Ko nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). 
Wiremu A. Koura Eru T. Kupa 



MAHI KURA HAPATI. 
Prelude. 



After Cowex. 



Eiiymnj] 



SACRAMENT GEM FOR JUNE, 1920 
■ in memory of I he broken Mesh 

We eat the broken bread ; 
And witness with the cup afresh, 
Our faith in < Ihrist, our Read. ' 
Postlude. 

Soft !>ft itop 



^iplii^l 



c l I : [I 



144 TE KAIM.KK Mei :6, l<;-6 



tOMCERT RECITATION I OR JUNE, 1926. 

(The Beatitudes. Matt. Chapter 5, Verses .'I to 7.) 
Blessed are the poor in spirit; for thoir's is the kingdom 
of heaven. 

Blessed are they thai mourn: for they shall be comforted. 
Blessed are (he meek: tor they shall ii»heri1 the earth 
Blessed arc they which do liungcr and thirsl after righteous- 
: for they shall be filled. 
Blessed are the merciful: for tlurs shall obtain mercy. 



KOK.-RO A NGaKaU MO HUNE, 1926. 

ITGA TAKE MO TE KOA. I a Matiu, 5: 3-7. 

"Ka koa tc hunga lie fawa-korc nci tc wairua: n > raton 
Iioki te rangatiratanga o tc rangi. 

"Ka koa te hunga c tangi ana: ka whakamarietia lioki 
ratou. 

"Ka koa !;• hunga rigakau inaahaki: ka riro hoki i a ratou 
tc whenua. 

"Ka koa 1c liunga o hiakai ana. c liiainu ana, ki tc tika: 
c makona Iioki ratou. 

"Ka koa te liunga tohu tangata: c tohungia li >ki ratou." 



MAORI THEOLOGICAL 



Ratapu tuatahi, tttine 6, 1920. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. 
Na Tia/;a W. Witchira i whakamaori. 
Putakc: Ko nga vvhakahauhau a tc tauira i v.hakalako- 
toi i;> ii ti e Ehu hei mahi ma tatou. 

Ta Whakaatu: I a Maka 1 : 12 ; ia liuka, 4: 1; i a Matiu, 

4:1. 

Tc Wa: I muri tat a mai o te iriiiinga. 
Te Wahi: I te'Koraha. 

Te Take Nui: Ka tukua ilio <• tc Atu Ana manaakitanga 
ki runga i te liunga e \vh tkaatu ana i o ratou hiahia ki nga mca 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE 145 

wairua ma runga i tc taonga-karc tc kikokiko. 

"Mc i reira ka arahina a Ihu e tc Wairua ki tc Koraha, Ida 
whakamataiitauria c tc rcwera." 

A l:a </': a llm tc iriiri ka liacrc In ki tc koraha, a mc ti> 
n >!.o ;;;;'::: mo 1;- rrha tcliau nga .a mc nga po. E korc nga 
karaipiturc v mca he a!. a Tana mahi, cngari ka wbakaarotia 
c tatou he hiahia Nona kia korc atu la i nga tangata, Ida korcro 
marie ai la ki Tona Matua. lie nui Ana patai ki te Matua. 
phara hold la i tc tamariki Liaiaaei. Kua mohio la inaiauei 
he mahi nui Tana hoi mahi; a ka hiahia [a kia moliio la ki 
i! m whakaaro Tona Matua me pehea tc mahi. 

K alici ai la tc korero ki tc Matua, ka kite la me whalra- 
kahore e la nga hiahia kikokiko. 

Kahorc la i vvhakaatu ki a tatou he aha nga mca a tona 
Matua i korcro ai ki a la, cngari kci te mohio tatou ahakoa he 
aha ana m< a, i whakakaha i a la kia u ki 1c pono, 1c take 
kahorc la i ruarua mai i reira taca noatia Tona ripekatanga. 

lie aha nga mahi i whakatakotoria mo tatou i tenci tauira ? 

Koia tenci 1c Ra Noho Puku. 1 noho puku ano tatou i 
tenci ata, tera ranci kci te ngoikore te kikokiko? Kua noho 
puku 110a ilio ranci tatou, a kua noho puku ranci mc tc inoi? 
L] lika ana tatou mc korcro ki to tatou Matua, mcitc noho puku 
tatou, kia mohio ai he aim 1c mca e hiahia ana la kia mahia c 
laion. Mc inoi atu tatou ki a !a kia whakakabangia tatou ki te 
la i nga whakamatautauranga, mc tc homai i 1c hinengaro kalia 
po.io o te Lioilgo-pai, mc tc auhina i a lalou id te lu i 1c 
rcwera ma roto i :i tatou mahi pai. B tika ana tc moni c toe 
mai nci i a lalou i runga i to laiou korc nga <• kai me hoatu ki 
te tumuaki te peka, mc penci hold ka tapiritia mai nga mana- 
akitanga. 

Mcatia ngo mema o tc karaihe Ida korcro i nga manaaki- 
tanga kua riro mai ma roto i te noho puku, he mca pchca tc 
arahi i ;i rntou hi tc pono, tc hunga pangin e tc male i whakao- 
i ,, 'ii in !•• Wairun ' m i ta n i ! ni hi ;i raton, ;i ' la ivliaka- 
■ Li'ictia raloii i nj?.i sva !■■ tiilmahatauga, ma roto katoa i te 
ii iho puku. 

Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti 

Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou 
A',; WitemuC Kaarau&koTokelVatim iwhakaritt 



14> l u KARERfc Mei 26 i« 26 

Ratapu t inrtia, liuie 13, I ( J2(i. 

AKORANGA 14. 

"Te Tuatahi o ta Pa:ra Mahi Mihana Hicrc." Tg roanga atu 

1. Te tutakitanga ano o Paora raua ko Panapa. 

Ka haerc atu a Panapa i Anatioka ki Tarahu ki te 
whakatau i a Paoia. Main 11 : L9-25. 

(b) Kotahi tan i pau i a ia ki Anatioka. Malii 11 : 25-26. 

(c) I matua Luaina nga akonga lie Karaitiana Ki 
Anatioka. 

(d) [va hacre a Paora raua ko Panapa ki lliruharama, 
he raea mau raw a ma nga teina i Hu:aa. Mahi 11 : 
27.-30. 

2. Tc hacrenga a Paora ki Anatioka me [Iiria. 

(a) Ka karangatia a Panapa raua ko Paora. .Mahi 13; 
L-3. 

(b) He karangatanga c te Atua pera me Arona. Tiroliia 
Hiperu 5 : 4. 

(c) Te tiikunga atu o nga kai-kauwhau tuarua. Main 
13: 3; Mahi 6: 6. 

Whakamarania : Whakamahia nga mapi o te Paipera ki te 
l.ica e taea ana, hei whakaatu i nga haereerenga o nga kai- 
kauwhau. 

Ratapu tnatoru, Huns 20, 1926 

AKORANGA 15. 

' ' Tuatahi o ta Pac ra Ivlahi Mihana H iere. " Te roa r. ga atu. 

1. 1 te motu o Kaipcru. 

(a) I\ci Llarami e kauwhau ana i nga whare karakia. 
Mahi 13; 4-5. 

(b) Nga mca i tupono i Papaho. 

1. Te tutakitanga ki te poropiti teka. Mahi 13: (!. 

2. Te whakatahuritanga o [Icrekiu Paora — he 

tangata whai ingoa, c kiia ana nona te putake 
mai o te ingoa o Paora. 

3. Te whakahuatanga tuatahi o tetalii o nga ingoa 

o Ilanra. Malii 13: 9. 

4. Te whakakiteatunga o te mana o tc Atua. Main 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARFRE 147 

13: 9-12. Whakaritea ki a Aranii 30: 37-56. 
2. Ki Percka i Pamapuria. 

(a) Jui wchcwchc nga wliakaaro Paora raua ko Hoani, 
;:,.i Maka. Nga IMahi 13: 13; Mahi 15: 37-38. 

(}>) Ka haere atu a Hoani ara a Maka ki Hiruliaraina. 

Malii 13: 13. 

Whakamarama : Kaorc i te ruarama te take te wehewc- 

henga. Ki te wliakaaro akc, kaore a .Maka i tino pai ki ta tc 

wliakaaro Paora i kite ai te whanuitanga te mahi i Aliia 

Maina (Asia Minor). 

Ratapu tuawha, Hune ?7, 1926 

AKORANGA 16. 

"Taatahi fct Paora Mahi Mihana Haere." Te roanga atu. 

1. Kei Anatioka i Pihiria. (Tirohia te mapi.) 

(a). Ta Paora kauwhau ki nga Hurai me te hnnga <> 
wehe ana ki te Atua. Mahi 13: 14-41. 

(b) Ka whakakahoretia ta raua e nga Hurai, ka tahuri 
atu raua ki nga tauiwi. Mahi L3: 42-49; Mahi 28: 28; 
Ihaia 4!); G. 

(e) Ka lu ano nga whakatoinga — ka haere atu raua i 
Anatioka. 
(d) Kei roto i te wharc karakia i Lkoniunfa. Mahi 14: 1-6. 

2. A Paora raua ko Pauapa kei Raihitara. Mahi 14; 6-7. 

(a) Ka wlmkaorangia tctahi tangata kopa Paora. 

Mahi 14; 8-10; Whakaritea ki a :\ Xiwhai 17: 7-!). 
(I)) Ka whakapono nga tangata, ka mea he Atua raua. 

Mahi 14: IMS. 
(<•) Ka akina a I'anra ki te kohalu. Mahi 14: 19-20, me 

Nga Mahi !): KI; \Y ha ka ril ca ki a Araini 11:7. 

::. I Berepc ki Anatioka i lliria, Mahi 14: 20-28, 



PAKKIIA TMLOLOvilCAL 

"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" 

First Sunday, .1 u 11 c 6, I92G. 

Uniform I ast Day lesson 

The example of Jesus: what ii hi. Is us do. 



150 l K kakkki-; Mei l6, k,-6 

Question for Ten.hers. 

1. I > i v I [he later lives of Jacob and Esau justify the ucin us 
through which Jacob received the greater blessings? 

2. Did Jacob have a faith in (Jod thai Esau did not I Did 
he have a judgmenl of the real life values thai Esau did no, .' 

Third Sunday, Jane 20, 1926. 
Lesson 13. Jacob as Father and Patriarch. 

Texi • Ucnesis, Chapter 28. 

Objective: To show that man reaches his highest development 
through faith in and service to God. 

Sui>p!ementary Licfercnccs: Same as in previous lesson. 
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
I. Jacob leaves home. 

1. I lis journey down to llaran. 

2. His vision of the ladder. 

II. Jacob's service of Laban, his uncle. Covering a period of 
'10 years. 
IN. Jacob's return home. 

1. J I is preparation to meet Esau. 

2. 1 1 is encounter with the angel. 
.*). lie enters the promised land. 

IV. Jacob's family blessings. 

1. Twelve sons. 

2. His journey to Egypt. 

3. He succeeded to all the blessings of Abraham. 
Jacob was a plain man, patient, thoughtful, shrewd, and 

far-seeing, lie was also gentle, affectionate and home loving, 
Geikie. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Point mil the greal strength of Jaeohalong three lines. 

2. Considering that Jacob was really called to his great 
mission the night of his encounter with the angel -how many 
years of preparation had lie had? 

lourth Sunday, June 27, 1926 
Lesson 14. Joseph, as a Youth end Young Man. 

Tcx1 : (:<;.<• .i ;, Chapters .7 :0. 



Mei 26, 1920 TE KARHRE 1 5 1 

Objective: To show how faiih in God sustains us in times 
ot greatest trials and icmpialions. 

Supplementary References: References as given. 
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
[. Joseph, son of Jacob and Rachel. 

1. Born at Haran, Mesopotamia. 

2. Mother died at time of birth of liis brother Benjamin. 
:). Jacob particularly I'ond of these two boys. 

I i. Joseph as a Youth. 

1. A handsome and promising youth. 

2. As a youlh he was given knowledge of his leadership, 
bul he retained his innocence and humility. 

-\. His duties as a youth at home. 
III. Joseph sold ami carried into Egypt. 

1. The people buying him dcsccndcnts of Ishmael, the half 
brolher of his grandfather. 

2. Sold to Potiphar in Egypt. 

o. Tr;iiJspJa"ited from a simp!" pastorial lii'e to a complex 
I if. 1 with its slaves, wine, immense riches ami idol go is. 

4. Grew in a firm reliance upon God. 

5. His power to overcome the temptation of Potiphar \s 
wife. 

(I. The result. 

a. His life in prison. 
I). His liiiiil release. 

Ones'; ions for Teachers. 

1. Arc the purposes of God always apparent 10 his chil- 
dren I I live examples. 

2. Docs a righteous life inspire respect even in the unrig'ir- 



l\T! UMI l)UTI |)| p\im;>ii \| 
mi: BOOK OF MORMON" 

I i»->i Sunday, ■• 111 • -. * 926 
l uiioi m 1 OSt Da) I t*SOfl 

Same ,-s Pakeha Theological Class. Sec page M7 

Teaehi 

Rj nkilful (pic I ioninfl j on w .11 !•«■ uhle in have j our 1 hi 



1 E K UtERE Mei 26, I 

bc€ the fine distinctions between the temptations of Jesus 

ppcals which Satan made to Him. In each instant- ■ 
hi in class gel tlie thoughl thai Ihey, too, arc tempted, along, 
i.e.. their vanity, love of power, greed, disloyalty, appetites 
etc. Have them point out the big value of their ability i<> resist 
temptation! How can Ihey acquire thai ability? How docs 
attendance at Sunday School contribu e to (heir power <>!* re- 
sisting temptation Let them show how the many activities and 
requirements in the Church all help to s rengthen the individual 
to rise above temptation. Probably some may eare to recite in- 
cidents wherein they were tempted, and over, ome the temp!ations. 

Second Sunday, Jiue 13, 1926 
Lesson 12. Alma and His People. 

i : Mosiah, thrptera 18, 23, 21. 
Objective: To teach thai though "the Lord sccth fit to 
< Ii.is en His people . . . nevertheless whosoever putteth his 
Irusl in him shall be lined up at tha hist day." (Mosiah 23:21, 
22.) 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
General assignment of the texl to all tli? pupils. 
Special assignment : 

(a) Organisation of the Church (Mosiah 18:1-18.) 
(l)i Alma's teachings. (Mosiah 18:18-29.) 

(c) Peace in the land of Helam. (Mosirh 23:1-18.) 

(d) Trouble with the Lamanites. (Mosiah 23:19-30.) 
(c) In bondaj e. (Mosiah 24:1-9.) 

(f) Relief through prayer. (Mosiah 24:10-25.) 

(g) Noah's wicked acts bring th i ir own reward. (Mosiah 
1!) h chapter. ) 

Note: Bach pf the above stor'cs given as special assign- 
ments sh add be briefly told by the pupils, allowing about live 
minutes for each, in which time die mosl interesting points can 
be covered, with a view oi' rousing a desire on the part of all 
the pupils 'o read them in full. 

Have class memorize Mosiah 18:C0; 24:11, 12, 13. 

1. Mention the qualities of true leadership in Alma. 

2. show the fulfilment of a part of the prophecies of 
Abinadi in the experience., of Alma and his people. 



Mei 26, 1926 Tli KARERK [53 

Third Sunday, June 20, 1926 
Lesson 13. Limlri and People Blessed of the Lord. 

Text : Uoyiah 20th, 21st, 22nd and 25th chapters. 

Obj< cLive: To leach Lha1 mighty prayer brings forth blessings 
from the Lord. 

Supplementary References: Hebrews, 11th Chapter. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: The whole 
text to be assigned for reading; 

Special assignments: 

1. Triable broughl by priests of' Noah. (Mosiah, Chapter 
20). . 

2. Limhi's people in bondage. (Mosiah 21:1-22.) 

3. Plans for escape. ( Mosteh 22.) 

4. A glad reunion. (Mosiah 25.) 
Passages to be memorised: Mosiah % 21 :14-15. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. How were the words spoken by Abinadi further fulfilled 
in the experiences of Limhi and his people. 

2. Discuss the value of trials in bringing a people or 
indi\ iduals near to < lod. 

Note:- -Ask from time to time how many are regularly 
reading the Book of .Mormon through, and occasionally have an 
expression from those who are doing so as to their iriferesl in 
i1 lo '!! : Imi ■". if |-.o ■ iihlc, those uh ) arc not reading ii to do so. 

Fcurtii Sunday, Jane 27, 1920. 
I.c <>ii l!. Conversion of Alum. I he Younger, and 
the Sons of Mosiah. 

Tcx1 : Mo: iali 27 and 28th Chapters. 

Objective: To leach thai Faith brings tho soul "1o behold 
Ilic marvelous light oi' Clod," while the power of Satan leads 

ii ; n io •■■!- <'••.!■■< 

! n- ■" I Ions en Preparation and Pre entation : 
1. Aatfgn ! 'in MiapterN i?iven in the text to l>< read bj all 
the clai 1 

I • lit . : 



154 TE KARERH Mei 26 1^26 

a. Mosiali's proclamation to unbelievers. (Mosiah 

27:1-7.) 
1). Alma and companions visited by an angel. (Mosiah 

27:7-20.) 
c Alma's confession. (Mosiah 27:2*11.) 
(I. .Mosiali's sons desire a mission. (Mosiah '28:1-!).) 
3. Passages to memorise: Mosiah 27:13-15; Mosiah 
27:3G, 37. 

4. In all special assignments pupils should be eneouraged 
to quote Prom the book those passages thai arc striking. 
Questions fcr Teachers. 

1. Briefly discuss the fruits of genuine repentance shown 
by Alma and Ihc sons of Mosiah. 

2. What lesson is taught by Alma the elder in his altitude 

towards his son .' 



PRIMARY DEPARTMENT 
First Sunday, Jane 5, 1926. 

Unifcrm Fast Day Lesson. 

The Forty Days' Fast. 
Text: Matt. 4:1 ; Mark 1 :12; Luke 4:1. 
lleferenees: ".Jesus the Christ," Talmage, pp. 127-128; 
"Life of Christ*' (Papini), p. p. Gl-62; Sec Superintendents' 
Department, this issue. 

Time: Immediately following the baptism. 
Place: A wilderness. 

Objective: To teach that through fasting and prayer we gain 
physical and spiritual strength. 

I. Christ's preparation by the spirit, 
a. After His baptism. 
h. Through earlier experience. 
IT. Christ in the Wilderness. 

a. Pasted forty days. 
}). Was an hungered. 

ITT. Christ attuned physically and spiritually — 
a. To overcome temptation. 

b. To fulfil His mission. 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARKRE 1 55 

Suggestions to Teachers 

Lead children to see thai by fasting we put ourselves in a 
:,: . e : piritual attitude and are better able to < ommunicate with 
our 1.; vcnly Father. It is a physical sacrifice tor a spiritual 
blessing. We give up sonic one thing tor some thing on a higher 
plane. Lead tho children to see why we have Fast Day; to 
sacrifice, to give to others. 1 have often thought that too often 
we may fas! but we forget to give. The giving should go with 
1 lie self-sacrifice. We \ hould be willing to give that others might 
receive, .'haw the children how they can save their pennies and 
take to Past Meeting. How much better to help some one who 
than to go to so many movies or buy candy. Think of 
(he joy you are giving and the joy you arc getting. 

Hi >w pictures, where possible, of ( hrist in the attitude of 
prayer. Stimulate the children for the desire to seek their 
Heavenly Father. If it were necessary for Chrisl to seek Him, 
how much need we .' 

Memory Gem. 
"Jesus friend of little children 
Be a friend to me; 
( Juide my cleeds and ever keep me 
( Hose to Thee. " 
'n teaching ihe gem, show picture of Jesus blessing little 
children as point of contact. 

Song: "Little Purple Pansy," p. 127; D.S.S. 
"Nature's Easter Story/' Tally Hill, p. 37. 

Res1 Exercise: Carry out the thought of sacrifice by having 
the children, on Fast Day, instead of eating their breakfast, 
fast. They c:m lake apples, potatoes, etc., or else prepare a little 
i i with a little lunch in, to take [he Bishop or Reli< f Society 
to scud to some poor person. Have Ihe children tell where they 
keep apples, potatoes, etc. then let Ihem run quietly and get them. 
put ilicin in (he box or basket. Then take them 
h the H \u> v . 

S cond Sunday, Jane 13, 1926. 

The I ast Suppi r 

I ' hi" ' Luke 



156 IK KARERE Mei 26, 1926 

22:7-20, 24 27 ; John 13:4, 5, 12-16; 34:14-15. 

References: "Jesus the Christ," p.p. 592-597; "Sunday 
Morning in (he Kindergarten," Lesson -17. 

Time : a1 (he Fcas1 of 1 lie Passover. 

Place : Jerusalem. 

Objective: To teach thai by partaking of the Sacra men 1 
worthily we show our willingness to remember II im and follow 
[lis ic.'ii lungs. 

Suggestions Lo Teachers. 

Review, by asking questions aboul some of Ihe things Jesus 
did while on earili. lie was now preparing to leave the people 
here and re; urn to II is Heavenly Father. Bring out the im- 
portance of preparation. As lie sent His disciples to prepare 
Tor the least, to prepare for what was coming, so we too must 
prepare Tor what is before us, Jesus showed in how we must 
be willing to follow. That is why, when He broke the bread, 
blessed it, and passed it. Hi 1 said, "'lake, eat in remembrance of 
my body. Drink in remembrance of my blood." When we 
think of His body and blood sacrificed for us. we can't help but 
think of His teachings, and when we think of His teachings, we 
must be willing to follow. Thai is our preparation for what is 
to eome. 

Show picture, and lead them to see that this is why we 
partake of the Sacrament: because Jesus asked h ; s disciples to. 
Bring out the eommandmcnl that Jesus gave them to love one 
another. 

Memory Gem: Tn teaching the memory gem, lend Ihc ehil- 
ren to tell how the Sacrament was passed to Ihcm. and by whom. 
How they should partake of it : clean hands, righl hand, quietly, 
holding cups quietly. 

Just a liny piece of bread 

While I eat I bow my head ; 
Now a sip of water clear 
To show I leave my Saviour dear. 

~Res1 Exercise: Bring out the thought of preparation in ihe 
home, making it a more beautiful place in which to live. 

Dramatize the things that the children may do in keeping 
the home tidy and clean, picking up bits from the floor, dusting 
books, keeping things in order, setting ihe table in an orderly 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE \'J 

way. 

Let this })iin?j.- oul i he thought that is brought < »nt in ihc 
\v :on of how ChrLsl net the example of preparing and having 
things in order, by sending th 2 disciples to prepare for the Last 
Supper. 

Third Sunday, June 20, 1926 
The Death and Resurrection of Christ. 

Tcxl : Matt, 27:28; Mark 15 ;1 15, 21-47; Luke 23:24; John 
1 ( J. 

References: "Jesus the Christ," Talmage, chapter '■)'->: "The 
Life of the Master/' John Watson, chapter 29; "Sunday Morn- 
ing in the Kindergarten," Lessons 48, 4i). 

Objective: To teacli that by being obedienl to the laws and 
commandments of God, we will have Life hereafter. 

Time: When Jesus was thirty-three years of age. 

Place: Golgotha, just outside of city of Jerusalem. 
Suggestions to Teachers. 

Lead the children to see the big purpose of Chirst*s death. 
To rhow us there is no death. Bring ou1 the beautiful side of 
it, tiol the horrid. Remove from the mind of the child the dread 
- ;' being buried, show that it is only our body thai is placed 
in the grave; thai our spiril has gone to a higher sphere 

e caterpillar gives np its stages of life to become a butterfly. 
When the caterpillar goes into the cocoon, we can'1 see it. It 
op pears dead, lmi ii isn'1 ; it is only preparing for a higher life. 
Its w,\\ of preparing is to cat certain foods and to grow. Out 
wu,y of preparing for a higher life is to do kind deeds, be prayer 
ful. Remember the (cachings of Christ, to love one another, etc 
Help the children to sec that there is a purpose back of everj 

lhiii«:. 

M • ■■ - Oem: Sing or recite the last verse of " Jesus Wants 
f ' f< r a- h'unbej 1," I -." v '. ! ' >nu I 

■■ i i ■ as last Sum] 

[test L u rcisc: To brinja oul the thoivxhl of "The Awaken 
Dramatize Nature's awakening, the warm south wind, the 
r.'Uiii" of the sunbeams, the caterpillar turning into butterfly, 
1 h • li 



'58 TE KARERK Mei 26, 1926 

tor her babies. Or, sing and dramatize "Nature Awakening" 

l\<ii\ Hill. p. 37. 

fourth Sunday, Jane 27, 1920 

Text: Luke 24 £0-51; Hi Nephi, chapters 11, 12, 27; 28: 
13-15. 

'rime: After the Resurrcetijn. 

Places: On the American continent and in Jerusalem. 

Objective: To teach that we musl be kind to all whom we 
meet, if we wish to return to our Father in Heaven. 

Read carefully the references! Tell the children that Christ 
went to talk to the people in America (the Nephitcs) and to 
teach them the same things He taught the people in Jerusalem. 
Ilis great love extended to all people no matter where they were 
nor the kind of people, lie set the example "Love one another." 

Lead t he children to see that after Christ taught the 
Americans lie then ascended up into the Heaven, just as He 
did in Jerusalem. When His mission w r as performed He re- 
turned to His Heavenly Father. 

Lead the children to see that they, too, have a mission to 
perform and prepare for their return to Heaven. Things we 
can do: grow kinder, to be more cheerful and helpful, and to do 
the things that Christ taught us. Sing and name the things in 
the song, " Jesus Once Was a Little Child." If we do these 
things we can return to our Heavenly Father as Jesus did. 

Memory (Jem: The same as for the previous Sunday. 

Songs: The same as for the previous Sunday. 

Rest Exercise: Bring out the thought that during Ihe winter 
nature appears to be dead. She is just sleeping; now she is 
awakening. 

Dramatize and Sing: ''Clouds of Gray" — Patty Hill, p. 22, 
and "-Nature's Awakening" — Patty Hill, p. .17. 



MAHI HUI ATAWHAI. 

CORA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Ilui Atawhai. 

Na Tokc Watene i whakaniaori. 

AKORANGA MO HUNE. 

TE WA TE TAIMA I RITE AI. 

(Meridian of Time). 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARfcRE 159 

Wa'.i !. To Matamua. (The Forerunner.) 

A. lie tuwheratanga houtanga to rangi. 

To L.cnga mai tc \va t» i puaotanga tuaiahi tcnei 
Rongo-pai liou. Ko to iononga mai i rnnga te Anahcra 
Kaparicrc ki a Hakaraia ki t< i inatua Floani Kai Iriki. (Soc 
"Jesus the Christ," by Ifelmagc, pp. 75-77.) 

C To orauga Iloani Kai Iriiri. 

1. I vvnauau ia he whakatutukitanga i nga kupu a te 
Anahcra a Kaparicrc. Ruka 1 : 57-58. 

2. I whakaingoatia ia, he ngohengohetanga ki nga wliaka- 
haunga a te Anahcra. Ruka I : 59-64. 

3. i wiiakaritca ia, i v/hakaingoatia, i ruraakina hoki, i a 
ia ano c tamariki ana. Alto, me nga Kawc 84-27-28. 

4. I whakatupuria ake ia i tctahi wahi koraha Ilnria, 
i ra; ■(> i to v hakahaerenga a te wairua. Ruka 1 : 80. 

5. I karangatia hoki ia c tc Atua, hoi nvatamua (fore* 
runner) 1110 tc Kai Whakaora. Iloani 1 : 6-8. 

(i. Xa ana i iriiri tc Kai Whakaora tc ao ki te wai, i 
raro i Tana tino whakahau. .Matin .'> : 13-17. 

7. I] kiia ana lioki ko ia tc poropiti nui atn kua wliunau 
mai. Matin 11 : 11. 

lie kai-kauwkan maia hoki. Maka I: 4-7. 

!). I hereheroa, i whakamatca hoki ia mo tona !•: 
we i ki te lii-i i te ha -a. Matin 11 : 3-12. 

10. I ara ia i to aranga mai llm Karaiti. Ako. me nga 
Kawc. 133 : 55. 

11. X.i ana i whakahoki mai tc Tohungalanga Arona 
i nga ra muri nei. Ako. me nga Kawc Wahanga 13. 

L2. I whakaatu hoki ia i tona hinengaro ki a llohepa 
Mete mo te taha ki te Atuatanga Mm Karaiti. Ako. me nga 
Kawc. 93: 16-17, 

! '. ' • hacrc i.ihi mai ia me te Ariki ki te an a i<- tino 
• 1 1 mai nui. ((ie .1 1 Ako. me 

1 ; ; . 

NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE HEI WHaKAUTUNGA. 

1. Ko tehee wahi <» tc iriiringa «> llm. no Iloani i svliaka 
rite ' 



i E k \ki-.ri-; Mei L6, 19:6 

2. Whakaaturia to rarangi karaipiture c tauroko a. in i 
ara ;i lloani Kai Iriiri i to aranga to Karaiti, a ka lac talii 
mai lioki me la a tc tino aranga mai. 

3. Whakaaturia to tautoko, i whakaatu a [Ioani Kai 
Iriiri i tona hincngaro kid flohepa Mote tno te taha ki a tc 
Karail 1, 

1. Rapua i roto i a Matin 3 to tautoko I10 tangata ngakau 
mai.aki a I [oani Kai I riiri. 

"). I pohea tc whanaungatunga lloani raua ko lltti? 

(J. Na wai, a nonahca lioki a lloani Kai Iriiri i tnantfakitia 
ai ! Ruka 1 : 7(i-77. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 

NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

KO TE WHAEA. 

"Nga waliino tauria ana ko nga wahinc koi a ral.m nci 
tc main mii ki tc rapu me te whakaki i aua aluiatanga niaori, 
pou tai gata waenganui e karangatia uei e t <» t * >u ko te kainga. 
Ka 1u ka hinga tc tangata c rite ana ki to kaha, ki tc ugoho o 
tana pou." \a Ida Tarboll. 

A. Tc wkai tikanga to main a nga whaoa. 

1. I runga i tc tikanga whakatupu ake i tetahi iwi. 

(a) Ko tc whakaputanga mai i etahi ki tc ao lici tangata 
whenua mo nga wa e takoto ake nei. 

(b) Te whakaakoranga nga tamariki kia rile lici 
tangata whenua, e tan nui ana koi runga i nga 
whaoa. 

2. I runga i te tikanga whakatupu ake i to kain.ua. 

(a) Ko tc whaea tc waenganui (center), me tc kai wha- 
kaoiio ake hold i nga aluiatanga katoa te kai nga. 

(1*) I te manawanui tc whaea, ki te raataara tonu, me 
te tupato ki tc whiriwhiri i nga kai c tika ana, i 
akci ai ia ki to whakaputa mai i nga tangata ora, 
kaha lioki i roto i tana wlianan. 

(e) Kei tc whaea te kaha ki to whakau i to nana me to 
toa ki roto i tana wlianan. 
•".. I runga i te tikanga whakatupu ake i te Ilal.i. 

(a) Ko te whaea te mea tnatalii ki tc ako i tc tamaiti i 
1c kot iro ranei ki t;- inoi. 



Mji 26, T926 TE K.ARERE l6l 

1 1») Ko te whaca hoi hoatu tuatahi ki tc tamaiti ki te 
kotiro i 1c \\ liakraro mo 1c Atna. 

(c) Ko te whaca hci hoatu tuatahi ki te tamaiti ki te 
kotiro i te whakaaro mo te Rongo-pai. 

(d) Ka taca c tc whaca le kitc-kia iriiria uga tamariki 
i tc wa c tika ana, c i*iro ai ratou hci me ma mo 1c 
Ifahi. 

(e) V) taca e tc whaea te whakahau 1c tamaiti te kotiro 
i-aua lahi ko tc papa kia whakaritc i nga malii o 1c 
Ilalii i.ic 1c pupuii i nga turc o te Kongo-pai. 



o- 



KI TE ETITA. 

Ko te Matenga o Melapere Matai 

Ki Te Karcrc, tena koe, man e panui alu ki nga marae o 
lac ai koe tc matenga o la maton tamaiti o Metapcrc Matai i 
mate atn ki te lloliipera i Painutana. \a nga mafauranga o tc 
pakelia i toho kin riro ki reira, ka kiia mai c tc Taknta me 
l.ai-i kia tapahia, ka oca. Ka patai a Sister Wai, "Ki te riro ki 
tc hohipera, ka ora ranei, Takuta?" Tc uin. "Ac!" I taua 
rnngi tonu i mauria ;ii, ka tapahia, kaorc rawa he painga akc. 
[' lorn n°;.! rangi i r.iu.'i mai ka tapahia ano, ka ma ai nga 
.•ml;.;. Ao manga akc ko te Ratapn tc 25 o nga ro o 
Aj -iM-ii-a ka licino hoki, korc rawa he painga o tc taknta, Ko 
tc male i whakakohatu ki poto, no tc tapahanga iho ka kitcn 
l.na pa k arn kc ki roto. 

N'ui aiu to matou pouri mo te in ate ii ga o tenci kotiro. I 
whanau ia 1908 i a Ihnic te 7 o nga ra. [Co ona tan kci tc 
17. hci a llnnc to 7 <■ heke ihu nei ka eke ona tan ki tc 18. 

I mna aiu i lona matenga i wacnganui ia c hararci ana, i 
to kite o era morchu i to pai n n main o tcnei koti <> nni nt.u 
' » raton manaaki, Kaorc o tukunn mai ana kia hoki mni, lie 
i ica tohu nakn ka hoki mai. K<» te matenga nei, <• ma marama 
ki roira. 

Kaati, i muga i to pni o nga main n tenci kotiro, nni am nga 
lv;i i { no mni !: ; !o tnnfji Id n la i \c ra i n »hu ni, I <• nni ai u 



[62 i k KARi-ki- Mci 26, ig:6 

iwi i tac mai. Pake ha, Maori. K<> Wiromu Takana raua ko to 
Pecti, e rua o raua hokinga mai. 1 te run o o raua hokingn mai 
ka haere mai te llui Atawhai o Tahoraiti me uga llunga Tapu. 
I te takiwa o te karakia na VV. Takana i whakahacro, nga 
kauwhau i a Tutu, fninita o te Mihingare, raua ko Kiriniwutu. 
Tcna koutou c uga iwi c tac ai teTici panui. Ma te Alna 
tat on e tiaki, v awliina, i uga \va katoa. Ka mutu. 
\:i to koutou tungaam , 

TAITOKO MATAF. 



lie Marenataiiga 

I in Ictchi marenatanga ki te Peka o Moawhango. Ko uga 
ingaa o uga inatua o tc mea taaue ko te Poihipi Teehi raua ko 
Iviiiha Teehi. KO uga ingoa o nga inatua o te mea wahine k*> 
lliaia Ototi raua ko Orfwa Ototi. Ko enei tamariki i nolio talii 
raua mo tctehi \\a roa, kihai rawa i poke, a i tino pumau to raua 
arolia ki a raua. Ko te mea taaue lie Elunga Tapu, a koia te 
liekerilari o te Kura llapati o te Peka o Moawhango. Ko le 
mea wahine no vvaho i te llalii. \a te Tumuaki o tc Mihana 
I'.uiii i marena, ara ua Tumuaki Iloani Tinikini. Tino pai taua 
uiarenatanga. Kii tonu te whare i te Pakeha i te Maori hold. 
I te taenga mai o te Tumuaki ki Moawhango i tino miharo ia, 
i tino koa hoki tona ngakau mo tona taenga ki te kainga i tae 
luataki mai ai ia i tona mihana tuatahi ara i te tau L906. I 
tenci pariha tonu ia e kauhau haere ana tae noa ki tona hokinga 
atti ki tona kainga tupu i te tau L910, ka hoki atu ia ki ona 
matua. I tona taenga mai i raua li> ona tau. Tino pai ona 
kupu whakaniaraina, tohutohu hoki ki te hunga i marciiatia. 

lleoi aim. kin ova te Hunga Tapu, ua to koutou teiiia i 
roto i te Rongo-pai. 

TE MAKO VVI1ARKMATIII1I. 



Ko te iMatenga o Tepora Kuril 

No te 4 o tiga ra o Mei, 1926, i mate to matou whaea, tipu- 
na, a Tepora Rum, i te Hohipera o Turunda. Tona rtiate, he 
numonia'pneum - ia), k >tah" .. '.: i takoto tiiroro ia i tona kai- 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE l6j 

nga i Uawa, ka iriauria Ltu ki tc Hohipera I Turanga i tc Ra- 
tapu, 2 o Mei, tona p >tiki e Ani Morete Watene, no te Tu- 
rei 4 o Mei, ka hemo. Haere e kui ki okiokinga. Na tona 
potiki me Lna mokcpuna me tona whanau. 

Ani VVatene 



Ko te T^kanga atu o te Rongopai 

Koia tenei ko tc mca lino whai tikanga i roto i to hunga 
c rapu ana i te matauranga ki nga whakahacrc a te Atua mo 
Ana akc mahi i niahia e la ki waenganui i roto i te ao nei; 
[vo tonei kaupapa kua hoha ki te Hunga Tapu. 1 te mea kua 
whi nga taniwha me nga pu whakaaro te hunga waho ki 
Tc Karoro. No roira ka tino ohorerc ratou ki tenoi. Ara 
tuatahi i taka atu te Rongo-pai ilui Karaiti me te maun tapu, 
i unit 11 ;:i tc malii tc Wairua Tapu i roto i nga tar. gat a, ajc 
1 1 «*: : 1 main mcrekara, me nga mana uhakaora i nga turoro. 1 
tc \va tonu i patupatua ai nga Apotoro me te llunga Tapu, 
koia tonu te \\a i tangohia ai tc mana te Atua i runga i te 
whonua tac noa ki te lau L823, katahi ano ka tohungia he 
tAngata c te Atua liei poropiti, hoi whakahacrc i tc kingitangn 
tc Karaiti ki runga ki te whenua, aie te whakahokinga mai i 
tc Rongo-pai kia kauwhautia ki te ao katoa i roto i enei ra 
muri nei. Ko tloliepa Mete taua poropiti, ko te Ilalii Ihu 
Karaiti taua liahi, koia c kiia aci he Ilalii Moromona. 

Kaati, kua kiia ake ra i tangohia te katoa te Rongo- 
pai, Le Diana mc era atu. K<» tcnei takanga atu he mea 
wliakaatu <■ nga poropiti. 

"Kua poke ano tv whenua i rnro i oini lang.ttn, 1<u:i takahia aoki 
iiga Hue, wkakaputaia kotiu akc c ratou to tikanga i tvhakatakotoria; 
ivhakataka una ratou to kowennta onamata. Na roira i ainga ai to 
ivhcnun «• tc kanga, inokomoko iho ona tnugata; aa roira i worn :ii aga 
langatu to arheuua, n he toruti ru to hunga i toe." Ihaia 24: 5-0. 

Mi- to noi ano. "I titiro ahau, aa kna whaiwhni taua haona ki tc 
Han; '." ,< n tnoa una ratou la; Taoa n«>:iii:i to taonga niai «• to 

1 i< »Ii ikuwn ki tc liungn i mi 

!. in |'ii.., mm 10 >•. 11 . ri ru ui to ki igitani n i Lo li 

'| UpU, ' " 1 .* 1 r . 1 « • t : 1 " : ' I ' ' 

Lie nni nga karaipitttre <■ whakaatn ana i le takanga atu, 
lv«'i konci te whakapouo tc Moromona: I taka ntu le \l< 

pal, .; kun .. li. ! .' • ' "... 1. ai !.': .. I lc.ll | \] 



TE KAKERE Mei .0, 19*6 

[Caati te vvhakamarama i to takanga atu <» to Rongo-pai 
mo tcnei vva. Mc whakamarama i 1;- whakahckinga uiai <> to 
Rongo-pai me te whakatunga i Tona kingitanga ki runga i to 
mata tc whcnua. Koi to tu tcnei kingitanga. 1 tiraata mai 
te tu L830, kci te tu Lnaianei i roto i to ao katoa. Koi tc Uunga 
r S"ii 1 > 1 1 nga Ra Muri Nei tc m. ma whakahacrc i tenci kingi- 
tanga i faro i nga tohutohu a tc Atua. 

Mo llohepa Mete, ae, koia tc matakitc whiriwhiri ma 1c 
Atua, he nica homai ki a ia Liga toliutohu mai i tc tan [823 
tae n<>a ki tc taima i tino tu ai tc kingitanga, 1820, hacre tonu 
nga tohutohu a tc Atua ki tc Poropiti i tc alma ara i tc tauira 

tc whakahaere i tc kingitanga, ua tc poropiti ki tc llunga 
Tapu, mc tc whakawhiwhi i tc I lain ki nga mana nunui, me 
tc liomai i nga kii c tuwhera ai liga rangi ki tc whanau <> 
[haraira mehemea ka ngohegnohe ki tc Rongo-pai b 11m 
Karaiti. E ki ana 1c Ariki : 

"Whakatakina nga tikanga nga karaipituro; c nica ana hoki 
koutou kei refra tc ora tonu mo koutou; ko enci hci kaiwhakaaiu moku." 
II 0:1 ni 5: 39. 

Koia i tika ai ma nga karaipiture c wliakaniarania he pono 
ranci c tae mai he anahera ki to kawc mai i totalii Rongo-pai 
mc te wliakatu i te kingitanga te Atua. mo te hangangn 
houtanga Eliruharama, me te whakapumautanga Eliona ki 
runga ki lenci vvhenua Amerika i enei i*a muri nci. Ac. 
ko tc kupu na [Iakaraia 2: 1.-5. 

"I ango akc anb oku kanoki, i litiro, na k<> telahi tangata, lie aln 
ruri i tona ringa. Xa ka mea ahau, E haere ana koe ki heal A ka nica 
ia ki ahau, Ki te whanganga i Hiruharania, kia kiten ai tonn roa, tona 
vvhanui. Na ka hacre tc anahera i korero ra ki ahau, a ka puta ano tetahi 
anahera ki te whakatau i a ia. Na ka ki tcra ki ;i ia, Ltere atu, ki atu 
ki tc tamaiti nci. mea am, Ka nohoia a Eliruharama, ka rite ki nga pa 
taiepakorc, i tc tini tc tangata, nga kararehe i roto: A hci taicpa 
:ilii ahau, c ai t;i [howa, ki a ki ;t karapoi i,oa; hci kororio ano i roto 

1 a ia." 

Ko tcnei poropititanga kua tutuki ki a Hohepa Mete, koia 
taua tamaiti i ki nci te anahera, "Hacre, mea atu ki te tamaiti 

nci ." Tekau ma tvha ana tail i tc wa i puta ai tc anaiiera 

ki a ia. i te tan L823. .Mai i taua tail ki tc 1S44 i puta tmn 
mai te Atua ki a ia ki te homai i nga vvhakahaunga mc ngo 



Mji 26, 1920 TK KAh'IRK 1 63 

kawcnata rao to Langahanga Uimliarama kua kiia niai pa 
Hakaraia i tc upoko rac nga rarangi kr.a kiia akc ra, hoi 
\.h ikatutukitanga an i h< ki ta ll.aia Poropiti --. 2-3: 

".",'. Lcuci r.kc k<i uga ra v.hi.k-mu'tiirga ka ivhalrapumautia IP 
r.iannga (i io [howa vyliaro ki tc tihi o cga maunga, ka whakanckchia 
ake iiiio l.i rurga i i:ga pul;cpukc; a ka rcre uga iwi kat< a ki rcira. 
Ka hacrc h. ki n_,.i iwi in. ilia, ka mca, Llaero mai, tatcu ka hacrc ki rungn 
ki u v maunga o Ihowa, ki tc ivharc o tc Atua o Hakopa: kia wliakaakona 
ai tatou c ia ki ana lira; ka hacrc k >'.:i tatou i ana huarahi; no le mca 
ka puta i.i .i tc turc i Qiona, aic tc kupu a Lhown i tliruharama. ' ' 

Kei Araciika tenei Wharc Tapu mc tc "iliona. me tc whaka- 
tapungj o Liiiiihai'aina c LJrata OiSon Hyde i a ia i runga i 
liaunga O.iwa. I tukua atu ana inoi ki te Atua kia whakatapua 
lliruharama lici hokinga atu mo nga Ilurai. 

Kua kiia akc ra i.a tc anahcra i kawc niai tc llongo-pai 
o te Karaiti ki a [iohcpa Aide. Ac, tirohia Whakakitcnga 14. (>. 

''I kite ano alia.i i tralii atu analicra C rcre ana i wacnganui <> tc 
rangi, kci a ia tc llongo-pai man tonu hci kauwhau manna ki le hungj 
<■ noho ana i tc whenua, ki nga Lwi katca, ki nga hapu, ki nga rco, ki 
Ugii liuihuiugj tangata." 

Kua tac niai tana anahera ki a [Iohcpa Mete i tc tan kua 
kiia akc ra. I aim niai tc Kongo-pai i Liiona i tc v.alii i kiia 
c nga poropiti tapu c puta inai tc kupu a [howa i liiona. Koia 
ti 1 liango-pai v kauwhau nci te Moromona, koia ano tc llahi 
o te Karaiti. 

i.a.:,. i.io leu. 1 v..:. iu |.» koutoil tcina i te Kongo-pai polio. 

ncaim'iii m:\.\T.\. 



Ko ie Hut N n i a Ngatl Porou 
(ite roanga am) 

I inn* kalia o tatou tamariki inarama ki le ivhakatakoto 
i tctahi kaupapa ki te aroaro <> tc Pirimia. K<» nga take enei 
i tape 1.1 '.< Pirimia, 

.',1 • i il Iro i ii.'n tin i.i : • pai o nga w lienuo a ' • 
i runga tonu ra i tc kaha <» tenei iwi ki tc ahu whenua. No 
rcira inc waiho tenei alma o Ngati Porou hci inohiotango ma 
tc Kawanatanga ko pcra ano hoki ctalii atu •» ago Iwi, cngari 

WO aw liina tc Kau Q n.il Ollfffl 



K» i TE KARERE Mei 26, 1926 

2. Mc wliakanohonolio hold nga Maori kore-whcnua, peia 
1 !c nga Pakcha e whakaiu honohotia ana e tc Kawaiitanga. Ij 
tika ana Is 1 nga Maori c wliakaaro i r.iua atu nga hckc c liaerc 
mai Dei i Ingarangi. 

.'). I\o te turanga Minita Maori mc waiha tonu i tc Piidmia, 
ara i te Hon. J. <!. Coates. Ina tac ki te \va e vvhakaaro ai tc 
Pirimia kia whakamamatia ia i tern turanga, 111c lioatu ki 
tctahi ona hoa Maori c nolio mai ra i tc Parcmata. 

4. Kia whakaturia tetalii Komihana hci tirotiro i nga 
lake katoa c pa ana ki uga vvlienua Maori. Ko nga taitara ki 
nga vvhenua Ida hohoro tc takoto marama. Kaore c taea nga 
reiti te kohi i te raruraru ng-i taitara. Tuarua, kaore hold <• 
taea lie raoni te tono, i tc takoto pcnei nga taitara. Ma tc 
puta iaai hoki te raoni hci awhina i tc iwi, ka taea ai v. nga 
.Maori ratou vvlienua tc whakapai. 

5. Mc wliakaaro c tc Kawanatar.ga tctahi talma moni hci 
awhina i nga kura Maori. Mc whakamotuhakc tana talma mo 
tera take anake. Mehemea ka. rite katoa tc liopu a tc iwi i tc 
matauranga, penei kua korc he whakahaere penci i to Ratana 
c mahi mai )\\ i tc Tai llauauru. Lie nui rawa tc taumaha ki 
nga 1 mtua ka tac ai nga tamariki ki nga km a. \.i reira tenci 
tono kia awhina mai tc Kawanatanga. 

6. Kia awhina te Kawanatanga i nga tangata c man ana 
ano tc mohio ki uga main whakairo a tc Maori, me c.a atu 
taonga e ngaro hacre nei inaianei. 

HA WHAKAUTU TE PIRIMIA: 

''Mo n«>':i kupu a Ngata c pa nei ki uga mahi whakairo a 
tc Maori; Ac, ka tautoko tc Kawanatanga, ara kia mau tonu 
t ■ mohio ki ana tu mahi kci ngaro i nga ra c hckc mai nei. 
Kei tc koa ahau, moku i lac mai Id tenci hui, i rongo marama 
ai ahan i nga tikanga katca c pa ana ki a k >ut <>u ki tc iwi 
Maori. Ka nui nga take kua marama mai i koutau kai-korcro, 
kaore i marama ki an i mua. No reira kci tc koa taku ngakau. 
Kei tc koa ano taku ngakau nio!:u ka kite, ka mohio hoki, kei 
tc tipu kouton tc Maori. 

"] mua akc nei ka puta nga korero, kci te heke haerc 
koutou tc iwi Maori. Otira naku lean i kite i tenci ra. kei tc 
he tana korero. 

"Mo tc korero wliakaiiohi :ic' i utra hoia Maori. Ivi taku 



Mei 26, 1926 



TE KARfcRE 



I/" 



niohio I* tino waimaric tc korcnga c riro mai he ivhenua i a 
ratou. K;> 1 i take, i taua wa i te tino nui te vvariu <» nga 
wlici! •■ 1. Na, k<i tc ar.e nga Pakclia i J • mate kua pa 
lit -i ki a ratou i mu.'i mai. Gtira, kci t-. 1 whakaae an kia 
i-ite touu te awliina a tc Kawanatanga i te Maori i te Pakeha, 
na te mea i tn talii raua i i*oto i nga ra tc riri kua t alia nei. 
Kali, taku kupii ki a koutoii ka ata tirohia tetahi huarahi e 
taea ai tc lioia M iori te whakanoho ki i'ii 1 1 ir^i i tetahi whenua. 

"Na, aio tc talia ki nga taitara ki nga whenua. K<> te 
tikanga tonu tea, ma te tino marama nga taitara ka taca 
ai te tukn lie moni ki tetahi tangata kia taea ai e ia tc wliaka- 
raahi tona \vl:enua. Engari, ki tc t atari tatou kia marama nga 
taitara, tera tatou c laia.i mo nga tan L5. Kati, he roa rawa 
teuei. llcoi, uu matoii c whakamatau tetahi tikanga kia vvawc 
tc put a he l.ioni ki nga mea koutou c ngakau nui ana ki te 
aim whenua. 10 kore c taea te whanga kia marama rawa nga 
taitara. Ka popokehu tonn i roto i tera alma raruraru, kore 
akc he painga ki a koutou. N'a reira, waiho ma matou e 
rapu he tikanga awliina i a koutou, ahakoa ra kore noa e 
marama te takoto nga taitara. E rua nga tari whakaputa 
moni, ho to tc Kai Tiaki Maori, mc te "Advances to Settlers 
Depart incut. " 

"Kii nga l.ialii whakatopu i nga paanga ka whakalu >ho- 
rotia. 

'}] > te taha l:i "c la! i:a moni mo nga kura Maori, te.*a 
tetahi moni £30,000. Kua tonoa mai c Ngata ma kia wchia 
tera hei tahua m<> nga kura. Kati, te £15,000 kua wehca mo 
Liingj i tera take. lOngari, kci tc mohio noa atu an. kaorc c 
rod ka tonoa mai 1 < CI 5,0C*J »• 1 ac ana. 

"Kci tc nui noa atu taku ivhakaaro kia ivhiwhi koutou me 
a koutou nri i te mataurauga. No reira maku ano tenci take 
c whiriwhiri. Kci to matou aroa 'o tetahi take in<> te matau- 
raii"- ' - kiia in i lie Secondary Education. 

" I ; 
.'.u.iui, ka kite an ko tc whakaaru kci tera T.-.i c ;■ 
"Kaua rawa he rori v mahia ma runga i nga, ^henua M. ■ 
K<» tc take (i tera vvliakaaro, he kore no koutou <• utu i nga 
rciti. 

"Otira, kua kiti au kci tc lie tera whakaaro n tc Tari, 



[68 TE KARERK M< 

Pai ke tne i ; iro te hunga kei runga i 1;' vvhcnua. No r< 
mehemea ka mahia lit- pori mo koutou, mc timata 1,1 ko 
ulu i nga reiti. " 

Ko nga whakahoki cm. i a tc Pirimia mo runga i nga take 
1 takoto atu ki tona aroaro. [Co te mea nui i kitea ih6, ho te 
hiahia (» tc Pirihiia kia awhina ia i a taua i te iwi Maori. No 
reira, kia ora te I*;; unia, kia ora hold e tic] kci te 

mataki te ngakau ki nga hua nunui i puta ake i to luii uui ki 
Tikitiki, Pepuere L6, 17. 1926. 

\'A TE TIATI MEI1A. 



Te Atuata.nga o \z Karaiti 
(Te roanga atu) 

I nga Poropiti o mua te Wairua Tapu hci artlii i a ratou. 
i kite ano nga tangata i tc Atua, a i tail ano Tana Wairua 
mana ki runga i a ratou, i mua tc hacrenga ciai tc Karaiti. 
Ko tc Rongo-pai i oti i mua tc mahitanga tc ao, a mai ano 
o tc wa o to tatou matua Arama e hari aoi tc tangata i 
runga i nga manaakitanga tenei Rongo-pai i nga wa katoa 
i puritia ai ona ture. kii tonu tc Karaipiture i nga wliaka- 
aturanga na ko tc Karaiti tc Tama a tc Atua. Xa runga i 
tnahi merekara, mocmoea, whakakitenga, mc etehi atu mahi 
whakamiharo ka kite tatou La Atua ano ia. 

Mehemea kihai te Karaiti i main merekara ka mohio ano 
talon lie Atua la i runga ano i Ana mahi ako. Mehemea 
kihai i ora i a la nga turoro, tc pei rewira, nga matapo, nga 
liana, ka kitea noatia atu e tatou kei "ko atu Tona mana i to 
t2 tangata, 

Kore rawa lie tangata i ako i nga tangata kia muru i ngn 
hara p ratou hoa rir}, a ka inoi atu hoki mo tc hunga e 
tukino ana i a, ratou, a nga una katoa c pai ai koutou ki a 
maliia e nga tangata ki a koutou, mc mahi ki a ratou. 
[vaore he tangata e inoi mo tc hunga v/kakamato i a ia, 
kia riiurua ratou hara. Ko retehi Ana ako koia nei, 
"Kahore he aroha tetehi i rahi ake i tenei, at a kia tuku tc 
tangata i a ia ano kia mate mo ona hoa." Kngari lie nui ke 
atu Tana aroha i tcra, i te mea i koatu ia i Tona tiaana mo 
0:ia In a rirj. 



Me\ 26, 1926 TE KARERE 169 

Ko Ana apotoro nga kai-whakaatu ki te ao, kaorc i ranea 
kia mohio ratou ki a la ma te Wairua Tapu. Kia ahei i a 
ratou te korero i nga iwi te ao, 11a i kite ratou i a te Karaiti, 
a i pa hoki Ona tunga i ona ringa. He lice hoki te whai nga 
iwi ki nga tohu, otira he rereke nga ahuatanga i pa ki nga 
apotoro, kia mohio rawa ra ano ratou, kaorc i te ranea te 
wliakapono anakc. I moliio hoki a Pita i mua te ripekatanga 
ko la te Karaiti. Engari kihai ctehi ratou i mohio, a no 
l.uiri ka hoki mai ano [a, ka mea kia wliawhai te tunga i Ona 
ringa, i Tana kaokao. i tukua atu hoki e la te Wairua Tapu 
Id a ratou i te Ra te P< tekoha. 

1 wailiotia iho hoki e Hohepa Mete tona whakaaturanga 
ki te ao ko Lhu te Karaiti, te Tama a te Atua. J korero ia i 
te vva i kite ai ia i te Matua raua ko te Tama i te motu rakau 
i Paiaiuaira takiwa X11 loka. I korero ano hoki a Hohepa 
i te wa i kite ai raua ko Iliriiu Rikitana i a te Tama a tc Atua 
c noho ana i te ringa matau te .Mua, a tctchi i kite ano i a 
te Karaiti i r i\;n;i whakakitenga i a la ki a Hohepa Mete raua 
ko Oriwa K-autere i tc Temepera <> Katarana. Ka korero nga 
Llungu Tapu i nga whakaaturanga <» nga poropiti mua a ka 
korero hold ratou i nga whakaaturanga nga poropiti <> nga 
■ a muii nei. Katahi tc Wairua Tapu ka whakaatu ki a ratou 
uranga a nj a matua he pono. 

E ki na .1 anga hold tana, In i apiti 

I : ' I i : ' | 1 

1 a ia e fcai-tamariki ana ka tukua La i runga i te uiihana 
ki Pen< haw< nia. Kihai ia i 1 tohio he pono te Rongo-pai, engari 
i whakapono ia, heoi ka inoi ia ki tetehi whakaaturanga. K<> 
te iiuinga tana taima i wliakapaua ki i< i tuhituhi mo te 
nupcpa, waiho ake te ako i te Rongo-pai. Ka whakr.toia ia e 
tona h >a mo tc kore s a i te R >ngo 1 ai, kia mohio ai ia ki 
tona t ika, otira he m . ko tana mca pai he tuhi- 

tuhi ia i roto i te kari 

■ 

t llku 1 lg»l. I I ■ ■ ; 

a te - v 1 iki 

i la <• inoi ana. V 1 \Vi1 iiii i a La c in<»i ana. " I '. 

toku Matua, ki tc mca «• ahei, kia pahcmo atu tenci kapa i 
ahau, a me inu 



170 



1 ;•: kAKERh 



G » 26 



;:, il. 

I kiti ano Witini i tc kanolii a to tatou Ariki '. a hi . 
i:ioi ana, me Ic rc/e ano hoki O.iu mi mat a. I pa raai 1 
aroha ki a ia, a ka tangi ia i to kaha tana a^olia ki to Ariki, 
a ko tana hiahia i runga katoa nga mca to ao kia 110K0 tal.i 
ii ki a la. 

Taro ilio ka kii ' ia i to Ariki c nialika ana, ka I. acre ki 
Ana Apotoro c warca ana i tc 11100. Ka ata whakaohoria la, 
ka ui atu ki a ratou kia kotalii liaora ratou e titiro. Kaoiv 
a tc Karaiti i riri ki a ratou, engari i maniac la i to ratou alma 
ugoikorc. [lacre ana ano tc Ariki ki tc inoi. Ka mutu ka 
liacrc atu ano ki tc whakaoho i Ana Apotoro. E torn nga 
pencitanga mc tc titiro vvliakatau a Witini. Mol'io ]>u ki to 
a!iua tc kanolii tc Arild. ll< i tangata roa, lie kaha, '.Jiai.i 
i tc tanga ngoikore penei mc tc wahinc nci c kite nci tatou i 
ngj poitatanga otol i nga kai-pcita. lie tino At ia la 1 
roto i nga tangata. Engari ko Tona alma i maliaki r.pji ilio 
penci in;' tctchi tamaiti nci. 

Kihai taro kua korc ia c kite i tc Ariki inoi ana, engari 
kci tc korcro tahi tc Ariki mc Ana Apotoro tokotoru. Kci tc 
takatu ratou ki te liacrc ki tc rangi. 10 ki ana a Witini ko e 
rawa ia c kaha ki 10 whakamanawanui, liaerc tonu atu ia i 1 ■■ 
walii i piri ai ia i tua tc rakau, ka hinga atu ki nga waowae 

tc Kai Whakaora, ka inoi atu ki a la U in I. aria ia ki to 
raugi ara ki to wain e liacrc ai la. 

I niocinoca a Witini i tuoliu ilio tc Ariki, ka ata lia ,>ai i a 
ia, ka awhi i a ia. Mc *c mca nci ko to Ariki tonu, i ronyn 
hoki ia i tc maliana Tona unia, a ka mca atu tc Ariki ki a ia, 
"Kao;v c taku tania. kua oti cnei ta ratou mahi, ka liacrO mai 
ratou i a! a::. Ko koc, mc nolio ki tc wliakaoti i tan naht." 
lie ahakoa man tonu a Witini ki tc Ariki, ka i:i atu ki a la. 
"\a mc oati Koc ka liacrc atu au ki a Koc i mr.ri nci." A 
ka mencnicnc ki tc kata, ka ata mea atu ki a ia. "Ko tenn, 
kei a koc tonu." 

Katalii ia ka olio akc me tc hotuhotu, ko If ata to:in. 

1 tana olionga akc ka korcro ia ki tona hoa, ka mca i ]>u mai i 
t;' Atua. Ka whakahokia e Witini. "Kaorc c tika kia korcrotia 
mai tona ki a an. kci tc tino moliio aliau." 

Kiliai i.. i whakaaro v- apotoro ia a roto i nga ra, engari 1 



Mei 26, 1926 



TE KAKERK 



171 



mohio ia ko ia te apotoro hinamoe, i te 1110c lioki ia i a ia i 
tana malii. Mai ano i taua rangi ka timatn tona kaha ki tc 
ako i tc Karaipiturc, 1:1c tana tuhitulii ano hold mo tc nupepa, 
cnga.i hi tc; nuinga nga korero c aim ana ki Dga Karaipiturc. 
Taro akc kua tika ia kia whiwhi i tc Wairua Tapu, a put a 
mai ana ki a ia tc wliakaatu ko tc mocmco i puta atn ra ki 
a ia i aim mai i tc Ai ua. 

Kaoi'c tatou katoa c whiwhi mocmoca pai pai pcra i la 
Witini, engari mclicinea ka iaal.i tatou i a tatou main tc 
llahi i tiinga i tc wliakapono, e whiwhi lioki tatou i tc Wairua 
r i'apu, lici wliakaatu ki a tatou lie pono tc Karaipiturc mi ko 
tc Karaiti h ■ Tama na tc Atua. LIcoi ko te ara anakc i wliiwhi 
ai tatou i Ana manaakitanga mc malii tatou kia whiwhi ai. 

NA TE NGOl KA 

He Ripoata no te M.A.C. 

Ko tetalii men whakamiharo mc tc tauhou i maliia i tc Karoti 
i tc M.A.C. nei i a Maelic 7. L926. Ko taua mca ko tc whaka- 
tura:i;.: i nga Korama Rikona tuatahi ki tenei mihana ki \iu 
Ti;*c:ii. I whaknturia te nei mca i raro i tc whakahacrcnga a 

1 11... mil- 1 1 1111k 'ii mi- i 2 I 11 111 nasi tc Karri 1 1 I i at a EIcci 1 




Kc te Korama Rikona Tuatahi 

Koia enci ko nga ingoa nga me in a mc nga apiha 1 
korama 1 ropu 1 e rua. Tc mea 1 uatahi ko < 'li irl 
tc Tumuaki, Wero llercwini tc Kaunihera Tuatahi, I! 
Amaru te Kaunih • -a Tiiaina. Tnumata Uapuhi le II 



I E KARERE 



Mei 20, iy20 



Ko nga me ma ko: Lala Lcti, Bcrty Brunt, (haia Harris. William 
Christy, Lester lliaia, Henry Shortland, .James Southon, me 
William Moon. 




Ko te Kara ma Rikona Tuarua 

Tc Korama Tuarua: Ko Vili Purccll te Tumuaki, V7i Pere 
Amaru tc Kaunihera Tuatahi, James .Joyce te Kaunihera Tua- 
i-u i, William Shortlanc! tc [Iekcrctari. \\°;a mema ko Richard 
; li >."ll:iu(l. Dan Sou'.hon, Joe Hapi, Kcrcsoma Isaia, John 
O.'msby, Rieliard Watcnc, Mita Wateac, me Dave Thompson. 

Ko n,".\ 1 tamariki o enci ropu he tino lamr.riki whakaar ) 
nui 1:1 o rain", karangatanga, me te wliakaaro hoki he mea tin > 
Klu nui enci karangatanga. Km te whakaritc raton i o rat on 
karangatanga kia tino rite. Teia nga painga maha ka ri:.' i 
te mi ropu, ko tc mea tuatalii hold tend o tona litcnga i tenci 
mihaua. 

\a Tiata Witehira i whakamaori. \a IIOR1 IIKXIHANA. 



7A TE ETITA. 



Ripoata Hui Tau 

Ivia pa 'a re ake n ?i to tatou Hui Tail o tc t.u 1926, cngc- 
ri ka maharatia tenei hi i roto i o tato 1 ngakau mo nga tau 
maha e tak >to mai nei. Kna whakapumautia tenei lake i ro- 
to i o tato 1 ngakau e n >;a mahi o t -w-' h r, ara kci te wa kc 
tatou inaiansi. Nui at 1 te pai o te wa e takoto mai nei i to 
tera i h >ri akc. Nui ntu te pai mc tc koa kci roto i tenei wa 
e 111 mai iul mo n.»;a mea tatjj e w'aakaae nei kia mahi i 



Mei 26, 1Q2j TE KARERE 



n#a mahi kua whakatakotoria nei c to tatoj Ariki hei mahi 
ma tatou. Ko te mahi nui o to tatou kai whakahaere hou a 
'I umuaki Tinikini hei whakakaha i te Tohungatanga me te 
whakatikatika i Qga whakaiitenga me nga ropu o te hahi kia 
tika te whakaiitenga. kua mahia enei mahi i mua, engari i 
whakapaua te talma o nga kaumatua ki te kauwhau ripenata 
ki nga mea kua oti noa atu te iriiri. He aha te take? He ngo- 
ikoretanga no nga Hunga Tapu. Inaianei kua whakamatau- 
tauria te Hahi, kua taka atu te nuinga o nga] mea ngoikore o 
tatou nui atu to tatcu kaha inaianei 1 era atu v. a. Kei te taka- 
tu tatou kia piki ake te mahi. 

Ki te whakaaro o nga mea i tec, nui atu te pai o tenei 
Hui Tau i era atu Hui Tau i tu ki tenei motu ki Niu Tireni 
nei. Tuatahi ko te pai o te rahgi tae noa ki te whakanv tu- 
nga o te hui. Tuarua ko te pai o te u hakahaeretanga te 
marae, tc pai o te kai, te pai o nga teneti moe, te korenga 
o tenei mea o te liaurangi me era atu tu hianga. Tuatoru, te 
mea whakamulunga me te mea tino nui hoki ko te wairua 
pai o nga huihuinga me nga mea whakamiharo i rangona 
nei e tat m. 

Ko nga huihuinga i raro i te whakahaerctanga a Tumu- 
aki Hoani I ii ikini, a i tu ki roto i te hobro hou i hangaia e 
te Hahi ki Nuhaka. 1 tu te huihuinga tuatahi te Hui Tau 
; te 10 a.m. o te Paraire te 2 o nga ra Aperira, a man tonu 
ana ic wairua tae nca ki tc huihuinga whakamutunga i te 
ahiahi o tc Ratapu. Ko te kupu kai | | nei hi i i 

katak -toila nei e Tumuaki 1 inikini, "Me tu koutou i runga i 
nga t ranga t. pu." Tangi ana tenei kupu i roto o nga kau- 
whai tanga katoa <> tc hi i. 

I in.;', ia e tc komiti mo it- Temapara tetahi putihana ki te 
Tumuakitanga luatahi kia whakaaetia te kohi moni hei ha- 
nga 1 emepara K 1 Niu 1 ireni nei. 1 hainatia tenei putihana e 
nga I li nga I . pti a tuku; . tu ana ki te fa I ote ki a 1 umuaki 
Karan; ta. 

I«; rua nga < ilua i pa mai ki tenei hui Ara ko te mate" 
k( ke i "an t. te m; lii, a ruehu Pi >mai e, me 

. ■ . ■ , i . • 1 1 n . K 4l I 

11 rakau i tc w 

kei te mohio tatou te Hunga fapu kaore e roa ka tutaki ano 

tatou ki <> tatou hoa an >ha i i"i>- 1 t< ai anga mai. 

K;i 1,1 te I Imi l .r. 111 1 te tau 10 ia takiwa 

Waiksto Ko te tumanako o te Hunga I ipi 
.in,, te pai *> tc I Lui I au u i«) 7 1 to I 



1/4 1fc kAKERE Mci . ( , i« .0 



HE MIIII. 

Tera tctahi whakaaro whanni, marama, kua Idtca c te 
Illita i waenganui o nga kai-tango o Te Karcrc. Ko tetalii o 
nga llunga Tapu o Ngapuhi, ka nui tona hihiko hi te kauwhau 
i tenei Rongo-pai ki tc hunga <> waho. \a i runga i tona hiahia 
kia rongo ti 1 iwi Maori kat-oa ki nga tikanga nir.iui o tenei 
\vhakaponr>, i runga ano i tona kore e ahci tc haere ki nga 
wain tawhiti o tona kainga, ka whakaaro ia inc ntu e ia he 
Kare/e ma etahi rangatira o era. atu hahi, i.:a tc pepa c tuku 
atu ana kupii kauwhau ki a ratou. 

lie tauira pai tenei ma tatou ma J .o hunga katoa c hiahia 
ana kia piki haere tc ma hi a tc Ariki i tenei svalii o Tona maara 
waina. 

I'] \\ Iv.kamihi ana Tc Karere ki tona rangatira ki a Ngapuki 
ftenata mo tonoi niahi pai ana. 'via ora koc c Xgapuhl, kia 
l:a!.a ki ton inahi pai. 

E Ono ng* Tzke mo te Whakatekau 

ric men tnngohia mai i tc improvement Era, April, 192C, ua Qi 
Bunker, i tuhi, n:i ngn cita i whakaritc ki tc reo Maori. 

1 Pita '■': 15. "Engari whnkatapua tc Ariki, to Atua, I roto i n 
koutou ngakau: kia rite tonu hoki te kupu i a koutou i nga wa katoa, hoi 
whakahokinga atu ma koutou i nga tan gat a katoa o ui ana ki a kontou 
ki tc mea e tumanakohia atu noi c koutou; ki.i mahaki ano ia to ngakau, 
kia wchi." 

Pubake Tuatahi: 

K utu whakatckau ana aliau, a e hiahia ano hoki toku 
wairau ki te herein. 

Tuatahi : hei utu i aku nam a. 

Tuarua: hei hoko kni. kahu, me tc utu i te kura mo toku 

whanau. 
Tuatoru: he mea c alici ai aliau tc kohi i nga whakapapa 

o okn tupuna, me te inahi whakaora hoki i ;i ratou. 
Maraki 3: 10 "Maun katoatia tc whakatckau ki roto ki te ton, kia 
wliai kai ai toku wliaro. wailio hoki tonci hci whakainatautan moku. o 
ai ta [howa p oga mano, mc kahorc o tuwhera i ahau nga matapihi o to 
rangi ki a koutou, n ka ringitin he mauaaki ki :i koutou, a kia kore ra 
ano he takotorauga. " 



Mei 26, T926 TE KARERE ITS 

Putake Tuarua: 

E utu whakatckau ana a ban he mca U i n whai li«>.-i ,-ii all an 
i roto i toku malii. 

Tuatahi: c korc c taea e au tc main ko au anakc. 
Tuarua: e whakapono ana ahau Id tc kotahitanga <> nga 
vvhakaaro nga hoa malii, a e korc e taea e au 1*' mahi 
ki tc korc e pera. 
M.-imki 3: 11 Ka riria te kaiwhakapnreho, kei he i Q ia nga hua <> 
t<» koutou ouuonc; e korc ano e ma re re iioa nga hua p ta koutou vvaina i 
tc maaia, c ai ta [hown o nga nemo. " 

1 Koriniti 3: (5-7. "Xaku i whakatoo, tin Aporo i whakamakuku; na 
tc Atn.-i ia i moa kia tupu. lleoi he korc aoa ilia tc kaiwhakato, he korc 
upa iho te kaiwhakaninkuku, engari te Atua nana nci i mea kia tupn." 

Putake Tuatoru: 

10 utu whakatckau ana ahau lie mea no toku hiahia kia 
tika, kia ppno. \a toku Ariki lioki tc wabi whakatckau o 
aku tnca. 

1 Koriniti 10: _<'». "Xn te Ariki hoki to whenua, mo oua tini mca.'-' 

Ako. mc nga Kawc. 119: l. "'I mini <> tona, k<> te hunga katoa koa 
(•ti te whakatckau mo utu ia tau, ia tau i tc wahi whakatckau <• aga 
i.inni o puta ana mai ki a rat on i te tau; a ka waiho tenei hoi turc ma 
tnku Tohungafanga ki to iwi mo ako touu atu, e ai ta te Ariki." 

Ruka Hi: 10-11. "Ko ia c pono aua i te mea aohinohi rawa, e pono 
:ni<» i te moa uui: ko ia o koro o tika i tc mea aohinohi rawa, c korc o 
tika i tc moa uui. Na ki te kali >rc i pono ta koutou mahi ki tc tuonga ho, 
■ i;i wai o tuku ki u koutou to Uionga | .'" 

Maraki 3: 8. " !•: tahac ranoi te tangata i ta tc Atual Heoi kua 
tahnctia taku o koutou. A <• men na kontou. Il«- pehea ta inatou tnhao 
i i :.u.' Ko nga whakatckau rn, me nga whaknhcre." 
Pa take Tuavvha: 

h] utu whakatckau ana ahau lie mea no toku liinhia kia 
ii ro mai ki a au lie kainga tupu i punga i tc whenua. 

Matiu 5: 5, " ICn koo tc bungu ngakau mahaki: ka rjro hoki i r 
ratou tc w henun. ' ' 

I! • :, i I !: - ' '■ 

Uulu .: mc ! ■ 

Li !<■ mca i tctnhi wnhi hci tukungn ako inn koutou, I 

; hau, ki tc tango i n koutou ki ahau; kii ho ni liokl I ton ki l< 

o noho ni ahau." 

\ ko mc ii gn Knwi 



i;(» I E K IRERE Mei 26, [926 

kahoro lie wnhi tc takiwa i kore ho kingitnnga; :i kahoro he kingi 
i korc lie takiwa, ahakon kiugitangn nui, men iti rami. A koa h am 
ki nga kingunuga katoa he lure; ti ki nga lure l;at(.a kcJ tenn, kei 
li 11. 1 tor.a raana me tona tikanga." 

Ako. nio ugn [vawe. ■ > .:>. "Me tenei ano, he p. .no taku mea aiu 
mi ki q koutoiij kei Ic pupuri te whouua i te li.ro o to kiLgi»ai:g:i " 
Tikitiki-o-Rangi (Cclcsdal Kingdom), ina hoki kei te rite loan i 11 ia 
to mchua tona hangangn, a kali, re c takaki i tc ture." 

Ako. me aga Kawe. 119-0. "Ko taku kr.pu tenei ki a k on ton, ki 
tc kahoro tokn iwi e pupnri i tenei tare (te whakatckau), c whakatapii 
ia\\a ranei i taua turc, nia konci hoki ka meinga ai tenei wlienna, hoi 
Hi. ma ki an, hei tauilga iho 1110 aku tare me aku u liaka wak:. n^a, lie una 

e lino tapu rawa ai, nana, ho pono taku e mea uei ki a koutou, e k< re 
ia. e meingn hei Eliona ki a kouti a.'' 

Ako. me nga K'awe. 88: 21. "A ko te huugn kahcrc i vvhakatapua 
ma roto i te tare kaa hoatu e ahau ki a koutou, a ra te tare a te Knraili, 
ka noho ratou ki tctahi atu kingitanga, ara ki te Kii;gitanga o aga 
Rangi Ta Halm (terrestrial kingdom), ki te k< re i rcLa ki te kingil 

Bangi-Nui ( teles iial kingdom)." 

Putake Tuarima: 

\l u t u whakatekau ana ahau ho mea no toku liiahia kin 

1 ;iiiii toku ingoa i loto <> ta te Rente pukapuka o te ora. 

VVhakakitenga 21: 27. "E kore ano e tomo ki rotm te.alii mea 
whakanoa, e malii ana ranei i te mea w lia ka rihariiia, i te teka ranei: ko 
tc hunga anakc kua o.i te tuhituhi ki to to Rome puknpuha o tc ora." 

Ako. me ne;a Kav.o. N.~>: 5. "Kia kore ano hoki C kiloa lalou 
ingoa, aga iugoa ranei o aga aiatua, nga ingoa ranei o nga tamariki e 
tuhituhi iho i roto i tc pukf.puka o Lo tare o Le Aum. c ai ta te Ariki o 
nga Mmiio." 

Ako. me nga Kiawc. 85: !'. "A, ko ratou katoa kali, re nci o ki.cn 
ki roto i te pukapuka o tc whnkamaharatanga, c koio e whlwhi ki te 

v alii tap i i tana ra, Engari ka patua ratou ki tvacuga, ka whiwhi n",ata- 
lii'.ia a rat<. a wahi mo ratoa kei roto i te hunga wliakapono-korc, ki te 
wahi o te auelanga mc tc teteataugj o nga nilii." 

Putake Tr.aono: 

E utu whakatckau ana ahau, e kore hoki ahau <■ pai kin 
rite ki nga ta •u c kotia a ka panga ki te ahi. 

M;;tia 1".: 24-30. "Tenei ake ano totalli kupu whakaritc i makaa e 
ia ki a rate u, i mea ia, Ka rite te rangatiratanga o tc raugi ki tctahi 
tangata i rui te purapura pai ki tana maara:A i nga tangita o moc ana, 
ka haere mai tona koa-riri, rui iho he taru kino waonga witi, a hearo 
ana.'' A ka mea !e rp.ngatirr i !*i ana por.onga, "Tukua kia tupu 



Mci 26. 1923 TE KARERE 177 

tahi, a taea noatia tc kotinga . . . ka mea ahua ki aga 

kaikokoti, Matun huihuia nga tarn, . . . kin t:ihui:i; ko te 
witi in me kolii ki toku vvharc witi." 

Maraki ! : 1. "Ta tc mea, nana, kci tc ha ere mai tc ra rite nci <» 
tona ngilia kci to tc oumu; na, tc hunga vvhakakakc katoa, mc tc hunga 
katoa C tnahi ana i tc kino hei kakau witi; a ka taliuna e tc la mcakc 
1.1'i ]),Ha, c ai ta Ilioua o llga mano. c korc alio he pakiaka. he inangn •' 
mahuc ki a ratou. " .... 

A.ko. mc nga Kawo. ('»!: •_';:. "Nana, tenci wahi e karangntia ana 
ko tenci ra (tae noa ki tc hacranga r.iai tc Tama a tc tangata) a he 
pono he ra tenci no te patunga tapu, a he 1:1 md tc whakatckau <> taku 
iwi; no tc mea ko ia e vvliakatekauria ana <• korc c tahr.nn (a Tana 
hacrengn mai)." 

Ko te Merekara o nga Karoro 

[Ic men tangohia mai i te llitori o te Hahi "Essentials of Church 

History," pages K>7, M58, tin Hohepa 1". Mete Apatoro i tnlii. 

na Eru T. Kupa i whakamaori. 

TE MATE PIHAREINGA. 

Kua whakaiiHitiiniiitu kc tc raumati ka tac nga Paconia 
ki I *t a i tc tan 1847, he tino iii lioki nga luia i puta mai roto 
i ;i ratou kai i tanu ;ii. hcoi ano ko ctahi purapura tacwa mania 
11 i. Kci tc tumanako ratou ki nga ngakinga <> tc tau L849 lici 
ivliakaora i a ratou i tc matc-kai. H torn nga inirn kani rakau 
i vvliakaturia c ratou, kotalii tc inira kauoro kanga, witi, nic 
era atu kai pcra. Ko tc nui <> tc walii i maliia c ratou hci 
niaara kai c rinia mano kotahi ran c torn tckau ma torn cka, 
c \\\ ;i rati o ana cka i tiria ki tc v ii i. I tc mea kua <»1 i i a ratou 
tc hanga he ara wai ki ;i ratou inaara lici ivliakamakuku, no 
rcira whakaaro ana ratou U ra c tino Kua tc kai i 8 ratou. E nui 
ana tc koa nga lln iga Tapu, R pai ana hold a ratou luaara 
katoa. Ka whakawkctai ano hoki ratou ki tc Ariki me tc mahi 
ano I:! !■ • roto i te ngakau papaku. I nga marania Mci mc 
1 1 mc ku k • ■ .•! ;•■■ 

! in.. tenci mat< ki ii| .1 1 ukinotan 1 >.|>n 

kino. I !• 1 iiri 1 piharcii ilio i iiga 

1.1I1.1 tuaunga ki iiga rao ao ano lie tana tino nui c tvliakatutu 
ana ki Ic kokiri, na ka tahuri « n. i 

inaara kai Ka pan l« na \. aiii \..\a 111 k. ki I. -J .1 1 ■ i al .1. 



I/,; TK KARERK Mei 26 i 26 

rawa hoki c roa kua mootii, kua rito ki lc koraha titohca. K 
ora ai tc iwi i tc mate-kai, me inahi ra ano tetahi tikanga hci 
vvhaka:autu i ta ratou pakanga. Ka o!:o ako te iwi katoa, k.i 
uru atu ki tenoi whawhai rerekc tc tangata ki tc ugarara. Ka 
karia e ratou he awa karapoti i nga maara, ka tukua atu lie 
wai ki roto hci pupu/i atu i nga ugarara, otira kore rawa i 
taca. Pera ano ki tc alii koi'o rawa i noho atu. I whakama- 
tauria ano ki tc arai atu ruo hauliau ki tc rakau, ki Lc pumma, 
me era atu patu pcuci, otira ahakoa he alia tc aliua karo c 
v\ hakaarongia ana e tc tangata hci arai atu, kore rawa he 
alia. Kore rawa he painga tc iwi kainga ki nga ugarara nei. 

TE LIEREKARA NGA KARORO. 

I te mca c pan katoa nga kai, kua tau mai lie pouri nui ki 
nga LIunga Tapu, otira i taua wa ano ka tirohia atu pango 
tonu te rangi i te karoro, ka rcre mai ki runga akc i nga 
maara tangitangi hacrc ai. Kua wbakaaro ettihi ratou he 
pakanga ke ano tenci, tera hoki e vvliakapana c nga karoro 
nga toenga mai a nga piliarcinga, otira kaore i pera. Kaorc e 
taca tc kautc nga rupu karoro i whakatau iho, a ka tiinata 
lc kai i r.ga piliarcinga, ka pakanga hoki ko nga karoro ki 
nga piliarcinga, kia ora ai nga kai. Ka kai ana tc karoro kin 
ta; 1 ra ano lei tc korokoro tc ki, ka rcre atu ai ki nga awaawa 
inn wai ai, katalii ka ruaki mai ai ki waho, ka hoki ano ki lc 
pakanga. lie penci tonu tc mahi i a i:\ ra tac noa Id te pannga 
o nga piliarcinga. Ka wliakawhctai tc iwi i konci, no tc mca 
he inci'ekara tenci ki a ratou. Ac ra. tino arolia tc Ariki ki a 
ratou, a ka tukua mai nga karoro ano lie anahcra aroha, hci 
whakaora hoki i a ratou. Mai ano i taua wa tac mai ki naianci 
c rite ana he maun tapu te karoro ki nga Hunga Tapu nga 
Ka o Muri Nei, lie manu whakaora hoki. He mca paahi hoki 
he tui'e hci tiaki i enci manu, ki te patu kari noa tc tangata 
ka eke he lino lie nui ki runga ki a ia. I tc L3 o nga ra 
Hepctcma i te tau 101,'), lie Pohatu Whakamaharatanga mo 
tenci i hurahia ki te Pa Tote. Ko tenci pohatu e karangatia 
ana ko tc Pohatu Whakamaharatanga Karoro, na Mahonorai 
AT. laanga i hanga, lie mokopuna hoki ia na Pirikamu laanga. 



Mei 26, 1926 T£ KARERE ^_____ 

Ki nga Kai-Kauwiiau te Pei Whairangi 
Ki Te Karere: Mau e panui atu tenei panuitanga ki nga 
kai-kauwhau katoa o te Pei Whairangi. 

I te mea kua kore he hui takiwa mo tatou i roto i enei 
marama e toru, me haere ano koutou i roto i enei rnarama e 
toru e tu mai nei ki nga wahi i whakaritea mo koutou i tera 
kuata, kia tino pai ake nga ripoata mo to tatou hui ka tu 
nei i a Akuhata. Na to koutou teina, 

R. R. Stevenson 
Tumuaki Pariha 



E 



"He rangi tc ao 
k a u h i a t 
he huruhuru te inanu 
ka rere." 






/ 



Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE 



NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA 



Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto aim kei te tari o te Miliaria hei lo- 

konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mca e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. 
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 

New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather no 

Book of Mormon, Cloth 26 & 7-6 

" " " , Half Leather 90 

" " " .Leather 10-0 & 150 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0 

" ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 
MA02I BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 20 

" " , Leather 30 

Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 

" " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in I II-6 

" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 

" " , Leather 15-0 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-J 

" " " " " " ", Leather 15 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer I 
S JNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0 

What Jesus Taught 50 

Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 3-6 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6 

SONG BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 

" " " .Leather 6 6 

Dese ret Song Books, Cloth 30 

" " " , Leather 6 6 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS 

Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3 

Vitality of Mormonism 4-6 

Sc'entific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 6-0 

Restoration of the Gospel, IV idlsoe 40 

Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6 

Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6 

Tp^us the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 

Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9 

Bible Ready Reference 2-0 
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 6-0 



KO J H. VINIK1NI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
.1. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. P- 




I^ariftp 



WuhMiga XX. 

o o o — o 



Thine 23, 1926. 
-O- O O—O - 



Nama VI 

O O O 

I 




I'o le Ngsherc Ttpu 



"V\ te hrpa telahi o koutou i te ma- 

11 tauranga, me inoi ia ki ie Atua f 

e homai pui nei ki te katoa, kahore 

hoki ana tawai mai ; a ka homai ki a 

ia." Hemi 1 : 5. 



o 
o 
u 



o 
o 



O- 



-o — o 00 — 00 00- 







"C& KflRSRS" 



WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 





Wha 


rangi. 


Kl TE ETITA 






He Manaakitanga 




207 


He Ripoata Hui Tau 




198 


He Ripoata mo te Rao nga Whaea 






Note Kirikiri 




203 


No Korongata 




205 


No te Mahia 




204 


He Ripoata no Korongata 






Ko te Matenga o Koro Waerea 




206 


"Ma nga Hua ka Mohiotia ai" 




206 


Mo te Ra o nga \\ haea 




205 


KO NCA RONCO KORERO 







Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona roj 

KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 

E Mahi ana Tatou mo te Aha? 2(k) 

He W'hak'aahua Pai 200 
Ko nga Mahi a te Kura Hapati hei 

1'ainga ma Tatou 2 r V 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 194 

MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Concert Recitation 180 

Intermediate Department 187 

Korero a Ngakau 180 

Kindergarten Department 100 

Maori Theological 1 80 

Pakeha Theological 183 

Postlude 179 

Prelude 179 

Sacrament Gem 179 




Kaww 



WAHA.JGA 20 WErtErfEl, HUNE 23. 1926. NAMA 6 

Maori Agricultural ColUge Hastings, H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o ISiu Tireni, 

Hani o ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri JNei. 

Tukua mai o kcutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings. 

Ko te utu mo TE KAItEEE i te tau e rima hercni (5/-). 

KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. 
file matua utu mo tou pepa ka whiwhi ai. 

/. H. Timkini, Tnmuaki Mihana 
Mariana K. Ewatana, htita. Tiata Witdiua, hiita Hoa Awliina. 

Ko te Kai-R.poata Te Tuati Mc/ia 

Ko uga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). 

Wiremu A. Koura i.ru T. kupa 



MAHI KURA HAPATI. 
Prelude. 



After Cowex. 



*E4z 



2S 



3s=mmm 



t—$r 



■+■*■ ~. +- + 



UliltiHi 



SACRAMENT GEM FOR JULY, 1926 

"In memory oi' the broken flesh 

We eat the broken bread ; 
And witness with the cup afresh, 
Our faith in Christ, our Head." 
Postlude. 




1 !•: k VRERE Hune 23, 1920 



tONCERT RECITATION IOK JILY, 1926. 

(Luke, Pourlli Chapter, Fourth Verse.) 
i Jesus answered him, saying, [1 is written, That 
shall hot live by bread alone, but by every word of God." 

K0RERQ A NGAKAU MO HURAE, 1920. 

I aRuka, 4: 4. 
"Na ka whakahoki a Diu ki a ia, ka men. Kua oil te 
tuhituhi, B kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, engari i nga 
kupu katoa a te Atua." 



MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



Ratapu tuatalii, Hurae 4, 1926. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-FUKTJ. 

Na li^ia W. V/iLshira i vvliakamaori. 

Putakc: Ko nga whakahauhjiu a te tauira i whikatako- 
toi ia nei e [h-u hei main \ i a tatou. 

TA HAT ANA WHAEAMATAUTAU&ANGA I A IUJ. 

He iti rawa atu te korcro mo tenei whakamatautauranga 
1 atald engari kei roto ia tetal.i whakaaturanga tino nui ki a 
tatoii. Ko te kai-whakamatautau ko taua Rutiwha ra ano ko te 
xama a tc Ata nana nei i aralii letalii wahi nga mano te 
llangi, i arahi ke. Koia auo hoki te mea i whakaiaatautau nei 
i a I \v i i roto i te Kari Erene, me te mea i hanga mi i to 
kohurutanga Kaina. Nana hoki a Rawiri te mea k:.li 1 i 
ai, nana hoki a Horomona te mea matau i whakapoke, nana 
hoki a ilopa te mea tika i whakahe ki te aroaro te Atua. Ka 
haere tonu a Hatana ka malii i ana whakamatautauranga i nga 
Ilunga Tapu me nga hunga katoa hoki e aroha ana ki te Atua. 

1 whakaara pakanga a 1 hit ana ko tc take i hiahia ia kia 
meinga hei kingi hei tu i te turanga te. Atua. Kei te hiahia. 
tonu ia hei kingi ia a kei te mahi tonu ia i nga wa katoa ki te 
whakaniate i te kaha te Atua. lie mea tino matau ia a he nui 
nga wa e ta< a ana e ia nga Hunga Tapu tino kaha. Kei te jitiro 
tonu ia ki tatou ngoikoretan^a, n meite kitea e ia tetahi Wahi 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE l8l 

ka huri ia ka mahi i reira e kore e mutu, a, kia peia ra ano e 
t:itou kia ngaro. 

1 whakaritea e ia te taima hei whakamatautau i a Ihu, ko 
to taima i a Ihu kua ngoikorc i te noho-pukutanga. He wha- 
kaatu tenei i tona matauranga. E mahi te tangata ahakoa he 
aha hei whakaora i tona hiakai. I hokona e Ehau tona mata- 
muatanga mo te kai. Ka whawliai nga tangata ano he 
kararehe mo te kai. I matau a Hatana ki enei mea 
katoa i te wa i haere mai ai ia ki a te Karaiti i a Ia e hiakai 
ana, a ka ki ia, "Ki te mea ko te Tama koe a te Atua, kiia 
iho kia meinga enei kohatu hei taro." 

E kite ai tatou i te kaha tenei whakamatautauranga me 
titiro iho tatou ki a tatou ano — ano to tatou hiahia ki te kai — 
nui atu i era atu mea mehemea kei te hiakai tatou. Ko te ture 
o to tatou Hahi me utu tatou i tatou whakatekau, me haere 
ki nga huihuinga te Hahi, engari i etahi wa ka nui pea te 
uaua ki te waiho i a tatou mahi rawe mo enei mea. Engari 
meite haere tatou i runga i nga tauira kua whakatakotoria nei 
e Ihu mo tatou ka taea noatia iho e tatou te takahi nga whaka- 
matautauranga a Hatana. 

Ka whakahoki a Ihu ki a Hatana ka mea, "Kua oti te 
tuhituhi, E kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, engari i nga 
kupu katoa e puta mai ana i te mangai te Atua." 

Kei te mohio ranei tatou tera e kore te tangata e ora meite 
kahore te taro o te rangi? Me matua whai aroha te tangata 
me te pono, katahi ia ka ora, he taro anake e kore ia e ora. 

Me whakapoto e te kai-whakaako o te karaihe te taima mo 
te rehana kia whai taima ai nga memea o te karaihe kia korero 
i nga manaakitanga kua tau ki runga ki tena ki tena i puta mai 
nei ma roto i te noho-puku. 

Ratapu tuarua, Hurae II, 1926. 

Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti 

Te Kaupapa: Ko te Kawenata Hou 

Na Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rapata Panapu i whakarite. 

AKORANGA 17. 

"Ko te Tautohetohenga mo te Kotinga." 

I. Ko te ritenga te kotinga. 

(a) Ko te kawenata i waenganui i a te Atua me nga 



I S 2 1 E K A R E U K Ihi.'K- 23, 1926 

Fharaia. Ken. 'hi 17: 9-10. 

ku nga men e tika ana kia kotia. 

1. Ko nga tamariki lane katoa e warn nga ra te 
kaumatuatanga. Kenehi 17: 12. 

2. Ko nga taurekareka etahi atu iwi i hokona niai 
ki te moni. Kciiclii 17 : L2-13. 

.'). Ko nga tauiwi e liiahia nei kia kai i te liakari 
te Kapcnga. Ekoruhe 12 : 4-8. 
(c) Ko te kawenata qio ake tonu atu. Kenehi 17: 9-13. 
id) Ko te tapanga me te kotfriga i a Ihu. Ruka 2: 21. 
(e) K<> nga tUFC a Mohi he mea wehe ke na te Karaiti. 
Matin 5: 17; Karatia 3: 24-26. 
II. Ko te tautohetohenga — nga kotinga ki nga kotinga-kore. 

(a) Ko te kotinga me te whakaoranga. Mahi 15: 1. 

(b) Ko te runanga i Eiruharania. Mahi 15: 2-5. 

(c) Ko te karonga a Pita i nga tauiwi nga kotinga-kore. 
Mahi ir ): 7-11. 

(d) Ko te tohutohu.'ki nga tauiwi. Mahi 15: 19-29. 



Ratapu tuatoru, Hurae 18, 19_6 
AKORANGA 18, 

Ko te Haerenga Tuarua Paora i te Mihana. 



Te wehenga Paora raua ko Panapa. 

(a) Ko to raua liiahia lie torotoro i nga hahi. 15: 2G, 

(b) Ko te lake te tautohe. Mahi 15: 37-39; 13: 13. 

(c) Ko te haerenga Panapa raua ko .Iloani Maka ki 
Kaiperu. .Mahi 15: 39. 

1. Ko te wahi i whanau ai a Panapa. Mahi 4: 36. 

2. Ko te piringa nga Karaitiana tera takiwa. 
Mahi 11 : 19-20. 

(d) A Paora raua ko I lira i Iliria i Kirikia. Mahi 15:41 ; 
15: 23. 

I Rerepe, i Raihitara, Raikonia. 

(a) Te tutakitanga Paora ki a Timoti. Mahi 16: 1. 

(b) Ko te kotinga Timoti. Main 16: 3; I. Koriniti 9: 20. 

(c) Ko nga whakahaunga a te Rununga Hiruharama ki 
nga Tauiwi ; Mahi 16: 4-5. 

d ) K'o te whakakitenga ki a Paora mo Makeronia. Mahi 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 183 

16: 0-10. 

Ratapu tuawha, Hurae ?5, 1926 
AKORANGA 19. 

Ko te Haerenga Tuarua Paora i te Mihana. Te roanga atu. 

. T. A Paora me ana hoa i Makeronia. 

(a) I Piripi i te pa nui, Mahi 16 : 32. 

(b) Ko te whakatahuritanga me te iriiringa o Riria me 
tona whare katoa. Mahi 16 : 14-15. 

(c) Ko te peinga te wairua kino e te mana te Tohu- 
ngatanga. Mahi 16 : 16-18. 

(d) Ko te patunga o Paora raua ko Hira me te makanga 
ki te whare herehere. Mahi 16 : 22-24 ; II. Koriniti 
11 : 23-27; Whakaritea ki a Mohia 17: 12-20. 

(c) Ko to raua putanga i te whare herehere. Mahi 16: 
25-26 ; Whakaritea ki a Arami 14 : 25-29. 
II. Ko te whakatahuritanga o te kai-tiaki herehere Piripi. 

(a) Ko tana whakamatakutanga me nga whakahoki kupu 
a Paora. Mahi 16 : 27-31. 

(b) Kaore e nui te whakapono anake, engari me iriiri. 
Mahi 16: 32-33; Korerotia te upoko 30 Niwhai 
Tuarua. 

(c) Te matakutanga nga kai-whakawa, no te mea he 
tangata a Paora raua ko lliria no te pa Roma. 
Mahi 16: 37-40. 



PAKHH4 THHOLOGICAL 

"GRKAT BIBLICAL CHARACTHRS" 

First Sunday, July 4, 1926. 

Uniform Fast Day Lesson 

The example of Jesus: what il bids us do. 

.Jesus Tempted. 
This firsi temptation, ;is reported by Matthew (4:3, l i 
immediately following His forty days' fast, and while He was 
still in the wilderness, does not occupy much space, and yet 
contains n message <»r the most vital importance to every Living 
soul. The Tempter was the same "Son <>f the Morning" 



T! K. A KKKK Himc 23, I926 

Lucifer— who led away one-third of tlic hosts of heaven; who 
led Eve in the Garden of Eden; who made Cain a 
murderer. As Papini says: "He suborned David the strong, 
corrupted Solomon the wise, accused Job the righteous before 
the throne of God. And Satan tempts and always will tempt 
ail tlie Saints, all those who love God." 

He has never abandoned the determination to rule, that 
was behind his rebellion, nor is he yet ready to admit defeat, 
but is always on the watch to tempt and destroy by use of all 
the wiles of the most subtle of all intellects. 

Out- weak points are his vantage places of attack, nor does 
he retire so Long as we permit him to remain. 

Subtlety is shown in the time chosen for this temptation, 
when Jesus was alone and weakened through the long fast. 
"Satan had chosen the most propitious time tor his evil purpose. 
YYhai will mortals not do, to what lengths have men no, gone, 
.11 assuage the pangs of hunger? Esau bartered h s birthri{ hi 
for a meal. Men have fought like brutes tor food. All this 
Satan knew when he came to Christ in the hour of extreme 
physical need, and said unto Him: 'If thou be the Son of God, 
command these stones 1o be made bread'/' (Tahnage.) 

in putting it in this way there was a double appeal to the 
human — the challenge of the "It"' and to extreme hunger. If 
we turn our thoughts inward for self-examination, we cannot 
fail to recognise the power of temptation, and that we, too, are 
subject to similar ones. As mcmbeis '>f God's Church it is our 
duty to offer private and family prayers morning and nighl ; 
to observe, for instance, this day by lasting; to pay an honest 
tithing even though we seem to be deprived of luxuries long 
desired'; to attend Sunday School or Pr : oathood meetings 
requiring our arising earlier than our desires indicated ; to attend 
Sacramenl meetings instead of taking an automobile ride. 

Je as answered Satan, saying: " It is written, man shall 
noi liv< by bread alone, but by every word thai proceedeth out of 
;hc mouth of < lod." 

Do we realise thai "No man can live without heavenly 
bread .' " "Man does no' live by bread alone, but by love, fervour, 
and trulh." 

The Example of Jesus: whal it bids us do. 

The stress o! this lesson is on the Ias1 line above. Teachers 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 185 

should see to it that 1he preliminary presenting of the facts of the 
story occupies but a few minutes, and that the balance of the 
time shall be given to class members in answering the question 
"What it bids us do," testifing to the joy and other blessings 
which have followed obedience to His example. 

Each teacher should work out illustrations and applications 
that shall peculiarly fit his class. 

Read Tannage's "Jesus the Christ," pages 127-129 ; Farrar's 
"Life of Christ," pages 63-70; Papini's "Life of Christ," pages 
63-66. 

Second Sunday, July II, 1926 

Lesson 15. Joseph as a Ruler in Egypt. 

Text : Genesis, Chapters 41-50. 

Objective: To show how the great are made greater by 
maintaining faith in God and by serving Him. 

Supplementary References: References as given. 
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation : 
1. Joseph made a ruler in Egypt second only to the king, 
or, as the Lord says: "Prime Minister." 

1. Time, 1700 B.C. 

2. His success at once manifest. 

3. He married the daughter of the high priest of the 
god of On. 

II. As ruler in preparing for the famine he visited with al! 
the people, advising them to save. 

1. They did not follow his advice. 

2. lie stored all surplus. 
ill. When the I amine came he — 

1. Sold the people corn for money. When their money 
was gone he — 

2. Sold the people corn for Hocks. When their Hocks 
were gone he — 

'>. Sold the people corn tor land. 

4. At the end of tin 1 famine the king held .ill moneys, 
Hocks and land. 

5. He rented back tin 4 (locks and hind ;ii a good rental 
and made everybody happy. 



1 86 TE KARERE Ilnne 23. 1926 

Questions for TeacLeis. 

1. Djcs religion add to the power of statesmanship* 
Tliustraie. 

2. Name:; three points upon which .Joseph demonstrated 
great strength of character, and explain why. 

Third Sunday, July 18, 1926 
LESSON 16. JOSEPH AS SON, BROTHER AND FATHER. 

Txt: Genesis, chapters 42-50. 

Objective: To show how love and faith in God lifts 
man above littleness and sin. 

I. The famine required Joseph's brothers to go to Egypt. 

1. They come to him for food. 

2. Joseph's temptation to punish them for revenge 
because of their earlier treatment of him. 

3. He overcomes the temptation and as a servant of God 
arises above himself as Prime Minister. 

II. He receives his father with great affection. 

1. His kindness to him evidence of his respect for him. 

2. He took Jacob's body back to the promised land for 
burial. 

III. His sons, Ephraim and Manasseh. 

In spite of environment and a pagan mother, lie rear's 
them in a knowledge of and faith in God. 
Questions fcr Teachers. 

1. Is marriage outside one's own religious belief condusive 
of right living and happiness? (Jive reasons. 

2. Give five reasons why Joseph was a great leader and 
why we consider him as an ideal. 

Fourth Sunday, .lu'y 25. 1026 
LESSON 17. MOSES' BIRTH— EARLY MANHOOD. 

.Text: Exodus, Chapter 1-4. 

Objective: God is mindful of His leaders and trains them 
long and well for really good service. 
I. The birth and boyhood of Moses. 
1. Conditions in Egypt. 



Hune 23, 1920 TE KARERE 1 87 

2. Time — latter part of 16th century, or the beginning 
of the 15th century, B.C. 

0. Israel increasing alarmingly. 

4. The order to kill Israel's babies. 

5. Moses saved by daughter of Pharaoh. 
II. The training and education of Moses. 

1. In the palace of the Pharaoh. 

2. As leader in his armies. 

3. An associate in his wise men. 
II. J\ loses driven to Midian. 

1. He killed an Egyption task master. 

2. He fled to Midian. 

3. In Midian in training for forty years. 

4. Supposed to have written Genesis there. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. What two incidents in the early life of Moses impress 
you most and why? 

2. What was the effect upon Moses of living so long in 
Midian? Compare with the preparation required of latter-day 
leaders. 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 
"THE BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, July 4, 1926 

Uniform Fast Day Lesson 

Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 183 

Teachers, as they study carefully the suggestive outline will 
find a wealth of material out of which to construct an interesting 
lesson. 

All boys and girls in our department know the call of hunger. 
When they come home from school, they are "starving,'' al- 
though they have eaten lunch only a few hours before. They 
Can realise the force of this temptation. 

The lessons they can draw are numerous. They can Forego 
food on Fast Day to strengthen their own character and to give 
to the needy. They can forego seeming pleasures during the 
week in ov(\i>\- to bc ] more efficient in school work. 



1 88 TE KARERI£ Hune 23, 1926 

Physic;'.! well-being upon physical properties taken into 
our bodies. Abstinence from harmful, or excessive amounts 01* 
unharml'ul foods, conducts to greater physical strength, 

Boys and girls, Like Jesus, are tested also in being asked 
to risk their safety or to break away from their ideals or from 
parental counsel for pleasure or tor power. This lesson offers 
an excellent opportunity to discuss the everyday temptations 
that interfere with living up to the Gospel. Have pupils indicate 
what these problems are and then lead them in a discussion of 

l!,om - I. 

Second Sunday, July 1 I, 1926. 
Lesson 15. Enemies of the Church and of the Nation. 

Text : Alma, Chapters 1 to 3. 

Objective: To teach that "every man receive! h wages of 
him whom he Jisteth to obey." (Alma 3:27.) 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation. 

1. The teacher might briefly state the facts concerning 
change in government, as related in Mosiah, 29th Chap. 

2. Special assignments: 

a. Nehor slays (Jideon. (Alma 1:1-15.) 

b. Peace in the Church. (Alma 1:16-31.) 

c. An election held. (Alma 2:1-9.) 

d. Victory through faith. (Alma 2:10-20.) 

e. Amlicites and Lamanites combine. (Alma 2 :21-38.) 

f. The curse of the Amlicites. (Alma 3:1-19.) 

g. Another victory. (Alma 8:20-27.) 

3. Passages to memorise: Alma 1:25, 29, 30 Alma 2:19. 

Ques! on for Teachers. 

1. What strong points stand out in the life of Gideon? 

2. Mention the blessings that came to Alma and his people 
when serving the Lord. 

3. Contrast the condition of those drawn away by Amlici. 

Third Sunday, Jily IS, 1926. 

LESSON Hi. MISSIONARY EXPERIENCES OF ALMA 

AND AMULEK. 

Text: Alma 9th to 15th chapters. 



Huie 23, 1926 TE KARFRE 189 

Objective: To teach that those who serve the Lord even while 
passing through afflictions are sustained by the Spirit of the 
Lord. 

Supplementary References: Acts 12:1-19; 10:13-34; Latter- 
day missionary experiences. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. Chapters 9 to 13 should be carefully read by the teacher, 
and briefly discussed in the class. Special assignments should 
be made to pupils of passages to be read or memorized by them, 
such as Alma 9:26-28; 11-21-40; 13:21-26. 

2. Story of imprisonment of Alma and Amulek for special 
assignment. Alma 14th chapter. 

3. Conversion of Zeczrom. Alma 15:1-12. 

A. Alma and Amulek return to Zarahemla. Alma 15: 
13-18. 

In making special assignments to pupils, teachers should 
wisely choose those who can take longer parts, while the more 
timid pupil may be assigned a short part. Always make assign- 
ment in writing. 

Questions fcr Teachers. 

1. Mention some of the characteristics oc Amulek that 
would class him as a true servant of the Lord. 

2. Discuss the tw T o visits of the same angel to Alma and 
the progress Alma had made between these visits. 

3. Relate briefly a missionary experience similar to some 
that Alma and Amulek had. 

Fourth Sundry, July 25, 1926 
LESSON 17. ALMA AS MISSIONARY. 

Text : Alum chapters 4 to 8. 

Objective: To teach that in giving unselfish service one 
can rejoice even in the midst of trials. 

Suggestions on Preparations and Presentation: 

1. General assignment of text for home reading. 

2. The teacher should give briefly to the class the in- 

structions given by Alma (Alma 5th, 6th and 71 h 
chapters.) 
a. Ask one pupil to memorize and recite Alma 5:46-51, 
and another to recite Alma 7:7-13. 



IQO TIC KARERK Hune 23, 1^26 

1). Experiences of Alma in Ammoniliah. (Alma 8:6-32.) 
e. Opposition of the wicked. (Aima !):1-12.) 
Passages to be memorized: Aima 7:23-24. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. .Mention striking points in Alma's testimony of the di- 
mity of Christ. 

2. AY hat trails in Aima mark him as a great missionary? 



KINDERGARTEN DKPARTMHNT 
First Sanday, July 4, 1926. 

Uniform Fast Day Lesson. 

Subject: The Temptation of Christ. — "Man shall not live 
by bread alone but by every word that proceeded from the mouth 
of God."— Matt. 4:4. 

Text: Luke 4:1-8. 

Objective: Prayer and purity are essential conditions in 
preparing for membership in the Church of Christ. 

Approach: 
I. Christ in the Wilderness. 

. 1. lie goes to prepare for His ministry. 

a. Through prayer. 

b. Through fastings. 

2. lie becomes an hungered. 
The hour of danger. 
II. Christ Tempted by Satan. 

1. Jlis appeal to the appetite (an incentive alluring.) 
a. ''If thou be the Son of God command that these 
si ones be made bread." 
These stones shaped like loaves. 
2. Christ's Reply. 

a. "Man shall not live by bread alone, but by exevy 
word that proceedeth out of the mouth of Cod.'' 

b. The reply made possible as a result. 

(1) Constant prayer. 

(2) Purity j*i. thought and action. 
III. Christ's First Victory, 

1. He gains power over evil. 

a. Through self-renunciation. 

b. When Satan turns to a new plan of appeal. 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 191 

2. He becomes one step nearer in being prepared for His 
ministry. 

3. He sets a powerful example for others. 
Application: Every one of us must get ready to help our 

Heavenly Father. What do we do every night when we go to 
bed, and every morning when we get up, that keeps us near 
to our Father in Heaven? When we are angry and naughty, 
words want to come into our mouth. What shall we try to do? 

Second Sunday, July 1 1, 1926 

Topic : ' ' Father 's Day. ' ' 

Text: Ex. 20:12; Deu. 5:16; Luke 2:51; Proverbs 1:8, 15:5 
23 :22. 

References: Juvenile Instructor, May, 1919, pp. 240-243, 
very good material; April, 1919, p. 452; March, 1921, p. 155, 
extra good; Sept., 1921, p. 501. 

Objective: By honouring and obeying our earthly father we 
are obeying and honouring our Heavenly Father. 
I. Our Horn's 
Parents. 
Father. 
II. Father's Love for Family. 

1. lie sacrifices to earn a living. 
<; . Is awa\ from home. 

!:. Works hard. 

c. Out in all kinds e£ weather. 

d. Away early and late. 

2. .Why he works. 

To earn money. 

( 1 ) For food. 

(2) For clothes. 

(3) For shelter. 

III. How We Can Show Our Love. 

1. By being obedient. 

a. Doing the things we know he would wanl us 1o. 

b. By being the kind of boys and girls in Sunday 
School, etc., that he wants us to be. 

2. By being helpful in the home. 
a. Helping with the chores. 



192 TE KARERE Hune 23. 1926 

(1) Carrying eoal. 

(2) Carrying wood. 

(3) Carrying water, 
b. Deeds of kindness. 

(1) Getting father's slippers. 

(2) Running to get the paper. 

3. Patting our arms around his neck and kissing him. 

Suggestions: Prepare for this Sunday as you did for 
Mother's Day, letting different children participate. Invite the 
fathers, and singsongs, recite poems, and tell stories, all of which 
can be obtained from the references given. 

Stimulate children to appreciate fathers as much as mothers, 
that they, too, are God-given, only they arc not with us to watch 
over us as our Mothers are. They have to earn the living. 

Songs: "Daddy's Home Coming," p. 38, in Francis Iv. 
Thomassen ; Second verse of ''Father's Care," Patty Hill, p. 74. 

Let children suggest what they can do; chop wood, carry 
coal, etc. 

Third Sunday, .July 18, 1926 

Subject : Father Lehi and His Fami.y. 

Text: Lesson 51, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten"; 
1 Nephi 2; 3:1-9; 5;1-U; 7:1-5; 10 8-10; 16-26-29; 17:1-6. 

Objective: The Lord blesses a. id directs those who try to do 
His will. 

Suggestions: Why did the Lord ask Lehi to preach to the 
people of .Jerusalem, when He knew that by doing this Lehi might 
endanger his life? 

What is there in I Nepl.I 2:4 which causes us to feel that 
Lehi and his family sacrificed much to do the will of Cod? IT ->w 
did the Lord direct Lehi (1) in escaping the destruction of 
Jerusalem. (2) In finding his way to the wilderness. (3) In 
obtaining the lecords of his forefathers? 

The Lord made Lehi a promise that he should have many 
descendants. What plan did He direct to make this possible? 
Describe the Liahona and how it operated. Name some ways 
in which Lehi and the members of his family did the will of God. 
Name one way in which Nephi listened to the wishes of his father. 
Which wishes were also the desires of his Faihar in Hya\cn. 



Hune 23, 192J TE KARERE 192 

What are some ol: the things our parents ask us to do? How 
do we respond 1 ? 

Songs : " 1 )addy ? s Home Coming, " * i Love at Home, ' ' 
Deseret S.S. Songs. 

Rest Exercise: A follow up of last Sunday. Have the 
children tell of what their father does to earn the money with 
v. hich to buy their food and clothes, and the comforts of life. 
Dramatize the various occupations as the children tell them. 
For instance, at the suggestion, "My Daddy is a farmer,'' 
dramatize plowing the ground, sowing the seeds, cutting the 
grain. "My Daddy is a Shoemaker, ' ' dramatize the repairing 
of the shoes — cut the leather, sew it, hammer in the nails, etc. 

Fourth Sunday, July 25, 1926. 

Subject: Nephi Obtains Food for the Family. 

Text: Lesson 52, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten''-; 
I Nepl.i 16:14-32. 

Objective: God blesses those who strive earnestly to help 
others. 

Suggestions: When Nephi and his brothers were striving to 
obtain food the second time for the family, what accident hap- 
pened ? 

How did the hunters Ceel when they returned to cam])? 

How did the members of the family, even Lehi, express their 
feelings of disappointment ? 

What stand did Nephi take which influenced the family 
(o cease their murmurings? 

Wha1 evidence is there that the Lord guided Nephi in the 
preparation for the next hunting expedition, and also that lie 
directed the way he should travel. 

Why did lie do this? 

Describe the scene of rejoicing at camp as result of Nephi 's 
helpfulness. 

Memory Gem: "The Family,'' Emilie Poulson, Finger Play. 

The (Jem on page Hi!), "Sunday Morning in the Kintcr- 
grgrten," under Lesson 53 — in June. 

Songs— Same as Tor last Sunday. 

Res1 Rxercise: Lead the children to feel thai we arc. showing 
our 1 ove for mother sod father when we are kind and helpful to 



194 TE KARERE Hune 23, 1926 

our brothers and sisters — as Nephi showed his love for his 
brothers. 

Dramatise: — 

Wheeling the baby in the pram. 

Lacing little brother's boots. 

Brushing little sister's hair. 

Putting on brother's rubbers. 

Bring him play things 



MAUI HUI ATAWHAI. 

KORA S. TIN1KINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawliai. 

Na Toko Watene i whakamaori. 

AKORANGA MO HURAE. 

Te Wa te Taima i Rite ai. 

(Meridian cf Time). 
A Ihu, te Tangata te Wa. 

A. Tona Ingoa. 

Ki nga mea whaka-te-Atua kotahj ano te lhu, ko ta te 
karaipiture i whakaari ai, Nona nei hold te ingoa i te Rangi a 
i runga hoki i te whenua ko tona tikanga nei, "Kei a tatou te 
Atua. " Matiu 1 : 21-23. E whakaatu ano hoki te ingoa nei he 
Atua ano a Ihu i mua i Tona taenga mai ki te ao, inaianei, a 
ake tonu atu. 

Ka marama i konei te whakaatu a Apinari Poropiti nga 
Xiwhai. Mohia 15: 1. Te ingoa o Ihu he mea tapu, a kia ahua 
wehiwehi ano te whakahua. Ko te whakahua hopohopo i tend 
ingoa, he whakaatu tena i te whai-whakaaro te hunga whaka- 
pono, me te karakia pono. 

B. Whakamarama mo te Taha ki Ona Matua. 

1. Tona Matua ko te Atua. Ko tatou katoa nga tamariki 
whaka-te-wairua a te Atua, engari ko Ihu anake te tamaiti 
kotahi a te Atua a te whaea kikekiko. Hoani 1 : 14. 

2. Te whaea o lhu. Ko te whaea o Ihu lie wahina (puhi) 
i tanmautia me tetahi tangata whakaaro-nui. I tona whakaaro 
lei te iti tona whakapono, e kore te tika TTohepa e mau i a 
ia ki tona kainga hei wahine ma ana. Engari kihai tona nga- 
kau-nui i tuku kia whakaiti ia i a ia ki te aroaro nga 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 195 

tangata, pera me etahi. Otira i tae mai he anahera, he karere 
no te rangimarie, me te korero mai ki a Hohepa ka riro raua 
tahi hei kai-tiaki mo tetahi tamaiti nui atu i te mana kikokiko. 
A i pupuri ia i taua kai-tiakitanga i hoatu ki i a ia, e marama 
ana i a ia ngohengohe ki te whakarite i nga whakahaunga a te 
Atua i te wa i whai ai nga tangata kikino ki te whakamate i te 
pepi i a 11m. Ko te whaea Ihu te wahine manakohia nuitia 
atu o nga wahine katoa. Ko te whakaatu a Ihu Mona ake ko 
te Tama a te Atua, engari kei te karanga ano hold Ia i a la ko 
te Tama a te Tangata, e whakaae ana ki te taha tangata Tona 
whaea. 

C. Tona Whanautanga. 

Ko te poropititanga a Ilakopa i a ia e manaaki ana i a 
Hiira kei te tino mohiotia. Kenehi 49 : 10, a tera hoki pea i a 
Ilerora e mau ana tenei mohiotanga i nga tangata matauranga 
i haere mai ai me te ui haere mo te tamaiti mo Ihu. No te mea ko 
Ihu te "Hiro," te Tama a te Atua, te Piriniha o te Rangimarie, 
ka mutu ko ia anake te Kingi lharaira e kingi mo ake tonu 
atu. 

D. Whakaaturanga a nga Tangata mo te Taha ki Tona Atua- 

tanga. 

1. Ta Himiona i roto i te Tcmepara. Ruka 2: 27-30. 

2. Ta Hoani Kai Iriiri. Hoani 1 : 29-34. 

3. Ta Pita. Matin 16 : 17-17. 

4. Ta Erihapeti. Ruka 1 : 39-43. 

5. T^ Ana i roto i te Temepaia. Ruka 2 : 36-38. 

6. Ta Maata. Hoani 11: 27. 

7. Ta Anaru. Hoani 1 : 40. 

8. Ta Natanahira. Hoani 1 : 47-51. 

E. Whakaaturanga a nga Anahera. 

1. Ta Kapariere ki a Meri. Ruka 1 : 31-33. 

2. Ta te Anahera me te ope tini te rangi. Ruka 2: 
11-14. 

F. Te Reo te Matua i te Rangi. Matiu 3 : 16-17. 

G. Whakaaturanga a te Wairua Tapu. 

1. I tona putanga iho i te wa Tona iriiringa. 
H. Whakaaturanga a Ihu ano. 

1. Ki Tona Whaea. Ruka : 48-49. 

2. Ki a Ma'ata. Hoani 1 f: 25-26. 



196 TE KARERE Hune 23. 1926 

8. ki te Tohunga Nui. Maka 14: 61-62. 

4. Ki te tangata kapo. Hoani 9 : 30-37. 

5. Ki te huihuinga tangata. Hoani 10: 17-18. 

Me Tana meatanga hoki, "Kahore he aroha tetahi i rahi 
ake i tenei ara, kia tuku te tangata i a ia kia mate mo ona lioa." 
Hoani 15: 13. Tei'a atu etahi kua tuku i ratou oranga mo 
runga i etahi tikanga papai, engari ko Ia te mea tuatahi i wliai 
kaha ki te tango ake ano i Tona oranga. No reira ko Tona 
aranga mai te whakaaturanga nui rawa atu mo te taha ki Tona 
Atuatanga. 
NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE IIEI WHAKAUTUNGA. 

1. Korero whakariterite — Ko Ihu he tangata i kaha nei 
ki te tu atu ki nga whakamatautauranga, a he Axua i taea ai 
e [a tenei mea te mate. 

2. Whakamaramatia — i whakaatu nga rewera mo te talia 
ki Tona Atuatanga. 

3. No tehea wa i whakaatu ai to Wairna Tapu i te Atua- 
tanga te Karaiti ? 

4. I runga i tehea huarahi i rite ai te whakaaturanga ;i 
nga Hunga Tapu o nga Ra Muri Nei ki ta Pita? 

5. Korerotia te whakapaeng-a Ihu kia whakaraatea 1110 
te whakaaturanga i a la ko Ia to Tama a te Atua. 

6. He alia te take hoi whakaponotanga he tane, ho wahinc 
tahi nga anahera i roto o te ope whakaatu i te whariautanga 
te Karaiti. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 

NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

Ko Pirikama Iaanga. 

A. Nga tino putake roto i tona oranga. 

1. Tona whanautanga me ona matua. 

2. Tona whakatupuranga, whakaakoranga wawe hoki i 
tona taniarikitanga. 

3. Tona huangatanga tuatahi ki te tikanga "Moromona." 

4. Tona urunga ki roto o te haere i heke mai i Mihuri 
(Missouri). 

5. Tona urunga ki roto te haere i heke mai i Nawuu 
(Nauvoo). 

C>. He Apotoro ia, he Tumiiaki. 

B. Nga tino nutake tana mahi mihana hoki. 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 197 

1. He kai-whakaputa, ho kai-arahi no tona iwi. 

2. He kai-whakatupu ake i nga tangata tona takiwa- 

3. He kai-whakahaere kawanatanga. 

4. He Poropiti. 

C. Nga tino tohu a tona ahua. 

1. He whakakitenga — he kalia ki te titiro whakamua. 

2. Ko te kaha ki te whakariterite. 

3. Ko te mail ki tona karakia. 

4. Ko te kaha ki te whakawa tika. 

5. Ko tona tahuri ki te whakahoa. 
Nga korero a Pirikama Iaanga : 

"Ki te pono koutou Id kouton karangataiigaj taku knpu 
ki a kouton, kaore he manaakitanga i roto i te ture te Tiki- 
tiki-o-Rangi, o te Rangatiratanga o te Atria e kore ai kouton e 
kore te whiwhi ki te koa." 

"He kahore noa iho tatou, heoi ano ko ta te Atua tonu e 
whakarite ai hei pehea tatou." 

"Ki te kahore te niaramatanga o te wairua te Karaiti, e 
kore tetahi tangata e ahei ki te whakarite tika i te tikanga 
te ora." 

"Ki a all an tonu toku karakia i te ata o tetahi Mane ki 
tetahi, huri noa te tail, ki te kore e kore la e korero mai ki a 
an." 

"Te putake tonei oranga Ida ako tatou, a kore nei e taea 
te mahi engari iti nei iti nei i te wa kotahi. " 

"Kaua e mahi ki te Atua no te mea kei te welii koe i te 
reinga, engari whakarHea nga tikanga o to karakia no te mea 
ma reira koe e whiwhi ai ki te oranga tonutanga. E tohu ana 
hold ki taua oranga kaore nei he mutunga, tera atu huarahi 
18 ki te whakangaromanga." 

"E mea ana ahau ki te ki atn ki a koutou e oku hoa, kei 
te whakapono hiaton ki nga tika katoa. Ki te kitea e koe te 
pono i te whenua i te rangi i te reinga ranei, no to matou 
akoranga, kei te whakapono matou, no maton hoki, me ta 
matou pupuri ano.''' 

Nga whakaaturanga kei \o "Biographical Encyclopedia*^; 
"Historical Record," na Jensen; "History of UtalVna Whit- 
ney; " Life of Joseph Smith," na Cannon; "One I In ml red Years 
of Monnonism," na Evans. 



TE KARERE Hunc 23, 1926 



-0- 



KI TE ETITA. 



He Ripoata Hui Tau 

Tc pai te whakahaere 1 nga mahi, te hui, te nui te 
kai, Die era atu, koia te arolia toku wairua ki Xuliaka. 

No te po te Wenerei ka tatu matou ki te marae te hui. 
I taua po ano ka tatu a Ngapuhi me Waikato. Ki auina ake 
ko te Taite te 31 nga ra te marama, na katalii ano ka 
whakaeke nga ope a Ngati Kahungunu ki Heretaunga tae atu 
ki te Upoko te Ika, huri noa a Manawatu, Whangahui, tae 
atu ki Taranaki, whiti atu ki te Waipounamu. Ko nga ope 
katoa enej i tatu ki te marae o te Hui Tau i tn nei te 1, 2, 3, 
nga ra Aperira ki Nuhuka. E kore e taea e an te tatan nga 
iwi i tae mai ki te hui, i te lini a te tangata ara nga uri 
Aperahama, Ehaka, Hakopa, Hohepa i whakaraua atn ra 
ki Ihipa, puta mai nei ko Manahe, puta mai nei ko Riliai i 
tonoa mai nei e te Atu a Ida puta mai ki waho o te whenua 
Hiruharama e 600 tau i mua atu te whanautanga te Karaiti, 
ka rere atu ratou ko tona whanau ki te whenua o Tawhiti-Nui 
ara ki te whenUa o Amerika, ki reira whakatipu ai i te peka 
hua i korerotia ra e Hakopa i roto i tana manaakitanga i ;t 
Hohepa. Xa ka ti])ii ratou, ka kapi am) lioki te whenua o 
Tawhiti-Nui i a ratou, a lea ara nga pakanga, nga tautoiic- 
tohenga i waenganui i a ratou, na ka puta te whakaaro i te Atua 
kia tohaia mai ratou ki runga i nga moutere te moae.a. K 
54 nga fan i mua atu te whanautanga te Karaiti ka tonoa 
mai e te Atua a Hakota i te whenua Tawhiti-Nui ki Qawaiki 
Moutere e tau mai nei i te Moana-Nui-a-Kiwa. lie maha nga 
tail i muri mai ka heke mai tatou tipuna i TTawaiki ki nga 
moutere te moana a tae noa mai ki Aotearoa nei, ara ki te 
pito mutunga tc ao nei. I tutuki ai nga kupu a te Atua ki 
tatou tupuna i te koraha o Maunga Hinai i mea ai ia, "Ka ])eia 
atu koutou e au i konei a te pito wliakamutunga ra ano te ao. 
A maku ano koutou e tiki atu, e kohikohi mai i nga whenua i 
whakamararatia atu al koutou, a maku koutou e whakahoki 
mai ano ki o koutou ake oneone tupu." 

E te Whare Iharaira, e te Hnn.^a Tapu. ko awhe'a koutou 



Hune 23, 1920 TE KARER E _^ 199 

kohikohi ai, whakahoki ai ki to koutou oneone tupu? Maranga, 
whakatika, hamama, tupeke! Hamama atu ki a Ihowa ki to 
Atua. Whakarahia to rco ki to karanga atu ki a la. Kua tae 
mai nei Taana whakaoranga ki a koe, e te Whare o Iharaira, 
ara te Hunga Tapu nga Ra Muri Nei. Ko te Ava tenei o 
te kohikoliinga. Whakarongo ake ki nga kupu i puta mai i 
roto i nga mangai nga pononga, a te Atua. E niea ana a 
Tumuaki Tinikini i roto i te Hui Tan ka hori ake nei, e ki ana 
ia, ''Ka koa te hunga ngakau ma, e kite hoki ratou i te kanolii 
a te Atua. E tu ra koutou i runga i koutou turanga tapu. 
Kua tata te ra te haerenga mai e kingi ai a te Karaiti ki 
vvaenganui tona Hunga Tapu mo nga tau kotalii mano." 

Titiro atu, e te Hunga Tapu, ki nga mahi i mania e te 
Tumuaki te Mihana, ki nga vvhakahaere nga huihui, nga 
tohutolm ki nga api-ha v/liakahaere ia peka o ia peka. He 
tino niiharo nga whakahaere tenei Hui Tau. E mohio ana an 
I.e maha te hunga i kite i nga mea kaore nei ia i kite, i rongo 
i nga mea kaore nei ia i rongo. E tohutolm ana i nga Tumuaki 
Peka me ona Kaunihera kia tahuri ki te whakapai i ratou 
peka, ki te ngaki i nga taru a ratou ngakinga. Kei tipu ake 
nga taru kino. Ara te Puremu, te Haurangi, te Tahae, te 
Whakapae, te Kohuru, te Korero i nga korero paruparu (ara 
e puta nan mo nga wahi ngaro o te tane te wahine, nga haka 
paruparu. He nui nga haka lie pai nga kupu, he nui nga haka 
he paruparu nga kupu), te Hae, te Taunu, te Tawai ki etahi, 
ara atu o nga mea kaore nei e tika kia mahia e tatou. E te 
Hunga Tapu, i mahia katoatia e tatou nga main kua korerotia 
f,ke nei i mua atu i to tatou uuinga ki te wai o te iriiringa no 
reii'a pu ano koutou i horoi ai kia ma. Koia na hoki te take 
i hoatu ai te Wairua Tapu ki a koutou. T tana ra kua, rite 
koutou ki te Temepara, kua oti te whakapaipai hei nohoanga 
mo te Wairua te Atua. E kore hoki te Wairua o te Atua 
nolio i roto i nga temepara poke. He alia te temepara poke? 
Ko te tangata kaore c taea e ia te pehi nga hihikotanga te 
Kikokiko, ara to Puremu, te Hae, te Kohuru, te Hiahia Taikaha, 
te Taunu, to Tawai tetahi ki tetahi, \c aroha-kore tetahi ki 
lotahi, te kore-ripenata, t<- korc-muru i te lie ton teina. E te 
Hunga Tapu, inurua koutou lie e koutou ano. Kaua v whaka- 
maun e koutou nga he a koutou teina, ka whakamaua ano 



200 TK KA RERK Hunc 23, 1-26 

a koutou e to koutou Matua i to Rangi. Murua koutou he 
e koutou auo me koutou ano hold e mum nei i o te hunga e 
he ana ki a koutou. Na e te Hunga Tapu, ka mohio koutou ma 
koutou ano e mahi taua mahi, ara te mum i nga hara, te peehi 
i te hara kei pilii ake te kino. Na koia tenei ko te tangata 
tohe touu ana ki te mahi i te kino. Kaore nei e taea e ia te 
whakamanawanui i muri iho i tona iriiringa rumaki me te 
hoatutauga o te Wairua Tapu. Te temepara ma ko te tangata 
kua taea e ia te peehi nga hihikotanuga te kikokiko i muri 
iho i tona iriiringa rumaki. he tangata whakapono, he tangata 
ngakau iti, ngakau maru, he tangata ngakau iro, he tangata 
manawanui ki te mahi i nga mahi pai, he tangata manawanui 
ki te kaupare atu i nga mahi kino kei poke ia, ko te tangata 
e ngohengohe ana ki te whakarite i nga tikanga tapu te 
Rongo-pai, nga whakatekau. E te Hunga Tapu, whakaritea kia 
polio ai ta koutou mahi ki te Atua to koutou tipuna 
Aperahama. E Iharaira, kua tae mai te kupu whakatupato i 
a koe, "E tu ra koutou i runga i koutou turanga tapu, kia 
rokohina mai ai koutou e te Tama a te Atua, kua rite mo te 
tomo ki te whare marena." Hei konei mutu ai nga kupu. 
Na to koutou teina aroha, 

Xa WIREMTJ KARAKA. 



He Whakaahua Pai 

Na R.R. Tiwinihana 

Ki Te Karere. Tena ra koe. Man e panui atu enei wha- 
kaahua tomtom nei ki nga tangata i nga wahi katoa ka tae 
ai tou maramatang. 

Tenei ahau tetahi o nga kaumatua i whiti mai i te Moana 
a Kiwa te mihi atu ki a koutou katoa. I runga i te mea kua 
whiwhi ahau ki etahi whakaahua pai, a kahore taea e a.u ki 
te whakaatu ki a koat ju i enei whakaahua, ma te kai-panui 
o Te Karere e whakaatu ki a koutou. 

Ko tatou nga Hunga Tapu, kua wh'whi ki tetahi taonga 
nui, a kei te hari hoki tat >u i roto i tenei taonga kua hornai 
ano e te Atua ki n?;a tangata. k'o te wawati nui hoki o ta- 
lon ngakau kia kitekite tonu i nga mea hei whakakaha i o ta- 
tou whakapono i roto i te Rongo i'ai nei. Kua taka mai enei 
whakaahua ki oku ringaiinga, hei tino mea whakakaha ki a 



Hunc 23, 1926 



TE KAR1-RE 



201 



au. No reira i runga i te ! iahia kia kz 
erui mea hei painga ma tatou tal i. 



:a ake tatou kua tukua 




Ko tt Ngohcrc Tapu 

Ko te whakaahua tenei o te Ngahere Tapu, ara te wahi i 
whakakitea mai te Matua raua ko te Tama, i a raua ano ki a 
Hohepa Mete i te tau 1820. E ta te whakaaro o nga Hunga 
Tapu i tuturi ai te tamaiti, a Hohepa, ki te taha o te Rekau 
nui, ki te wahi kua whaitohungia. 

O aria te roanga) 



He Manaakitanga 

Ki Te Karere, tena koe, tenei au te tuku atu nei i tenei 
ripoata ki te manu tangi pai hei mau mana ki te hunga e tae 
ai ia. 

Kaati tena, no te whitu o nga ra Mei ka tae mai nga 
kaumatua, a Erata Paapiti, Tumuaki Waikato raua ko Erata 
Karaitihana. I tae mai raua i runga i taku tono kia tae mai 
ki te iriiri i taku tamaiti. Xo te wild i te i wa o nga ra katahi 
ka iriiria. I te wa tonu i iriiria ai te tamaiti, te putunga ake i 
te wai ka huri mai matou ka liok mai, katahi to tatou whaea ka 
karanga mai, "Taihoa, e haere kia korero atu au i taku 
whakaaro ki a koutou. Xo reira e penei atu ana au kia koutou, 
mehe kaore koutou e whakaae me haere atu au ki roto i te wai 
tapu a te Atua." Katahi ka utua e au, "Kei to whakaaro te 



232 Tli KARERK Ilune 2J, 1^26 

whiriwhiri 1110 tena wahi." Ka tautokoiia c te Tumuaki. 
Katahi ka matika mai to tatou whaea ka kuhu ki te wai raua 
ko te kaumatua. E te Hunga Tapu lie tino ruruLi rawa to 
tatou whaea. E hoa ma e tata ana J .e pa o te ihu ki te wkcnua 
mebe ki te haere tu ia. Kati, e hoa ma i te wa i tu ai ki roto 
i te wai, c te Hunga Tapu e tia nei ka tekau ma ono ano nga 
tau te tika o te tuara i a ia e tu ana i roto i te wai. Tuarua i 
a ia ka puea tonu akc i te wai ka kite katoa atu oiatou i to 
kanohi e minamina ana ki te kata. Kati tena, no te ekenga 
mai ki uta, i te matao o tena rangi katahi ka hoatu lie kooti 
liei uhi i a ia i te matao, katahi ka karanga, "llei alia te kooti, 
kei mea mai koutou e maeke ana a an. Kaore an i te maeko. 
E tia nei te wai e mea nei i runga i a an he wcewera no taku 
tinana, te pai o te mahana ki taku tinana." 

Kati tena whakamarama, tuarua o nga whakamarama ko 
tenei ruruhi kua kaumatuatia ki roto i nga tikanga Maori i 
roto i nga Whare Wananga o o tatou tnpnna. Kaati, i tenei 
ra kua kore ia e mobio he taonga ano era, ina lioki e ki ana ia. 
i a matou e heare mai ana ki te kainga, katalii a Kirika 
Toheriri ka puta mai ki waho ka maiolia mai ki to tatou whaea 
i te mea kaore i mohiotia ka iriiria i a ia i taua taima. 1 te 
mea e maioha mai ana katahi ka mea mai, ''lie aim te take o te 
maioha? Kaore lie hiia o tera mea o te tangi. Kna ruruhitia 
au e kimi ana i te kaupapa o tenei mea o te arolia, kite akc nei e 
au ko te whakapono ki to talon Kai Whakaora ki te Tanga 
Nana tatou i whakaora i te ao nei." No reira e 1c Hunga Tapu 
nui atu to matou koa ki tenei whakawhiwhinga a te Atna i a 
matou ki tenei iriiringa. lie tino manaakitanga nui tenei na 
te Atua i tenei takiwa o to tatou niihana. 

No reira me mutu iho i konei cnei whakamarama mo te 
Peka o Aria o te Takiwa o Waikato. Kia ora koutou te Hunga 
Tapu puta noa te Mihana o Xiu Tireni. Ma te Ariki koutou e 
tiaki hei whakakaha i nga wa katoa, Aniene. Xa to koutou 
teina, tungane i roto i te TCongopai. 

Na HERE TANGIHAERE. 



POWHIRI HUI PARIHA 
No te Tai Rawhiti ; hei te 3, 4 o Hurae, ki te Muriwai. No 
te Wairarapa : hei te I 0, 1 1 o Hurae, ki te Kohunui, Fea- 
therston. E powhiritia ana tatou katoa. 



Hune 23, [926 



TE KARF.RE 



203 



KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. 





Elder H. Lester Petersen huier Golden J. Webster 

Ko ELDER H. LESTER PETERSON 6 Rexburg, Ida- 
ho. 1 tae mai a Erata Pitihana i te 20 o nga ra o Hurae, 1923, 
a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Wairarcpa. No le 3 o nga 
ra Pepueie, 192^, ka whakaritea ia Lei tumuaki mo taua ta- 
kiwa. Ka nukuhia atu ki te Kareti i te 2 o nga ra lihema, 
1924, a i te 2 o nga ra o Maehe, 1925, ka nukuhia rno ki te 
takiwa o Foneke. Ka tu ia hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa i te 
l o nga ra o Hepetema, 1925, a tukua honoretia atu ana i a 
Aperira te 8 nga ra 1920. 

Ko ELDER GOLDEN J. WEBS! ER o Kaysville, Utah. 
I tae mai a Erata Wepiha i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira 1924, a 
whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Whangarei. I a Mei te 26 o 
nga ra 1925 ka nukuhia atu ia ki te takiwa o Poneke, a i te 
15 o nga ra o Pepuere 1926 ka nukuhia atu ano ki te takiwa o 
Otago (Waipounamu). 1 te 8 o nga ra o Hune ka tukua ho- 
noretia atu ia kia hoki atu ki tona kainga. 



He Ripoata mo te Ra o nga Whaea 



NO TE KIRIKIRI. 

Ki te etita o Te Karere, tena koe. Man e pamii atu enei 
korero. I tu te huihuinga whakanui mo nga whaea i te wiki 
tuarua te 9 Mei ki te Kirikiri nei (Takiwa Hauriki). I hui 
mai Hunga Tapu Omahu me nga kaumatua te Thames a 



23 ]._ Tlf KARERK Hune 2:, iy:6 

Ex'ata Wehitoa raua ko Erata Teira. Tino pai tana huilminga, 
ahakoa te nui o te ua o iaua rangi. Nga tikanga nunui o roto 
ko te pai o te whakahaere a te Tuinuaki a Tiki Reihana mc 
tona kaanihera a te Wirihana Watene, me nga tamariki hoki i 
nga mahi i whakaritca ma ratou. Ko te tu-a-rarangi a nga 
tamariki tane, kotiro, me nga ret;::, M-O-T-TI-E-R, he pepa, he 
mea t&pahi, me te korero ano tena, tena, i tana raraagi. Me 
nga waiata hoki e rite ana. Te tuhanga o nga putiputi ki nga 
whaea. Te 1 meneti ata noho whakahonore mo nga whaea kua 
wehe ki tna o te arai. Toko-ono nga whaea i tu ki te korero 
ko Sister liaira Te Aue, Panikena, Whakamura, Kahukore, me 
Rose Watene. He nui te pai me te aroha o a ratou kupu i liaere 
mo runga i nga mahi a o ratou whaea, ki te tiaki me te mana- 
wanui hoki i te ao, i te po, ki te whakatupu ake i a ratou 
tamariki, me era atu painga, me te tangi ano o etahi. I tu 
hoki nga kaumatua a Erata Yv'eliitoa, he nui ana korero. Ko 
te whaea te hoa pai atu o te tamaiti, kotiro ranei. Ahakoa he 
aha te raruraru, ka piripono tonu ia ki tona tamaiti. Koia noki 
te kai-whakamarie ina tupono ia ki te raruraru. Ko tetahi o 
nga ture nui i homai, kia whakahonore tatou i o tatou wlmea. 
Ko Erata Tarapata, lie tautoko, he nui tona nama ki tona 
whaea. E whakaae ana hoki ia, kaore te whaea e moe ana ki 
te haere tana tamaiti, kotiro ranei, i te po ki nga kanikani ; kei 
te oho tonu ona mahara ki te rongo kau ki tetahi haruru, ka 
karanga ia, "Ko koe tena?" e mea kia moliio ra ano, ia, katahi 
ano ka tatu ona wliakaaro. I tu hoki a Erata Roiti raua ko 
Ahitarama, pera ano te aronga o a raua korero. I puta hoki 
enei korero, kaore tatou e tino mohio ki te nui o te painga o o 
tatou whaea me ana mahi papai, kia mate ra ano katahi ano 
tatou ka mohio mc te hoki ano o nga mahara. 

Na ROSE WATENE. 
NO TE MAHIA. 
Ki te Etita o Te Karere, tena koe. Ileoi te mihi. I te 9 o 
Slci nei ka tu to matou karakia ki te Paratiamu lie wliakaaro H 
te Ra o nga Whaea ara Mother's Day. Na, e hoa ma, tetahi 
ra whakamiharo tenei ki a matou. No te mea he mea hou tenei 
ki waenganui i a matou ki nga Hunga Tapu o te Mahia nei. 
I whakaritetia e matou tenei ra i roto i te aroha ki a matou 
matua kua hinga kei te po. Ko te mea nui ki a matou kei roto 



Hune 23, 1926 te karkre 205 

i tenei ra ko te kotahi meneti e noho-puku ana, ara one minute 
silence. E lion ma, hold atu ana nga whakaaro ki nga whaea 
kna hinga kei to po. Ahakoa ra, eliara i to moa whatoro tenei 
ra i waenga parae, kaore. Tirohia Ekoruhe 20: 12. Kei reira 
ki ana kia whakahonoretia ton papa me ton whaea, kia roa 
ai o koutou ra ki runga i to mata to whenua. 

Kaati, e te Hunga Tapu, kia ora koutou katoa i roto i nga 
manaakitanga a to tatou Matua i to Rangi. Kia kalia tatau 
ki te whakarite i o tatau karangatanga. Heoi na to koutou 
taina. 

W. J. MATENGA, 
Timuaki o to Kura Hapati to Mahia Peka Oraka. 



He Rjpoata no Korongcta 

Mo te Ra nga Whaea. 

E whakamarama ana tenei ripoata i nga mahi tenei ra i 
whakahaeretia i roto i nga tauira i roto i Te Karere. 

To in ah a o nga tangata i tao mai ki te whakanui i tenei ra, 
105. Te in aba nga whaea i roto i tenei ra e toru tekau ma 
warn. Xga apiha whakahaere tenei ra, Hamiora Kamau me 
ona kaunihera mo Teiti Kamau, hekeretari. 

E to Runga Tapu. tetahi tauira tino pai tenei kua oti e 
tenei llalii to whakatu hoi whakaako i a tatau tamariki ki to 
nni to honore tenei moa to whaea. Ko tatau te iwi Maori, 
eliara tatau whaea i to moa nui raw T a ki a tatau. He aha to 
take ? He kore kaore i akona ki te nui ta ratau mahi ki te 
miramira i a tatau. Engari no roto i nga whakaakoranga 
tenei Hahi, katahi ka kitoa te nui tatau wiiaea ki a tatau 
i roto i nga Hui Atawhai mo nga roopu te Paraimere no roto 
i tenei ra i te ra o nga whaea. Ka whakamaungia te tohii 
whakanui ki runga ia whaea, he putiputi. Katahi ka titirp 
whanui atu nga kanohi to hunga ngakau papaku ki ratou 
11 ei whaea. Tino heke nga roimata me te hoki o nga whakaaro 
ki muri, ki to takawa ora ana ratou nei whaea kihai i penei 
to whakanui. Ka mohio tatau ka noho to ngakau whakahonore 
ki roto i a tatau tamariki inaianei ki ratau whaea. 

No muri ka hoatu to tohu whakaniaharatanga mo nga 
whaea kua mate, kotahi meneti noho puku ana t«^ katoa. Tino 



206 TE KARERE Hune 23, 1926 

nui te urunga te arolia ki roto i nga ngakau te hunga i tae 
tnai i tenei ra. Ko te luia tenei tenei mahi te Ra nga 
Whaea. Ka rite te ture, "AVhakahonoretia to papa me to 
whaea kia roa ai ou fa e homai ana e ton Ai-iki. " 

Nga kai-waiata me nga mahi whakatangitangi na Dga tama- 
rika to Kareti me nga kauniatua te Pariha me te Karri i tae 
niai ki nga Hunga Tapn Korongata. 

Te Karakia Hakarameta, 108 nga tangata i tae mai. Nga 
kai-kauwhau, Erata Heera, Erata Paraone, Erata Piringihaate, 
Paora Hapi, Rawiri Kamau. 

No te Miutara 175 nga tangata i tae mai ki tenei huihuinga. 
Tino njii nga mahi i mahia i roto i tenei Miutara, e kore e pau 
ki roto i Te Karere te tuhi nga mahi. Te knpu polo, e rite ana 
he Ilni Pariha. 

Ko te Mateng'a Koro Waerea. 

E whakaatu ana ki nga whanaunga tenei tamaiti, no te 
7 nga ra Mei nei ka mate a Koro Waerea. Tekau ma rima 
011a tan, tona karangatanga i roto i te Hahi lie Rikona. He 
tamaiti pai tenei, kaha hold i roto i tona karangatanga tae noa 
ki te ra i mate ai ia. He nui te pouri i pa mai ki a matau ki 
ona matua. E kore hold, e warewaretia te pai o ana mahi me 
tona kaha i roto i tenei peka. Kua rite i a ia tona karanga- 
tanga, kua riro ia i tona Matua hei mahi i ana mahi i tua o te 
ai*ai. E hari ana e koa ana tooku ngakau mona i mate i roto i te 
ma, Kaore he raruraru. Koia nei lie tauira mo ona whanaunga. 
E kalia ana ahau ki te ripoata, ki te kore tenei tamaiti e whiwhi 
i te rangatiratanga o te Atua kaore hoki tetahi tangata atu e 
whiwhi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua. 

"Ma nga H.ua ka Mohiotia ai." 

E whakamarama ana tenei ripoata i tae mai a Takuta Te 
Rangihiroa ki konei ki te pokapoka i a matau i te 10 o nga 
ra Mei. I liui katoa mai te Hunga Tapu kia pokapokatia. 
Ko Paraire Tomoana me Poke Henri me te neihi. 1 tino nui t>* 
jnilii a te Takuta Te Rangihiroa. 1 puta i a ia tenei korero, 
katahi te kainga whakanui i a ia roto Heretaunga nei. 
kaore he omaoma te ahua o nga tangata. lie aha ra te take i 
penei ai nga tangata o tenei kainga, i rereke ai etahi atu 
kainga ? Te whakahoki ko tenei iwi ko te Hunga Tapu e haere 
ana i raro i te mana o nga kingi, o nga tinmaki, o nga ranga- 



Ilune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 207 

tira, nga kai-whakahaere tikanga, c pai ana hoki matau ki te 
ngohehgohe, ki te tautoko hoki i te ture. He ture tenei i roto 
i to matau Hahi. Whenci he tohunga Maori whakaakoranga 
kaore matau e whakarongc. 

"E te iwi, e kore e warewaretia e ahau to koutou alma me 
la koutou manaaki i a ahau. E tino mihi ana ahau ki a koutou, 
te maa to koutou kainga, te maa a koutou tamariki, te 
ataahua nga pakeke. E noho ana koutou i roto i te tupato, 
ma tenei alma ka taka atu etahi o nga mate e puta mai ana i 
roto i te paruparu. No reira koia nei te taonga nui te 
Pakeha, he maa. E mihi ana ahau mo to koutou karakia Hahi 
"Momona." Ko au, kaore au i te tangata karakia. He aha 
te hahi, kaore aku whakahe, engari e puta ana he mahi pai he 
malii kino i roto i nga hahi katoa. No reira kua kite ahau i te 
pai o a koutou mahi pai i roto i to koutou hahi." 

I timatatia to matau huihuinga ki te karakia. Ilimene 
tuatahi, Iloia o te Hahi ki te reo pakeha. Inoi na Katima 
Hakopa. Himene whakamutunga "Till We Meet Again," inoi 
wh'akamutunga na Rangi Kawea. 

Na RAWIRI M. KAMAU. 



KO NGA JVUHI A TE KUIM HAPATI 
HE! PAIN3A MA TaTOU 

Na Te Ngoura i tuhi, na R.apata Tanapu i whakamaori. 

Ki Te Karere : Tena koe. I a au e korero ana i te puka- 
puka te Kura Hapati Hiona (Juvenile Inst rue tor), ka 
korero au i te kauwhau i kauwhautia ai e Tumuaki Ilipa J. 
Karanata i te hui a nga kai-arahi o nga Kura Hapati roto 
te Hahi, i tu ki te Pa Tote i te wha nga ra Oketopa, 1925 
Ka korero ia i te pai te mahi e puta mai ana i te Kura Hapati 
ki a tatou ki te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Ned. E ki ana 
ia e awhinatia ana e te Kura Hapati nga tangata katoa e haere 
ana ki te Kura H-apiti tae atu ana ki te Tumiiaki Xni nei ki a 
Rawiri 0. Makei ki te katoa ano hoki nga kai-mahi, kai- 
wnakaako, akonga, a ki nga tamariki ano hoki. 

Na, ko tetehi ano ana kupu e penei ana. Ko te niea nui 
i'awa e ahei i te tangata te mahi, he awhina i tetehi i runga i 
te aroha, kaua lie utu. lie nui ke atu nga kai-mahi a te Hunga 
Tapu e mahi ana i roto nga Kura Hapati, i nga kai-mahi 



203 TE RARER K Hune 23, 1^26 

roto i etehi atu Iiahi penei ano i to tatou nai te nui. Kei etehi 
hahi he wahine nga kai-w hakahaere o o ratou Kura llapati, 
kaore he tane, c meatia ana hei kai-whakahaere. 

Engari ano to tatou lialii e mahi katoa ana nga tangata 

nunui, e whakaako ana, e arahi ana i nga mahi o te Kura 
llapati, awhiiia atu hoki i nga tuahine, me te tohutohu ano ki 
nga mahi. He niaha nga tangata o waho i to tatou Hahi e haere 
mai ana ki o tatou Kura llapati e chorere ana i te Qui o te 
matauranga o nga tangata whakaako, arahi, o roto i o tatou 
Kura llapati. 

E ki ana a Tumuaki Karanata ehara i te mea ma te nui o 
nga kai c pau ana i te tangata e kaha ai tona tinana, engari ma 
te nui ke o te painga o nga kai e tapoko ana ki nga toto i te 
puku. Waihoki, ehara ano i te moa ma te nui o to tatou kaha 
ki te ako ki te korero pukapuka i roto i o tatou Kura llapati 
e puta mai ai lie painga ki a tatou, engari ma te nui ke o te 
puwerawera e riro mai ana i a tatou i roto i te Wairua o te 
Atua. Ko te kai-whakaako e ako ana i nga tamarika ki te 
pono o te rongopai, he pai ke atu ia i tetehi e mea hei me ako 
a ngakau te nuinga o te karaipiture. Ko te mea nui rawa i 
riro mai i a Tumuaki Karanata i roto i te Kura Hapati i a ia 
e tamariki ana ko tana whakaatu hinengaro ki te pono o tenei 
rongopai. He tino pai hoki tana kai-whakaako i ata whaka- 
marama ki a ia i nga ture i whakatakotoria ai ki roto i te 
karaipiture, me te korero atu ano hoki ki a ia i ana mahi i a 
ia i te miliana, i a raua e ako ana. 1 tino arohatia hoki tenei 
kai-whakaako e nga kotiro, e nga tamariki tane, a kore rawa 
i warewaffc i a ratou nga mea i akona ai ki a ratou a taea 
noatia to ratou matenga. Ko te kai-whakaako kaore e whaka- 
pono ki nga ture katoa o te rongopai, kaore c hiahiatia kia 
ako i roto i o tatou Kara llapati. E whakapono ana tatou 
tera ano he Atua, he Rewera. Ko a tatou mahi papai katoa i 
puta mai i runga i te whakapono ki te Atua, a ki ana mahi 
ako hoki, na ko nga mahi kino katoa e puta ana ki nga mea 
e whakarongo ana nga taringa ki nga tohutohu a te Rewera. 
He poi'opiti ano ta te Atua. he poropiti ano hoki ta te Iveweia. 
Tera ano hoki etehi whakaakoranga e mohiotia nei e nga 
tangata e nohoia ana e te Wairua o te Atua lie mahi na te 
Rewera. Xa he mea kia marama ai tenei ka korero a Tumuaki 



Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 209 

Karaiiata ki etehi mea i pa Id a ia i mua tona tunga hei 
Tumuaki mo te HaLi. 

Tokotoru nga tamariki a Tumuaki Karanata raua ko tana 
wahine, tino ngakaunui hoki nga tamariki nei ki ratou matua.. 
Engari i mua te kamautua-rawatanga ka mate to ratou whaea. 
I muri te tapuketanga o to ratou whaea ka haria e Karanata 
ana tamariki ki te hacreere i nga whenua, ma tera pea e whaka- 
wareware te pouritanga i roto i ratou ngakau mo to ratou 
whaea. I haere ratou ki nga taone nunui Amerika. A i a 
ratou e noho ana i Wahingitana ka pangia ana kotiro tokorua 
e tetehi mate kirika te korokoro ara e te tipitiria. I aua ra 
ki te pa ana tenei mate ki le tamariki e kore rawa e ora. Kore 
rawa nga takuta i niohio ki te rongoa e ora ai tenei mate. Ko 
tetehi nga kotiro nei kua kino rawa te mate. Pewhea ra ka 
rongo a Tumuaki Karanata i te takuta e korero atu ana ki te 
neelii kia whakainungia te kotiro ra ki tetehi rongoa i nga 
tekau ma rima meneti katoa, 11a ki te hapa i a ia tetehi whakai- 
numanga kotahi nei, ka mate tonu atu te kotiro nei. Kore 
rawa a Tumuaki Karanata i moe i taua po, he mea mona kei 
wareware te neelii ra ki te iioatu i te rongoa ki tana kotiro. 
( Faria te roanga) 



E MAHI ANA TATOU MO TE AHA? 

Improvement Era, April 1926, ua J.W. i whakamaori. 

Ka korero atu te minita ki tetahi kaumatua "Momomi," 
"E lie ana koe 111011 i ki kei nga main te mea nui. Kahore rawa 
atu he take mo te main. I korero hoki a Paora, 'Na te aroha 
noa hoki koutou i whakaorangia ai i runga i te whakapono ; 
ehara ano hoki tenei i te mea no koutou he mea homai noa na 
te Atua: Ehara i nga malii, kei whakamanamanate tangata. ' ' 
Epeha 2: 8-9. 

Ka whakahoki te kaumatua, "He tika i korero a Paora, 
engari kei te rarangi i raro iho e ki ana, 'He mahinga hoki 
tatou naana, lie mea lianga i roto i a Karaiti Ihu mo nga mahi 
pai i whakaritea e te Atua i mua hei haereerenga mo tatou.' 
Epiha 2: 10. I korero ano hoki a Paora, 'Whakaotia to koutou 
whakaoranga i runga i te wehi, i te wiri.' Piripai 2: 12. 1 
korero te Rangatira, kei runga ake nei ia i a Paora, 'E mahi 
ana toku Matua a taea noatia tenei ra: e mahi ana ano ahau.' 



2 TE KARERE Hune 23, I926 

Hoani 5: 17. 'Me mahi e ahau nga uialii a toku kaitono tnai 
i te mea e ao ana : meake ko te po e kore e taea te mahi e 
tetahi tangata.' Hoani 1): 1. 'Tenei akc hoki ka haere mai te 

Tama a te tangata, ratou ko ana anahera, i runga i te koro] La 
o tona Matua; a ko reira hoatu ai e ia ki tenei, ki tenei, 1c utn 
o tana mahi.' Matin 16: 27. 

Ac, i runga i te whakamarietanga a to tatou Kai Whakaora 
ka ara katoa nga tupapaku. Otira e kah'a-kore ana tatou ki to 
ara mai, engari i roto i to arol.a o to Atua ka ara mai aua tinana 
kikokiko engari kahore nei ho toto. A ka hoatu nga kororia- 
tanga, to utu mo nga mahi a tena tangata a tona tangata. 
Kahore katoa ara i to wa kotahi, kahore hoki e haere ki to 
walii kotahi. E ki ana to pukapuka pai, "Ka rite ano ki tana 
ake mahi tona utu e riro i tetahi, i tetahi." J. Koriniti 3: 8. 
"Kei whakapohehetia : ko ta te tangata hoki e rui ai, ko tenei 
tana e kokoti ai.". Karaitia G: 7. 

Ko te kupu tenei a Tumuaki Pirikania Taanga, "Ko an 
nei ka whai mo te oranga tonutunga. " Kia ara mai i te ata 
tonu o te aranga mo to hunga tika, me te whiwhi ano hoki ki to 
kororiatariga o runga rawa. Kahore hoki tatou e pai kia 
Avhanga tonu tatou i te aranga tuatahi a pau noa te kotahi 
mano tau, hei pononga ma etahi atu mo akeake tonu, pora me 
te kororiatanga o nga wh'etu. 

E nga taitama te llahi, ko nga manaakitanga mo koutou 
hei kingi hei piriniha mo te Kingitanga o te Atua ki to mahi 
koutou. ] J ]hara ranei i te mea lie utu nui tenei ! 

No reira matika "hei kaimalii ano koutou i te kupu, kaua 
hei kaiwhakarongo anake." Hemi 1: 22. Ma tatou ano 
whakarite o tatou mihana, kahore e taoa tetahi atu. Ko to 
rangi e whiwhi .tatou ko te rangi i taea e tatou ana mahi; engari 
mo te Tikitiki Rangi me tino awhinatia rawa te tangata te 
Atua i nga wa katoa katahi ka whiwhi. Kia mahara e nga 
Hunga Tapu i roto i a tatou mahi katoa kia mahara ki te Kai 
Hanga. Ko to mana to kikokiko he mea kahore noa iho. \o 
reira ma inoi tatou ki to Atua kia aratakina kia awhinatia i 
roto i a tatou mahi, mo te hoatu ano i te whakamoemiti me to 
kororia ki a Ia i nga wa katoa mo ake tonu. Ko te hapai ra 
tenei to waiata nei (keyonte) te Hahi "Momona," To 
v/hakapono raua ko nga mahi. 



Hune 23, 1926 



TE KARERE 



Ko nga Kai=kauwhau Waikato 



Ki Te Karere. Tena koe. Ko enei nga ingoa o nga kai- 
whai-mohoao o Waikato me nga wahi e haere ai ratou ki te 
kauwhau i nga marama o Hurae me Akuhata e tu mai nei. 



Tu George Stockman 
Erata Reke Karaitihana 
Winieta Kapinga 
Erata Wiremu Oketana 
Here Tangihaere 
Erata Reke Karaitihana 
Walter Tangihaere 
Erata Wiremu Oketana 

Henare Maiho 
Te Whare Hetaraka 
Hokio Tarawhiti 
Erata Reheri D. Paapiti 
Te Awe Pongo 
Ngaha Ratana 
Hoani Ormsby 
Tetahi Kaumatua 
Hemi Haki 
Te Whotu Apiti 
Karena Takono 
Hongi Rawhiti 
Pene Poutu Kupa 
Tetahi Kaumatua 
Tamati Honetene 
Totana Arona 



\ Okahukura 

J Matiere 

\ Aria 

i Taumarunui 

1 Piopio 

J Te Kuiti 

I Kokohi 

I Woodleigh 

I Ngaruawahia 

X Taur 
J Ohir 



jpere 

inewai 

Matakowhai 



Puke Tapu 

Waingaro 

Pukekohe 

Frankton 
Tauhei 



ka- 



E hoa ma, e koutou no te takiwa nei kia ora koutou 
toa. Kei ware ware ki a koutou mahi i tenei wa. 

I te mea ka tu to tatou Hui Tau ki Ngaruawahia, ara ki 
te kainga o Te Puea, a tera tau, me tino whakamohiotia ka_ 
toatia nga Maori ki nga ahuatanga o tenei taonga nui kua 
whiwhi ai tatou. Na tatou katoa no tenei takiwa te Hui Tau 
nei, no reira me mahi katoa tatou. Kia kaha kia manawanui 
ki tenei mahi whakahari ngakau. 

Kua kii mai a Kingi Tawhio ki a tatou, "Ko Arekahana- 
ra toku Hoana Kaha, ko Kemurete toku oku Aoroi, ko 
Ngaruawahia toku turanga waewae." 

No reira kia kaha ra tatou katoa. Ma te Atua koutou e 
tohutohu e whakakaha i nga ra e tu hum nei. Heoi ano, na 
to koutou teina, 

Na Reheri D. Paapiti, Tumuaki Takiwa. 



Ti; KAKKKK 



Htmc 23, 1926 



KO NCA PUKAPJKA HEI HOKONCA 



25-0 
11 
7-6 
9-0 



*>-0 



Ro enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kci te lari o to Miliaria hei bo- 
konga ki nga niea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapaka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Bex 72, Auckland. 
STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS 
Teachers Bibles, with Re;idy Reference, Leather... 
New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather 

Book of Mormon, Clodi 2-6 

" " " , Half Leather 

" " , Leather u-o 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 

" " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 

MAORI BOOKS A.4D TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 

" " " , Leatiier 

Ko Te Kawenata Hon, Cloth 

" " " " iVie Nga Kimene, Leather 3 in i 

" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 

" " '' , Leather 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 

" " " " " " ", Leather 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 
SJNDArf' SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Cospel 

What J ts. is Taught 

Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 

S0.4C BO0X3 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 

" " " , Leather 

Deseret Song Books, Cloth 

" " " , Leather 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS 
/ rticles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talttioge 
Vi'ality of Mormonism 
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 
Restoration of the Gospel, li idtsoe 
Joseph Smith's Teachings 
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talnwge 
Essentials in Church History, Smith 
Bible Ready Reference 



2 


3-6 


1-9 


li-O 


5-o 


15-0 


5-J 


150 


1 


4-0 


5 ° 



4-0 

2-\ 
66 
3-0 

66 

3-o 

8-3 

4-6 
6-0 
40 
3-6 
46 
8-9 
6-9 
2-0 



Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Mot ris 6-0 



KO J. H. TIAT^INI TE KA) TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A. C. KOROVCATA HASTINGS. II. H. 




;Caa>tro 



OlIIOI II IOI I IIIOI 1 1 I I I O I I I 1 1 IOI III I IOI I I I I OH IIOIIlO 
5 WAHANGA 20 HURAE 21, 1926 NAMA / 5 




O O 

r Ko te Ruma a te Tamaiti, a Hohepa Mete z 



**[JERE atu, ka korero atu ki te tamaiti 

11 nei, mea atu, ka nohoia a Hiruha- 

rama, ka rite ki nga pa taiepa-kore, i te 

tini o te tangata, o nga kararche i roto." 

Hakaraia 2 :4 



Oil IOI 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 lOll IO 



'C6 KAR&R&" 



WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 



Wharangi. 



Kl TE ETITA 



He Powhiri 224 

Ki a Ngapuhi Renata 235 

Ko te Matenga o Piki Waerea 232 

KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 

He Piki i runga i te Tumatakuru? 233 

He Whakaahua Pai 235 
Ko nga Mahi a te Kura Hapati hei 

Painga ma Tatou 236 

Ko te Namaa te Atua 242 
Me Pehea e Riro ai nga 

Tangata ki te Kaha o te Atua hei Whakaora? 238 

Mo te Aranga Mai 240 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 229 

MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Concert Recitation 2l2 

Intermediate Department 2 

Korero a Ngakau 212 

Kindergarten Department 2?5 

Maori Theological 212 

Pakeha Theological 217 

Postlude 211 

Prelude 211 

Sacrament Gem '-'II 



■L 




f^roro 



WAHANCA 20 WENErtEI. HURAE 21. 1926. NAMA 7 

Maori Mgricullural College Hastings. H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia mamma e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, 

Hani o iliu Karaili o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. 

Tukua uiai o kqutou reta ki te Elita o To Karere, M r A.C, Hastings. 

Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hercni (5/-). 

KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. 

Hie niatua utu mo tcir pcpa ka vChivhi ai. 

J. H. Tintkini, Tumuaki Mihana 
Mariona K. Ewatuna, htiia. Ttaia U iidiu u, Ltita he a Awliitia. 

Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha 

K<» nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). 



Wiremu A. Koura 



Rap-jta Tanapu 



Lru T. Kupa 



MAHI KURA HAPATI. 

Prelude. 



After Cowex. 









^M^mmA 



SACRAMENT GEM I OR AUGUST, 1926 
• In memory of the broken flesli 

We eal I he broken bread ; 
And witness with I \w cup a rresli, 
( hir Faith in ( Jhrist, our [lead. ' 
Postlude. 



Soft Oft itop 



p ^^33^-^^m ^^^^ 



.■■■ f \l" i i ii 



212 TE KAKERE Hurae2I, I926 



CONCERT RECITATION FOR FAST DAY AUGUST 1, 1926. 

i Matthew 4th Chapter, 7th Verse) 

"Thou shall no1 tempi the Lord thy God." 

CONCERT RECITATION FOR BALANCE OF AUGUST, 1926 
(Matthew 7th Chapter, 12th Verse) 
''Therefore all things whatsoever ye would that men would 
do to yon, do ye even so to them." 



-o 



KCRERO A NGAKAU MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. 

1 a Matiu 4: 7. 
"Kaua e whakamatautau ki te Ariki, ki ton Atua." 

KORERO A NGAKAU MO ERA ATU RATAPU 

TE MARAMA. 

I a .Matiu 7: 12. 
"Na nga tnea katoa e pej ai koutou kia meatia e nga 
tangata ki a koutou, meatia ano e koutou ki a ratou." 



MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



KO TE TAKE TE AKORANGA MO TE RA I70H0-PUKU. 

Ko te take o te Akoranga mo te Ra Noho-Puku he whaka- 
kaha i te wairua o tenei ma o te whaki-hinengaro. Te huarahi 
tika ki te whakahaere i tenei take he tuku i nga mema o te 
kar.aihe kia whakaaiu i nga tikanga o tona ngakau. 1 nga tan 
kua huri k« v te patai i nga akoranga, "He aha ahau i whaka- 
pono ai?" Jvo te take o te akoranga mo tenei tau, "He aha 
te mea a te tauira o Ihu e whakahau mai ana i a au kia 
mahia?" E ako ana tatou i nga mahi a te Karaiti me kore e 
kitea e tatou nga mahi o roto. Kei te mea tatou i nga mema 
o te karaihe kia whakatakoto i etahi tikanga o a ratou mahi 
mo nga tau e heke mai nei, hei mea e whakakaha ai ratou ki te 
mahi i nga mahi kua whakatakotoria nei e Ihu hci tauira mo 
tatou. 

Ratami tuatshi. Akuhata 1, 1926. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHC-PUKU. 
Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. 
Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- 



Hurae2I, 1926 TE KARERE 21 3 

toria nei e Iliu liei malii ma tatou. 

Putake: Te Whakamatautauranga TuarUa. 

Te Whakaatu: Kei a Matin 4: 5-7. 

Ko nga whakamatautauranga e toru kua tapahia ketia e 
etahi tangata ko te whakamatautauranga nui. Ko te take i 
noho tonu a Hatana ki a la, a, muri 110a i te mea mutunga. 

I mea pono a Rawiri, " Ki tonu tona mangai i te i te kanga, 
i te hianga, i te patipati kei raro i tona arero te whanoke me te 
teka." Waiata 10: 7. 

I whakatupuria a Ihu penei he tamaili na tc kamura, 
engari i nga wa katoa ko te Wairua Tapu e malii ana i runga 
i a la. I a ia tekau ma rua tan ka mohio la ho malii nui Tana 
kei tc haere mar. I roto i tc Akoranga me te Kawcnata i mea, 
"Kahorc hold ia i whiwhi ki te rancatanga i te tuatahi, engari 
i nuku haere ake ia i te aroha 110a ki tc aroha noa, tae noa ki 
tc wa i whiwhi ai ia ki tc raneatanga. ' ' Me tenei ano, "Ka 
lii])u ia i roto i te aiatauranga. " 

\a ka kit t- tatou tera Tana wairua i tupu tae noa ki te wa 
ka mohio In mc timata la ki Tana mihana. No reira ka haere 
hi me tc whakaaro kia oti i a la tc malii kua oti nei te whaka- 
takoto ki niua i s la. Tera i wliakateiteiria la i te mohiotanga 
te Matua ki Tana Tama i tc wa tc iriiringa, engari i haere 
tonu alu Ia ki te whakangoikore i Tona wairua i tc noho-puku, 
ki tc takahi i ngj hiahia kikokiko, ahakoa he Atua la, he 
Tangata ano la. 

I te whakamatautauranga tuatahi i malii a Hatana i te 
laha kikokiko a Ihu, i meatia e ia ko te hiakai Ihu hei hoa 
inona hci whakakake. Engari kali ore a taca. 

I tc whakamatautauranga tuarua ka meatia e ia Tonu 
talis wliakahihi. Ka man ia ki ;i Mm ki rungs i te Temepars 
,-i ka mea kia pekc la ki raro, a ma ngs anahera e haere msi, 
c hapsi ake Fa, ka kite ngs tangata ka whakapono ko la tc 
lino Atua. Ko ngs tangata koi te tit i ro ki tctahi kingi he 
whakahcrc-korc i a ratou, tera meatia v ratou a Mm hei kin( i. 
,-i mc i" ratou mahi i nga mes katoa mona mchemea i malii la i 

t.i [Iutailfl i mea ;ii. lie timi \\ h;ik;iin;it ; 1 1 1 1 ;m ramva nui tciin 

ahakoa ki tchea <> tatou. 

Kngari mchomes i malii la i ta flatans i noa ai, c kore 



2U ■ TE KARERE Hurac 21, 1926 

rawa la e tu hei Kai-Whakaora — ka he la i roto i Tana tnihana 
nui mo te mea i a la hei rangatira, a ka riro la hei kai-mahi 
te kino. 

Te whakahoki a Ihu i rite ki ta uga poropiti onamata, "Ka 
oti ano hoki te tuhituhi, kaua e whakamatautau ki te Ariki, ki 
ton Atua." 

lie aha uga manaakitanga kua riro mai i a tat 011 ma roto 
i a tatau takahi i nga whakamatautauranga? Tukua ki nga 
mema te karaihe te nuinga te taima ki te korero, e, he mea 
pehea ratou manaakitanga i roto i a ratou mahi i nga tauira 
o Ihu. 



Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti 
Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou 

Na Wircmu C. Kaa raua k3 Rapita Tanapu i whakarite. 

Ratapu tuarua, Akuhata 8, 1926. 
AKOEANGA 20. 

Ko te Haerenga Tuarua Paora i te Mihana. Te roanga atu. 



.1. Te haerenga atu i Makeronia. 

(a) I Tcharonika — a Paora i roto i te whare karakia. 
Main 17: 2; 13: 14. 

(b) Ka tukinotia raua. Mahi 17 : 10-13. 

(e) Ko nga mahi pai a Paora i Peria. Mahi 17: 10-13. 
(d) I Atene. Te tautohetohetanga Paora i roto i te 
whare karakia. Mahi 17: 15-17. 

II. Ko nga whakaakoranga i te Hiwi Areopaka. 

(a) Nga Apotoro i roto i nga tohunga. Mahi 17: 18-21. 

(b) Ko te "Atua Ngaro," nana nei i lianga te ao. Mahi 
17: 22-24 ; Hipcru 1:2: Mohia 4:2; Xiwhai Tuatoru 
9 : 15. 

(c) Ko te tangata he uri no te Atua. Hipera 12: 9 ; Matiu 
6:9; Kenehi 1: 26. 

(d) Ko te tikanga te ripenatatanga. Mahi 17: 30; 3: 
19-20; Arami 2: 24; Ako. me nga Kawe. 19: 31. 

(e) Te ai'anga o te hunga mate. Mahi 17: 31-32; IToani 
11 : 24-2(5. Korerotia te Upoko 40 o Arami me te 
Wahanga 7(5 te Ako. me nga Kawe. 



Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 2.5 

Ratapu tuatoru, Akuhata 15, 1926. 
AKORANGA 21. 

Ko te Mutunga te Mihama Tuarua i Haere ai a Paora. 

J. J Koriiiiti 1110 te kotahi tau me te hawhe. Nga Mahi 18: 11. 

(a) Tana nohoanga i a Akuira raua ko Pirihira. Mahi 

18: 1-2. 

(b) Ka tika hold te utu mo te kai-mahi. 

1. Ko nga akoranga a te Karaiti. Ruka 10: 1-7. 

2. A Paora raua ko te kai-mahi teneti. Mahi 18 : 

3 ; 20 : te. 

3. Ko te akoranga a Paora mo te utu. Mahi 20: 33; 

Koriiiiti Tuatahi 9: 18; Koriniti Tuarua 7: 2; 
11 : 7-9. 

4. Ko te whakakitenga nga ra muri nei mo te 

ako kaua he utu. Akoranga me nga Kawenata 
84: 78-92. 

(c) Ko te piringa ano Eliraha raua ko Timoti kia Paora. 

Mahi 18:4-5. 

(d) Ko te whakatahuritanga Kirihipu, Kaiu, me te 

whanau katoa a Tepana. Mahi L8: 8; Koriniti 
Tuatahi 1 : 14-16 ; 1(5: 15. 

Tiroliia iho tenei: Ko tetahi vvahanga nga halii waho 
c tohc na ko te whanau Tepana he tamariki kan. he mea 
iriiri, engari kaore he kaupapa tenei whakapono. 

(e) Ko te whakakitenga te p<>. Mahi 18: 9-10. 

(f) Ko te inainiga mai Paora ki te aroaro nga iwi 
Kario. Mahi 18: L2-8. 
II. Ko te haerenga atu Paora i Koriniti ki Epeha, ki Miliaria, 
ki llii-iiharaina, 111c Anatioka. Mahi IS: L8-23, 

Ratapa tuawha, Akuhata 22, 1926 

AKORANGA 22. 
Ko te Haerenga Tuatoru Paora i te Mihana.. 

I. Te \\ haknunga i nga hahi, 
(a) I Karatia, i Pirikia. M.ihi L8: 23. 
1 1. K<» )<• mahi a Aporo i Rpelm. 



21 6 TE karere Hurae 21, J926 

(a) He Iliu-ai no Arehanaria. AI alii 18: 24. 

(1)) lie mea-iriiri ia na Iloani — kihai i whakaekea to 

Wairua Tapu ki a ia. Mahi 18: 25. 
(c) He tangata kaha ki te kanwhau i nga nialii a 1c 
Karaiti. Mahi L8: 27-28. 
1 IT. Ko te niahi a Paora i Gpeha. 

(a) Ivo te iriiringa nic te whakaunga nga tangata na 
Hoani Kai-Iriiri i whakatahuri. Mahi 19: 1-7. 

Tirohia iho tenei: Kaore to tatou Hahi e whaka- 
iiiana i tenei niea i te ii'iiri tnarua; engari e 
whakaaetia ana te ii'iiri tnarua nei mo nga niea i 
tapahia ki waho o te Hahi, a mo nga niea ano hoki 
kua ngaro nei ratou tuhituhinga te iriiritanga 
i roto i nga pukapuka te Hahi. 
(])) Ko te tautohetohenga nana o Paora i roto i te whare 
kura o Tairanu. Mahi 19: 8-10. 

(c) Ko nga tino merekara i niahia ai. Mahi 19: 11-12. 

(d) Ko te whakamatautau te mana. Mahi 19: 18-18; 
Tauanga Ki o nga upoko. 

(c) Ko te whakatetcnga Rimitiriu kai-mahi hiriwa. 
Mahi 19: 23-41. 

Ranpu tuarima, Akuhata 29, 1926. 
AKORANGA 23. 

Ko te Roanga ake te Haerenga Tuatcru Paora i te Mihana. 
I. (a) Ko te haerenga atn Paora i Epeha ki Makeronia. 
.Mahi 20: i-3. 

1. Ka akiakina e Paora nga tangata Makeronia i 
ruriga i te whakapono. 

2. Ka nolio i rcira mo te torn tnarama. 

:]. Te tukinotanga nga Ilurai. Mahi 20: 3. 
(1)) Tana haerenga atn i Makeronia ki Toroa o Ahia. 

1. Onahoa. Mahi 20: 4. 

2. Te whatiwhatinga te taro i Toroa. Malii 20: 7. 

3. Te whakaaranga te hunga mate. Mahi 20: 
9-12. Whakaritea ki Nga King] 17: 1922, ki a 
Niwliai ano lioki 1 : 5. 

(c) Tana haerenga atn i Toroa ki Miretn. Mahi 20: 



Huraeil, 1926 TE KARERE 217 

13-1 (J. 
1. To kauwhau nui a Paora i reira. Mahi 20 : 17-38. 
11. T roto i Ahia. 

(a) To haerenga atu i Miretu ki Taira. -Main 21 : Mi. 

(b) Ki Horomai, ki Hiharia. 

(c) To poropititnaga a Akapu. Mahi 21 : 7-14. 



-0- 



PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL 

"GRF.AT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" 

PURPOSE OF UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON. 

The purpose of the Uniform Fast Day Lesson is to promote 

the spirit of testimony. This spirit will be best promoted, of 
course, as pupils are encouraged and stimulated to give expres- 
sion to their own con vie! ions. For a number of years we have 
featured a pupil responsive to the question, "What do I be- 
lieve?" — in certain principles of the Gospel. The thought be- 
hind this year's Fast Day Lessons is to encourage pupils to fix 
their attention upon the things they should do, if they are to 
develop fully in the teachings of the Gospel. Basing the year's 
work upon the actions of Jesus, we ask once a month that the 
pupils focus their thinking upon the query, "What does the 
example of Jesus hid me to do?" The aim of the work is not 
merely to acquaint pupils with the teachings or with the habits 
of Jesus, hut rather to lead them to Formulate their own pro- 
gramme of activity in the light of His great example. 

First Sunday, August I, 1920. 
Uniform last Day Lesson 

The Example of Jesus: what ii bids us do. 

Subjecl : The Second Temptation. 

It will be apparent from the fact that we call this the 
second temptation thai we follow the order given in Matthew 
1 :.") 7. Presumably it immediately followed the first, Some 
prefer to call the three temptations the Greal Temptation because 
of tic continuity from beginning to the culmination when the 

devil Ief1 -I' 

David 1 1 1 • 1 \ Raid: "ruder bis tongue is mischief and vanity." 



2l8 Th kakkre LIurae 21, 1920 

(Psalms 10:7.) 

J. el us remember lhal Jesus had had a very unique ex- 
perience. He had been reared as the son of a carpenter. The 

workings of the Holy Spiril apon Him were in evidence when 
Lie said to His mother following His visit to the temple in 
.Jerusalem at the age of twelve: "Wis1 ye not that I must be 
about my Father's business?" We read that "He received not 
a fulness at first, but continued from grace lo grace, until He 
received a fulness." (Doc. end Gov. 93:13) and that "He grew 
in wisdom." 

Let us ley to picture Him then. The expanding of the 
soul under Divine impress until He must have felt the actual 
approach of the time when Lie must enter the field of activity, 
which no doubt He did with an overmastering determination 
to accomplish His great mission. 

From the exaltation that must have followed His Father's 
acknowledgment of both His act (in baptism) and His sonship 
(".This is my beloved Son") lie had, through, a long, long East 
been brought to a condition of physical weakness with the 
possibility of its usually attendant mental and spiritual depres- 
sion, for with add that He is God, even the Son of God, lie Was 
yet also a Man. 

In the first temptation lie had been approached largely 
through the flesh — by an appeal to the natural appetite which 
must have been then so keen within Him. 

Now Satan approached Him through an appeal to vanity, 
coupled with the really dangerous challenge of the "If." lie 
was taken into the holy city, and placed upon a. pinacle in the 
temple. It was the very heart of a people suffering under a 
bondage very grevious to them, and who were looking for a 
Deliverer, a Mighty One, a King who should have power to set 
His people free; a greater than Moses through whom God had 
in trie past worked such wonders. 

"It* thou be tlie Son of God, cast thyself down: for it is 
written, lie shall iiive Irs angels charge concerning thee; and 
in their hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou 
dash thy foot against a stone." Compliance with this dare would 
have brought Him the adulations of His own people. Such a, 
manifestation of miraculous power and Divine co-operation, a! 



Hurae 21, 1926 te karere 219 

that time and piaee, witnessed as it would have been by crowds 
of devout Jew.s, would have stamped ILim as the Messiah for 
whom they were looking, and brought lo an immediate climax 
the mission upon which He had been sent. With our mortality 
and fiesh -weakness, how great would such an appeal have been 
10 ns! 

Vet what would have appeared to our human eyes an op- 
portunity to demonstrate that He was in every deed the Sou of 
God. the acceptance of the challenge of the "if" would have 
proven but the reverse, for He would have parted with His 
Messiahship — He would not have been a Deliverer, For He would 
have becom< rather the captive of evil. 

How wonderfully did Jesus dignify the word of God through 
His prophets \\\>.vn he answered from The written word, "It 
is written again, Thou shall not tempt the Lord thy God." 

Jesus was sufficiently well acquainted with the history of 
jsrad to know of such manifestations of God's power as occurred 
in the days of Moses with Israel crossing the Bed Sea, of bring- 
ing water Mom the rock, and other like incidents. 

The Example of Jesus: What i1 bids as do. 

"If" yon have received remission of sins through baptism, 
wjiy is it worth while to devote as much time, perhaps go to 
greal trouble, perchance pay ou1 so much money m connection 
with the Church . ; 

"If" you have received the wonderful promises given in 
[In Hon 1 ol the Lord, whj can'1 yon sit down and wail for their 
fulfilment .' 

Why accept serious responsibilities such as are imposed 
upon official acl ivity in I lie ' lunch ! 

Why take unnecessary risks physical, financial, spiritual? 

What blessings have been poured out upon as when we have 
followed Iks example and resisted temptation 1 

Read Ta Imagers "Jesus the Christ," pages ! :> ><i 133; Farrar's 
" Life of < 'In 1 -1 " p; .- 7 1 72; Papini 's "1 .\ ( r of I ! hri rt, M p 
G3-G7. 

It i ex| • ■ ted thai teachers of each depart m nt will earc 
fully and prayerfully adapt this lesson to their respective «•!. 
especially 11 > lo illustration mid applications, and all beai 
Htanl ly in mind thai Ihc *ri \i but I hi 



220 TE KARERE Hurac2I, I926 

the lesson being the determination oi' what the example of Jesus 
as depicted in the story, bids us do, and to draw out testimonies 
of blessings following. 

Second Sunday, Augusts, 1926 

Eeview Questions. 

1. What effect docs the example of a good man or woman 
have upon you? 

2. What circumstances or event occuring in the life of 
Isaac has impressed you and why? 

3. Name two outstanding accomplishments in the life ot* 
Jacob that make him great in your estimation. 

4. Could Joseph have attained to what he did if he had 
not served the Lord? Give three reasons for your answer. 

Third Sunday, August 15, 1926 

Lesson 18. Moses as Leader and Deliverer of the Israelites. 

Text: Kxodus, chapters 5-12. 

Objective: To show how man's leadership under God is the 
highest leadership of all. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
I. Moses called to leadership. 
II. Moses visited Pharaoh asking the deliverance of his people. 
The plagues. 
III. Israel released. 
[V. Moses as leader in the wilderness. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. What Priesthood did Moses hold, and were the people 
able to live up to its requirements f 

2. (Jive examples of leadership similar to that of Moses. 

Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1926. 

Lesson 19. Moses as Orator and Statesman. 

Text: Exodus, chapters 13-20 and others listed in body of 
outline. 

Objective: To show how man's leadership under God is 
the highesl leadership of all. 



Hurae 21, 1926 TE K ARE RE 



Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

I. As a statesman and Law-giver Moses has probably exercised 
a greater influence than any other character except Jesus. 

1. The Ten Commandments embrace the principles of 

primary law, and these principles are accepted not 
only by Christians, but by Mohammedan nations as 
well. (Exodus 20:3-17.) 

2. Many of the laws of Moses are decidedly practical 

and humane. 

a. Charity for the poor. (Lev. 19-9-10; 25:35-46). 

b. Equalization of wealth. Redemption of the land 
of servants. (Lev. 25:1-34 and 47-o5.) 

II. Moses presented religious truths in the form of wonderful 
orations. 

(The book of Deuteronomy comprises chiefly four orations 
by Moses. The fourth one is contained in Chapters 29, 30. \)v. 
Richard Green fcloulton says: "When I was a beginner in 
literary studies I recollect setting myself as an exercise to read 
through on three successive days, each at a single sitting, an 
oration of Demosthenes, one of Burke, and the Book of 
Deuteronomy ... I well recoiled the feeling 1 had at the 
time that neither of the other two rose to the oratorical level 
of Moses.") 

Note: in closing the discussion of Moses, il would be 
impressive 10 have some good reader read to the class the poem, 
••The Burial of Moses," by Mrs. Cecil Frances Alexander. It 
may be found in "Choice Readings," by Cummock, as well as 
in several other volumes of readings. 

Il is suggested thai ii' available the teachers gel the General 
Conference sermons of Presidenl Grant and compare with 
teachings of .Moses as to profound religious truth being combined 
with keen practical wisdom. (See Emprovemcnt Era, January, 
L922.) 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Summarize the life or Moses and name five great 
attributes of character that liis life exemplified. 

2. How do >oii explain his supreme greatness! 



Fifth Sunday, August 29, 1926 
Lesson :.<» Joshua. 



222 TK KARERE liLirae 21, 1^26 

Text: Given in body of outline. 

Objective: To show that a valiant follower of (Jod becomes 
a great leader. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
I. Joshua, a valiant follower. 

1. Fights the Lord's battle. Ex. 17:9. 

2. The twelve spies. 

a. Majority report, Numbers 13:32 to 14:5. 

b. Report of Joshua and Caleb, Numbers 14:6-9. 

3. Minister of Moses. Ex. 24:13. 

4. Encouraged by Moses. Deut, 1:38; 3 = 28. 

II. Joshua ordained by hand of Moses. Numbers 27:18-23, 
Deut 34 :9. 

Note method of 3,500 years ago and compare with to-day. 
III. The Leadership of Joshua. 

1. The waters are divided. Josh. 3:9-17. 

2. Jericho destroyed. Josh. 5:13 to 6:21. 

3. Sun and moon stand still. 

Note: Were the Israelites tempted to worship and 
serve the sun and moon? See Deut. 4:19. 

4. Land divided among twelve tribes. Josh. 10:12-14. 

5. Renewal of Covenant. Josh. 24:20-25. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Cive illustrations of latter day leaders who typify the 
same elements of leadership as were evidenced by Joshua. 

2. How can we be "Joshuas" to our present leaders? 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 
"THE BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, August 1, 1926 

Uniform Fast Day Lesson 

Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 217 

Second Sunday, August 8, 1926. 
Review Questions. 

1. Toll briefly the story of the conversion of Alma the 
'iiangcr. 



Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 223 

2. How did the sons of Mosiah show they had truly re- 
panted i 

0. r rell 1lic missionary experience that you like best that 
we have studied. 

4. Quote a passage you have memorized in the last three 
monl hs. 

Third Sunday, August 15, 1926 

Lesson 18. Missionary Experiences of the Suns of -Mosiah. 

Text: Alma, chapters 17 to 24 

Objective: To teach that the Lord worketh in many ways 
for the salvation His children (See Alma "24:27.) 

Supplementary References: "Leaves from My Journal,'' 
b\ President Woodruff. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. Alma 17:1-18 might be briefly told by the teacher. 

2. Amnion's missionary experiences, for special assignment, 
a. With Lamoni's servants. Alma 17:19-39. 

1). Conversion of King Lamoni, Alma 18th and l!Mh 

chapters, 
c. On the way to Middoni, Alma 20:1-27. 

3. Aaron \s experiences : 

a. Teaching the king, Alma 22:1-12. 
1). The king's hearl softened, Alma 22:15-27. 
c. A truly converted people, Alma 24. 
Passages to be marked and memorised 1 Alma L£:32; 19:23; 
24 :30. 

Qucsl ion for Teachers. 

1. Why do you think ihc miracles performed by Amnion 
were especially needful to convert the people among whom he 
was labouring \ 

2. Discuss the covenant entered into by the converted 
Lamanites and the genuine change of heart shown in it. 

Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1926 

! ' ion 1 9. Korihor, the Am i ( !hrist. 

Text -. Alma, chapter :'><>. 

Objective: To tench that those who serve the Ix>rd serve 



22| TE KARERE Hurac2I, 1926 

one Who is powerful to aid, while those who labor for Satan have 
no support in time of need. (See Alma 30:69.) 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. All the elass should read carefully the whole chapter. 

2. Special assignments: 

a. Korihor's teachings. Alma 30:6, 12-18. 

b. Korihor in the lands of Jershon and Giddonah. 
Alma 30:19-29. 

c. Have one student memorise the words of Alma and 
another the words of Korihor and have them give 
from verses o'O to 49 as a dialogue, to make a 
diversion. 

d. Korihor's confession and end. Almo 30:50-60. 
Memorize Alma 30 :(>(). 

Draw attention to the following words of Elder Rudger 
Clawson, President of the Council of the Twelve: 

"Prom earliest boyhood 1 was religiously inclined. One of 
the shaping forces of my character was of the reading of the 
Book of Mormon. Early in life I became interested in this 
remarkable work, which I read and read, drawing from its divine 
pages inspiration and hope. Faith sprang up in my breast. By 
a careful study of thai glorious book, well defined ideas of right 
and wrong were firmly fixed in my youthful mind, and I was 
thus measurably able to withstand the temptations thai assailed 
me, and was thus able to escape many of the sins and follies to 
which some of the young were addicted. With advanced years 
the conviction lias constantly grown upon me that the Book of 
Mormon is one of the grandest books of the age." 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Compare the teachings of Korihor (Alma 30:13-15) 
with the belief of many in the world to-day. 

2. Quote Alma 30 : 44, and discuss its appropriateness as 
an answer for any who may ask for signs. 

Fifth Sunday, August 29, 1926 

Lesson 20. Zoramite Manner of Prayer. The Poor Accept 
the Gospel. 

Text: Alma, chapters 31 and 32. 

Objective: To teach that we should ''worship God in 



Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 225 

whatsoever place wo may be, in spirit and in truth.'' (Sec 
Alma 34:35.) 

Supplementary References: Matt.: 6:5-8; Luke 18:!)-14. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. Have class read the whole text. 

2. Special assignments: 

a. Alma again goes forth to preach. Alma 31:1-11. 
1). Vain worship. Alma 31 :12-23. 

c. Alma's prayer. Alma 31:24-35. 

d. The appeal of the poor. Alma 32 : l-5. 

3. The answer made by Alma 32r6-43; also chapters 
33 and 34 should be carefully read by the teacher and 
given briefly to the class, assigning such passages as 
32:11-13; 32:21; 32 -.4042 : 33:8; :J4 : 1 7-2S to different 
pupils to recite, and have all pupils mark these and oilier 
passages in their own books. 

Questions fcr Teachers. 

1. Point oul the main features in the Zoramite manner of 
prayer thai would make ii most objectionable to the Lord. 

2. Define whal you think to be true worship. 



KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT 
First Sunday, August I, 1926. 
Uniform Past Day Lesson. 

Topic : The Tcmplat ion of Jesus. 

"Thou shall no1 live by bread alone," etc., Matt 4:7. 

Text : .Malt hew 4:5-8. 

Time : A t'tcr (he bapl ism ol JCSUS. 

Place: The Holy City. 

Objective: Courage to resisl temptation brings strength. 

I. Satan lakes Christ to the Holy City. 

I. Prom t he wilderness w here | [e Pasted. 

Sctteth Him (in tli.' pinnacle of the Tcmplo. 

1 1, lie attempts to t< 1 1 1 1 .nth. 
1 Th«- setting. 

a. Thf surrounding count r.\ . 

b. I haul il'nl colonnades of 1 he Temple. 

( 1 ) !•:.•« lesia 1 1' (High Church iuthor?t! I 



226_ TE KARERE Hurae 21, 1 926 

(2) Gossip seekers from the city. 

(3) Visitors from the country. 

2. lie calls attention to God's promises. 

"If Thou be the Son of God . . . angels will have 
charge concerning Thee. " 

3. He wishes Christ to see: 

a. That lie would receive the applause of the mul- 
titude. 
1). That His life's work might be made easier. 
II. Jesus' second victory. 

lie express faith in God. 

a. lie quotes scripture— "Thou shall not tempt the 

Lord Thy God." Matt. 4:7. 
1). lie abides by it. 
Application: Three boys break windows, two ran away, one 
stayed and met the owner of the place. What do you think of 
his attitude? 

Suppose a boy has a tooth that should be pulled. Which 
shows the greater courage — to have the tooth pulled at once, 
or suffer for a time? Going in somebody's yard against mother's 
wishes. 

Rest Exercise : We gain strength to resist temptation to 
do wrong by quickly choosing the right, whether it be deeds, 
words or actions. June is the month of flowers. We may do a 
kind deed by making our flower gardens a joy to others. We 
may dramatize caring for our flower gardens as the children 
suggest. Water them. Hake the soil around them. Drive 
sticks into the ground for the climbing flowers to lean upon. 
Gather the blooms. Take them to the sick or old. 

Songs: "Pansics," ( D.S.S. Songs, No. 127) ; "Let's be Kind 
to One Another," (D.S.S. Songs, No. 239.) 

Second Sunday, August 8, 1926 

Topic: Bird Sunday. 

Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten;" Jeremiah 
8:7; Gen. 1 :20 ; Matt. 6:26. 

Objective: Aiding in the care of birds will help to make 
our homes bright and insure protection from insect pests. 

Suggestions: Lead children to see the blessings derived by 



Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 



caring for God's creatures. Why God gave them to us. How 
man}' ways we can show our appreciation for the blessings R e 
have received by caring for His birds. 

Use pictures and let children talk about the birds they 
have seen. Where they build their nests, how they care for the 
young. The kind of food they eat, the songs they sing, and the 
good they do. 

Suggestive Songs: "The Song Birds," Kindergarten and 
Primary Songs, page 51. 

Memory Gem: 

"Dear little friend in your nest in the tree, 
Caring for baby birds, only three: 
Come, I have crumbs for you to eat, 
Then you may sing me your songs so sweet." 

Rest Exercise: The birds are our friends. The children can 
name many ways of earing for and protecting them. Dramatize 
their suggestions. Feed those who stay with us in cold weather. 

Garry a pan of water slowly and carefully to a shady place 
in the yard, for 1 lie birds to drink from. Frighten away the cat 
t licit sometimes catches the birds. 

Third Sunday, Augist 15, 1926. 

Topic : Abram and Lot. 

Time: When the Lord called Abram. 

Place: Prom ITaran, Canaan to Egypt. 

Text : < .'enesis 13. 

Reference: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," lesson 
54. 

Objective: Wc ore pleasing (.'oil and keeping His command- 
ments if we are unselfish in dealing with others. 

Suggestions: Abram and Lol willing to sacrifice their homes 
and friends in order to obey the Lord's call. 

Their long and ledums journey did not discourage them. 

They built alters and worshipped flod. When the promised land 
was reached, contention arose among the servants, Abram 'a 

L'tc.il desire lor pence between him ami his nephew. Me offers 

his nephew find choice. 

lie received ureal blessings from his Hcavenlj Father. 

Lead the children In '.<•<• how lhc\. loo. call be Ulisellish 



228 TE KARERE Iiuiac 21, I926 

with one another, with toys, candy, apples, picture books, pets, 
etc. Share Hood and shelter with those in need. 

Rest Exercise: When our friends come to visit us wc let 
them choose which of the playthings they would like to play 
with. 

This one may choose the ball, (dramatize throwing the ball.) 
Another may choose a jumping rope, (jump very quietly.) 
Another may choose the doll carriage, (push it back and forth.) 
Memory Gem: 

Is there a cross word that tried to be said? 

Don't let it, my deal', don't let it; 
Just speak two pleasant words, quick, instead, 
And that will make you forget it. 

Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1826 

Topic: Tithing paid in early times. 

Text: Genesis 14:20; 28:19^22; Hebrews 7:4,5 Deut. 12 :G; 
IT; 14:22-25. 

Time: Just after the great battle of the four kings. 

Place between Beersheba and Ilaran. 

Reference: ''Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," lesson 
55. 

Objective! The Lord blesses those who pay their tithing 
willingly. 

Suggestive Sonus : "The Little Tenth," Kindergarten and 
Primary Songs, page 26. 

Rest Exercise: Let us walk quietly to the Elder's house with 
the tithing in our hands; step quietly up the steps to the porch ; 
ring the door bell. Boys remove their hats and say, "How do 
you do, Elder? (state his name), I have brought you my tithing. " 
Say, "Thank you," as we take the receipt from him. Girls 
bow. Say "Good-bye" and walk quietly home. 

FLth Sunday, August 29, 1926 

Topic: Daniel in the Lion's Den. 

Text : Daniel 1 :1-4; 6 ; Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, 

Lesson 57. 

Time: Six hundred and seven years, B.C. 



Hurae 21, 1926 te karere 229 

Place : Jerusalem. 

Objective: A courageous person wins the favour of both God 
and man. 

Suggestions: Lead children to see how Daniel lived up to 
the teachings of his parents and was not afraid to be laughed 
at. He wanted to be what His Heavenly Father wanted him 
to be, and he felt that his parents had helped him to do it by 
their teachings. 

Daniel would rather have died than to have done wrong. 
He showed his faith and trust in God. 

How can we do right and receive protection. 

J. By being obedient to our parents' teachings. 

2. By obeying God's commandments. 

3. By being prayerful. 

4. By having faith. 

5. By not being afraid to do right. 

Song: "Put Your Shoulder to the Wheel," D.S.S. Song 
Book, page 178. 



-o- 



MAHI HUI ATAWHAI. 

KOUW S. T1MKIXI. Tumuaki Ilni Atawhai. 

Xa Toke Watene i whakaniaori, 

AKORANGA MO AKUHATA. 

Te Wa te Taima i Rite ai. 

(Meridian of Time). 

Ko nga Apotoro kotahi tekau ma rua Tuatahi. 

I. To ratou karangatanga. 

(a ) A Pita te hao-ika. Matiu 1 : L2-20. 
(hi A Anaru tona teina. Ruka "> : 1-2. 

1 1 1 \'_i;i akonga a lloani kai-iriiri. lloani 1 : ."."» I'i 
(Ci A llcini. me lloani, he tuakana he teina hoki raua. 

1 I 1 Nga taina a (leperi. Ruka 5: 10 L2; Matiu 1 : 

21 23 
(2 ' Nga i.miii.i .1 (laroini tcina >> Mori \n haca «» to 
Karaiti. Matin "7 : 56; Maka Hi: 1. 
A [ioani i tinci aroliatia nuitia u llm. Lloani 
19: 26 '.'7; 21 20, 
(d ) \ Piripi Petanaira <> K.iriii. 



230 TE KARERE Hurae 21 , 1926 

(1) Te mea tuatahi i kitea a tinanatia ai e Mm. 
Iloani 1 : 43. 

(2) A nana hold i matau ai a Xatanahira kia te 
Karaiti. Iloani 1 : 45-51. 

(.3) A Piripi hoki i to wahi i whangaia ai te i-inia 
iiiaiio (5000). Hoani 6: 1-14. 
(<.') A Xatanahira ara a Patoroniu. 

(1) I mauria mai kia te Karaiti e Piripi. Iloani 1: 
45-51. 

(2) Te whakakiteatanga tona vvhakapono kia te 
Karaiti. Iloani 1 : 47 51. 

(f) A Taniati lie tangata tut urn no Anatioka. 

(1) Tana piripono kia te Karaiti, ahakoa e kiia ana 
ia ko te tangata ngakau rua. 

(2) Me te nolio rite lmki kia mate tani me te 
Karaite. Iloani 1 1 : 7-17. 

(3) 1 ruarua i te rongo kua ara a te Karaiti, a i te 
putanga ki a ia, ki tonu ai i te a roll a me te 
ngakau ngohengohe i te mohiotanga ki a ia. 
Tloani 20: 24-80. 

(g) A Matiu te pupirikana. Matiu 10: 3. 

(1) Tonn karangatanga tonutanga atu e te Karaiti. 
.Matiu 9 : 9; 

(2) E karangatia ana ano hoki ko Iviwai. Maka 2: 
14; Ruka 5:27. 

(3) I kai talii a t(- Karaiti me ia ratou ko ona hoa. 
Maka 2: 14-18. 

(4) Te kai-tuhi te Rongo Pai tnatalii. 
(h) A llenii tama a Arapiu. 

(1) lie iti noa iho te mohiotanga mo te taha ki a 
ia. Kei te pohe be etahi ki a ia, ko te Elemi 
teina o EToani raua ko Henri teina te, Karaiti, 
engari e karangatia ana ia ko te tania Ai'apiu, 
me Matiu ano hoki raua ko Taniati, a tera pea 
he teina ia no raua. 
(i) A Repiu e karangatia nei ko Tariu. 

(1) lie iti rawa atu te whakaatn mona i era atu. 
Matiu 10: 3. 



Hurae 21, 1920 TK K.ARERE 231 

(2) J'] karangatia ana hoki ko Hura c iloani oie te 
ata wehe aim, iiaunga a Hura Lkariotc. Hoani 
14: 22-23. 
(j) A iiaiinoiia te Kananiti. 

(1) I whakaingoatia ko tetahi te tekau ma rua. 
Matin 10: 4; Maka 3: 18. 

(2) B karangatia ana ko llainiona Heroti i a Ruka 
(i : 15, aie N T ga Mahi 1: 13, te tikanga Heroti, 
"He tangata Kanaani." 

(k) A Hura lkariotc 

( 1 ) Te alma i ngohengohe in ki te whakahaunga a 
te Kaiwhakaora, oie te kaha hoki te mea i a 
ia c pupuri ana nga oioni, engari i alma ngakau 
apo, kaorc hoki i pono. Hoani 12: 1-7. 
i2) Te tukunga i a te Karaiti, me tona whakamo- 
moritanga. Ruka 22: 1-7; Maka 14: L0-11; 
.Matin 26: 14-17; Matin 27: .'Mi. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

Ko te aroha tetahi ki tona ake whenua (Patriotism). 

Te tangata aroha pono ki tona ake whenua, ko tc tangata 
c pupuri ana i runga i te ngohengohe ki nga ture tona 
whenua. "Kaua tetahi tangata e takahi i nga ture te 
whenua." Ako. me nga Kawe. 58: 21. 

E pai ana m at on ki ic haere i raro i te mana nga Kingi, 
o nga Tuniuaki, mc nga Kai-whakahacre tikanga, e pai ana 
hoki malon ki i<- ngohengohe ki !<• whakahonore ki te tautoko 
hoki i te ture. 12 nga Tikanga te Whakapono. 

1. Ko te ture here i a matou hei tangata whenua ki i<> 
in at 011 \\ henua. 
a. Ko tc ngohengohe ki nga ture. 
1) Ko to awliina ki te whakakalui i nga ture. 
2 Ko te whakanui ki te kara to taton whenua. 

.1 Ko tc whakaarahanga <> t<- kara "Union Jack" 

i \"m Tireni n< i i nga Ra hararei nunui, ara i !<■ 

Aperii ;i " \ ! tune, te ro 

w lianant.mv l <> King! 1 1. mm | tc II <> \onna 



i E KARERE Hurae 21, 1 026 

"Armistice Day" ko te ra i mutu ai te whawhai 
nui i rhahuc ake nei. 

I). Ko 1c whakanui i te kara. Ka nga lioia. Ka 
luiiia te "Union Jack'' ka maati nga hoia i mua 
te kara me te ara te ringa matau ki ratou 
rae he whakanui, i te kara, me te whakautu pcra 
inai hoki to raton Apiha whakahaere. 

c. I nga kura. Ko nga tamariki ka maati ka tu 
ranei i mua te kara i tc hutinga*. Ka pera ano 
te whakanui nga ringa i niuri ka waiata, i te 
waiata ''God Save the King. " 




KI TE ETITA. 



Ko te Matenga o Piki Waerea 

Tciici tetahi mea whakapouri kua pa mai kei a matau kei 
nga tangata Korongata nei. Mo tc 5 nga ra Hune ka mate 
tetahi o matau nei pakeke, ara a Piki Waerea. He tangata 
ngakaii mahaki tenei, lie tangata atawhai i tc manenc. Kahore 
tetahi mahi pakanga raruraru i niahia e ia i waenganui i a 
matau. lie tangata tu marae iioki ia, he tangata tautoko i nga 
whakaaro nunui i waenganui i to matau marae, tautoko i nga 
tikanga tc Rongopai Ihu Karaiti. Tona karangatanga i te 
Tohungatanga Arona, lie Kai-Whakaako. Mahue iho i a ia 
tona lioa wahine me a raua mokopuna nui noa atu i muri i a 
ia, kai ai i tenei ika nui i tc hakura me tc tangi. Ka rjro tc 
matua. no tc 7 o nga ra Mei i mate ;ii tona taniaiti a Koro 
Vy.acrea, c wha tonu nga wiki i muri mai i tc matenga atu 
tona tamaiti ka mate atu ko ia. Mai i tc ra i mate ai tona 
tamaiti ka iti tona whakaaro ki tona ake tinana i tc nui tona 
aroha me tona tangi ki tona tamaiti. Ko nga korero mo tona 
tamaiti kua oti ano tc panui i roto i Te Karere. Ko ona tan e 
63. Heoi i te kaha tona tangi pouri mo tona tamaiti kua mate 
ia. kua rite ona whakaaro tangi ki tona tamaiti, kua tae atu 
ia ki tona, tamaiti. 

Heoi, mihi mai, tangi mai e ona whanaunga i roto i enei 
hapu Ng&ti Kahungunu, Xgati Rakai]>aka, Xgata Tuwharetoa, 
mc era liapu tenei tangata. Heoi ano, 

R. M. KAMAU. 



Hurae 21, 1920 te karere .3$ 



He Piki i runga i te Tumatakuru ? 

E korero ana i roto i nga Qiangai te hunga kaore e pai 
ana ki tenei kura ara te kura a te "Moniona," he kura mani- 
heko, ahakoa e mohiotia ana etahi hua pai me etahi main pai 
e puta niai ana i roto i tenei kura. Kaore te hunga puhaehae 
ana ki tenei kura e ki lie pai, engari lie kura weriweri, whaka- 
rihariha, ko t<- take ke te whakakino mo te karakia. No 
reira aliau ka hoatu i tenei ripoata mo etahi mahi pai i nialiia 
c nga tamariki tenei kura, hei titiro mai ma te hunga e korero 
ana i Te Karere. 

I te tainia o te Pakanga i ata tonongia te ropu whaka- 
tangitangi nga tamariki te M.A.C. kia haere ki te kohl moni 
ma nga mea i haere ki te Pakanga i roto katoa Aotearoa nei 
i te robe i raro i te whakahaere a Apii'ana Ngata. Nuku atu 
i te wha mano pauna nga moni i tiro mai i a ratau. Ko enei 
tamariki l:e "Momona" te nuinga, lie Mihingare etahi, i whaka- 
akona e Watene Mete i roto i tenei Ivareti. Kaore ano oku 
tannga 1 rongo e In t an 3 lie tolui pi ten* he pn 1 mti enti 
tamariki no te M.A.( '. 

\a ko Wi renin Wiremu, i paahi ia i tenei kura. lie para- 
kimete tana mahi i vvhawha ai ia. Inaianei ko ia tetahi tamaiti 
moliio atn o iil:;i tamariki .Maori katoa, ahakoa i whea, ahakoa 
i whea. No Ngapuhi tenei tamaiti. [Caorc e korerotia te mohio 
o tena tamaiti. ko te take he koiv kaore e mahi whaimko i roto, 
engari kia noho hei roia ka haere te rongo, no te mea hoki he 
whanako taua mahi e riro ana mai nga moni nui noa atn. 

Ko tetahi tamaiti ko Ero Paranihi (Frances) no [lamoa, 

i ako i;i ki t«' ako i nga tohll pai katoa te kau miraka me te 
alma nga miraka e pai ai mo nga whriina v. era. me nga tohn 
papai o tenei taonga te pikaokao me nga tohu papai te kau, 
itipi. poaka. I paahi ia i tenei kura, tona hoki nga atu ki tona 
kainga ko ia te tamaiti i hoki atu i te .\! ,A.< '. kei )<• mahi i enei 
iii:ihi katoa i vvaenganui i ona i\\i. FCua in he vvharc mahi patn 
rnana, vvliare Imkapapa mana. Tekau ma wha nga ETamop i 
tac mai i tenei tan. 

Tetahi tamaiti ko llirini Rawiri Kamau, i tvhakaakona ia i 
roto i tenei ki •:: i 1 .■ VI.A.i i 1 itfl ki n ia tenei mol.iol 1 



2J4 TE KARERE Hurae 21, 1926 

mo to vvhakatangitangi. lie inea ako ia 11a Watene Mete, 
whii-a. kataa, menorini, kararanate, penetio, saxophone. 1st 
Grade ia i enei malii katoa. Kua noho ia he kai-wliakaako i 
Akarana. Kua noho ia hei agent ma Kad x v's Co., wkare nui 
Akarana. Inaianei kua haere ia i te ao katoa purei haere ai. 
Kua riro maii a ia te inatauranga teni malii. Kaati, kaore 
e kiia he hua pai tcna no te M.A.C. 

Anei ano etahi taniariki papai i paahi i tenei kura. Ko 
Nirealia Paewai, Apiata Meha, .lames Elkington, Brii T. Kupa, 
Tapsell Meh'a, me etahi atu. I paahi ratau i nga malii katoa 
tae atu ki te taha wairua. Koia nei te tino inatauranga nui ko 
te moliiotanga ki te taha mo te wairua e tika ai mo te oranga 
tohutanga, koia nei te riiutunga mai nga inatauranga. lie 
nui nga taniariki i puta mai i roto i tenei kura me tenei moliio- 
tanga, kaore e korerotia lie hua pai ena. 

Anei etahi taniariki ko (J. Xepia raua ko Rui Paewai i 
whakaakona ki tenei kura M.A.C. Kua kitea l-aua e te ao 
taniariki toa ki te purei wluitu paoro. I riro raua i roto i te 
piki o nga kaha mo te purei ki te ao, noho ana a Xepia koia 
te toa o te ao. E kore e kitea e kiia ana na te M.A.C. i 
whakaako, na i roto i te panui a te Pihopa o Waiapu no Te 
Ante aua taniariki. 

Anei ano etahi taniariki kua pikingia ano tokorima katoa 
ratau hei haere i roto i te tiima Maori no te M.A.C. I puta ake 
to ratau toa ki tenei malii ki to whutu paoro i roto i tenei kura. 
E kore e kiia te ao na te kura ''Momona" i ako. 

No reira e hoa ma, titiro iho ki nga korero, me ata korero 
e koutou te ahua tenei kura, he tino kura. Ara atu etahi 
awhina nunui a tenei kura i walio atu i enei kua oti nei te 
tuhituhi, i waenganui i nga Maori, Pakeha, Heretaunga nei. 

Ko te kaha te kura nei ki te man taniariki e 70. Inaianei 
kua neke atu 78 ng-a taniariki, kua tino ki, kaore lie ruma era 
e whai hang-atia atu ano etahi ruma Ida pan te 100 taniariki. 
No reira, e te iwi, Ida kakama mai, a kua nei ka ki i te Ilamoa. 
E whakamihi atu ana ki a koe e Ngapuhi mo to kaha ki te tuku 
mai i a koutou taniariki ki te kura o te M.A.C. Heoi, 

UM.K. 



Hurae 21, 1926 



TE KARKRE 



235 



He Whakaahua Pai 

Na R.R. Tiwinihana 
(He roanga atu) 




Ka te Ruuma a te Tamaiii a Hohcpa Mete 

He whakaatutanga tenei, te mea tuarua, te ahuatanga a 
te rum a o te Poropiti, i puta mai ai te Anahera Moron a i ki a in. 
Ko te moenga pu tenei i takoto ai te tamaiti poropiti i te wa 
o n^a whakakitenga e torn te Anahera lie moenga pai ho- 
ki tenei, mo tera wa, ahakoa e rima putu roa, a he taura ho- 
ki nga "spiungs." 

(Taria te roaaga) 



Ki a Ngapuhi Ranala 

R koro N'gapuhi lien at a, tena pa koo mo to mahi i>;ii ki to 
ui 11 i To Karero kia haero ki nga marao te luinga e whakahe 
mai n:i i i<' llahi lliu Karaiti <» te [lunga Tapu <> hlm Ra 
Muri N r oi. K tunianako atu ana toku noi ngakau kia vvhai hua 
taua nialii n hau i roto i nga po me nga pa tenei koanga, 
l\di;i 11.-1 ano nga mahi 1 ki ana hoki ngn koroua »> nclic pa, 
"Ki to koro <• hua to karaka mo kairangi nga poka kia hua ai, 
kia paralii ai, kia pakari ni." Mohentoa pa ho karaka ai 
i;ni c kairangi mai na, ki toku tino moliio ka pakari ona hua 



2Jj6_ TE KARERE Hurae 21, J 926 

i tenei raumati heke mai nei. Tena ki te oiea ko te piki i 
kanga ra e te Karaiti kia kore e hua a marokc noa tan e 
kairangi mai na, e koro ki toku whakaaro ka mouniou tana 
malii pai aliau ki la te ngakau tangata whakaaro. Tena ia ki ta 
te Atua he utu nui ki a koe, ahakoa tawaia, ahakoa rnanaakitia. 
Ko te lino painga tana mahi alum kia whai huarahi ai ratou 
hei whakamarama mai ma ratou i nga he te Iialii. Kia 
marama ai lioki te whakamarama a nga apiha o te Hani. 

Heoi, kia ora e lioa Renata mo to mahi pai. Xa to hoa 
pononga i roto i te Ariki. 

Xa TEHAUERANG1 MATAIRA, 

Chatham Islands (Wharc Kauri). 




KO NGA MAHI A TE KURA HAPATI 
HEI PAINGA MA TATOU 

Na Te Ngoura i tuhi, na Rapata Tanapu i whakamaori. 

(He roanga atu) 
I te ata kore he painga ake te kotiro nei, lieoi hacrc ana a 
Karanata ki roto i tana ruuma ki te inoi. 

I a ia e inoi ana ka puta te whakaaro ki a ia me tono ia i 
nga kaumatua kia haerc mai ki te pei te kai-whakamate e 
whakamate nei i tana kotiro, kia ora mai ai ia. Heoi ko tana 
tononga i nga kaumatua kia haere mai ki te whakawahi i tana 
kotiro. Te taenga mai nga kaumatua ka whakapa atu 
ratou ringaringa mo te w T hakawahinga, me te inoi ano mo te 
kotiro ra. 1 te mea c inoi ana te kaumatua nei. ka puta ctelii 
kupu tauhou rawa, kaore nei ano i rangona i mua atu e Kara- 
nata i roto i tenei mea i te inoi. 

Ka mea ia. "Kua oti noa atu te whakarite e te Kaiwliaka- 
mate e te Hoariri ton matcnga, kua panuitia nuitia lioki me 
mate koe i tenei mate. Engari ma te niana te Tohungatanga 
i a matou nei, e pei te niana te Kaiwhakamate, a c pera ano 
lioki e matou ta te Hoariri whakarite mou. ka mea ai kia tupu 
koe hei whaea i roto Iliaraira." 

I te hokinga nga kaumatua pai tonu iho te kotiro nei, 
ora ana. tupu ana hei wahine, inaianei kua whaeatia. I a 
Karanata e tatari ana kia pai ake tana kotiro kia lioki ai ratou 
ki to ratou kainga, ka lioki ana mahara ki nga kupu tauhou 
i rongo ra ia i roto i te inoi a te kaumatua. heoi ka whakaaro 



Hurae 2i; 1925 te karere 



noa iho ia ki ona ritcnga. I mua tata atu i tana hokinga ki 
loiia kaingd ka hacre atu ki a ia tc tangata nona ra 1a whare 
i noho ai ratou, ka mea atu ki a ia, 

"K hialiia ana an ki te korcro atu ki a koe i tetehi korero 
whakangahau mo taku wahinc. Ko taku wahine lie wahine 
whakapono ki nga tnalii-a-wairua. Xa i tetehi rang] ka haerc 
ia ki te kainga tetehi wahine korerorero ki nga wairua. 
Katahi ka mea mai te wahine ra ki a ia, i kite ia i etehi kotiro 
tokorua i roto i to mana whare e pangia ana i te mate, e tata 
ana ka mate, a kihai itaro ka kite ia i tc mea kaumatua e ora 
liaerc niai ana, ko tc mea iti i kino haerc tonn atn tc mate, a 
mate ana. I kite ano ia i te kotiro itiiti e maka ana ki roto i 
1c pouaka, i 1c niakanga tc pouaka ki runga i tc tereina, i te 
roa o te haeretanga te tereina ki tetclii taone, i te niakanga 
atu o tc pouake ki runga i tetehi atu tereina, i 1c whakaw iii- 
tinga o tc tereina i tc awa nui, ka liaere i nga macro maha 
nga maunga, nga raorao, i te niakanga atu ano te pouaka 
ki runga i tetehi atu tereina, i te haercnga atu »» te tereina a 
ka in i ic taone nui i tc taha te roto, c karapotia uei c nga 
maunga, i te tangohanga mai te pouaka i runga i te tereina, 
i te tanumanga ki te urupa i runga i tc hiwi." Pcnei ano i 
ata kite te waliine uei i enei mea, i te mea korc rawa i lie tana 
whakamarama i te ara liei liaringa i tc tinana te kotiro uei 
atu i Wahingitana, ka tanu ki tc urupu <> tc l'a Tote, me i 
male ia. 

Katahi a Karanata ka moliio ki tc tikanga <> nga kupu 
o ic iooi n te kaumatua ra, "Kua wliakaritea noatia atu hoki 
ion matenga <• !<• Kaiwhakamatc, kua panuitia nuitia hoki <• ia 
ka mate koe." Kaorc ano te kaumatua nci i rongo noa i mua 
.Mil i tonei wahine main ki tc wairua, ;i 1^ ;i toke akc tc whakaaro 
i a ia kin mea ia i ana kupu i roto i tana inoi i rongo ra ia. 
a na runga i te mana n te Tohungatanga i< Rcwera i pel, a 
ora ana ic kotiro nci. 

Ik' maha hoki nj»a kai w hakaako <• roto i n tatou 

llapali c kill' ana i tetehi una w liakamilia 10 1 .1 ratOU P malii 
.na 1110 tc Malii. I'] lik.i an;i liokl kia km, i.ni.i v faloii . in i 

mea rckarekn ki a ratou ukonga, kia u rawa ai ratou U i 

malii o Ic llalii, a kia mohio ;ii U i Ic mana •« ic Alna. ki Ic 
i nun a am. hoki n u« i;< ■ w . i . 



238 TE KAKERE liuiae>i, 1926 



ME PEHEA E RIRO AI NGA TANGATA KI TE KAHA 
A TE ATUA HEI WHAKAORA ? 

Ka mea a Paora, "Kahore hoki oku whakama ki te Rongo- 
pai te Karaiti: ko te kaha hold ia te Atua hei whakaora 
mo nga tangata katoa e whakapono ana." 

lie aba taua kaha i roto i te Rongo-pai? Ko te kaha i 
roto i te Rongo-pai koia to Wairua Tapu. E ki ana a Paora : 

1 Koriniti 12: 8-10. "E homai ana hoki ki tetahi e te 
Wairua te kupu whakaaro; ki tetahi atu te kupu ihatau, lie 
mea na tana Wairua ano; Ki tetahi ko te whakapono, na tana 
Wairua ra ano; ki tetahi atu ko nga mana whakaora, na tana 
Wairua ano; Ki tetahi atu ko nga nialii merekara ; ki tetahi atu 
ko te niahi poropiti; ki tetahi atu ko te matauranga ki nga 
wairua; ki tetahi atu ko nga reo ke; ki tetahi atu ko te vvhaka- 
maoritanga i nga reo." 

.Ma konei ka kite tatou, ki te whiwhi nga tangata ki tana 
wairua katahi ia ka whiwhi ki te kaha te Atua. No reira 
ko te tino take mo tatou, me pewhea e whiwhi ai nga tangata 
ki taua wairua 1 He alia te huarahi c riro ai nga tangata ki 
tana kaha ? 

E ki ana to tatou Poropiti a Hohepa Mete, ko te huarahi 
e riro ai nga tangata ki taua wairua, ara "ko te whakapono ki 
te Ariki ki a Ihu Karaiti; tuarua ko te ripenatatanga ; tuatoru 
ko te iriiringa rtimaki hei nmrunga hara ; tuawha ko te whaka- 
pakanga nga ringaringa mo te hoatntanga te Wairua 
Tapu." 

Na, mehemea he poropiti tika a Hohepa Mete, e tautokona 
ana ia e nga poropiti onamata. Titiro ki te kauwhaUtanga a 
Pita i te Ra o to Petekoha (Mahi '2: 39) i te mea kna kite a 
Pita he whakapono 1a te whakaminenga, no to mea i patai 
ratou, ".ATe aha matou?" Ko te whakahoki a Pita, ^Ripenata, 
kia iriiria tena tangata, tena tangata o kouton i rnnga i te 
ingoa o Ihu Kai'aiti, hei murunga hara ; a ka riro mai i a konton 
te mea homai, ara te Wairua Tapn." 

A tenei ano, titiro ki Xga Mahi S: 14-20. I te mea kna 
uiohio a Pita rana ko Ilemi kna whanan enei tangata i te wai, 
ara nga tangata na Piripi i iriiri, ka tae atu a Pita raua ko 



Hurae 21, 1 rE KARERE 239 

Jlciiii. me 1" whakapa iho o raua ringaringa ki runga ki o ratou 
mahunga kia whanau ai ratou i te wairua. Na ka kite a 
Haimona mi te whakapakanga o nga ringaringa ka whiwhi cnei 
tangata ki te Wairua Tapu. Kua mohio lioki a Paora ki te 
tika o enei whanautanga, no tc mea i te \\ a ka tac atu in ki 
Epiha (Nga Mahi 1!): 2-4) ka patai atu ia ki nga tangata, 
"Kua riro ranei tc Wairua Tapu i a kputou i muri i to koutou 
whakaponotanga "( Ano ra ko ratou ki a ia. Kiano matou i 
rongo noa he Wairua Tapu tenei. Ka mea ia ki a ratou, 1 
iriiria oti koutou ki roto ki te aha.' Ka mea ratou, Ki roto ki 
1a lioani iriiri. \a lea mea a Paora, Ta Eloani iriiri he iriiri 
ripenata. I mea ia ki te iwi, kia whakapono ratou ki tetahi e 
liaere mai ana i muri i a ia, ara ki a Karaiti Ihu." 

Na, e hoa ma, me ata rapu koutou i enei rarangi karai- 
piture, no te mea e korc enei tangata c taca te whakapohche 
i a Paora. Kua mohio a Paora he tangata tika a Eloani, he 
tangata vvliai in ana ia mo te iriiringa, a kei te mohio nga tangata 
tika katoa ki te kahore te tangata e whanau i te wai i te 
wairua lioki c korc ia e ahei tc lomo ki te rangatiratanga a te 
.\tu.!. Aia ka mea a lioani ki 1c iwi (Maka i 

"Ko ahau nei, he iriiri laku i a koutou ki te wai : mana 
i;i koutou c iriiri ki te Wairua Tapu." Ko enei tangata kei 
Epiha, kihai ratou i rongo ko te Wairua Tapu tetahi mea. \'a 
kua mohio a Paora ehara tenei i !<■ irriringa a lioani, chara 
hoki tenei i 1c iriiringa na i< talii tangata whai mana. Me ata 
titiro ki te rima me tc ono <> nga rarangi, a ka rongo ratou, ka 
iriiria ano ratou i runga i tc ingoa o tc Ariki a Ihu, ara ka 
iriiri ratou ki tc iriiringa tika na tetahi tangata kua vvhai mana. 
Na ka whakapakia iho nga ringaringa a Paora ki runga ki a 
ratou ,-i k;i tac mai ic Wairua Tapu ki a ratou. Na ka korerotia 
i ra1 (>u nga reo ke, ka poropil i iioki, 

M.i Loin i ka kite te huarahi e w \\\\\ hi ai 
whanautanga » tc wai mc )«• Wairua lioki, ara h kaha 
Atua lici w hakaora m< u tangata katoa v \\ hakapi i 

\,i i - inn i roto i Ro pai a t< Ki 

\;i lv II WIN W \ 



240 IE KAKEKK Hurae 21, 1926 



MO TE ARANCA MAI 

He men tango mai i te pukapuka qio nga tikanga te Rongb- 

pai (Gospel Doctrine, page 564) na te tumuaki 

11a llohepa P. Mete i tuhi, na Eru T. Kupa i 

whakamaori. 

I] whakapono ana au i te mea i ara ake a te Karaiti i tc 
mate, ka pera ano te hunga whakapono. Ka kite ano tatou 
i a tatou. E Qiohio ana au ki a l!m ko la te Karaiti, i nluri Jioki 
i Tuna matcnga me tona tanumanga, kua ara ake la i te mate, 
a kua aoho ko. la hei liua matamua mo te aranga mai. Iv i te 
hunga katoa e whakapono ana, tera noake ia ki te Hunga Tapu, 
e tatu iho ana te marietanga pai ratou whakaaro, me te 
mohiotanga hoki nia te ngohengohe ki nga lure me nga tikanga 
o te Rongopai, na te Karaiti na to tatou Kai Whakaora i 
whakaako, me te whakahau hoki ki te iwi me Ana akonga, ka 
wiianau ano te tangata, ka whakaorangia i te hara, ka ara ake 
i te urupa, a pera me te Karaiti, ka hoki atu ki te aroaro to 
Matua. Ehara ke te male i te mutunga. I a tatou hoki i roto i te 
hinapouri, i te wa e whakatakoto ai tatou i era tatou kua riro 
i a aitua, he maramatanga tonu to tatou kei runga i te oranga, 
kei nga kupu me te aranga mai Iliu Karaiti, ka tutaki ano 
tatou ki a ratou me te hariru, ka noho tahi, ka liaere tahi me 
ratou i te oranga pai ake, kua kore te pouri me te vvhakararu, 
kua kore hoki tatou e w^he ano. 

Ko tenei mohiotanga hei tino arahi i a tatou kia pai te 
noho i tenei oranga, kia puta atu tatou i roto i tenei hanga 
matemate, i runga i nga mahi, i nga whakaaro, i nga hanga 
pai. Ko nga wairua katoa nga tangata, i te mahuetanga atu 
ano o tenei tinana matemate, ahakoa wairua pai, kino ranei, e 
whakaaturia mai ana ki a tatou e te Pukapuka a Moromona o 
haria atu ana aua wairua ki 1c kingi ki tana Atua ano naana 
nei i homai te oranga ki a ratou, kei reira te wehewehenga, te 
whakaritenga i tetahi wahi te whakawakanga. Ko nga 
wairua o te hunga tika ka tukua ki te wahi whakahari, e 
karangatia nei ko Pararaiha, lie wahi okiokinga, he wahi 
rangimarie, tipu whanui ai to ratou matauranga, a okioki ana 
ki reira i ratou rarunga katoa.. i ratou pouri, i te alia, i te 



Hurae 21, 1926 TE karere 

aha. Ko te liunga kino ia, kaliore ratou wahi, taunga hoki 
ki te Wairua te Atua. na maka atu ana enei ki t»- pouritanga 
waho, he mea na to ratou kino ake, kua araliina li<>ki ratou 
i runga i ta te Itewera i pai ai. I tc wa tc matenga atu e 
penci ana te uoho a enei karailie wairua e rua, tae 110a ki te 
aranga tuai, te hunga tika i roto i te whakahari, te huuga kino 
i roto i te pouritanga, hei te wa pa ano hoki kua rite i te Atua. 
c ara mai ai te hunga mate, <■ kotahi ai ano te wairua me te 
tinana, e mauria ai hoki kia tu i te aroaro te Atua. kia 
whakawakia i runga i tc alma a ratou niahi. Koia tenei te 
ivhakawakanga wliakamul unga. 

1. tc mea kua ngohengohc te tangata ki nga tikauga tc 
Rongopai, kua whakapaua tona kaha ki te uialii pai, k; 
hoki i nialii lie ki tetahi, i aroha tonu ki tc tika, me te tal 
lioki i nga malii he, me te tuku atu i tuna tinana ki te urupa 
i roto i te okiokinga te hunga tika, e rongo ana ahau, c aiohio 
ana hoki tera c tapiritia mai i waho atu te ranghnaric aie te 
okiokinga i tc Pararaiha, tera he tino kororia uui rawa te 
kotahitanga ano te tinana tana ko te wairua, he tino marama 
hoki te aranga mai mona, me te oranga ki tonu i tc whakahari 
c takoto mai ana. AJica tcnci wa tae mai ai ko te Atua anake 
c mohio. ana. otira e inohio tuturu ana tatou ki tenei: ka 
mai nga tangata katoa i te mate, 

; an nci ano. <• mohio tuturu ana an <• tika ana enei whaka- 
aturanga ; v mohio ana au ki te tika enei mea, i runga i te w iri 

toku tinana ki tonu i te wairua tc Atua « awhina nei i 
mohiotanga. Ko tenei alma kei te haere tahi me te matauranga 
,, te Atua me Ana tikauga tapu. Kci ' • hakaatu 
ranga a te Karaiti, a nga poropiti ano hoki, nga kohimuhimu 
ano a tc Wairua Tapu, i roto i en< i 

kore taku w hakapono, me te mohio tonu hoki he ai 

to tc tinana, chara i te m< a ;:i nc 

aranga tuturu no te tinana Kaore hoki au 

1 Aina ki tonu nci i te 1 k hi > me 1 ; ' ,r 
tangata kia rite ki to tatou hoa, tuakana hoki, he p 

whai ho . : e tika hoki i roto i A 

hoki i Tona (i 

matenga mo ake tonu atu mutii atu 

.,■ men i m ;i ll " 1 ' ' 



244 TK KARERE Huiae2I, 1926 

turanga i roto i te Miutara, trie tana utu tonu i tana takoha 
i nga ruaraina katoa, a no te tatanga rawatanga te pan te 
rua tan, ka korero tahi ano raua ko tana Pihopa. 

(Taria te roanga) 





H e Fowh i r i 

Ki Te Karere: E rere ra e te manu tangi pai ki nga 
waahi katoa e tae atu ai koe, man e whakaatu atu ki nga 
tangata katoa e noho ana i runga i enei motu e rua, ara i te 
Aotearoa me te Waipounamu. E penei atu ana me haere 
katoa mai ratou ki to matou Hui Pariha ka tu nei ki te Kiri- 
kiri takiwa o Hauraki nei a te 31 o Hurae me te I o nga ra o 
Akuwhata, 1926. Haere mai kia kai tahi tatou i nga kai 
whakatewairua rne nga kai whakatetinana ano hoki. 

Haere mai! Haere mail Haere mai! 

Na Anara Tarapata, Tumuaki 
Pirimona Watene, Tumuaki Peka 

Haere mai! Haere mai!! Haere rmi!!! 
Tenei matou o te Peiwhairangi ka powhiri atu i te Hu- 
nga Tapu katoa, nga hoa aroha, Maori, Pakeha, aha atu 
ranei, kia hui katoa mai ki tenei oa tatou Hui Pariha; tenei 
ka tu ki Mangamuka i te 28 me te 29 o nga ra o Akuhata. 

E kii ra a Ihu, "E kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, e- 
ngari i nga kupu katoa a te Atua." No reira e te Hunga Ta- 
pu, e nga hoa aroha, tenei matou ka powhiri atu i a koutou 
katoa kia haere mai ki te kai i te taro o te ora. 
Na to koutou hoa, na 

Apiata Meha 
(R.R. Tiwinihana, Tumuaki Takiwa) 

Ko te Hunga Tapu o Korongata takiwa o Heretaunga 
nei kei te takatu i to rato.i marae kia tu he Hui Pariha kei 
tenei takiwa i roto i te marama o Hepetema nei, engari ko 
te tino taima hei tunga kahore ano kia whakapumautia e te 
Timuaki. No reira e te Hunga Tapu, kia mataara, tera pea 
ka panuitia te tino powhiri i roto o Te Karere mo Akuhata. 



Hurae 21, 1926 



TE KARERE 



Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau te Mahia 

Iriparete Pom are 

Te Amo Tengaio 

Whakahe Matenga 

Ruka Rarere 

Tiema Taurima 

Henare Taurima 

Perea Reupene 

Tungane Reupene 

Runga Tengaio 

Rangi Tengaio 

Hirini Christy 

Hoani Kemara 

Hohepa Te Kauru 

Hirini Kemara 

Paora Hapi 

Friday Pirihi 

Tere Waerea 

Wi Mete 

Ora Noa Tengaio 

Raiha Tengaio 

1 iemi Mete 

Waaka Toroaiwhiti 

Pita Reihana Pene 

Areta Kerei 

Potiki Kahuroa 

Keita Kahuroa 

Heremia Mae he 

Ray P. Thompson 

Hetakia Pirihi 

Hori Haere 

Tamihana Pere 

Miria Kamau Peri' 

Te Kauru Piripi 

Epeniha Kaihote 

Ko nge ingoa enei o nga kai-kauwhau Mahia mo Hu- 
rae Akuhata me Hepetema. E hoa ma, titiro, kua ma te 
mara, kua rite mo te kotinga, no reira ko ia e hiahia ana ki 
te kokoti, tukua ia kia aki ih<> i tana toronaihi i runga i tona 
kaha, kokoti ai, i te roanga te ra, kia purangatia ai mo to- 
na wairua he oranga mutunga kore 1 roto 1 te kingit 

Alua. Na tO koUtOU trina, 

l II. Anihana 



1 Nuhaka 


1 


J Mahanga 


3 


1 Oraka 

J Waikokopu 


4 


2 


1 Nuhaka 
/ Waikokopu 


3 


1 


\ Mahanga 
J Nuhaka 


2 


4 


\ Whakaki 
J Oraka 


1 


3 


\ Ki Roto 
J Wairoa 


2 


4 


) Wairoa 
J Ki Roto 


3 


I 


) Mahanga 
J Tuahuru 


4 


2 


1 Tuahuru 
J Wairoa 


I 


3 


S Oraka 


2 


J Tauapata 


4 


\ Ki Roto 
J Whakaki 


4 


2 


1 Mohaka 
J Waihu 


3 


1 


) Wairoa 


2 


i Reinga 


1 


) Mohaka 
j Nuhaka 


1 


3 


\ Nuhaka 


2 


j Putahi 


4 


J Nuhaka 


1 


j Wairoa 


1 


1 Te I'hi 


4 


) Putahi 


2 



TE KARERE 



I [urae 21, 1926 



KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA 



Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- 
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Auckland. 
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 

New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather 1 1-0 

Book of Mormon, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6 

" " " , Half Leather 9-0 

•' " " , Leather 10-0 & 15-0 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-0 

" " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 

MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 

, Leather 3-6 

Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 

" " " " Me Nga tiimene, Leather 3 in I Il-b 

" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 

" " " " , Leather 15-0 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-J 
" " " ", Leather 15-0 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 10 
SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Gospel 

What Jesus Taught 

Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 

SONG BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 

" " " , Leather... "... 

Deseret Song Books, Cloth 

" " " , Leather 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORX3 
Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 
Vitality of Mormonism 
Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 
Restoration of the Gospel, Widtsoe 
Joseph Smith's Teachings - 
Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 
Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 
Essentials in Church History, Smith 
Bible Ready Refcence 



4-0 
5.0 

36 
4-6 



66 

3-0 
6b 
3-0 

8^3 
4-6 
6-0 
40 
3-6 
40 
8-9 
6-9 
2-0 



Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Motris 6-0 

KO J. H. TINIK1NI TF KAI TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A. C. KORONGATA, HASTINGS, H. B. 




fetw 



gC^^^g^gpCC^ 



^^i^rs^ssiir^^ 



| WAHANGA 20 AKUHATA 25, 1 926 NAM. A 8 




i 



1^,% , *^ 



Ko te Puke Kumora 

'•KA iti ano tau kupu i rolo i te puehi 1 , 
11 ka rite tou reo ki to te tangata i 
te atua maori. he mea puta ake i te 
whenua, ka kowhetewhete ake tau ku- 
pu i roto i te puehu." Ihaia 29 : 4. 



;-o 



w, 



ESS 

m 






I 



<^- 



*C& KMK&R&' 



WHAKAEMINCA O NOA KORERO 



V\ naraugi. 
Kl TE ETITA 

He Matenga 266 

He Powhiri 20/ 

hie Ripoata Hui Atawhai 278 

He Ripo.ta Mihana 274 

Ko te Hui a te Poari M. AC 279 

Ko te Hui Panhao te Kirikiri 209 

Ko te Matenga o Te Paea Cunningham 274 

KO NCA RONCO KORERO 

Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona 268 

KO NCA TJHINGA MAI 

He WhakaahuaPai 267 

Ko te Nama a te Atua 202. 

MAKI HUI ATAWHAI 2bi 

MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Concert Recitation 246 

Intermediate Department 255 

Korero a Ngakau 246 

Kindergarten Department 258 

Maori Theological 246 

Pakeha Theological 249 

Postlude 245 

Prelude 24$ 

Sacrament Gem 24s 




aroro 



WAHm.wa 20 WENEREI. AKUHATA 25. 1926. NAM* 8 

filaori Hgriculmral College Hasliitfls. i . £. 

E tukua atu ana ia mararmi e te Miliaria o Niu Tiieni, 

Halii o iliu Karaiti o te Runga Tapu o nga Ra o xMuri JNei. 

Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita c Te Karere, M.A.C, Hastings. 

K<» te utu iuo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-). 

KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. 

iV.e matua utu mo tcu pcpa kc. voiiivhi ai. 



J. H. Timkini, Tumuuki Mihana 
Monona K. Kwutana, Etita. l\ala Wiuhita, LUia Hoa Awhii.i 



Ko te Kui-R,poata Te Tuati Meha 

Kii aga Kai Tulii Mai (Special Writers). 



YY iremu A. Koura 



Rap ta Tan;*pu 



Eru T. Kupa 



TIAHI KURA HAPATI. 

Prelude. 



Adagio hgato. 



Arr. After Schumann. 
by Edw. P. Kimball. 



PP 



StCRAMENT GEM FOR SEPTEMBER, 1926 

I ii memory of i he broken flesh 
We eal I he broken bread ; 

And witness wit h t he eup a fresh, 
( hie faith in < Jhrisl , our I read. " 
Postlude. 

PPP Bit, 



246 TE KARERE Akuhata25, ^26 



cU.vCLRT RECITATION FOR SEPTLMBER, 1926. 

(Matthew, Fourth Chapter, Tenth Versed 
"Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt 
ihou serve." 



KORERO A NGAKAU MO HEPETEM4, 1926. 

Kei a Matiu 4 : 10. 
"Me koropiko koe ki te Ariki, ki tou Atua; me mahi ano 
ki a ia anake." 



MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



Ratapu tuataiii, Hepetema 5, 1926. 
HE AKOKANGA MO TE KA NOKO-PUKU. 

Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. 
Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- 

toria nei e Ihu liei mahi ma tatou. 

Te Whakaaui: Kei a Matiu 4: 8-11. Akoranga me nga Kawenata 
19: 1()-1S. 

Tera lie nui Dga tangata e korcro ana i nga karaipiture kahore e 
inohio ki to tino tikanga te whakamatautauranga Ihu, tera e pa ana 
ki ia taugata te ao. Hcci ano te mea e kite ana ratou, ko te whawhai 
1 waenganui nga mea kaha c rua — te Tama a te Ata (a Hatana) me 
te Tama a te Atua (ko Ihu). Ko te patai kei roto i a ratou koia tenci, 
"Ka aha kia pena i taka a Ihu i te whakamatautauranga ? ' ' Kei te 
tino mohio ratou tera he atua a Jim, te take i taea e la te whakamatau- 
tauranga. Kei te hari ratou ko Ihu i kaha, kahore te Rewera. Engari 
1 vvareware ratou tera a Hatana i homai i nga mea te ao ma tatou 
meite korokipo tatou lei a ia — !:;; iaua whakamatautauranga ano ana ki 
a Ihu. i mea ratou kahore a Hatana e vvhakaamatautau pcra i a ratou, 
ie take ehara Latou i te Atu a pera i a Ihu. Me mohio tatou tera a Hatana 
kei te whakamatautau i a tatou pera ano i tana mahi ki a Thu — teuei 
hci whakakaha i a tatou ki te takahi i a ia. 

Ac, he Atua a Ihu, a he tangata ano hold, pera kahore a Hatana e 
whakamatautau i a la. I Tona tutakinga kia Hatana i mahi la i Tona 
kaha tangata, ki taea ano e la te kaha te Atua, engari kahore i mahia 
o Ta no te mea kahore tera i te rite ki nga whakaritenga mua atu. 

I whakamatautau a Hatana i a la i runga i ()n« hiahia — hiahia 
almarcka, hiahia koropiko, hiahia kaha. He vvahi ngolkorc tcnei ki a 
tatou katoa, engari ka awhina te Ariki i a talon i roto i o tatou whaka- 
matautauranga — pera ano i Tan;' mahi ki a Ihu. 

Kei te whakamatautauria nga tangata katoa, kahore he mea e kaha 



Akuuata 25, \^2u IE tLAhLLRE -.47 

incite kore e av.hir.atia. 

J mohio a Ihu he Tama In na te Atua, a tera nga ia kei te haere 
mai ku mohiotia la be kingi. Engari i mua Tona hounga ki Tuna 
kingitanga he mahi Mana hci aiahinga, me nga mamaetanga me nga 
tukinolanga Mona. I mua atn i Tona kakenga ki to rangi ki Tona 
torona me maniac Ja, a me ripcka ano hoki. 1 mea a Hatana incite 
koropiko a lhu ki a ia ka whakahoa ia ki a te Karaiti. Tera a te 
Karaiti e tn hei kingi nni. kahore hoki he rnamae, he mahi, heoi ano 
me kokopiko la ki a Hatana, ka tino niaarnaa noa atu — engari ka inca 
a ilin Die haere Ja i raro i nga whakahaunga a Tona Matua. 

"Xa ka mea a Ihu ki a ia, Haere atu, e Hatana kua oti hoki te 
tuhituhi, Me korouiko koe ki te Ariki, ki tou Atua me mahi ano ki a ia 
anake. Xa ka niahue ia i te reueia, a ka haere nga anahera, ka mahi 
Diea inaana.'"' 

l\a whaknwai. a Hatana, ka tohutohu, ka whakahau — engari kahore 
i taea e ia tetahi ki te mahi i 011a mahi kino inehemea kahore e pai atu 
te tangata ki a ia. E kore hoki ia e noho ki tetahi mehemea kahore 
ia e tukua mai. Ka tukua mai e te Atua he awhina ki nga mea nui ke 
iici to ratou aroha ki te Atua ia Hatana. 

He aim tiga lake o tenei tauira ki a tatou.' 

He alia nga manaakitanga • ' riro mai meite taea »• tatou nga whaka- 
niatautauranga .' 

Me takatu te kai-whakaako ki te hoatu i tenei akoranga kia nui ai 
nga painga ki te karaihe, a ka hoatu ai te nuinga te taiina ki nga 
mema ki te korero i nga manaakitanga kua riro mai i a ralou nia roto 
i to ratou kalia ki te tu i nga vvhakamatautauranga. 

Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti 

Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou 

\';i Win mil ('. Kaa raua ko Rapata ranapu i whakarite. 

Katapu tuarua, Hepetema 12, 1926. 
AKORANGA 24. 

Ko tc Mutanga te Hacrcnga Tuatoru Paora i te Mihana. 
I. A Paora i Kpelui. 

Ko te pukapuka tuatahi ki tc Hunga <> Koroniti. 
I\.»iiniti Tuatahi L6 - 

Tirohia ili»» tcnei: l\<> to pukapuka noi he mea 
tuhituhi atu na Paora i te tatanga pan te toru 
tau tana noho i Bpeha. 
I !. Ko te haerenga <» Paora i Kariki. 

(a) Te pukapuka tuarua ki nga l\<uiuiti 

Tirohia iho tenei: !!<• mea tuhituhi i muri tata ilu> 
i t« pukapuka hiatahi, i Makeronia 



248 tk KARERii Akuhata 25, .y26 

(b) Te pukapuka ki te Hunga o Roma. 

Tirohia ilio ano: I tuhia mai i Koroiniti hei whaka- 
at n tahi ki nga Eiunga Tapu o nga Hurai, a o Qga 
tauiwi hokij ko te aroha me te whakaoranga a te 
At na i tau ki a ratou kaioa. 
III. Ko te haerenga o Paora i te akau o te moana o Ahia 
Maina. 
(a) Te whakaoranga o Utiku i Toroa. 
(1>; Te poroporoakitanga ki nga Hunga Tapu o Ahia. 
Mahi 20-: L8-36. Ata tirohia ng, frhakaakoranga i 
put a i reira. 
(e) Te poropititanga <> A.kaJ)U i Toroniai. 

Ratapu tuatoru, Hepetema 19, 191:6. 

AKORANGA 25. 

Ko te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i Hiruharama. 

A. Ko tana powhiritanga atu e nga tuakana ki iliruharama. 

1. Ko tana ripoata o tana mahi mihana i waenganui i nga 
tauiwi, mo nga tau e toru. Mahi 21: 17-19. 

2. Ko tana whakaaturanga i nga mahi i oti i roto i nga 
tauiwi. Mahi 21 : 19: Roma 15: IS. 

3. Ko te pataitanga o te kauwhau a Paora. Malii 21 : 20- 
22. 

4. Ko t<» tohutohunga a Paora hei awhina i te ritenga o 
to purenga. Mahi 2i : 23-26. Tirohia tahitia Tauanga 
(i : 1-9 Inn whakamarama i ona ritenga. 

B. Ko te whainga o nga Hurai kia patua a ia, ne tana hopu- 

nga e nga tangata o Roma. 

1. Ko te puhaehaetanga o nga Hurae mo Paora i roto i 
te Temepara. Mohi 21 : 27. 

2. Ko tana whakapaenga <• whakaako ana i nga tikanga 
ke i 1a te llahi. me te mahi poke i roto i te Temepara. 
Mahi 21 : 28-29. 

Tiroliia ihd tenei: Xa ko nga tauhou e tomo ana ki roto i 
te Temepara e ahei ana kia whakamatea. Tauanga 3: 10, 38; 

1 : 51. 

3. Ko tana maunga i te ropu. Ko tana haringa ki waho 
o to Temepara kia whakamatea. Wliakaritea TT Kingi 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KAKERE 249 

11: 15. 
4. Ko te whakaoranga Paora e nga tangata Roma. 
Mahi 21 : 33-34. 



Ratapu tuawha, liepetema ?6, 1926 

AKORANGA 26. 

Ko te Roangu atu te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i 
Hiruharama. 

A. Ko tana karonga i a ia i te arawhata. 

1. Ko te kiiii»<a a Paora i a ia he Hume whakaako i Qga 
mea tika katoa. Mahi 22: 3; 21 : 39. 

2. Ka whakapuaki a Paora i tana kaha i niua i roto i oga 
tukinotanga ki nga Apotoro. Mahi 22: 3-5; 7: 58; 
8: 1-3; 9: 1-2. Whakaritea ki te ahuatanga o Arami, 
te mea tamariki iho. Mohia, upoko 27. 

3. Ko tana vvhaki hinegaro mo nga whakatahuritanga 
merekara. Malii 22 : 6-l(>. 

4. Te whakapuakitanga i te karanga a te Atua i a ia kia 
malii i roto i nga tauiwi. Mahi 22: 17-21. Tirohia ano 
Nga Mahi 9: 15; Roma 11: 13. 

B. Te po tuatahi Paora ki roto i te pa (castle) Hiruharama. 

1. Te takatakainga ona ki te peha kau. Malii 22: 25-28. 

2. Ko tana kiinga i a ia he tangata no te pa Roma, a 
korc ake ia i tapua. Mahi, 22: 29; 16: 37. 



P4KHH4 TH FO LOGIC* L 

"GREAT BIBLICAL CmKACTIKS" 

I ir*t Sundav, September 5, 1926. 

FAST DAT TOPIC 

The Example of Jesus: What it Bids us l)<>. 
The Third Temptation. 

Text : Mati hew 4 :8-ll. 

Probably must <>i* the casual readers of the scriptures fail 
to see the greal significance to <;icli individual of the temptations 
of Jesus. Their thoughl is thai they were but 1 battle between 
two 'jrc.it personalities the tempter, Satan, whose constant 



250 TE KARKRE Aknhaia 25, Jy^6 

efforts and great aim is to overthrow the Father's work and 
defeat the Son's plan- and the Tempted, ihe Only Begotten 
Son, the Chosen One. 

The question in the mind of such a reader is, "Will Jesus 

successfully resist I What it' He had failed V A world, yes, 
more than a world, was at stake. We accept the result as 
demonstrating the Divinity of Jesus, and that He had power to 
accomplish His Father's purpose. We are too apt. to think, as 
we are not divinely born as was Jesus, that the promises were 
not to us, that Satan would not offer us the kingdoms of the 
world. Thus we push ourselves out of Ihe picture. While we 
rejoice in the victory of the Lord, we fail to recognise that wc 
are subject to temptations of similar types, and thus fail to get 
the value of His example through his victory. Recognition 
should give us courage and greater determination in resistance 
of temptation. 

While we recognise thai Jesus was marvellous and wonderful, 
yet we cannot fail to see that in birth, in growth and in gradual 
development, He was a man. Probably there was with Him as 
He grew up from the Babe of Bethlehem, as the Son of Joseph 
;>ii<! .Mary, to the temple of Jerusalem, to the waters of the 
Jordan and then to the great conflict with Satan, first a glimmer, 
followed by the dawn of the great truth that He was in very 
deed the Son of God, following human consciousness, operated 
on by God's Spirit. He had constantly the sense of manness ; 
humanness never left Him. He never invoked the miraculous, 
never exercised the power that was developed in Him for Hi, 
own safety or benefit. Let us keep then in mind that He met 
the tempter on Ihe platform of common humanity, and there 
light ou L the battle of virtue. 

He was attacked as all of us can be attacked, as one writer 
pm it, "on the side of desire (the desire of pleasure, the desire 
of praise, and the desire of power) — an approach through the 
body, through ihe intellect, and through the soul, to Ihe inner 
man, the spirit, the real /." 

Ood's promises of sustaining grace, of overruling providence, 
of deliverance, are to each of us under the same price of 
obedience. 

Dr. Deems says: "Every intelligent man who devotes any 
time in self-inspection finds that his violations of any code, 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TK KARLRE 251 

i.'Mch he believes to be the moral law, come either from certain 
emotions 0' bis »wn inner nature — excite'! lie cannot tell how, 
spontaneous so far as he knows — acting upon his will, making 
such presr.ure upon that wiii as amounts to a tempatation ; or, 
thai such excitation of the emotions and such pressure upon the 
will is something from without. In the latter case ii is some 
perception of some object which he sees, or of some sound which 
lie hears, or some report of some 01 the senses, undesigned, 
coming incidentally upon him, or designed,, brought to bear upon 
bim by some intelligenl being. Among the undesigned seductions 
1o evil, or what may at least be called evil influences, are those 
attractions or repulsions created in the individual man by the 
"spirit of the age," a general air and temperature generated b\ 
all the intellectual and spiritual motions about him, and coming 
upon his soul no! from any individual's design to be specially 
hurt in! to him, but just as dele'erous air destroys where no man 
is attempting to poison another. But we are conscious of 
sinister and wicked designs upon us concocted and operated by 
wicked men. Some men are adroit, some skilful, some surpas- 
singly influential Tor evil. Some of these are really so acute in 
their perceptions, so rapid in their motions, and so persistent 
in their efforts, that to speak of them as compassing sea and 
land seems hardly an aggregation. Artists of the pen sometimes 
paint these far-sighted, near-sighted, telescopic microscopic, 
almost ubiquitous weavers of the webs of deceit and treachery, 
and p: ; m them with ;i power that appals us." 

Let us not sit down with the thought that we are not subject 
to tempalations nor thai in and of ourselves we sre able to 
ii --fully resisl them. 

In this temptation .Ic^ns was taken "to an exceedingly high 

uin." and shown all the kingdoms of the world, and the 

glory of them ; Satan said, "All these things will I give Thee, if 

thou wilt Fall down and worship iac." This w;is in ,1 w;iy ;in 

offer of ;i partnership with s.-itan. who practically recognised 
Jesus ;is the Son of God. with r message and mission, to become 
the Messiah, and, claiming sovereignty over the world, offered 
Ihem J" linn " He would but how down and worship. 

.Jesus was attacked on the spiritual side. He, too, n..w knew 
Elis Messiahship, and probabh could see the thorn} path b< 
I Inn. and tin- offer of whal mighl be called ;i "bloodless victon " 



252 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, iy26 

may have been an alluring one — yet he failed not. 

Let us get a full understanding of three features that now 
appear strongly: 

"Then saith Jesus unto him, Gel the hence, Satan: for it 
is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only 
shalt thou serve. Then the devil leaveth him, and, behold, 
angels came and ministered to him." 

Satan can tempt, entreat, entice, even command, but cannot 
compel obedience. Satan can remain with the tempted only so 
long as the latter permits. God sends succour and help to those 
who prove loyal and true. 

A contemplation of what con fronted Jesus, His destiny (read 
Doc. and Cov. 19:16 and 18) and the aspirations of Satan will 
prove very interesting. 

What does the example of Jesus bid us do"? 

Shall we have prayers in the home, read and study the 
scriptures and engage in Gospel talks in the family circlet Shall 
"love abound" in our homes? 

Shall we prove our loyalty to God by honoring our priest- 
hood, attending the priesthood, sacrament meetings and auxiliary 
gatherings; by paying our tithes and offerings; by responding 
to missionary calls; by showing that we have pure religion such 
as described by James ( 1 : - 7 ^ , ''Pure religion and undefiled 
before God and the Father is this, To visit the fatherless and 
widows in their afflictions, and keep himself unspotted from the 
world. " 

What blessings are obtained through overcoming tempation ? 
The constant companionship of God's spirit; becoming instru- 
mental in accomplishing His purposes; securing eternal life and 
exaltation, etc. 

Teachers should not fail to make as careful preparation of 
this lesson as of any other, carefully adapting the illustrations 
and applications to their respective classes. Do not let it "go 
over the heads" of your boys and girls, and see to it that the 
major portion of the time is given by the pupils, particularly 
of a testimony nature. 

Read: Talmage's "Jesus the Christ," pages 131-135; 
Farrar's "Life of Christ/' pages 72-74; Papini's "Life of 
Christ. •' pages 63-68. 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARERE 253 

Second Sunday, September 12, 1926 
LESSON 21. 1UTII. 

Te::1 : ( liven in body of outline. 

Objective: To show that the choice of one's people and one's 
Ood del ermines one's destiny. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
i. Naomi and Sons and Daughters in the country of Moab. 
a. Death of husbands. 
I). Orpha 's choice. 

<-. Ruth's choice. (Memorize 1:16-17.) 
II. At Bethlehem. 

a. Ruth the gleaner. 

I). Receives recognition from Boaz. 

1. In work, 2:15. 

2. In virl ue. 3:11. 

y. Requirements of Mosaic Law fulfilled. (See Matt. 
22 :24. ) 
III. ftulh ihc ancestral grandmother of David and Christ. 
I Must ration : 

1. ( Jonverts to the ( !hurch. 
2 Song, "Who's on the Lord's Side. Whot" 
Questions for Teachers. 
\Yhai three virtues 01 womanhood did Ruth exemplify? 
2. Why can one be besl judged by the company one chooses. 

Third Sunday, September 19, 1926 
LESSON 22. QUEEN ESTHER. 

'i ext : Book of Esther. 

Objective: To show thai the safety and reputation of an 
ei tin neople maj depend upon the virtues of a humble member. 
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
! Time of \hasuems, King of Persia (probablj Xerxes . 
nboul !•"><» B I '.. during i he Jewish capt \\ \\\ 
;i. Power, wealth, magnificence of Persians l :i l»» 
I*. Ifnmiliuting conditions of Jews in captivity, I '• 
1 1 Es1 her 1 he Jewess 

u Niece and adopted daughter of Mordeeai, " 
1) Fair and beautiful, ! 



254 J >- KAKBKl Ak ihata 2J>, 1926 

c ( >hcdient, loyal, humble, 2 :20. 
d. ! :ho,sen Queen, 2 :15-17. 

III. Privileges of a Persian Queen. 

a. Limital ions, 4:11. 

i). Queen Vishti's banishment, 1:10-21. 

IV. Esther as Queen. 

a. Loyalty and faith, 

1. Mordccai's appeal to save her people, 4:1-14. 

2. Her appeal tor the faith ;m<l prayers of her 
people, 4 :35-16. 

b. Courage and discretion. 

1. Presents herself to king on pain of death, 5:1-3. 

2. Obtains reversal of decree against her people. 

3. Elevation of Mordecai and death of Haman. 

4. Safety for the Jews, chapter 8. 

Illustration: Benjamin Franklin in Europe. John 
Taylor's letter to Argus. '"One Hundred Years of Mor- 
monism," page 286. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Name three virtues possessed by Esther that make for 
leadership and greatness. 

2. I low can you bes; serve your people and the Church \ 

Fourth Sunday, September 26, 1926. 

LKSXOX 23. SAMUEL, A CHILD OF PROMISE AND A 

TRUE SERVANT OF GOD. 

Text: I Sam. 1-16. 

Objective: To show thai as one gives himself to the service 
of the Lord and His people he grows in goodness and power. 
Supplementary References: Geike's Hours with the Bible, 
Vol, 3. Beacon Lights of History," Vol 2. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
1. Samuel, the sou of ;i wonderful mother. 

Her prayer of thanksgiving (I Sam. 2:1-10.) 
tl. His early training in the temple under Eli. 
1. His call by the Lord. 
2. His response. 
ill. His service to Israel. 

1. Xo national existence — no settled government — no 



Akuliata 25, 1920 TL ICARKRE 255 

established religion. 
2. As judge ho established a nation and a religion for the 

people. 
.'>. II is groat speech. (I Sam. 12.) 
4. Lord says: " His character was reproachless. He was. 
indeed, one of the best men that ever lived, universally 
revered while 1 living, and equally mourned when he 
died. '* 

Questions for Teachers, 
i. To whai do yon ascribe Samuel's great wisdom and 
power. 

2. Whal great lesson comes to you from the study of the 
life of Samuel? 

INTKRMEtmTH DKPaKTMHM 
"lill: BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, Septemeber 5, I92(> 
Uniform Fast Day Lesson. 

Sh roe as Fakeha Theological Chss. See page 249 

General Subjed : The example of .Jesus: what it bids us do. 

Special Topic: The Third Temptation. 

Adaption for Intermediate Department. 

Refer to the notes for .May and June. Use the copious 
suggestions in the outline in the Theological Department. 

This temptation centres around power. Every boy likes to 
be ;i loader, ;i captain of ;i team, or ;i patrol leader. lie can 

grasp the significance of this appeal to the opportunity to rule. 

'To lead is laudable, provided our does not need to lose one's 
self-respect and liberty, in order to lead. 

Some public office holders secure their positions only by 

selling their liberty to some political ring with ulterior motives 
Such a man loses in character development. 

That person who sells himself to any power, is forever 
under Its influence and control. We can readily see that we 

should resist temptation lO do base things, and make ourselves 

lable tO those powers \\h<» can elevate Us !o\\;ird the better 

things, those thing* which leave peace an. I contentment in the 
soul. 



256 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926 

List the temptation thai come to boys and girls through 
■ he appeal lo "be somebody" by sacrificing their ideals. 

Second Sunday, September 12, 1926. 
LESSON 21. ALMA TEACHES Ills SONS. 



Text : Alma, chapters 36-42. 

Objective: To teach thai a wise lather is able by his 
experience to give instruction to his children which if followed 
will give them happiness and peace in this life and put them in 
(he way of eternal life. 

Supplementary References: Dictionary of the Book of 
M or man and Story of the Book of Mormon. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

The Teacher will no doubt have to lead out in the discussion 

of this lesson, hut the pupils should he asked to read the 

text, mark passages they like, and discuss them in tin 1 

class. 

Special assignment mighl he made of Alma 36:6-23; 

: > ,7:24-:)7; chapter 38'; chapter 39; 40:11-14. 
I 1 might be interesting to have pupils give brief sketches 
of llelaman. Shiblon and Corianton from the Dictionary 
of the Book of Mormon. 
Make the lesson alive. Try to picture Alma and his sons 
at this time. 

(^ues on for Teachers, 

1. Discuss the warning given in Alma 37:28, -I'M. as it 
might &ppty to present times. 

2. How may the words of Alma to his son CorianthOn, Alma 
29:11-13, he fitting to young Latter-day Saints? 

Third Sundav, September 19. 1926 

LESSON 22. FOES PROM WITHOUT AND TRAITORS 

WITHIN THE NATION. 

Text : Alma, chapters 4: > >-4C>. 

Objective: To leach that in all our si niggles, if we have 
faith in the Lord He will he our powerful friend. 
Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
1. II would he well for 1 he teacher to give Alma 43:1-25 



Akuhata 2->, 1926 TE karere 257 

as an introduction to the lesson, to make clear the mo- 
lives of the Nephites and Lamanites at this period of 
history, and to introduce the leaders, etc. 
2. Special assignments: 

(a) Alma 43:26-54. 

(b) Appoint two students to give the dialogue between 
Moroni and Zerahemnah, Alma 44:1-11. 

(e) Zerahemnah humbled. Alma 44:12-24. 
(d) The Title of Liberty, Alma 4(i. 
Passages for pupils to memorise: Alma 43:48-50; 44 -.'3, 4; 
46:12-18. 

Note: The events related in the above assignments are of 
a stirring nature. Impress each pupil who is given a part with 
the necessity of reciting them in a way to arouse deep interest. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Mention the advantages which the Nephites had over the 
Lamanites both spiritually and temporally. 

2. Point out the characteristics of true leadership in 
Moroni. 

Fourth Sunday, September 26, 1926 
LESSON 23. WAR AND WARRIORS. 

Text : Alma 47-51. 

Obective: To teach thai in war time or in peace righteous 
living increases our joy. 

Su^i'i ions on Preparation and Presentation: 
For special assignment : 
(1) Amalickiah's wickedness. Alma 47. 
(2) Moroni's preparations. Alma 48 :7-'J.">. 
(3) Laminates disappointed. Alma 4!). 
( 4) The happy Nephites. Alma 50:1-24. 
(.")) Quarrels between brethren. Alma 49. 

(6) Kingmcn and Freemen. Alma 51:1-21. 

(7) Victory for the Lamanites. Alma 51:22-27. 

(No1 more than lour or five minutes should he allowed far 

eaeh of these parts, in which time the main points can be given 

in a way in amuse interest in 1 he class to read the si. tries from 
tic- Book of Mori. mci | 

Note: A blackboard should he used with these wartime 



IE KAktRK Akuhata 25, 1926 

lessons. From the descriptions given of the fortifications a pupil 
might be able to make drawings on the board, also to Locate the 

position of the different cities that were fortified. 
Questions for Teachers. 
1. Contrast the motives of Moroni and Amaiickiah as 
leaders. 

2 Review the time of happiness, as related in Alma 
*>0:l-24, and point 011I the inward causes for it. 



KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT 

First Sunday, September 5, 1926. 

PAST DAY LESSON. 

Topic: 'i'lie Tempatation of Jesus. "Thou sJudl worship the 
Lord thy God and Him only shall thou serve." 

Text : Matt. 4:8-10. 

Time: After Christ's forty day Last. 
Place: On s high mountain in wilderness. 
Objective: l>; resisting temptation we grain the approval 
o!' God the Father. 

!. Satan pleads Cor Jesus to worship Jlim. 

1. He shows Him all the kingdoms of the wo-Id and the 
glory of them, 
a. Man\- countries. 
1). Great possessions. 

Palaces, churches, homes, fields, flowers, people, and 
their homage, riches, pearls, diamonds, crowns, etc. 
2. Offers all these things if Jesus will fall down and 
worship him. 
1 1. Jesus Rejects Satan 's < >ffer. 

1. dvt thee hence. 

2. "Thou shah worship the Lord thy God/'' etc. 
•'!. Satan leavcth Him. 

1 1 1 The Approval of Ood the Father. 

1. He sends inward joy and peace. 

2. Angels come down and minister unto Him. 
Application • When and how shall these little children 

resist temptation? Specific instances. Mother said, "Johnny, 
please remain inside the yard to-day with baby sister." Soon 



Akuliata 25, 1926 TE KARLRE 259 

Tom came along and said, "(.'ome on over, Johnny, I have some- 
thing to show you," etc. What should Johnny say or do? 
Memory Gem: 

Is there a wrong deed that wants to be done? 
Don't let it, my dear, don't let it; 
Just do two kind deeds insteads of one 
And that will help you forget it. 
Rest Exercise: Have the children suggest kind deeds to do 
lor others. Dramatize the suggestions. Clean the yard for an 
old lady or a widow; paint a fence; clear the weeds from the 
('itches, etc. 

Song: "Do what is right," Desert t S.S. Song Book. 

Second Sunday, September 12, 1926 

Topic: The Story of the Pioneers. 

Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson 5$. 
History of Utah, or History of Church. 

Objective: Courage to do righl wins the favour of God and 
man. 

Suggest ions: 

1. Show pictures of Pioneers. 
a. The way they travelled. 

1). The count ry they crossed. 

r. The valley as il looked to 1 hem. 

2. Their sacrifice was .1 greater gain. 

a. Their love for Iheir religion was greater than for 
worldly goods. 

I). Their greal faith and trusl in a higher power 

c. Their strength of character, 
•'! I lov. 1 heir example ran h< lp u . 

a. Whal is our < Ihurch to 
Our duty to it. 

I). We should iioi complain in making a sacrifice. 
Song: ••The Seagulls," FVancia K. Thomassen. 
R E Had we been the little pioneer children, 

what COUld We have done to help alone; the w.iy. I >i;iin;i! i/e t lie 

children '* Drive the oxen ; push the handcart ; chop 

down 'hushes; <;im water from nearby stream 



860 YE ICAKER1* Akuhala _'5, 1926 

Third Sunday, September 19, 1926. 
LESSON 59. 

Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten.*' 
Topic: How Bessie Kept the Word of Wisdom. 
Objective: By keeping; the Word of Wisdom we gain physical 
and spiritual growth. 
Memory Gem: 

The Word of Wisdom teaches us 
The things we all should eat. 
God gives us fruits of many kinds 
He gives us corn and wheat. 
Rest Exercise: Talk with the children of ripening grain. 
Let them dramatise the cutting and tieing of the grain as it was 
done in olden days. 

Show the children what is to be gained by keeping the Word 
of Wisdom rather than what may befall them if they do not do 
so. 

A strong, well kept body is able to do great deeds. 
Discuss with the children the kinds of food they should eat. 

I ourih Sunday, September 26, 1926 
LESSON 60. 

Text: Daniel 1, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten." 

Topic: Daniel and His Companions in the King's Palace. 

Objective: By keeping the Word of Wisdom we gain physical 
and spiritual strength. 

Memory (Jem: Same as last Sunday. 
l tcs« Exercise. Let the children tell the kinds of vegetables 
and fruits thai grow in the garden. Then dramatise the sug- 
gestions of how they are gathered. Potatoes are dug; carrots 
are pulled; cherries are picked into a pail, etc. 

Song: "The Heart Garden," Francis K. Thomason's Prim- 
ary and Kindergarten Songs. 

Impress the children with the power and beauty of Daniel, 
because he had pleased our Heavenly Father and kept the Word 
of Wisdom ; thai bv so doing we may become as Daniel w r as. 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARERE 2ui 



MAHI HUI ATAWHAI. 

KORA s. TIN1KINI, Tuimiaki Hui Atawhai. 

Na Toke Watene i whakamaori. 

AKORANGA MO HEPETEMA. 

Te Wa te Taima i Rite ai. 

(Meridian of Time). 

Nga Mahi Whai Tikanga i Whakaritea e nga Apotoro. 

1. Ko te whiriwhiringa i te apotoro hou. Mahi 1 : L2-26. 

2. K0 te tukunga iho te Wairua Tapu. Mahi 2: 1-5. 

.'>. Ko te whakatahuritanga Qga mano e torn. Mahi *_ } : 
6-47. 

4. K<> te whakaoranga to tangata kopa e Pita raua ko 
Eioani. Mahi 3: L-9. 

5. Ko te whiwhinga a Pita ki te tuaia Die te kaha nui i 
miiri n te tukunga iho te Wairua Tapu. Mahi 2: 14: 
3: L2-6; -! : 8-12. 

(j. Ko te hoatutanga ki a Pita i te mana e niatau ai e 

kaha ai ki te titiro atu ki roto i nga niea katoa. Mahi 

5: 1-11. 
7. lie tokomaha nga turoro i whakaorangia. Mahi 5: 

L2-17. 

Ko te u'hakaputanga ki waho te whan- lierehere e 

tda hi anahera. Mahi 5: 17-21 . 
9. Te mahi me te whakamatenga <» Tepene. Mahi 6 s : 

7: 55-60. 

10. Ko te wliiriw hiringa te tokowhitu. Mahi 1. 

11. Wa mahi a Piripi. Mahi B: I -5 : 8: 26-40. 

12. Ko te \\ hakatahuritanga <» Haora. Mahi (»: lit. 

Te Taki N'ui : Ko te Wairua Tapu hei tautoko, hei kai- 

nra'ii hoki I'm tatou, ka ; 1 > ^ I ; i 1 1 ; 1 Imki i ;i tatou ki te w haka fil <■ 

i ii"'.-! mahi whakamiharo ki !<■ mahi pai, a tika hoki tatou. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO 

NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

Ko te Pupuri i t" Whanau (V 1 Kotahi. 

1. Km to tikanga vvhakakotahi i te whanau he mea tino 
w hai 1 ikanga i roto »pu huihuii 



262 ih kAKEKK Al 1920 

kotahitanga te whanau ngawari a pai atu lioki ki te riro ma 
nga tikanga takaro e pupuri mai. Ko te ki a nga tangata <> 
nga ropu huihuinga tangata k<> te tu he wehewehenga i roto i 
tetahi whanau ki te inea ka haere te tane lie huarahi puta ke 
i tu te wahine ki a raua uei takaro. Kaore rawa lie whanau e 
tino kotahi ki te kore e kitea e nga tamariki lie ngahau i roto 
i nga whakahaere ngahau a nga niatua a whaea hoki. 

Ko te wa pai hei timatanga i te mea ano e ri.-iki ana nga 
tamariki, e taea te whakarite tetahi ahiahi whakangahau, ;i 
haereere a waho ranei, e whai ngakau ai ratou ki roto i taua 
nica. Kotahi po, hei po ngahau i te kainga i te niarama, a mi 
nga tamariki e awhina i roto i te whakarite i nga takoro, me 
nga waiata, me te taha ki nga kai (refreshments). 

I'] taea te whakarite enei whakaritenga hei whakangahau i 
te w lianau katoa. 

1. Ko te waiata a takitahi, a ma te whanau katoa ranei. 

'2. Ko nga takaro. 

.'I. Ko nga waiata whakatangitangi ma nga mea e mohio 
ana ki te whakatangitangi. 

4. Ko te korcro pukapuka, a vvhakaatu ranei i etahi 
korero purakau papai. 

5. Ko te tuku i nga kotiro kia whai wahi i roto i te 
whakarite, me te tuwha haere i nga kai. 

Ko te whakarite haereerenga mo te whanau i nga hararei, 
e tika ana hoki kia whakaritea kia kaua ai tena, tena, e haere 
i runga ake i tona ake wliakaaro. Me te wliakarite wawe i 
roto i nga whakaaro nga tamariki, te tikanga whakarite tahi 
me te whanau i nga hararei e man mai ai te whakaaro <> te 
whanau me nga tamariki hoki i raro i 1a nga matua, me ta nga 
whaea tiaki. 

Ko te hoki whakamuri nga mahara ki nga wa whakahari 
nga tuakana teina me nga tuahine, me nga matua whaea 
hoki. ka riro hei pupuri i te whakaaro ki te kainga, ki roto i 
nga ngahau te tangata. 



KO TE NAMA A TE ATUA 

(He roanga atu) 
Inn Hoori e neraro atu ka whanau a Pirihira i tana tamaiti, 



Akuhata 25, 1920 TE K ARE RE 263 

heoi ka koa noa iho raua ki ta raua taniaiti. 

I hokona e Hoori tana whare piha ka tangohia mai e ia 
tetehi whare hukapapa hei rongoatanga niiti. Ko te nianaaki 
a te Atua i a ia e nui rawa atu ana. I tetehi rangi ka haere a 
Pirihira ki te hui a te hahi, te kitenga o te Pihopa i a ia, ka 
inca atu, kei whea a Hoori, katahi ia ka ki atu kua riro ki t( 
tango kau, hipi mana kei apopo ia ka hoki mai. Kihai i pai a 
ji ihira ki te haerenga tana lioa tane ki te tera mahi i te 
rtatapu. Katahi te Pihopa ka mea atu kei te pai noa atu, he 
tangata pai a Hoori alma nei koina ke te ra e hiahiatia ana 
e tana tangata hei kiietanga ia ia. He wahine tino u hoki a 
Pirihi/aki nga tikanga te Hahi, na kaore e pai kia Qiahi 
tana tane i etahi mahi ahua he. I te nui haere te tupi. 
te mahi hukapapa a Hoori ka pan ke te nuinga o tana taima 
! :i ana mahi ake te tukunga iho ka wareware haere ia ki nga 
tnahi o te Miutara. Ka whakaaro te Pihopa lie pai rawa me 
korero ano ia ki a Hoori. I tetehi rangi ka haere te Pihopa 
Ida kite ia Hori i tana whare hukapapa. 

Tana taenga atu ka whakaaturia ia e Soon ki nga mahi 
katoa rot,) ? tana whare. Ka mutu tena ka ki atu te Pihopa. 
"E Hoori, kei te tino koa toku ngakau ki 1c nianaaki penei 
a te Atua i a 1- >e, na kia mohio mai koe e hiahia ana au kia 
utu Ia i Tana nama ki a koe. M 

Alma whak una ana a Hoori i enei korero, katahi ia ka mea 

atu, "K ore enci mea i puta noa mai hi a an. engari na taku 

kaha tonn ki te mahi, na kei etehi po <■ ara ana an tae atu ki 

ia rua o nga haora i te po. Ko taku kotahi anake 

ki 1 : i !, i i ;l:n mahi tino uaua ra, engari i naianei kua ngawari 

ku mahi. " 

ikamarama haere tonu a Hoori ki te ahua <> te whaka 

ha< <• tana mahi k i te ara hoki e puta nui mai ai te tarn nei 

te moni, a ki mm ritenga ano hoki i tupu haere ai. 

Kaoic te Pihopa i pai ki !<• w hakapuakiaki i te mahi Miu- 
tara. In- well] mma kei Piri B Hoori, katahi ia ka whakaan- 
In- pai ra\\;i me \\ai!'<> < ia kia pan te rua wiki, ka mea atll 

aihei tirohanga mana mehemea ka pai ake ka pewhea • 

te alma Hoori. 1 nga huihuitanga katoatanga ka korero nga 

kaunihera a Hoori ki to ratou mate i te kore tumuaki, ki to 

PatOll hiahia hoki ki to lumn.iki hmi. Iimi iim te nui 



264 KARERE Akuhata 

whakaaro o te Pihopa ki a Hoori raua ko Pirihira i whakakiki 
;ii ia ratou kia tatari. 

Nawai, Nawai a ka heke haoiT to hi.Jua o Hoori ki te 
haere ki ii<r;i liuihuinga o te Elahi ehara, i tetelii rangi ka tukua 
atu c te tan gat a nei tana pukapuka ki te Pihopa kua korc ia c 
puta atu hei tumuaki mo te Miutara i te uui o ana mahi be pai 
rawa te whakatu atu i tetehi tangata ki tana turanga. Tino 
tohe te Pihopa kia hoki mai a Hoori ki tana turanga he alia 
te alia, korc rawa a Hoori i whakaae. Heoi whakaturia ana 
e ratou he tumuaki hou mo te Miutara. Tino tnaru te Qgak; a 

Pihopa tno tc korcnga << Hoori i hoki mai. 

Ka tupu haere nei hoki tc mahi a Hoori, a tc pau katoa 

ano hoki o tana taima ki ana mahi. Xawai a ka korohek< 
haere tc tangata nei tc nui o tana v/liakaaro ki tana mahi 
Na tc puta mai o tc wa i iti ;ii tc utu o nga poaka, o nga kau, 
ka hinga a lioo.i i koiiei no tc mea lie nui hoki nga poaka i 
tangohia mai e ia i 1.' vva e nui ana tc utu. I heke rawa mi 
hoki tc utu o tc poaka, korc kau ake i hokona i ga poaka m i, 
ruihi pu ana Hoori, me ana moni katoa i roto i te peeke. I te 
hokinga o nga utu ki raro rawa katahi a lioori ka whakaaro e, 
ko te wa pai tenei hei tangohanga kararehe ano maim, mei 
korc e hoki mai ana moni i ngaro ra. ! whakapr.n katoatia 
e ia n^a moni katoa i riro mai i a ia, hei tango mai i.mu.i i 
nga poaka e L200, ko te ntu i te pauna he hikipen<5. Heoi ko 
tana patunga i nga poak^ nei, ko te utu nui rawa i riro mai 
i a ia he hikipene ano i tc pauna mo tc miti, heoi ka 7'uilii ! 
tangata nei nga moni £5000. Whakamutua ana c ia tc mai \ 
a ana tangata malii, a kore rawa hoki i ca i a ia n.-i nan 
■ g i;iii;i;! 4 .: c \ li;;i r<m kia "' ■■ : a ratou moni. 

I vvaenganui pu o enei raruraru o lioori. ka pangia tans 
kotiro a Atareta e te taipo piwa. Ka mea te takuta kei te pai 
noa atu te mate o tana kotiro. ko te mate o te kotiro nei e kino 
rawa iho ana. No konei ka porangirangi noa iho a lioori i t 
nui o tana aroha ki tana kotiro, ko ia hoki tana i whakaar< 
nui ai i ctchi mea ke atu o tenei ao. 

Heoi, ka feonoa te E*ihopa kia haere mai ki te kotiro nei 
tc taenga atu ko Pirihira e noho ana i te taha o tc moenga n 
tana kotiro. mai ano o tona pang a e te male mea noa ratou i 
tc kotiro ra kia. moe, kore rawa e moe. c atn noho ranei. Ka 



Akahata 25. 1926 TE KARERE 265 

iiica atu a Pirihira ki te Pihopa, mehemea e whakaaro ana 
ia ka tangohia atu e te Atua i a raua ta raua kotiro. Ka oho 
atu ie Pihopa, ko Atareta lie mea honiai na te Atua ma korua 
e koi-e la e tango atu ano i a ia, ma Tana kite iho ra ano e 
tika ano ki ta raua i pai ai. I te tomonga atu Hoori ki te 
whare waii iacc a.ia te ahua ka titiro atu ki tana kotiro 0. 
takoto mai ana i runga i tana moenga, haere toiiu atu ka kiln 
i tana wahine, te mutunga ka huri atu ki te ruru ki te Pihopa. 
Kiiiai i rite te ahua, me nga mahi a Hoori ki te ahua tetehi 
tangd i vvhakaatu ai ki te Pihopa i ana whakaaro e whai ana 
ia ki a ia hei mirianeera. Kihai i taro ka uru niai te neehi, 
poua eonutia atu he tipune wai maori ki roto i te waha Atareta. 
Kore rawa i lioromia e Atareta te wai ra i kopi ranei tona 
walia. Rurerure noa te neehi ra kia mataora a Atareta kore 
lioki i ara, heoi ko tana rerenga ki te whono i te takuta kia 
haere mai. Katahi Pirihira ka vvhakahinga atu i a ia ki 
runga i te moenga tana kotiro, ka kihi i nga paparmga 
tana kotiro me te tangi kia oho ake i te moe kia korero ake ki 
a ia. Kore rawa a Atareta i koriri ake. katahi a Piriliira ka 
tono i te Pihopa kia inoi ki te Atua kia ora ai tana kotiro. 1 
tana w a tonu ka urn mai nga takuta. ka rongo atu raua. i 
tetehi nga takuta e ki ana. "Kaore he painga," haere ana 
put a ana ki vvalio. I muri ka mea atu a Pirihira ki te Pihopa, 
",\ii:i mohio in a ake an e kore e ora i nga takuta, ma te Atua 
anake ia <■ ora ai," Ka mea atu a Hoori ki te Pihopa kia inoi, 
K,i mea a Hoori, 'I hua an >• nama ana te Atua ki a an mo 
takn : . 1 : 1 '• : i i roto i te Flahi. Otira l<a manaaki tonu te Atua i 
ahau, ma 1 iku wareware r*a ano ki te vvhakahonore ki 
ki a la. Nana tenei tamaiti i honiai, engari kei au te raruraru 
mo 1 • kore <• vvhakawhetai ki a la. \a i te mea kua tangohia 
katoatia atu nri 1 la aku rawa kei te manawapa toku ngakau 
ki takn kotiro, kei tangohia atu e ia engari ko takn hiahia kia 
kore c tangohia atu. K'> a maua mea katoatia li«' mea homai 

na te Atua, ma mana a e kore 1 1 « i lioki niana <• alui ki tC UtU 

i a Ia mo enei mea na, e nama ana maua ki te Atua " 

Te putaputanga nga tangata ki waho te puma ka tuturi 
to Pihopa Isi te taha «» )<• moenga Atareta ka inoi ka mea ki 

te Atua kia u<a uaa k il i;i a lluori. ki \r man ia ki n 

tenei ako a kin kaua ano hoki v tangohia atu c la te wairua 



266 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926 

Atareta. Mehemea e ahei e te Atua tukua tenei tamaiti kia 
tupu ake liei waliine. I whakapaua katuatia lioki e ia 
kalia ki te inoi mo Atareta, a i nma <> te mutunga tana inoi, 
ka rongo ake ia Atareta e korikori ana ka tangi ake ka 
karanga, ' E mama." Heoi ka moe iho ano nga karu te 
Pihopa ka irhnkawhctai Id tona Matua. KataH ka karan •■ 
ki nga matna te tamaiti nei ka haere mai ka koa ! i te Tinga 
a ta ran,-, tamaiti. 1 muri Lho ka taka tu te Pihopa ki te b e 
katahi a Hoori ka haere atu kia ia ka pupuri i tana ri 
Ka titiro atu te Pihopa ki nga mata <> Hoori kua rehnrenu I te 
roimata, ka mea atu ifa, "Kua tika tan Hoori, kaore tcnei tnea 
iv nama mai te Atua/' 

Na TE NGOURA. 



-o- 



He Powhiri 

Haere mai e te manuhiri-tu-a-ran^i, haria mai ko te 
Aroha. Kua tae mai "nga karere o Mahuru." 

Tenei matou o te Tai Rawhiti nei te powhiri atu ki te 
hunga katoa e tae ai te manu, ara Te Karere, kia haere mai 
ki te Hui Pariha ka tu nei ki a Uawa wahi o te Tai Rawhiti 
i te II me te 12 o nga ra o Hepetema. "Kua pai nga hua- 
rahi." 

Na nga tuahine kei Uawa. 
( Tamihana, Tumuaki) 

He Panui Whakaatu ka Tu te Hui Pariha ki 
Korongata Hepetema 4, 5, 1926. 

Kei tenei hui ka korerotia e te Timuaki o te motu etahi 
take hou kaore ano te ao i rongo. No konei ka panuitia kia 
mohio ai te katoa, kia riro ai ma ou taringa ake e whakaro- 
ngo atu ki te Timuaki e korero ana. Kia riro ano mau e pa- 
tai atu au whakaaro me ou hiahia katoa. Kei konei hoki 
etahi tikanga hou hei painga mo te tinana, engari e kore koe 
e whiwhi ka noho mai koe i roto i to whare i to kainga ranei. 
E wehi ana ahau kei rereke te korerotanga atu ki a koe i nga 
korero a te Timuaki a ka poraru o whakaaro i roto i nga ti- 
kanga pono. No reira haere mai, haere mai! 

Na Rawiri Kaman, (Erata Heke, Timuaki Pariha) 



Ak »hata 25, 1926 



TE KARERE 



-0 - 



He Whakaahua Pai 

Na R.R. Tiwinihana 

(He roanga atu) 



27; 




«%&• ~-—^* 



Ko te Puki Kit mora 

Ko te Hiwi Kumora tenei, te inc.! ttratoru. Te wahi te 
whawhai whakamutunga nga Niwhai. Te wahi hoki i hu- 
naia ai e Moronai, (i a ia e tangata ana), e rite ana ki nga 
whakahannga a te Atua, nga papa k< toa i tukutukua mai ki 
a ia e ona tupuna. I konei i kitea ai e Hohepa Mete nga pa- 
pa tapu i roto i enei nga ra whakamutunga. Ahakoa te hia- 
hia nga Hunga lapu kia hokona mai tenei hiwi, kei nga 
tauiwi tonu ia. Ka whakaae ratoti ki te hoko mai tenei wahi 

tapu ki a tatOU mo nga iixnii $100,000, ara £20,000. 
I [eoi « no na to koutou teina, tungane, 

Na R.R. 1 iwinihana 



lie M itentfa 



Ki Te Karere: rena koe, man <• p. nun atu te matenga 
t<» matou tamaiti, mokopuna, te Kahukore Kara k a Pairama. 
No te JO nga ra <> Hurae ka wehe atu tona wairua 1 a mat mi. 
He nui te whakapouri 1 pa mai ki .1 matou Kua tutuki te 






1 E KAKhRE 



Akuhata 25, iy^G 



kupu a te karaipiture, ka hari nga tupapaku e mate ana i roto 
i te Ariki i nga w a muri nei, e ai ta te wairua, kia okioki 
ai ratou i a ratoj mahi. 

Eieoi ma te Matua i te Rangi tatou e tiaki, na to koutou 
teina i roto i te Rongopai Ilm Karaiti, 

Karena W. Takaroa 

KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. 





Elder Geo. R Henderson 



Elder LeRoy \\ estov 



Elder LE ROY WES TOVERo Lewiston, Utah. I tae 
mai a Erata Wehitoa i te 28 o n#a ra o Pepuere, 1924, a wha- 
karitea ana ki te takiwa o te Mahia. I te 30 o nga ra o Tihe- 
ma, 1924, ka nukuhia atu ia ki te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te 
16 o n^a ra o Oketopa, 1925. ka nukuhia ano ki te takiwa o 
Hauraki ki te mahi i waenganui o n^a Pakeha te Thames. 
A ka tukua honoretia atu ia i te 20 o nga ra o Hurae, 1 926. 

Elder GEORGE R. HENDERSON o Joseph, Utah. I tae 
mai a Erata Henihana i te 23 o nga ra o Hune, 1924, a ka 
whakaritea ki te Kareti M.A.C. hei whakahaere i te mahi wa- 
iata, whakatangitangi, o reira. A i te 13 o nga ra Oketopa 
1925 ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa Pakeha o Akarana. Ka 
hoki atu ano ki te Kareti i te 21 o nga ra o Hanuere, 1926, a 
i te 20 o Hurae ka tukua honoretia kia hoki atu ki tona hoa 
wahine me a ra ia tamariki i Hiona. 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE karere 269 

KI TE ETITA. 
Ko te Hui Pariha o te Kirikiri 

I lu re Hui Pariha llauraki nei ki te Kirikiri i te Rahoroi, 
te 31 liurai. me te I o nga ra Akuhata. Ko tiga kaumatua 
l tae mar, ko I'umuaki Tinikini, ko Erata Pirihana, hekeretari 
o te Mihana; ko Erata Kimepara me Karanata Hamilton, ko 
Erata Paapiti me Karaitiana Waikato, hui tahi ki nga kau- 
iiiatua tenei takiwa : Erata Tarapata, Aratama, Koiti. Naiti, 
Lietaraka Anaru raua Rupata Wi Hongi Ngapuhi, Erata Teii*a 
te Thames. 1 konei lioki etahi nga Hunga Tapu Tau- 
ranga, a Waikato. I konei lioki a Te Puea me tana ropu poi 
ki te purei liaere he mahi moni hei whakapai i te marae te 
Hui Tau ka lu nei ki Ngaruawahia. I manaakitia tenei Ilui 
Pariha ki nga rang] papai, a i mutu pai hoki. 

i puare tenei hui i te 10: 30 i te ata te Rahoroi. Na 
Erata Tarapata, Tumuaki Takiwa, i whakahaere. Nga himene 
na Erata Paapiti. I limene tuatahi 1. "Kei Runga te Maunga." 
inoi vvhakapuare na Tumuaki Tinikini. Himene tuarua 2. "H 
Iharaira " Kai-kauwliau tuatahi ko Pirimona Watene, 
Tumuaki te Peka <> te Kirikiri nei. He powhiri ki nga manu- 
hiri. I ko em mo te mihana te Karaiti, [riiringa, Whiriwhiri- 
nga i n^:\ Apotoro, me te hanganga i te Ilahi he mea kia tiuo 
rite ai te Hunga Tapu mo te main minita. 

Bro. Rupata Wi Hongi. .M<> te takanga atu me te v 
liokinga mai te Rongopai v tetahi anahera, e kauwhautia nei 
<■ nga kaumatua me te korero svhakarite mo te kamera i kuhu 
i tona ilui ki roto i te teneti tona rangatira kia mahana, muri 
iho ko tona kaki, i muri ko tona tinana katoa, v peia ana tona 
rangatira ki vvaho. Ara i te rewera ki roto i ;i tatou kia riro 
i ,- ; i;i te whakahaerc <> tatou tinana. 

ko Erata TciTa. I korero mo Hona i tona turinga U i te 
haere ki te kauwliau i t<- pa Ninewe; tona makanga ki te wtd 
horomanga <• te Tohora, b ruakina ki ata kia haere ;ii la ki le 
ivhakarite i tana mihana Whakawahangutanga <• Korihoro i 
te kauwhautanga a Arami Korero i runga 1 te patai 1 te 
matua ki tana tamaiti i te kai peita etahi whakaahua 
mea te tamaiti, "Na mea, ino e mau nei tona ingot *' Ka mea 
te matua "Tii iro ki w aho, na kn 1 H ataahua - 



270 ih KARERE Akuhata 25, 1920 

rakau uic nga mea katoa, tia ko vvai te kai-peita enei niea 
katoa i 'x.i mea te tamaiti, ■ tvaore au e tuohio, eugari na 
tetahi kai-peita kei runga noa atu tona mana i era atu katoa.' 
hliniene whakamutunga i>Y.- *'ll<' Inoi. N'a Tiki Reihana te 

liiOl. 

Karakia te 2 nga haora te ahiahi. Na Bro. Betaraka 
Anaru i whakahaere nga himene. tiiuiene tuatahi hi."). "Lo 
the Mighty Uod ^^i>|>viiiiii<^». inoi na Tukino link' pa. Uitnene 
tuarua, L65. "Sunshine in the Soul." Kai-kauwhau tuatahi 
In i Krata Koiti. i korero i roto i i< reo Maori, mo runga 1 te 
Inoi. lie tono ivi te Atua mo uga mea e tiito hialiiatia ana, i 
runga ano i te wain. a pai. E monia ai tatou ki te tikanga te 
Lnoi, me inoi tonu. 

Ko Kiripata Ouiipi. I korero mo te uhakahaunga Rihai 
kia puta atu ki waho liiruharama. i\a v\ hakangaromia taua 
pa c 600 tau i mua atu i a te karaiti. Lie uri nei tatou nga Maori 
(■ Rihai. Me te tautoko he tika te 1 ukapuka a Moromona. I 
korero 1 runga 1 tana uinga ki tetahi vvaliine lie "Spiritualist" 
tvhakapono ki nga mea vvairua mo taua p ukapuka. I runga i 
tana niahinga ka ki ia ko taua pukapuka ua nga mi Epa- 
rainia. Whakahau ga i nga Niwhai kia tuhituhi me nga hapu 
kotalii tekau. Kao.e te .una i wailio noa ili<» i nga tangata i 
roto i te kauretanga. 

I muri he Quartette, 'School Thy feelings," na uga kau- 
matua. Ko Sister Raira f'arless: lie tautoko mo te Inoi. Me 
tono i runga i te whakapono kia vvhiwhi ai ki nga maua- 
akitanga. Ko Sister Payne: Me vvhakarongo tatou ki nga kau- 
niatua, ka riro ma te Rongopai tatou e ako ki nga main ma 
tatou. Ko te inoi he mea tin > i:i;i. kei t«' maiiara an i etahi wa, 
lie aha ranei a tatou vvhakalioki am ki te Atua mo nga mea e 
tono ana tatou i a la. Kia. kaiia, In- ugawari noa iho te ope 
oneone ake, engari te piki, me main" rr.a ka eke. 

Ko Mori Watene: Ko te whakatunga te Hani ki runga 
i te kamaka te whakakitenga. Whakahokinga mai te 
Rongopai kia Hohepa Mete kia kauwhautia ki te ao katoa. Ko 
te iwi Maori no [haraira. I *<• manaakitanga Hohepa he peka 
hua i te taha te puna. Te whakamararatanga ki nga motu 
te moana i runga i to rat on tutu. Ko te tohu i roto i nga 
mahunga te Maori, rite tonu ki nga Hawai me nga Iniana 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARERE 27 1 

Amerika, he porotaka a waenganui. He tautoko tenei mo te 
r>ukapuka a Moromona, a no te whare lioki tatou [haraira. 
Himene whakamutunga 170. "God Be With You." Inoi 11a 
H.\). Billman. 

Ka/akia te aliiahi, to V nga haora, he karakia whaki 
hineiigaro, na Pirimoa Watene i whakahaere, na R. \Vi Jloiiyi 
nga himene. Tuatahi ko tc 152. "Let l"s All Press On." Inoi 
nj Erata Teira. Himene tuarua L02. "We Thank Thee, I 
Grbd, for a Prophet." K<> nga mea i tu ko Panikena, Tuku- 
niana, Hovi Taniaki, Te Aue Kahukore, R. Wi Hougi, Tukino 
Iiakopa, Rosie Watene, Ripoi. Ko Tnmuaki Tinikini: 

Ko nga hahi he mea hanga na te tangata ka karangatia 
In rat 011 ingoa. Ko te hahi he upoko katoa he mea mate 
{ korero mai tetahi tangata ki a an 10 ratou te hahi pai rawa, 
c 300 nga apotoro, e oOO hoki nga neehi, e 300 hoki nga akonga, 
ko a ratou man : rite tonu. Xa he upoko katoa. ko te ahua- 
tanga he mea mate. Ko tenei hahi ia he Poropiti, he Ilai Piriti, 
he Piriti, lie K<ii Whakaako kci roto. Kei roto i te Kura Hapati 
nckc atu 100. 000 nga mema. Me te Miutara pera aim. 1 muri 
ka tu a Turoa Royal, Totaca, Toke Watene, Erata Karanata, 
me Tarapata. Himene whakamutunga 218. "Count Your 
Many Blessings." Inoi in T. Royal. 

Ratapu, i te 1 »> Akuhata i te 10: 30 <> nga haora <> te ata. 

1 tu te karakia Kura Hapati. \'a Erata Tarapata i whakahaere. 
Nga himene na Bro. Anarn i whakahaere. Himene tuatahi B2. 
"Welcome, Welcome." Inoi na Erata Kimepara. Himene 
tuarua L27. "Though Deepening Trials." \a Toke Watene 
raua ko Turoa Royal i uhakatapu te Hakaremeta. Korero a 
Ngakau, Matiu 4: 7. "Kami e whakamatautau i te Ariki i urn 
Atua." \a Erata Karanata i vvhakamarama, Ka inutu i konei 
nga inani <» te Kura Hapati. Kai-kauwhau tuatahi ko 1 
Watene, Whakamarama i te Kingitanga te Atua ki to te ao 
nei, me nga putake «• tu ai tetahi kingitanga, me nga ahuati 

i poto. I muri he solo na Bro, R Wi Hongi "Mj Father 

KlIOWS 

Ko Erata Karaitiana Waikato Whakahau 
Apotoro kia liaere ki te kauwhau So nga Tifc 
Whakapono, ko te Paipera me te Pukapuka a Moromona he 
kupti na te Atua, 



2J2 TE KAKERE Akuliata 25, 1926 

Brata Kimepara <> Hamilton. Mo te Atualanga. K<i ruto 
i te tangata te mohiotanga he Atua ano, ara tera ano tetahi 
maiia nui e whakahaere ana i nga niea katoa. 11*- qui nga alma 
tautoko, ko tetahi ko Arama i kite tonu i te Atua Die te tuku 
i tenei mohiotanga ki 011a mi, a Enoka hoki me muri iho. 

Brata Aratama. Mo te Lriiringa, ko te patene whakamu- 
tunga tenei, I whakaatu lioki i toaa hinengaro, he poropiti tika 
a fclohepa Mete, me te Rongopai hoki. Himene whakamutunga 
K»4. "The Spiril of God Like a Kire is Burning." Inoi ia 
Brata Boiti. 

1 te 12: 30 i tu nga liuihuinga o te Tohuugatanga me te 
Bui Atawiiai. Ko te liimene whakapuare ko te 1!). "Israel. 
Israel, God is Calling." Inoi na Bro. Ariaru. 1 muri ka wehe 
te Hui Atawhai. Na Tumuaki Tinikini i whakahaere nga take 
mo te Tohungatanga. Tana patai tuatahi, He aha te putake i 
whakatapu ai tatou i nga urupa} Hei tuku atu i te wahi ki a 
tatou ki to Atua., Nana nei te whenua uie ona mea katoa. Kia 
takoto tapu pai hoki. Me pehea te alma te keri nga urupa .' 
Me takoto han^ai i te rawhiti ki te hauauru. Kia hangai te ara 
nga tupapaku ki tc tangihanga mai te tetere. Kia pehea 
te holionu o tc iiia? Kei tc alma tc vvhenua tc hohonu. Ko 
te pai kia liohonu, kaore lie imr whakarite. lie una tika, a lie 
ranei tc tanu kakahu me te tupapaku? Kaore he ture riri, i 
tc mea he ture tenei no te Maori. Ko te ahna tc kawhena, kei 
runga i nga whakaritenga te ma te tupapaku ki ruuga kei 
tc ritenga tc ture. Pehea te alma mo te whakatapu nga 
tupapaku e rua i roto i te urupa kotahi? Me whakatapu wehc 
ke tc tain i tetahi. Ko te inana hei whakatapu ko I" Tohu- 
ngatanga o Merekihereke. Meheinea kaore he kauniatna hei 
whakatapu i te wa e tanumia ai c taea te whakatapu a muri 
atu. I muri i whakamutu ki te inoi. 

Karakia i te 2 nga haora. Himenc tuatahi 111. "Arise 
Glorious Zion." Inoi a Erata Karanata. Tuarua he anthem. 
"Song of the Redeemed." Kai-kauwhan tuatahi ko Erata 
Paapiti, Tumuaki Waikato. Mo te Whakapono me nga Mahi, 
me nga hua te Rongopai. Te wa hei tunga mo te Kingitanga 
o tc Atua. i roto i te moemoea a NTepukaneha. Me koropiko 
ki tc Atua. kaiia ki nga whakapakoko. 

Ko Bro. 11. Anaru. Mo te whakamararatanga [haraira, 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KAREK.E 27 j 

me te kohikohinga mai. Ko*-ero i nga karaipiture me te tono 
aao ki te Atua kLa liomai he mohiotanga ki nga karaipiture. 
tvia u, kia mahi toiiu, pera me te kohua tiamu e kororia ana 
kei rapa, kia pai ai te inaoa. Kaua a tatou kupu e whiua kia 
mua noa atu a ki muri noa atu uei whai atu ai tatou tinana, 
eagari kia hacre tahi tonu me tatou tianaua. Tukua uga 
taniariki ki te kura kia whakaakona, kia mohio, kia pai me 
te koLatu e tukua ana ki te mini kia tuia, kia pai, kia moani. 
Whakahonoretia tatou Tohungatanga. 

ft rata Xaiti, mo te matenga, mo te aranga mai. Whak.i- 
ritea te lure te Tikitiki-o-rangi kia whiwhi ai ki taua ranga- 
tiratanga. 

1 muri lie sextette na nga kaumatua na Xaiti, Aratama, 
Tarapata, R. \vi Hongi, Paapiti, me li. Anaru. Ko Erata Pii-i- 
ha na. Mo te Karaiti, he whakaaturanga, lie mea whakamaori 
no poto 1 ii.ua ana Lliipa e whakatu ana mo te Karaiti. Te roroa 
ona makawe tae ana ki tona hope, pai te hanga tona ihu, 
ona paiiau pera anp me ona makawe, tona reo he pai te tang] 
he ngawari lie mea ano ka kata ia. engari ano te tangi. Wliaka- 
atu i te alma te whakaniatenga nga apotoro. Ko Pita i 
ripekatia ki Roma i te tau 66 A I). Ko Henri i poutoa te 
matenga i te tau 44 A.I). Ko Iloani i pana atu i te tau 96 A.I). 
Ko Ana 111 lie mea fipeka atu tonu ki te ripeka. Ko Piripi he 
mea lipeka i te tau 52 A.I). Ko Patoromu he mea tihore ora 
te tapeha. Ko Tamati he mea vvera ki te matia. Ko Matin 
he mea whakamate ki te toki i te tau <>n A.D. Ko Henri Poto- 
n .ii 11 he mea vvhiu a mate noa. Ko Tariu he mea whakamate 
ki te kopere i te tau 72 A.I). Ko Haimona he mea ripeka i te 
tau 72 A.D. Ko Maka he mea tooto i nga tiriti Arehanaria 
b mate noa. Ko Paora i poutoa te matenga i Roma < Nero i te 
t;ui in; A.D. Ko Panapa he mea aki ki te kohatu < nga Hurai 
i tc tau 7:5 A.D. I pera ano hoki .1 Hohepa Mete, i kohurutia, 

Himene whakamutunga 97. "Lord Dismiss [Ta " fnio na 
Tumuaki Tinikini. 

I te 7 nga haora, i te ahialii i tu te Miutara ll< uui te pai 
n nga waiata, nga korero, me te whakatangitangi a te ropu 
te Puea, Ko nga tangata i hui mai 1 roto i taua huihuinga neke 
atu i te 200. He nui nga hoa aroha l tu te Tumuaki Mihana, 
i korero mo nga taitama me nga tamahine I ki kei nga 



-'74 TE KARERE Akuhata 25. iy20 

taitama te nui te raruraru e pa ana ki uga tamaldne, mehe- 

nica e tiakj ana te lainaili i a ia ka mama te lalia ki Dga kotiro. 

ko te ingoa kino me te ingoa tahae e taea te whakarite kia 
takoto pai. Ko te tapu te ma te kotiro, me te kohuru, e 
korc »- taea 1<- whakakahore kia pai. 

Ka mutu ai i konei nga mahj te llui Pariha. Tokorua 
nga nica i Liiiria i rolo i tend liui. 

\a TOKE WATBNE 

He Ripoata Mihana 

Ki te Etita Te Karerej tena korua k<> to boa awhina, tens korua 
uga kai panui i nga rongo korero !<• motu noi. Teaei auo tenei 
pikaunga ma korua. Kaati, i a Maehe ka whiwhi ahau ki tetahi kara- 
ngatanga kia haere ki te kauwhau i te Ron go I'ai i te takiwa Waikato, 
a no te 15 Aperira ka haere ahau ki te vvhakaritc i tenei maki aui. 

I tae ali an ki aga \\ ahi katca <» te takiv.a Waikato, a i tino \\ hiu hi 
hoki ki te hari nui mo tenei inahi pai. He inalia n^a iwi i tulaki aliau, 
nic te nianaaki hoki ia matOll uga kaiii.ia.ua. He inalia nga kainga 
nga Iioa aroha i tae mntou, a 1 iviuiknlu hoki !.i a ia .11 i i:ga Ukaugu te 
Rongo Pai. Tino pai ratou ki te vvhakarougo i uga kauwhau tvhnka- 
inaraina i te RongO I'ai pono. 

Ko etahi nga Hunga Tapu ka nui te kaha me te u ki te pupuri 
i nga tikanga te Kongo Pai. Ko etahi kua tino waiku'ra ratou 
whakapono. I tae ah u ki te kainga <» Henry Marshall, he tangata 
kaha tenei me tono whare katca ki te pupuri i nga tikangj le Rongo 
I'ai. he tangata tino pai. 1 tae ano hoki ahau ki te kainga John 
Ormsby, q Ta,i,ti 1 lone a na. Tatann Arena, he tangata kaha katou 
enei ki to pupuri i ratou karangatangn. 

He niaha nga tangata i iriirin c nintor, i whakawahia ano h ki, nie 
nga pepi hoki i manaakitia. 

Kua oti taku mihana 1 runga i to pai, a kua whhvhi hoki ahau ki 
toku tukunga honoretanga. Kaati nei ano te ripoata, kia ora nga Hunga 
Tapu katoa Waikato, ara puta noa to mot 11 nei. tae atn hoki ki nga 
hoa aroha.. Kin ora koe e Toheriri me to flungn Tapu katoa, a Winiata 
Kapinga, a Here Tangihacre, no' koutou katoa. 

Uoiano. na to koutou tcina. tungane, 

PAEPAE W. SVITEHIRA. 
Ko te Matenga Te Paea Cunningham 

I mate ia i te warn nga ra Hurac i t«' tan l'.tL'n. Ko <>na tau 
p 14. Ko ana taniariki tekau ma tahi, e torn kua mate e warn kei te 
ora. Tona kainga i mate ai ko Whakatu. Hastings. Haki Pei. He 
Hunga Tapu tenei wahine ho mema ia no roto i te Hahi Tim Karaiti 
te Hunga Tapu nga Ra Mini Nei, peka Korongata. 

Te ahuatanga te mate n tenei wahine he mate kaiakiko. Ko 



Akuhata 2' D > 1926 n: KARERE 275 

t '' 1 "' 1 k.'iihiuo lie waiiine tenei i whawhai nui ia ki te japu 1 tetahi 
aio toim mate, tvua taea hoki e ■ ; g* ■fct» ut anga kai ■ 

"'• l ' i,,i kacre kau ana in painga ake u tona mate. Kafta 
k " '• ' "' ■■■ ;1 - Ltamna iin wuakaoru i tona mate. L goto ia i te whaka- 
oacic u u .una mo tetahi w a roa tonu, kore kau ana he p 
tona 1. a.e, e iieke haere ke atu ana ki Le mate. I 
rno»u - in.. ;. ,;: i.,i. he tona I . ua < aa inahara ki te ).; . 

1 nga kaumaiua kia ivhakawahia m ki te hmu tapu a kia Mate hoki ki 
1 "" ' il ' " : '" 1 « i'>" Karaiii. i haere a Erata Heke raua ko Paati 
ttiUKH»aui 1 a ia me ie kaumatua iviaori Kaui ,. 5 nga wiki 

i i,i,.,i iho kaiaii/ uiic ka mate, ao reira i man- ia i roto i te Kahi. 

u te u.unga tapu, e u hakainarnina ana Le kai ripoa 
te kn\\ Liautangd u te Kongo I'ai i ma roto i te 
i uuxtu ;i.u i te ma ran nga langata i tae iaai ki te 
Leiiei wahine, I rongo hoki i nga pouonga a te A; . 
i Le iiiihnga mo ■-• liunga mine. No kon \ ahau ka lulu i ; 
Ahakoa kauie tenei tualrine i kau , liau ., ana 

main i kauwhau Le Kongo I'ai. Nuku atu i te tU aga I'akeha i i.\ 
kia kiuu i te tapuke^unga o lenej vvahme, aie to aiatau kite touu atu 
c ntitu niai ana ,<• loiiu o Le aroha, ara e tai _ 
i uga uxinanki. Ano te ahua o tenei vvahii 
reira hei piuai iho ma te tangata ki a ia auo aia te wain 
aha te iiiKe i tangi ai ana uahine ■ akeha aie aga tane hnki . 
agohe, he ugakau raugimaire, he uguwari, he 
aiahi pai itatua i aga \.a e aoho ana i iva< g 
Kaia ..• i; ke i arohatia nuitia ai ienei wahine i 
Te Whiiu.ara ma nga Main E 
Tokoono aga kai aino mo te tupapaku, ka tu i !«• taha u te kawheua. 
Ka in te lane me te whanau katoa ara te whare man-. ICu inanaakilia 
c !«• kaumatua taaa whanau te Lupapaku aie tuna boa Laue H 
ukitanga katoa i roto i Le inoi, knore etulii atu <• urn ki rot«i i tuua 
u" iniiiii ka aniiihia ki roto i te whare karakia, kn reira te timua- 

ga ii i«' pekn e aoho mai ana me i*- Eluuga Tapu katoa, 
okenn kei Le tangi, v tatari ana ki i<- urunga atu o te kawhena. Kua 
rere mai te wain he tukotoranga am t.- tupapaku. Te lukungi atu I 
kui-ainu !.i ton ii takotorangn kn aoho te timuaki ki raro, uohu 
katoa te katoa, limata te karakia Ku te aoho a te kirimate me noho 
i le taha main l\'. te okeua laha katau. i\" aga kai aniu ts turn ki 
letahi taha e torn ki tetahi taha Ko te kiuiene Mo S3 M^ Father. 

ii-, whnkntuhera aa Hamioru Kttmau. II 'n< 

Matonga. Ko rteupoua Parahi te kai whakahaei 

kui-whnkatangi fi te okena ko Tiata WUehirn me R< Kai 

lamu hau I natahi I- n Memi I'urtri 

I kauwhau ia > te nhua >> tenei wahiue i a ii noa 

ki tona matenga. Kai kauwhau tuarui ko 

I I ii aw h(i n i te ha M n tor 



276 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926 

1 tenei take. 1 kore.ro hoki ia mo te taha ki te iriiringa, mo »e mai 
c 1 mi Kara in i a La 1 ara ake ai 1 te uuue 1 ha ere La ki te kauwhau ki 
ugu aairuu 1 .«■ whare Ucrehere a 1 kauwhau huki 1 te iriiriugu uiu ,.■ 
hunga male i a i Ixoroiuiti 15: 29, penei ka aim ic hunga u iriiria aim 
in', ivhakakapi mo te huagu mate ki te kore ruwa <» hunga mute o ara, 
In- aha hoki ratou ka iriiria ai hei whakakapi mo te hunga matel 
->ana ka unga alu 6 ahau a haia Poropiti ki a koutuu i nma i te taenga 

mai n te ra nui o Lhowa, te whakamataku, a ka tahuri i a La nga ngakau 
o ng; i mania ki nga tamariki, me oga Qgakau t> uga tamariki ki oga 
lnatua, kei haere atu ahau ka pain i te wheuua ki te kaauga. 

lie wuiata na Bratu I iriugihaata raua k.> raati. Kauwhau mi 

Liaia Henihana. I kurero La mo te alma ■ te ora i tenei a<> te 

ahuatanga o te urauga >■ tera no. ! run yd i te hari me tc ki>a o to 
tangata i roto i tenei orauga kihai i na kua mutu iaua aari, taua koa 
kua tangohia atu i a tatau. 1 whakariten e i., tatau ki te kaipuke. 1 
te takiwa i rere atu ai te kaipuke e mohio atu una tatau ki aga tangata 
ki te alma o nga ruea katoa i rungn i taua kaipuke, cngari i te taima ka 
lawhiti haere am ka timata tc ngaro haere atu i a tatau — aawai a. kua 
kite atu tatau ko le niaa anake o nga hera «' knen am ana, nawai aaa, kua 
ngaro, kua mutn to Laton mohio atu ka pewhea ra :i ko atu. Penei me 
io tatau tuahiue, i mohio tatau ki tona alma i Le taima o ora ana e 
noho ana i waenganui i a tatau. Engari i te wa kua male ia kua kore 
tatau e kite atu i a ia. kua ngaro atu ia i a tatau, kua kore tatau t) 
mohio pewhea ra a k-j niu. Ko tc vvahi pouri nnake tenei, engari ko te 
tikangn ia ka hoki mai ano taua kaipuke, ka kite ano ■ tuna wa. E 
mohiotia ana hoki tona ra h »ki mai e nga tangata whakahaere. Engari 
to tatau tuahine kei te mohiotia ano ka hoki mai ano. engari awhea 
te ra, te marama, tc tau ranei, kaore e mohiotia -kore rawa he tangnln 

hio ahakoa tc Tama n te A.tua, kore rawa tetahi tangata kin kotahi, 

koia anake ko te Matua. ka. te nga anahcra. He tangata aroha tonu le 
A i na. ara a llm Karaiti. E taoa e is t<' whakaora te tangata ahakoa 
mate, ka ora ia. Engari he tauira Tuna i whakaatu ai ma tc whaka 
pono, ahakoa taua whakapono pera noa te rahi me te p-ia nanj te rahi, 
c men afu ana k ut< u ki tenei maunga kia nckc n u. ka ncke. Kei a 
lataii taua whakaakoranga. I pera tonu hoki Tona whakaoranga i t<- 
lamahini" a Taitllha i whakaaiahia «• l;i i te mate. I korero ia mo etahi 
purapura witi i takoto i roto i nga whan- o te taima mai ra ano i [hipa 
nun purapura witi, no muri nei ka kitea i roto tonu i nga whare witi 
i hanga e Hohepa, kei te pai tonu. kei tc ora tonu te kakano tipu o 
roto i te witi. Pera tonu tatau. ahakoa pewhea to tatau rea ki roto 
i te kopu o tc w henna. Ko tc purapura kei tc Atua 6 pupuri mai ana 
tc wairua ora. Mr nga tangata whakaaro whanui kua mate, e wai- 
hotia e ratou etahi tohu o aua korero e pera tonu ana me ta to karai- 
pitnre e korero nei. 

Tie liimene na RcrC Waerea. .Icsus Lover of My Soul. Kauwhau : a 
Rawiri .Kamae. 1 mihi ki te hunga katoa i tae mai, te tohu o te 



Akuhata 25, 1926 TE KARhkE _;; 

aroha, me te mihi hoki ki te nui te Pakeha, mo ratau i tae mai ki te 
whakanui i te tapuketanga o tenei wahine. E mohio aua ahau he pai 
nga uiahi a tenei wahine i waenganui i a koutou mei te nui to koutou 
aroha. Ka pai ki a au te tauira a tenei wahine. kia mohio ai hum wahine 
inaianei kia penei ratou ahua ki a koutou me teuei wahine. Ko teuei 
wahine no tenei Ilahi, ara no te Elahi o Lhu Karaiti o te LIunga Tapu 
nga Ka -Mini Nei, e mohiotia nei e te ao he Momona. No reira ahaj 
ka mihi atu ki a koutou. Kua kite koutou he wahine pai tenei. Ka 
nnitu i konei tenei karakia. Himene 195 Shall We Meet Beyond the 
Kiver. inoi whakamutunga na Ltatima Eakopa. 

Ka mauria te tupapaku, tokoono nga tangata man. Ko te whare 
mate i inuri mai i te kawhena, ko nga kauimuim. ko aga Pakeha, k> 
nga manuhiri, Xgati Hineuru, Ngapuhi, Ngati Kahungunu, aga tauiu 
riki o te Kare.i 7.1. tangata w henna. Kn tae ki te rua. He paka a 
roto. ko nga taha he karoko katoa te rua atrahua ana te rua. Tuku i 
te tupapaku ki roto. Himene l(5(j i te himei.e Pakeha. Xa Erata PaaJ 
i whakatapu te rua. i aiua o te ;,. ratanga i te k< pani u te paaka 
Imra mai katoa nga wahine Pakeha km kite i te kawhena e lakoto 
ma ana i roto i te kawhena paaka. kua tukua iho aga karek i <> aga taha 
kua takaia ki te kawhena ake. Katahi .-nui ka aeratia te kopani u te 
paaka, tapukena hoki te rua. 

He nui nga mihi a te I'akehn tenei alum tapuke tupapaku a 

tenei Ilaln. Kaoro rawa ratau nei e kite aim he aha t«- llnln. kaorc 
he tapuke tupapaku penei te whakahaere. Te pai ki te titiro atu a te 
kanolii. Atnahua ana nga mahi katoa. lie nui tonu hoki nga Maori 
katahi ano ka kite, mo te mihi ki tenei tanu tupapaku. 
Te Tina ara Ilakari. 

I te mutungfl i) te hakari kn inea mm tetahi wahine ninku e whnka 
puaki tona mihi. Ara wahine Pakeha, Mrs. McKenzie. • ■ W i >■ whnka 
mnori atu nku korero. Tino ki tooku ngaknu i te aroha ki tenei u 
me tona whnnnu katoa. Ka nui taku whakumoemiti I na i 

whakamohiu i au ki te aroha ki tenei wahine Maori. I mohio ai ahau 
ki te ahua <> tenei iwi Maori. I. korero pono mm ahau ki ••< koe, koro 
rawn ahau i ki o i tetahi tanu tupapaku penei te wairua, Te p i «» 
nga whakahaere nra o tenei Hahi. Ko to matau whakanro katoa etici e 

i atu nei ahau I i a koe. i 
Whenei i p;ii tenei rangi, nui atu a matau i n< ho atu r tae mai ki tenei 
w liMiun in, engnri ko ta matau mihi katon hau ki 

! koutou, ko matau ko nun Pa matau 

inn koutou e ivhnkaal mai " 

Koin nei te mutunga, Ko tenei tauira tanu tupa|mku an Tiiuunki 

I 1 in I. mi 1 I nl 11 nn 1 te taui 1 :i llll' penei |e :iliu:i 

Heoi, tena, koin nei ra, te Huii| w aha 

•1 nn ke to kauwhauti I • 

\<p rei mi tr nui n te kn n« haul 11 - 

R v 



268 KARBRE .Uuhahi 25. 1926 

He Ripoata Hui Atawhai 
K 1 Te ECarere: Kia ora, tenei an k:i tuku atu i tetahi ripoata iti mo 
to liuihuiiiga atawhai i in aei ki te Hui Purina roto i te Putahi, peka 

to Wairoa <» te paiiha to \lahia nci. Te inn o aga mema i tae inai 

1 tae 111:11 ki UiUU tiuihllianga i imkw ;ilu i te 411. \;i te mema te 

Ponri na Kailia Tengaio i whakahaere tenei huihuinga. Eiimene tuatahi, 
11 t. aga aimene Maori, Aroha ki te Kainga. Xa Erihapeta Wn&itiri i 
whakatangi Le okena. Laoi whakatuwhera i a Kararaina Elapi. Eiimene 
tuarua, \- o aga himene Maori, Kia Pai aga Kupu. I tu a Etaiha Tengaio 

ki te karanga ia merua o ia Hui Atawhai ki te ripoata. Ilea tuatahi i 

karangatia <■ ia ko Male ana Taituha, Evaunihera Tuarua <> te peka o 

L'uranga. L ki ana a ia ka aui Le kaha o toi.a inn Atawhai ki te whaka- 
rue i aga main o to ratou Hui Atawhai. To ratou aui 8 warn ano aga 
inenia, a ko ia ano he kai-whakuako. Ka nui hoki to ratou kaha ki te 
t< rotoro aaeie i aga kainga, aie te whakakakahu hoki i aga tupapaku, 
a lie aiihi hoki nana mo tona taenga raai ki tenei Hui Pariha. 

Tuarua, i karangatia a Tiri Karauria, Tumuaki o te Hui Atawhai (» 
Muiiwai. tetahi wahanga o Turanga. Te nui o tona Hui Atawhai e torn 
ano ugu mema. Ivo etalii o o ratou kai-awhina he rawaho. ECaati, e 
LOrotoro ana rana ko tona h. a i tetahi tangata no waho o te Hahi tae 
atu hoki ki aga aica o roto i te ilalii. ECaati, mo te taha ki aga moni 
c i\\ a pauna ano to ratou moni. 

Tuatoru i karangatia a Erihapeti Whaitiri ki te homai i tana 
ripoata. Ko ia hoki te Tumuaki o to Elui Atawhai o Nuhaka. Tino pai 
hoki tana ripoata. K ki ana a ia kua rite katoa i tona Hui Atawhai 
te whakati.e i aga uialii i whakariiea hei inahinga, tae atu hoki mo te 
taha tiaki i aga kamnatua. K tino hari ana tona agakau ki te ki. ka 
nui te kaha (» tona hokereiari ki te manaaki i aga kaumatua me te 
whakarite hoki i aga hui aiahi-a-ringaringa. E tino kaha ana aga mema 
ki te aacrc tnai. K riro ana ma aga mema ke air te Timuaki e akiaki 

i etalii wa, tae atu nio te awhina i ll ga mea e turorotia ana e be ana 
ranei. Kua rite katoa tena i to Hui Atawhai o Xuhaka. A ko te tino 
kupu whakahau a Erihapeti ko te Kupu o te Mataurauga kia puritia e 

te katoa o aga mema o te Hui Atawhai, no te mea o kore e ahei kia 
whiwhi tcalii to karangatanga i roto i te Elui Atawhai me matua utu 
i nga whakatekau, aie kaua hei kai tii. kawhi ranei. 

I karangatia a EJrumannku Karere ki te homai i tetahi ripoata iti 
o tona mohiotanga ki te Hui Atawhai o Oraka (Mahia) i to mea kaore 
te Tumuaki i reira mo ona kaunihera hoki. Ko te ripoata o te mema o 
taua Hui Atawhai ka nui te pai, te kaha hoki o tana peka. I tautokona 
.• te mema o te Poari tenei ripoata, ara i tae hoki ia ki reira ki to tiro- 
tiro i a ratou. ki te whakatuturu hoki i aga karangatanga he kai-whaka- 
ako, hf kai-tiaki-taonga ano hoki. Ka nui hoki to ratou hihiko ki to 
whakarite i aga mahi me to pupuri hoki i te Kupu o te Matauranga, me 
te kohi hoki he moni ma ratau. 



Akuhata 25, [926 TE KARERE 

1 muri i tenei ka karangatia a Kautckura Webber ki te homai i 
tana ripoata te Wairoa, ko ia hoki te Tumuaki taua peka. Ka nui 

hoki Le pai tana ripoata. Ahakoa ia ugaro ka haere tonu nga buihui 
i ona kaunihera. Ka nui te kaha Apikaru Pomare ki te manaaki i 
nga kaumatua. Mo te taha ki te whakuakoranga 1 roto i nga magazine, 
kaore ra^au i le mahi, cngari taihoa pea. 

1 \vhnkatu\vheratia ki nga mema e hiahia ana ki te uhai kupu te 
taiiria, a ka tu a Apikara Pomare ki te mihi ki nga mahi katoa tae noa 
ki te kaha nga vvahine ki te haere mai ki tenei hui. I tu ano a afarara 
Mai'n ki te whakaatu i tona hinengaro mo te tika te Ilaln me t<- 
tautoko hoki i nga ripoata mo Nuhaka. No te mea ko ia kua tupono 
ia ki tetahi uiahi uaahi i te Tumuaki u te pariha ara a Erata Anihann 
i le maia paitini tona vvaewae, lac atu hoki ki te naahi whakawhanau 
taniariki, kua tuiuki ami i a ia. He mihi hoki nana mo te kaha o ;<• 
meina o te Poari i tarai ki te haramai, a Una tae mai kei wacnganui i a 
latau. I tu a Ha rata Kaipuke ki t«" mihi me to tautoko i nga kupu katoa 
i puta i roto i Le hui. I tu a Liararaiuu Hapi ki te tautoko ano hoki mc 
te \vh ikaatu ano hoki i t<ma hinengaro. 1 mutu tenei huihuinga i runga 
i le ranglmarie me Le pai. Hiniene vvhakamutunga 37 o nga himene, 
Ma te Marie. Inoi vvhakamutunga i a Grace llaiatua. [Ienoi ano 

RAUTEKUltA WEBBER, 

Kai tuhituhi. 



Ko te hui a te Poari o te M.i.C. 

I-; whakaatu ana tenei ripoata i te ahuatanga o nga main «• whaka 
hacrea ana me te alma o te tu a te Kareti, te ora ranei te mate ranei, 
te piki whakanma o nga mahi. te hoki whakamuri ranei. Ko tenei ra 
i mohiotia ai nga ahuatanga katoa o le Kareti. 

Te men Luatahi ko nga mahi u te paainu. Tino pai te Lipu o nga 
o i i tcuei taima n te tau me nga vvahi i rungia ki te karaihe. Ki te 
,i in it le Poari lino ora te kareti ina wnimarie te penei u te pa 
• ,a ' i •<• wa n who I Hinoni ai. 

Tr a tuiirua, ka nui te ora o nga kau miraka, o nga hoiho i i«* 

kahi u nga kai-whakaako ki te whaknemi kai ara aei hay) mi 
kararohc i .«■ taima o te raumati ki roto i nga whare lungt haj I 
I'i. ■:■ rawa ake te mnroke kua whaiti ke he kai, kaore i pau kua tupu 
i he karaihe, i naianei kei te pai ngi 

Te i tuatoru ko nga ponka mc nga pikaokao Tii 

I, i tr k-,i. tino pikaok to te tvhanau heki Kua 

n n rie ko nga mea pa i auake. 

Te mea tunwha, kua kite te Poai i I U al t< * I " (1 ' "* a 

lamariki ki te kai, <• rite ana ki iig 

mati igu ahuii o nga kai nu 

ana ngn " bill ni fn " inni I le M 



ik KA RERK Akuhata 25, ^0 

aga kai te Mane, Le Turei, te Weneroi, te Taite, te Paraire, 
te Hatarei, «> lc ttatapu. 1 tino ohorcrc 10 Poari i tenei ahua, tt* kaha 
(» te paij pai atu hoki i a matau nei kai. 

Te uiea tuarima, ka nui te ora nga ahua u nga tamariki hauuga 
la aga mea e pangia ana •■ te mate. Engari uuj atu le ora aga tinaua. 
He urn aga mea 1 tae puhutihuti aiai ki tenei kura, i to roanga e nohu 
ana ka tiinata te ora, lc nui. Kaore lie tii. lie >\ai luatno uoa ih<>. 

Te mea tuaono, kua wrhakaritea he takuta tirotiro mo ratou ko 
Dr. Johnson no Hehitingi. Ki te kiia aie tuku ki te holiipera ka 
tukua, engari ko aga raruraru katoa mo tana tamaiti ka hoki atu 
ano ma tona matua auo uga raruraru e utu mai. 1 pcneitia e vvhakakeke 
ana etahi o uga tamariki ki te haere ki te Hchipcra e titiro whakamuri 
ana kci ratou niatna ta aim te tikanga ma ratou ra aim e uhakanc 
aiai, mi reira ka r. a e takoto ana Lc tuniiti i to kura, tac rawa mai to 
whakautu kua wiki ke e takoto ana. [naianoi kaore e tatari ki nun 
m -.uia. 

Take tuawh'uu, i uiuri mai i te Hui Y; u i Xuhaka i puta te panui 
a h'.M.K. to inali' a te Kareti kw uga moni utu o Uga tamariki e haere 
mai ana ki te kura uei, e OUO ran euhitu tokau ma warn pauna kci te 
nama. Inaianci c rim a ran c whitu tokau ma warn pauna kua puta mai, 
kotahi rau pauna kci te toe. Te mohio iho o te Poari tae rawa ake ki 
te w a c inutu ai te Kara ka ea katoa mai i to koutou kaha, c aga matua, 
ki te utu mai i nga moni a koutou tamariki. Ka kite iho koutou ka 
ora nga tamariki i te kai, ka kore c uepuku nga korokoro, pai ana tc 
lickc (i nga kai. Tt kai a Lo langata cliara ho kai mahaialiara. kaore, ki 
tana kai ake, lino kai. tino makona. Heoi ana nga nama e toe ana kci 
ruuga i nga tamariki o nga iau kua hori ake. kua ]>uta nei ho painga ki 

a rataii E hoa ma, c tig atua o nga tamariki kore nei ano i utu d < ra 

atu tau. utua mai ana moni inaianei. 

I tino mihi te Poari ki to kai-whakaako o te Kareti a Efata Heera 
tae atu ki uga kai-whakaako i raro i a ia. Ki tona kaha ki te whaka- 
haere i nga mahi o te Kareti i tenei tau. Ki te titiro a te Poari mama 
ana te tu a te Kareti i tenei tau. He nui to mini o XirenhaPacu ai ki 
te pai o te ripoata o to Kareti i tenei tau. Ko tona hui whakamutunga 
tenei, kua rihaina ia i roto i tona turanga hekeretari mo to poari o te 
kareti. Ko te kai-riwhi mo tona turanga kua ata waihotia kia tu ano 
tc hui a te Poari, ka whirikhiri ai, kia noho hoki te Timuaki. Kua 
haere a Nireaha Paewai ki Amerika ki to kura ki te hopu mai i nga 
matauranga o te Pakeha e tu tika ai tatau te iwi Maori i roto i eoei 
mohiotanga kura nialiita. No reira i tukua honoretia atu ia i roto i 
tenei huihuinga. Ma te Atua ia e manaaki i nga wa katoa tae aoa ki 
tc ra e hoki mai ai ia me tona hoa wahine me ona tamariki. 

Tokowha nga mema o to Poari i tac mai ki tenei huihuinga: Erata 
Hoera, Tiamana; Nireaha Paewai. Hekeretari; Rawiri M. Kamau; Raki 
whata Peeti. Heoi na 

R.M.K. 



Akuhata 25, 1926 



TE KARERE 



Ko nga Kai Kauwhau Whangarei 

Ko nga in^oa enei o nga kai-kauwhau Whangarei mo 
nga marama e rua e tu mai nei, ara mo Hepetema me Oketo- 

pa. 



1 Pukehuia 

j Portland 



I Ngararatunua 

j 1 e Kauao 
I Kukuranui 
1 Wairua 
I Whakapara 
I Mokau 
l Takahiwai 
I Ngararatunua 
i Motatau 
1 Poroti 
1 Orakau 
I Opahi 
l litoki 
I Te Kauao 



Hemi Nai Tairua 

Rani era Rewi 

Hari Peeni 

One Elder 

Wiremu J airua 

Keremete Ratahi 

Heta Reweti 

Aperira Wiremu 

W irepa Taniora 

Mohi Peepe 

Mita Wepiha 

Noa Pakaraka 

Pera Wi Hongi 

Wehi Kauwhata 

Eddie Reihana 

Tumu Pei Hopa 

Hone Peepe 

Raniera Paora 

Hutana Eparaima 

One Elder 

Tirarau Renata 

Hori Peeni 

Marc Pari 

Wiremu I leemi 

Waimate Anaru 

Reno Poama Heke 

Hetaraka Anaru 

Peneha Maru 

Wini Anaru 

( )ur Elder 

Rehe I tori Peeni 

Oik- Elder 

I [ono Pere 

( >ne Bldi r 

Koroniria Tari 

( me Elder 1 

Tena koutou, e oku hoa mahi, ka nui oku whaimihi 
atu ki .1 koutou mo to koutou tautokotanga ki ahau, mo to 
koutou kaha hoki ki te wharite i koutou karangatanga 1 .1 
;ui i tu nei lie tumuaki mo koutou. Na, hei konei ra e oku 
hoa aroha. Ma te Atua Kaha Rawa koutou e manaaki e 
whakauu ki tenei mahi i a koutou e haerc ana 1 raro 1 to kou- 
tou tumuaki hou. I loi an< 1 1 a, na to koutou teina, na 

Rinehi K. famati, fumuaki fakiwa I awhito 



t Kairara 
I Maunu 
1 Nga Pipito 
I Ruatangata 
1 Kairara 
1 Otiria 
1 Nga Pipito 
I Ruj tangata 

I 

1 
! 



E rua w iki 
2 
4 
2 

3 
3 
4 
4 

One Week 
2 
4 

3 
2 

( >ne month 

3 week si 

( )nr month 

1 eeks 



11 KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926 



KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA 



Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei tc tari te Miliaria ht-i ho- 
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea C hiahia ana ki etahi O 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. 
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 

New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather no 

Book of Mormcn, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6 

" " , Half Leather 90 

.Leather 10-0 & 150 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0 

" , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 
MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 

" " " .Leather 3-6 

Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 

" " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in I n-b 

" Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 

, Leather 15-0 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nni, Cloth 5-0 

" " " ", Leather I5-0 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer I 
SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0 

What Jesus JCaught 5 

Kindergarten Plan Book, KesHer & Morris 50 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, .Morton 4-6 

SONG BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 

" " " . Leather 6 6 

Deseret Song Books, Cloth 30 

44 " " .Leather 6 b 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS 

Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3 

Vitality of Mormonism 4-6 

Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson o-o 

Restoration of the Gospel, II idtsoe 40 

Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6 

Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6 

Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 

Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9 

Bible Ready Reference 2-0 
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Mom's 6-0 

KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. R. 




j^trpr? 



i 



a 



Wahanga 20 Hepetema 22, 1926 Nama 9 



Ta Kamariere: 

>»UI te mea hoki na te tangata tenei 

whakaaro, tenei mahi, tera e ka- 

hore noa iho : Tena na te Atua, e kore 

rawa e taea te whakakahore e koutou." 

Nga Mahi 5:38-39. 



\0! 

I 

1 

! 



% 



M 



"CS KMR&R&" 



WHAKAEMINGA O NCA KORERO 





Wharangi. 


Kl TE ETITA 




He Matenga 


303 


1 [e Matenga 


304 


He Ripoata no te Mahia 




He Poroporoaki 


30S 


Ko te Matenga o Piripi 


306 


Ko te Marae o te Hui Tau 


305 


KO NCA RONCO KORERO 




Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona 


307 


KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 




He Whakaaturanga mo te Whare 


Iharain 308 


MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 


300 


MAHI KURA HAPATI 




Concert Recitation 


282 


Intermediate Department 


294 


Korero a Ngakau 


282 


Kindergarten Department 


297 


Maori Theological 


282 


Pakeha Theological 


288 


Postlude 


281 


Prelude 


281 


Sacrament Gem 


281 




j^an>n> 



WaHANCA 20 WENEREI. HEPETEMA 22, 1926. NAMA 9 

Maori Hgriculiural college Hastings, H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, 

hiahi u iliu ivara:u u te iiunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. 

Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, AI.A.C, Hastings. 

Kii te utu mo TE K ARK RE i te tan e rima hereni (5/-). 

KO IE TIKANGA TENEI. 

iTle malua utu mo tou pepa fcu wuiv hi ai. 

J. H. Timkini, Tumuaki Mihana 
Marioiui K. Ewutana, htita. Tiala Wttehtra, Etiia Hoa Awhina. 

Ko te Km-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha 

Ivo ogu Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). 

Wiremu A. Koura Rap ita Tana pu Eru T. Kupa 

~ MAHI KURA HAP ATI. 

Prelude. 



Adagio hgato. 



Arr. After Schumann. 
by Edw. P. Kimball. 



SaCRaMHM GEM FOR OCTOBER, 1926 

"His precious Mood He freely spilt, 

His life I le Ereely gave ; 
A sinlrss sacrifice for guilt, 
A dying world to save. " 
Postlude. 

'\I:. :: J.: J: ,,!-!;•!' Hi.!. I I 

PPP 

mm P .i.-.n _>;; 



rh k AkkkK Elepetema zi, 1926 

CONCERT RECITATION FOR OCTOBER, 1926. 
FAST DAY CONCLiRT RECITATION. 

(Matthew Chapter 4. Verse L9. 1 
And 1 1 < ' saith unto them, Follow me, and 1 will make you 
fishers of men. " 

CONCERT RECITATION FOR THE REST OF THE 

MONTH. 

(Matthew. Chapter 28, Verse 19.) 
"Go ye therefore, and teach all nations, baptizing them in 
the oamc of the Father, and of the Son. and of the Holy Ghost. M 



KORHRO A NliAh\U MO OhkTOPA, 1926. 
KORERO A NGAKAU MO TE RA NOHO-irUKU. 

Kei a Matin 4: 19. 

"Xa ka nica ia ki a raua, Arumia niai ahan. a maku korua 
e nn'ii hei kaihao tangata. " 

KORERO A NGAKAU MO ERA ATU RATAPU 
TE MARAMA. 

Kei a Matiu ?8 : 19. 
"Na haere, oieinga h ; akonga nga iwi katoa. iriiria i 
runga i te tngoa p te Matua, te Tama, te Waima Tapu. M 



MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



Ratnpu tuatahi. Oketopa 3, 1926. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHC-PUKU. 

Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. 

Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a to tanira i whakatako- 
toria aei e Ihu hei mahi ma tatou. 

Ko nga Apotcro i Whiriwhiri. 

Te Whakaatu: Kei a Matin 4: L2-25. 

"I te timatanga te Kupu, i te Atua !<• Kupu, ko te Atna 

ano te Kupu I a ia te ora ; ko te ora 1c 

marama mo nga tangata. I roto i te pouri u- Marafiia e wliiti 



Hcpetema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 283 

ana; heoi kihai i man. i te pouri I te ao ia. 

i hanga ano e ia te ao, a kihai te ao i mohio ki a ia. i haere 
niai ia ki ona, a kihai ona i nianako ki a ia. Tena ko te liunga 
i nianako ki a ia i tukua e ia ki a ratou nga tikanga e meinga 
ai ratou hei tauiariki ma te Atua, ki te hunga lioki e whaka- 

pono ana ki tona ingoa I whakakikoki- 

kotia te Kupu, a uoho ana i a maton (i kite ano maton i tona 
kororia, he kororia e rite ana ki to te Tama kotalii te Matua), 
ki tonu i te aroha noa, i te pono," Iloani 1: 1-14. 

lie aha te aiahi imi kua whakatakotoria ma te Karaiti a 
he alia te tikanga Tona meanga, "Arumia niai ahau, a niaku 
korua c mea hei kaihao tangata?" 

Meite titiro talon ki enei patai ka kite tatou i tetahi patai 
imi. Mehemea ka ako tatou i nga mahi lhn ka kite tatou 
i Yana miliana he nui raw a atu. E kore e taea e tetalii tatou 
te malii Ana mahi. 

Mai «) Tona vvhanautanga ka tiiuata te ako i Tana wairua 
me Tana tinana. Ka tnpn i roto i te matauranga, ka neke haere 
la i te aroha noa ki te aroha noa. a riro noa i a ia te katoa. 
Ka whakatakotoria e la he tauira i Tona iriiringa e Iloani. a 
ka haere ia ki te koraha ka noho-puku mo nga ra e wha tekau, 
i reira ka raru ia la a llalana. I konei ka tiniata Tona mahi 
nni. Kua niaka a Iloani ki te herehere i a lhn i te koraha. 
kua kore tona reo e rangohia i te koraha e karanga ana i nga 
tangata kia ripeneta, no reira ka riro i a lhn tana mahi. kua 
oti te miliana a Iloani. Ka ako a lhn i nga tangata i o ratou 
marae, a i te tahataha inoana, i runga i nga taha maunga, i 
nga pa, a i etahi wa i nga whare karakia, i nga wa katoa 1 
ako ana ia i etahi tangata. 

"A i a 1 1 1 1 1 e haere ana i te taha te inoana Kariri, ka 
kite ia i etahi tangata tokorua, he tuakana, he teina, i a Elai 
inuiia, tona ingoa nei ko Pita, raua ko tona teina, ko Anaru, 
<• maka ana 1 te kupenga ki te inoana; he kai hao hoki raua. 
\;i ka ineu ia ki a raua, Arumia rnai ahau, a niaku korua <• 
mea hei kaihao tangata." Matiu I I s L9. 

Mi- titiro tatou 1 a La e haoreere aua i waenganui i nga 
tangata I lianau [a i roto i nga haerenga (> mi matua, 1 
i ,1 ia ano In pepi 1 te nine u Tona vvhaoa ka nuu^ria la 1 
runga nga rori tino wera ki Ihipa, a i reira ka hoki mai 



284 TE KAKhKi. liepctema 22, 1920 

la ki Tona kainga i Kariri. 1 Kariri i liaereere fconu la ki 
Hiruharama ki te Kapenga. Na te reo Eloaiii la i karanga 
ki tioranOj na te reo te svairua ia i arahi ki te koraha, rue 

te tiuiata ia ki te ako ka kit*' taton i a Ana main i Kariri n n- 
Kaperenauma ano hoki, i Korahina, i Kana, i Makatara 
kainga <> Mere Afakarini), i Taipiria. Ka kite ano tatou i a 
la c noho ana i te taha te puna Haika i Samaria, i Peta- 
haiia. i Karara (te whenua ki tawahi atu Kariri)', i Miliaria. 

nu' te wlienua Qga Kerekehino. i a la . tata ana ki I I'm 

harama ka haere la ki Petani me fclerikp, i haere ano lioki 
la ki tawhiti atu tae atu ki nga takiwa Taira me Ilai ona 
Die te whenua o Miria. 

He haere tonu Tana maiii. kaore he okioki, he tangata 
haere kahore he kainga, i runga Tona aroha ki Taha tnahi. 
i malum i a la Tona kainga kia tiro ai ko la liei kai-haereere 
i roto o Tona whenua ake, kahore lie kohatu hei takotoranga 
iao Tona matenga, Tona kainga tupu ko nga rori, Tona tnoenga 
ko nga awaawa te tnaara, kei 1*0 waka, kei te taumarutanga 
ranei tetahi rakau. Pera ano hoki nga apotoro ka malnie a 
ratou mahi, kainga, matua, teina, tuukana, tnahine, wahine, 
me nga taniariki kia aru ai ratou i a lliu. llei aha? I uiea 
atu ranei la ki a ratou me utu ratou ki te koura, whenua. mea 
utu nui ranei? Kahore, i korero ke la i te aroha anake; mc 
te poharatanga, me te main tika. E hia tatou e pai ki te am 
i a Ia nieite karanga la i a tatou inaianei .' .Mehemea e tae 
mai he poropiti ki te kai-hoko taonga, ka mea atu, waiho 
taonga, a ki te aiahita kura, panga au pukapuka am mai i a 
An. ki te roia; waiho au pepa me main tinihanga, l<i te kai- 
kuti hipi, tukua te lii])i arn mai i a au, ki te kai-mahi paamu, 
waiho te parau i kona, ki te tangata rangatira, hoatu an mea 
katoa ma te rawakorc— mehemea ka mea la ki a tatou kia 
aru i a la i tenei ra, c hia tatou e haere? 

Tana karanga, "Arumia mai ahau. a maku korua e mea. 
hei kaihao tangata," ehara i te mea ki nga taniariki anake 
a Heperi. ki a Pita ranei raua ko tona teina ko Anaru. engari 
Id a au. ki a koe, me nga tangata katoa te Ilahi Ihu 
Karaiti te Eiunga Tapu nga Ha Muri Xei. Kua kara- 
rigatia tatou ki te kauwhau i te R01 gopai ki te ao. Ko etahi 
ki te kauwhau ki nga tangata kia. ripencta, ko etahi iho ki 



Hepetema 22, 1920 te karere 285 

te awhina i nga kaumatua me te kauwhau i te Rongopai ma 
roto i a tatou niahi. Penei ano i nga pakanga nunui, ko 
etahi ki mua whav*hai ai, ko etahi ki muri noa atu pupuhi 
tnai ai i a fatou pu tmnui Kei awliina i nga niea kei mua. 

E inahi ana ranei tatou i nga tikanga o o tatou karanga- 
tanga? Kei te whakarongo tatou ki tatou apiha? Kei te 
tiaki ranei tatou i nga rawakore, tirotiro lioki i nga pouaru 
me nga pani :' Mehemoa kahorc. Iiorekau tatou e aru ana i a 
1c Karaiti. 

Kaua nga kai-ako c tango i te nuinga o te taima, engari 
nijG tuku nga niema kia korero i nga niea e karangatia ana 
ratou c lliu ki te mahi incite ai'U i a la. 

Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ilia Karaiti 

Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou 

Na Wiremu C Kaa raua ko Rapata 1 anapu i whakarite. 

kaiapu tuarua, Oketopa 10, 1926. 
AKORANGA 27. 

Te Mutunga te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i 
Hiruharama. 

A. A Paora i te aroaro te ninanga nga Hurai. 

1. Ko te poropititanga te whakatetenga ki a Anania. 
Mahi 23: 3. Tirohia ilio Iciici: Ko Anania te tumuaki 
o ic whare ninanga nga Hurai, i mate ki te whawhai 
o nga Hurai ki nga Roma 70 A.l). 

2. Ko te whakaarotanga me te tukunga Paora i a ia ki 
raro i i<- mana te Tohunga \ui. Mahi 23: 4-5. 
Whakaritea ki a Mai in 7 : '24-*J7. 

3 ko te tautolietohenga <> Qga Parihi nga Haruki ki 
poto i nga kai-vvhakapae Paora. Mahi 23: 6 

B. Ko te whakaoranga <• Paora e nga hoia <» Etoma. Mahi 23: 

in ::i 

1. Ko te tiakanga <» Paora 1 n>i<> i te pa i ona hoa rirl 
Mahi 23: LO 1 1 

2. Ko te putanga n Paora i nga ivhakaaro nanakia nga 
Hurai e wrha tekau. Mahi.2 I 

S Te pukapuka a te kapene Roma ki te kawana pari 

pawa ki 1 Pirika Mahi 23 26 30 
Tirohia ihn tenei: Na e tino manaakitia ana hoki e tc Vtua 



28o T£ KAREKh I kpciema 22, iy20 

Ana pononga 1 nga tnea kino katoa i te Diea he main Tana ma 
ratOU. J Oti lioki i a te Kaiaiti Ana mahi i mua Tona 
matenga. K<> te meatanga a Apinari ki Kingi Noa. Mohia 
13 : 3. I ki a Hohepa Mete e kore ia e mate i ona hoa riri i mua 
o te tutukitanga o tana mahi, 



Ratapu t.atoru, Oketopa 17, 1926. 
AKORANGA UH. 

l a Paora i mnaria. 



A. Ko te vvhakawatanga o Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. 

1. Nga mea i vviiakapaea ai a faora e nga ilurai. Mahi 
24 : 1-9. 

(a) Na Paora i tutu ai nga Hurai. 

(I)) Mo tana akonga ke i te Ture a Mohi. 

(c) Mo tana whakanoanga i te Temepara. 

2. Ko te whakahoki me te whakahe a Paora ki nga 
whakapae a nga Hurai. Mahi 24: 10-21. 

3. Ko te hikitanga o te wa hei whakawatanga mo Paora. 
Mahi 24: 22. 

B. E rua tau a Paora e tiakina ana. .Mahi 24: 22-27. 

1. Ko te korerotanga o Paora ki a Pirika raua ko Ruru- 
liira. 

(a • Ka memeha te kino i te aroaro o te pai. Mahi 24: 
25. Whakaritea tahitia ki nga tikanga o te llitoi-i 
o te Hani, wharangi 243-245. 

2. Ko te alma o Pirika. Mahi 24 : 26-27. 

Rrittpu tuawha, Ok'topa ?t, 1926 

AKORANGA 29. 

I Muri o te Rua Tau. 

A. Ko te whakawatanga o Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. 

1. Ko te pitihanatanga e nga Ilurai kia whakawatia a 
Paora ki Hiruharania. Mahi 25: 1-6. 

2. Ko te karangatanga o Paora ki a Hilia. Mahi 25: 11. 
r}. Ko te uiuinga p Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. Mahi 25: 

1-V2. 

B. A Paora i te aroaro o King] Akaripa. 



Hepete.Tia 22. 1920 TE KARERE 28' 

1. Ko te toronga a Akaripa raua ko Pereniki i a Petuha. 
Mahi 25: 13-37. 

2. Ko to kiin.ua a Petuha. Mahi 25: 24-27. 

3. Ko te karonga a Paora i a ia. Mahi 26: 1-29. 

4. Ko te mohiotanga o nga kai-whakawa ki te pono nga 
korero a Paora. Mahi 2b: 30-32. 

Tirohia iho tenei: i runga i te mea kua tangata whenuatia 
a Paora ki Roma e ahei ana ia ki te karanga ko Akuhata llilia 
hei whakawa i a ia, 110 te mea e mohio ana ia ki te liaere ia ki 
i li.-uiia ama ka whakamatea ia e nga liurai, heoi ko te tango- 
iianga atu taua take i a Akaripa raua ko Pirika. 

5. Ko te whakahaunga a Paora kia haere ki Roma. 

katapu tuarima, Gkeiopa31, 1926. 
AKOKA^GA 30. 

Ko te Rerenga Paoia ki Roma. 

A. Atu i tana ekcnga taea uoatia te pakarutanga te kaipuke. 

1. Ko te haere-noatanga Paora i Hairona (Sidon) 
Poeniha (Phoenicia). Tirohia te mapi. 

2. Te ekenga i Maiia ki runga i te kaipuke wit i e rere ana 
ki Roma. Mahi 27 : 5-6. 

3. Ko te whakatupatoranga Paora i Nga Kokoru Ata- 
ahua. mo te mate te rerenga atu. Mahi 27: 8-11, 

Tirohia tenei: Whakarit* a to te tangata matauranga ki 
t,-i te Atua whakakitenga. 

4. Ka mea atu a Paora ki ana hoa i to ratou ora te paka- 
rutanga te kaipuke. Mahi 27: 11-26. 

B. Te pakarutanga te kaipuke. 

1. Ko te meatanga nga heramana ki te whakarere i te 

Kaipuke. Mahi 27: 30. M.ihnalia iho te ahuat anira 

to ratou whakaoranga i te urupa inoana ko te ngo- 
Kengohe. Tirohia rarangi 3 1 

2. Ko te meatanga a Paora kia kai ratou i te pal 
tanga te tekau ma wha ra. 

Na ko taua kaipuke he lino uui IUO an a ra. 

3 K<» te rukenga i te uttnga, 1m 1 to ivhakaunga i te kai 

puke ki in .. M.il.i 27 38 U 
l Ko !«• w hakaorn lauhcrchi 1 1 Mahi 



ik k akkke Hepetema 22, 1926 
27: 42-43. Korerotia iho tenei: E ahei ana Ida whaka- 
matea nga hoia Roma mehemea ki te riro nga mau- 
herehere. 
5. Ko te tutukitanga ta Paora i poropiti ai. Mahi 27: 
44 ; whakaritea 27 : 22. 



PAKRH\ THEOLOGICAL 
"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTER?, 9 ' 

First Sunday, October ;*, 1926, 
FAST DAY TOPIC 

The Example of Jesus: \VIi;i1 it Bids 11s Do. 
THE CHOSEN DISCIPLES. 

Tex1 : Matthew 4:12-25. 

"In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with 
Mod. and the Word was God . . . In him was life; and the 
life was the lighl of men. 

■'And the light shineth in darkness; and the darkness com- 
prehended it not . . . 

"Me was in the world, and the world was made by him. and 
the world knew him not. 

"Me came unto his own and his own received him not. 

"Hul as many as received him, to them lie gave power to 
become he sons of (iod, even to them that believe in his 
name . . . 

"And the Word was made flesh, and dwell among us. (and 

we beheld his glory, the glory as of the only begotten of the 
Father:) full of grace and truth." (John 1:1-14). 

Whal was the great missi..,i of the Christ when He came on 
earth, and what did Me mean when Me said. "Follow me ami 
1 will make you fishers of men?" 

When we slop and seriously consider this question we must 
stand al! amazed at the magnitude of it ! And when we investi- 
gate Mis life and follow Mim through history and in spirit, how 
appalling it must be to most of us to think of actually following 
Mim. 

Equipped through Mis experience from birth — bavin" 
' grown in wisdom," having advanced "from • race to grace until 



Hepetema 22, 1926 TE KARLRE 289 

in received a fulness'" — set the example of obedience to gospel 
ordinance, communed with the Father during the forty days' fast 
and gained a signal victory over the powers of darkness. He 
entered vigorously upon His mission. John had been cast into 
prison probably during this tasting period, and no longer was 
Iris voice heard calling upon the people to repent, but we find 
Jesus look up the cry and in Galilee He taught the people "on 
the thresholds of (heir shabby little white houses, on the small 
shady open places of their cities or the shore of the lake, leaning 
against a beach boat, His feet on the stones, towards evening 
when the ::un sank red in the west, summoning me to rest."* 
1 Papini.) 

■'And Jesus, walking by the sea of Galilee, saw two brethren. 
Simon (-'lied Peter, and Andrew his brother, casting a net into 
■ I- : \n'\ were fishers. 
'"And He saith unto them. Follow me. and I will make you 
fishers of men."" Matthew 4:18-18.) 

Let us for a moment follow Him as lie went from thence 
i .. 1 1 ; Ihe people with the ureal est message ever given to man. 

Papini 's description of Mis wanderings is so striking that we 
•hall quote some of ii : "He was born on a journey. Still a 
baby at the breast, He was carried along the sun-parched road 

to Egypt : from Kgypl He <•-•■ le back to the waters and greenness 
of CiH'e. Prom Nazareth He often went to Jerusalem for the 
Passover. The voice of John called Him to the Jordan : an inner 
voice drove Him ou1 into the desert . . . Mos1 often we find Him 
in Ualilee, in Capernaum, Chora/in. in Cana, in Magdala, in 
Tiberias, but often lie crosses Samaria to s ; i down near the well 
of Schar. We find Him From time to time in the Tetrarchy of 
Philip al Bethsaida, at Oadara, at Cacsarca, also at Gerasa in 
itie Parea of Herod Antipas In Judah He often stops at 
Bethany, a few miles away from Jerusalem, or al Jericho, but lie 
rlid not shrink from journeying outside the limits of the old 
kingdom and from going down among the Oentiles. We find 
Him in Phocnica, in ilw region of Tyre and Sidon, and in Syria 
if the transfiguration took place on the summit of Mount Hermon 
"lie is the traveller without rest, the wanderer with no 
home, Ihe wayl rer for love's sake, the voluntary exile in lli^ 
own eountn . ll< says Himself that lie hns not a stone on which 



ih KAKKRE I lepetema 22, 1926 

to lay His head, and it is true thai He has do bed where he may 
lie- down at night, hor room thai He can call His own. His 
reaJ heme is the road which takes Him along with His friends 

in search of new friends. His bed is the furrow of the field. 

the bench of a boat, I he shadow of an olive tree. n (Pages 75-76.) 
Speaking of the response of the "first four" Simon or 
Peter. Andrew his brother, and .James and John, sons of Xebedee, 
fishermen all, Papinj says: 

•"For Him they left their faithful boats which they had put 
into the water so many times, and so many times lied to the 
whatf; they left the old fish nets which had drawn from the 
water thousands of fish; they left their father, their family, their 
home. They left all thai to follow ihis man who did not promise 
money or lands and spoke onlj of love, of poverty and perfec- 
tion. " 

.Mid then Papini asks a question pertinent to us and our 
day: 

'"Who among us to-day. among ail those now living, would 
be capable of imitating those four poor men of Capernaum? If 
a Prophet should came and say lo die merchant, 'Leave your 
bank and your counter!' and to the professor, 'Come down from 
your chair and throw away your books;' and to the statesman. 
Give us you:- port-folio and your lies which are only nets for 
patching men; and to the workingman, 'Put away your tools for 
1 will give you other work!' and to the farmer, 'Stop in the 
middle of the furrow and leave your plough among the clods. 
L'cr . promise you a more wonderful harvesl ;' and to the factory 
hand. 'Stop your machine and come with me, for spirit is more 
pie^- ions than metal ; ' and 10 the rich. 'Give away all your good i 
for you will acquire with me an inestimable treasure;' . . . 
If a prophet should speak thus to us, men of the present day, 
how many would follow him with the simple-hearted spontaneity 
of those fishermen of old ! " 

"Follow me and I will make you fishers of men" was not 
alone to those fishermen of old. but has come to this people 
individually and as a whole. I'pon our shoulders rests the great 
task of carrying the gospel to every nation, kindred, tongue and 
people. And while it may not be the privilege of every one 
t< go to the 1 atl ie front, to enter the trenches and go over ihe top 



Hepetema 22, 1926 TE karere 291 

at the zero hour, as there must be behind the men at the front 
an organisation of support and supply, so there must be with 
us intelligent and loving service to support and carry on th< 
tremendous work, the battle royal in which we are called t( 
engage. 

The example of Jesus, what then does it bid us do? 

How are we supporting the home institutions? What 
our loyalty to those whom (Jod has called to positions of re 
sponsibility 1 Are our homes in order? Are the poor takei 
c; re of.' Arc the widows and the fatherless made to feel tha' 
they have indeed brothers and friends among us? Are w« 
"seeking first the Kingdom" or is our service perfunctory, an( 
last rather than first ■ Would we respond to such a call as cam< 
1o the fishermen, who "straightway left their nets and followe( 
Him?" 

(iive voice to the joy that has come into your hearts througl 
having if even in a small way "followed Him," who "went abou 
doing good." Declare the testimonies given to you of His great 
liess, of His abundant love, of His great power, of His savin; 
grace. 

Where can there be found a more profitable partnership thai 
is possible io each of us— partnership with Godl 

Teachers are again cautioned to spend but little time ii 

introducing the subject, to avoid lecturing thereon, or let l 

recital of the facts preclude reaching the heart of the subjec 

What it bids us do. 

Read Tannage's " Jesus the Christ." pages 139-152; Farrar'i 

"Life of Christ,*' pages 75-95 and Papon's "Life of Christ,' 
prices !»!' 85. 

Second Sundav, October 10, 1926. 
UESSON 24. DAVID, AS YOI'TII AND fOUNG MAN 

Texl : I Sara.16-31 ; II Sam. I 20, 

Objective: To show one attains to leadership througl 
righteous living and fidelity to God's annointed 

Supplementary References: "Beacon Lights of History" 
Juvenile Fnstructor, June, 1922; Jossphui 

Three points tO Illlike 111 ihls lesson 

I. David, seventh and youngest son of Jesse fraud 



292 ft KAKhKh ik-piUMI 

90H of Ruth. 
II. Hi- great faith manifest. 
lie slays (Juliath. 
111. liis great fidelity to those in authority manifest 80 long 
as Saul was the Lord's annointed he honoured him in spite 
of Saul himself. 

Questions for Teachers. 
1. How can you apply the Goliath incidenl to inspire faith 
in the boys and girls of your classl 

'2. Make application of David's respect Tor Saul in teaching 
respect and reverence for our leaders to-day. 

Third Sunday, October 17, 1926 
Lesson 25. I);i\id as Warrior, Poet and King. 

Tex! : 1 1 Sam. 2-15; Psalms. 

Objective-: To show that David, though weak at times. 
through repentance and righl living was truly God's servant. 

Supplementary References: "Beacon Lights of Efistory;" 
"Juvenile Instructor, " June, 1922; Josephus.. 

Sugucsnons on Preparation and Presentation: David. Leader 
of Israel's armies; Jerusalem taken and seat of government 
moved there from Hebron: point out and emphasize the source 
i)t' David's great power as 2 military leader; at the height of his 
military glory lie sins against I'riah the Hittitc; make clear the 
punishment he suffered and his sincere repentance; he becomes 
king at the age of thirty ; concerning building of Temple ( I Sam.. 
Chap. 1) ; his trouble with Absalom- his lamentation; His songs 
Book of Psalms. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. (iive three reasons why you think David a greal man. 

2. What place does the Psalms hold in the poetry of the 
world to-day? Analyse the 23 Psalm. 

Fourth Sunday, October 24, 1926 
Lesson 26. Solomon, a Man of God. 

Text: II Sam. 12-2&; I Kings 1-6; Proverbs. 
Objective: To show how Solomon prospered while living in 
arccordance with h ; s knowledge. 



Hepetema 22, 1920 Tii karere 293 

Supplementary References: "'Beacon Lights of History;" 
•■.Juvenile Instructor," July, 1922. 

. ingestions on Preparation and Presentation: The setting 
of Solomon "s early life — Son of Bathsheba — Loved by the Lord 
— Promised the kingdom by his father — Appointed king between 
the age of 15 and 'JO- David's charge to him (I Kings 2:2-9.) 

Solomon as king: His first mistake — his marriage to a 
daugh. er of Pharaoh for political purposes. Consider in this 
connection the reasons why we should marry within the Church. 
Solomon's love of God as shown by his prayer (I Kings :J :G9. ) 
Mis great advancement because "God gave Solomon wisdom 
i.)\d understanding"- His temple — His proverbs. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Mow may one most surely acquire wisdom? Explain. 

2. Prom wlial source does one obtain greatest blessings and 
c of mind .' Why .' 

Fifth Sunday, October 31, 1926 
Review Questions. 

1. What grcal man immediately preceeded Joshua) 

2. Wha1 was the outstanding purpose in the life of Joshua ! 

3. Name two seemingly miraculous incidents in Joshua's 
experience. 

' Which o\' the following men of these latter days typify 
elements of Leadership found in Joshua. Joseph Smith, 
Brigham Young, Wilford Woodruff, Lorenzo Snow, 
Joseph P. smii h or ot hers, 

5. Mow can we all be ".Joshuas"' to OU1* present leaders' 

li. < )i whal nationality was Kuih I 

7. a. What Loyal action did Ruth perform that portrays 
her \ «'i > excellent character, 
b. Who make the Following statement, and to whom 

ii made "Entreat me aol to Leave thee and to return 
Prom Following thee; For wither Ihou goest, I will l:o. and 
where thou Lodgest I will Lodge; U13 people shall be mj 
people and th} God mj God ; where thou dies! will I die, 
and there will I be buried The I. "id do so to me, and 

more lllso, if aught bill death par! I bee and • 

What "i<ai Lesson are we taught bj this woman t 



294 i '!•- KAREKE riepetema 22, 1920 

9. W J Kit was Esther's nationality .' 

10. A Tier she had found favour in King Ahasuerus' sighl 
and was made Queen, what great thing did she do to 
save her people 1 

11. What mvat lesson should the life and acts of this remark 

able woman teach us.' 

12. When did Samuel commence to serve the Lordl 

13. How Long did lie continue in the ways which lie began 
in his youth . ; 

14. Why can we call Samuel one of the finesl characters of 

the Old Testainenl ! 

15. Which of the following lessons do we learn from the life 
of Samuel. 

a. To learn obedience in our early life, 
1). To put off learning obedience until later. 

c. To rule justly, 

d. To rule unjustly. 

e. To remainn in the strict path* of truth and righteous- 
ness. 

f. To depart therefrom from time to time? 

l(i. Who was the shepherd boy that became kin^ of Israel ! 
And by whom was he anuointed ? 

17. Whenever David was reminded of his sins by the Lord 
what was always his attitude? 

18. What lesson of importance can we apply in our own 
lives from the life of David \ 

If). In what way did David express his love of (4od? 
20. What greal lesson does the life of David teach us? 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 
"THE BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, October 3, 1926 

UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON. 

Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 288 

General Subjeel : The example of .lesus: what it bids us do. 
Special Topic: The Chosen Disciples. 
Adaptation for Intermediate Department. 



Hcpetema 22, 1926 TE KARt.RE 295 

Boys arul skirls of this age know that they follow the teacher 
or the officer who can say, '"Watch me and live as I live." The 
boy whose father says, "Come, we'll go to Church," goes more 
readily than the boy whose father says, "You go to Church." 
Christ always set the example in ilis teachings. He said, 
"Come, follow me." Tie invites us to be His partners in His 
Father':; Kingdom. 

When we follow His example, we in turn set a good example 
to those with whom we associate. Yvry often, one boy or girl 
who says. "Come, let's go to Sunday School," can persuade 
a whole group to go. So live that you are not ashamed to have 
your deeds known, *hen let your actions show to others that you 
are consistent and tlcy will he influenced for good by association 
with you. 

One man lesiiiif-d thai he joined the "Mormon" Church 
because the eons'steivt lives of his "Mormon" neighbours induced 
him t( study " Mormonism. " 

Aftei a heavy bnowstorm, the first man to break the path 
regularly may have hundreds of others follow in his " footsteps. ' ] 

List and discuss forceful illustrations of the power <■! 
example. 

Second Sunday, October 10, 1926 
LESSON 24. STORIES OF WAR-TIME. 

Text : Alma 52-62. 
Objective : To teach that, 

"If we do what'fl righl we have no need 1o fear. 

For the Lord our helper will ever h«' oear, 

ill the days of trial Ilis sain's He will cheer. 

And prosper the cause of Truth, " 
Supplementary References: <>\i\ Testament, Joshua, chap 
ter (i. 

gestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

( 1 ) The taking <>\ Mulek. Alma 52:15 10 

(2) Faith fulness of the people of Ammon. Alma 53 

( 3) Faith of Helaman 'a 2000 ^-ns. \in, 

( \ ) The capture of the < !itj of < tameni Aim. 

Manti taken without loss of life Alma 
6 Nephihah retaken bj the Nephilea Alma 62 [I 



295 TE karlkk Eiepelema 22, 1926 

Passages for pupils to memorise: Alma 53:18-21 ; 56.45-48; 
57-26; 58:10, 11; 60-36; 62:49151. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Mention the outstanding lessons to be learned from the 
story of llelaman "s sons. 

2. Why do you think it was impossible for failure to attend 
the armies of Moroni? 

Third Sunday, October 17, 1926. 

Lesson "Jo. Secret Orders- War and Wickedness. 

Text : llelaman, chapters 1-4. 

Objective: To teach thai "the Lord is merciful unto all 
who will in the sincerity of their hearts call upon His holy 
name. *' I [daman 3 :27.) 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: Ask all the 
class to read the text 

Special Assignments. 

1. Secrel combinations, llelaman 1:1-13. 

2. Zarahemla in danger, llelaman 1 :14 :}:5. 

3. Death of Kishhumcn. llelaman 2. 

4. Activities in the land northward, llelaman 3:1-12. 

5. The Church prospers, llelaman o :24-37. 

n\ The Xephites driven northward, llelaman, chapter 4. 
Passages to memorise: llelaman :• :2T '-'JO ; 4:21-25. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Discuss the ultimate end of secrel combinations, and by 
whose power they are Led. 

2. What external evidences of the Book of Mormon confirm 
the statements made in llelaman 3:1-121 

Fourth Sunday. October 24, 1926- 

Lesson 26. Two Faithful Missionaries. 

Text : llelaman, chapters 5-10. 

Objective^ To teach thai power from heaven is given to those 
who are engaged in the service of the Lord. 

Supplementary References: "Leaves from my .Journal/' by 
President Woodruff, chapters 3-6, 23-24; "Autobiography of 
Parley P. Pratt," chapter 27. 



Hepetema 22, 1920 TE karere 297 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: (1) The 
advice given by Alma to his sons Lehi and Xephi (Helaman 
5;5-l9), might be briefly reviewed by the teacher, calling upon 
pupils to recite verses 8 and 12. 

Special assignment: (1) God's power shown on behalf of 
Lehi and Nephi (Helaman 5:20-49); (2) Gadianton Robbers 
(Helaman 6-18-24); (3j Nephi's prayer (Helaman 7:1-9); 4 
Nephi calls the wicked to repentance (Helaman 7:10-29); (5) 
Have one of the pupils read Helaman 8, and bring a brief outline 
of n to the class; (6j '1 he fulfilment of Nephi 's words (Helaman 
9:1-20); (7) Nephi given added power (Helaman 10.) 

Passages to be memorised by all the class: Helaman 5:8, 9; 
CO-32, 45, 46. 

1. Compare conditions described in Helaman 7:4. 5 with 
conditions of the presenl day. 

2. Men: ion the several ways in which the power of the Lord 
v, s made manifest through Xephi and Lehi. 

Fiftii Sunday, Oc.obe:- 31, 1926 
Review Questions. 

1. How did the Lord show His power when Alma and 
Amulek were in prison 1 

2. Which story do yon like best in the missionary 
experience of Amnion and his brethren? Why1 

:;. Write in brief the story of Korihor. 

I. Write one passage yon have memorised. 



KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT 
Mrs* Sunday, October 3, I926« 

General Subjed : The example of Jesus: what it bids as do 

Special Topic: The Chosen Disciples. 

"Follow me and I wdl make you fishers of men." (Matt 
4:19; Luke 5:1 I L I 

Objective: In choosing helpers the Lord looks for faithful 
workers u h h w tiling hearts 
I. lie feels the need of assistance in M^ ministry. 

I. To accomplish His li ome must be trained 



298 I'K KAKKRt [iepctema z2 y 1926 

for future work 

a. They must Learn the principles of Life and sal- 
vation, 
h. They must be willing to serve their fellowmen. 

11. He calls lour faithful fishermen. 

1. He finds them on the shores of the Sea of Galilee. 
His ministry. 

2. They are busy, healthy, and prosperous. 
Faithful in their daily tasks. 

3. The nature of the call. 

a. Affirmative (Come follow me.) 
1). A suggestion thai they may become skilful in 
higher duties. 
\. They respond willingly. 

Forsake all to follow Christ. 
Application : V\ hen called by mother to perform a little task 
(wash our hands and tend baby), how will 1 respond? 

How often shall I do this little duty? — daily, or every other 
day or how \ 

Second Sunday, October 10, 1926 
LESSON 61. 

Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten." 

Topic: One Resuh of Keeping the Word of Wisdom. 

Objective: By keeping the Word of Wisdom we gain physical 
iw.d spiritual strength. 

Memory Gem: Same as for the second Sunday. 

Rest Exercise: Same as for last Sunday. 

We are all preparing for ihe earrving on of Ood's work. 
We all must be missionaries, all of us at home, some of us in the 
mission fields. If we are to he preachers of the Gospel we musl 
have strong, healthy bodies and keen minds. We must gain 
physical and spiritual growth. By keeping ihe Word of Wisdom 
we ere pleasing our Heavenly Father and He will bless us. 

Third Sunday, October 17, 1926 

Review the lessons by use of pictures and experiences from 
life, thai the children can comprehend, and that will impress 



Hepetema 22, 1920 TE kareke 299 

them with the necessity of keeping the Word of Wisdom, that 
they may have the desire to do so always. 

Fourth Sunday, October 24, 1926 

Topic: Joseph Smith's First Vision. 

Text: "History of ( hurch, Vol. 1, pages 2-6. 

References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten." 
Lesson G2. 

Time: When Joseph was 14 years old. 

Place : in the woods. 

Objective: All earnest efforts to prepare one's self for the 
work of the Lord is rewarded. 

Song,: '•.Joseph Smith's First Vision," page 41, 1). S. Songs. 

Gem: The same as for tin' previous Sunday. 

Suggestions: Joseph's religious education and training in 
the home helped to strengthen his desire for knowledge of 
righteousness and eternal life. 

Because of his training, when the churches began to dis- 
. Joseph turned to his heavenly Father for the help lie 
had promised to give to all who would seek. Joseph sought the 
Lord in solitude. He received more than he had expected. He 
was overcome by the evil trying to keep him in darkness. But 
his desire and faith were so strong die evil was overpowered and 
Joseph received an answer to his prayer. 

Lead die children to see how they too can seek for help if 
they live lor it and ask in faith. Think what the answer of 
Joseph's prayer means to us to-day. The answer of a Little 

er has given us the knowledge of how to obtain eternal 

life. 

Hes1 Lxernse: 

Let the children represent die trees in a grove Lei them 
choose i he kind of trees t !n-\ wish to be, some pines, some maples. 
etc, 'Twas a beautiful calm morning when Joseph went into the 
grove; the trees were softly swaying There were bees softlj 
buzzing and butterflies were in th«' air, Some of the children 
m,i\ represent the bees birds and butterflies. 

1 Ifth Sunday, October i. 1 1 ffi 
Toph : The Book of Mormon Revealed 

■ Mi itorj of the Church, n Vol I page* 6 I • 



300 IE KAKLkE liepetema 22, ly-^o 

References: "Sunday Adorning in the Kindergarten," 
Lesson 63. 

I line : Joseph was still a hoy. 

Place: in Ins bedroom and at Hill Cumorah. 

Objective: The greatest blessing will conic to us if we 
prepare to do the work of i be Lord. 

Song: "Ye Thank Thee, <> God, tor a Prophet," D. s. s. 
Songs. 

Suggesl inns : 

The deep impression the vision had made on Joseph, lie 
was thinking about il constantly. His preparation Tor His work 
was s*> important that an angel came to help prepare him. The 
angel bringing an imporlanl message. Joseph's heavenly 

message. Joseph's heavenly Father was pleased with the work 
he was doing or He would not have chosen hnn for so great a 
work. We, too, should prepare and be ready for His call, for 
any work He sees lit to give us. We can be ohedient to parents 
and those in authority as Joseph was. Help the children to see 
that they can remember the teachings of Jesus and try to follow 
in His footsteps. By so doing we are preparing for mission not 
only in ;his life, bu1 the life to come. 
Rest Exercise. 

We are preparing ourselves for the work of the Lord when 
we are ohedient to His laws and commandments. Joseph was 
obedient. Let the children suggesl what they do in their daily 
lives that test obedience. Dramatise their suggestions — obedience 
to mother when she calls obdience to lather when he asks for 
help from us — obedience to teacher when she asks us to fold 
our ha, ids. etc. 

. ' '. ■ ; . i : 

"Remember your prayers, little children. 
Both morning and evening each day. 

The Loi • i> e er ready to hear you ; 
II- love* ail His children to pray." 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 
[ZGRA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. 

\'a Toke Watene i vvhakamaori. 



iiepetema 22, 1920 IE KARERE 30 1 

AKORANGA MO OKETOPA. 

Te Wa te Taima i Rite ai. 

(Meridian of Time). 
Ko Ta Paora Main Mihana. 

1. Tana mahi i roto i te Ilalii. 

a. Kotahi tau i Anatioka. Mahi 11: 25-27. 

I). Tononga ki !<■ Iiari mea hei awhina i nga Hunga Tapu 

i Uuria. Mahi 11 : 27-30. 
e. Te liokinga mai ki Anatioka me Maka. Mahi 11: 

24-25. 
(!. Te karangatanga ki to oiahi mihana e te kaha te 

Wairua Tapu. Mahi L3 : 1-5. 

2. Te mihana tuatahi. 

a. Te wa me te t-oa kaore i te kotahi te yvhakaatu a nga 
kai-whakamarama, ki te korero a tetahi e 2 aga tau, 
c wha inai-ania. ki tetahi kotahi :ino raumati, engari 
kei te kotahi u L*atou whakaaro no waenganui i te 
44 me i<- 50 o tiga tau i muri mai i te whanautanga 

H' kaiaiti. 

1). Nga putake aunui. K<> te haereerenga te tuotu ■> 
Kaiperu i te rawhiti ki te hauauru. Te tutakitanga 
ki a Paraihu ki te poropiti tcka. Mahi u : 6-13. 
e. Te hokinga <> Maka ki Eiiruharama, Mahi L3: L3 
(1. Te tahuritanga atu Paora raua ko Panapa i nga 

Eiurai ki nga tauiw i. Mahi L3 : 16 
e. Te peinga atu i Ikoniuma. Main II: 1-7. 
I Te whakaoranga <> t» tangata kopa. .Mahi 14: 8 l: 1 
n Te akinga Paora hi te kohatu i Raihitara. Mahi 

1 I : ID. 

h. Te u hakatahuritanga ■ » Tiiuoti, Mahi hi : 1. 
i. Te hokinga ki Anatioka. Mahi l 1 2 
.'). Ta Paora mihana tuarua. 

a, Te whiriwhiringa o 1 lira hei hoa inona, mo te 1 uranga 

Panapa Mahi l "• 36 » I 
l». Te w hiriw hiringa hoki Ti 1 1 Mahi Ifi 1-2 

re Pakeha l European 1 1 uatahi i iriiria Mahi 16 

11 1.. 
d. Te peinga ki wi n VI 16: 16-16 



M' 2 VE KAkfcRE tiepetema 22, 19^0 

c Te hopukanga, te whiunga, tue te tukunga Paora 

raua ko Bira. 
t. Te whakatunga te liahi i Koriniti. Mahi 1m : L-18. 
g. Te hokinga ano ki Anatioka. Mahi L8: L8-22, 
4. Ta Paora mihana tuatoru a whakamutunga hoki ki Epeha. 

Mahi 19: 1-11. 
a. Nga mahinga Qierekara. .Mahi 1!»: Ll-21, 
1). 'IV hokinga ano ki Hiruharama. Mahi 20: 22-38; 

2J : U-4U. 
c I niua i te liaringa ki niua i te nohoanga whawa Qui 

onga llurai (Sanhedrin). Mahi 23: Ll-27 j 23 : 1-."). 

Ka whakaaii 1c Aiiki me whakaatu ano a Paora ki 

Roma. Mahi 23: i L-20; 27, 23-24. 
(1. I muri i 011a whakawakanga tuaha Qie tona h6re- 

herenga mo nga tan e 2 ka haria hereheretia alu ia 

ki Roma. 
c. Ka kaumhau ia ki Roma mo nga lau e 2. Mahi 28: 

14-31, i muri ka tukua. 

f, Tana whakaaturanga nui i te mea ka mohio ia kua 
tata tona mutunga. II Timoti 4: 6-8. 

g. 1 muri i nga tau e wha pea ka I. aria hereheretia ano 
ia ki Roma, ki tc wahi i poutoa ai tona mahunga e 
Nero i te tan 65 A.I), i muri mai te whanantanua 
o te Karaiti. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 
NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

Ko te Whakakotahitanga (C:-operation) i waenganui i te 

Kainga me te Kura. 
I. He aha i tika ai kia whai whakakotahitanga. 

1. Ta te kiira he whakanui, he whakatupu hoki i tc 
akoranga, i whakawhiuhia ai te tamaiti tc kotiro 
ranei i roto i tc kainga. 

2. Me putake rite tonn la 1c kura me tc kainga, ki tc 
whakaako i tc tamaiti a kotiro ranei, 

3. Ko tc niohiotanga ki tc mahi a tetahi ki ta tetahi 
lici whakatupu i tc rangimarie c matenui ai. ki tc 
ako i tc tamaiti a kotiro ranei i roto i tc huarahi e 
neke raw a atn ai tc matauranga. 



Hepetema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 303 

Ji. Me pehea te whakakotahi me te kura. 

1. Me haere nga Diatua ki te torotoro i nga kura kia 
taunga ai ratou ki nga whakahaere me nga karaihe, 
e tutaki ai lioki ki nga kai-whakaako. 

2. Me tono atu nga kai-whakaako ki to kainga, ara 
meheniea tera tetalii tikanga raruraru i waenganui 
o te tamaiti kura kotiro ranei me kai-whakaako. (Ka 
whakaaro nui ke te kai-whakaako ki te tamaiti kura 
kotiro ranei i niuri i tona taenga ki te kainga, a 
taenga ranei o nga niatua ki te kura. 

3. Kaua nga niatua e korero wliakakinokino. whakahe, 
1110 te kura, mo nga kai-whakaako rami i mua nga 
tamariki kura, kei riro ma tenei take «• whakauaua 
te whakakotahi. 

4. Me wbakarite e aga biatua he tikanga awhina ki nga 
kai-whakaako me te kura, ma ratou lioki e whaka-u 
ki roto i te tamaiti, i te kotiro tenei whakaaro. 

5. Ki te kore tetalii tamaiti e hari e koakoa i te kura. 
me liaere te matua ki te kai-whakaako i roto i te 
wairua whakahoa, me te taliuri ki te awhina i a ia 
kia mohio ki te tamaiti, ki nga ahuatanga lioki c 
taea ai te whakakore tenei raruraru. 

(5. Me mohio nga matua ki nga ture te kura me nga 
putake lioki i mahia ai ana una. .Ma konei ka 
maraiiia ai ta ratou wiiakamarama i nga ture ki te 
tamaiti a kotiro ranei. 

7. Ma runga i te huihui 'alii me te hacre ki i»' huihuinga 
o te " I\o|)u nga Matua me nga Kai whakaako" e 
vvhakatupu ake te wairua <> te whakakotahitanga, e 
in tatatata ai hoki te kainga mc te kura. 

KI TE ETITA. 
HE MATENGA. 

Ki Te Karerc, tena koutou i tena walii, ma tf Aiua koutou 
katoa e tiaki, < whakakaha i nga wa katoa Kaati i< tnihi He 
tnhi atu tenei uaku ki ;i koe kia panuitia atu »• koe te mat. 
<» ia mat 011 pepi kotiro i te 30 «• nga ra Akuhata K<> te Ingoa 



304 TE KARERE Hepetema 23, 1920 

taua pepi ko Tepara Christina Heti, e 0110 wiki te kaumatua. 
Hi' mil hoki te maniaetanga i pa mai ki te whaea rue te matua 
taua pepi, ara ki nga whanaunga katoa <> taua 1 >i - 1 > i . Xn te 
Atua i homai, Nana i tango atu, whakahonoretia Tona ingoa. 
Heoi ra, ma to tatou Atua i tc Kami tatou katoa e tiaki, 
e whakakalia i nga vva katoa, na to koutou tnokai, 

POUAKA PAKI. 

HE MATENGA. 

i\i Te Karere, tena koe, panuitia atu c koe te matcnga 
ta tnatou tamaiti, "mokopuna, Ngakaahupohere P. Keena. I 
mate ia i tc 30 o nga ra Hurae nei tan L926. k<> te kaumatua 

6 taua tamaiti e Pima tan me tc hawhe tona kaumatua. Ko 
tona inatiia ko Karaka P. Keena koia te tumuaki te peka 
Weraroa, koia hoki te kai-riwhi tona matua Pairama Keena. 
Tokorua raua kua mate anake, ko te whaea me nga tuakana, 
tuahine, taua tamaiti kei te ora, me matou hoki me nga 
tupuna. He nui to matou pouri me te aroha mo tona wehenga 
atu i a matou. Engari e kore c taea te pevvhea i te mea koia 
tera te ahuatanga te ao katoa. A/a ko te taonga nui tera 
kei te ao katoa. ehara taua taonga i te mea no te tang: ta 
kotahi, no nga tangata katoa. \';i reira, e tatou e nga whana- 
unga tenei tamaiti. me a.iga atu tatou ngakau ki nga kupu 
roto i nga karaipiture. E ki ana te Kai Kauwhau i te 3 
nga upoko te 1 nga rarangi, "Kua takoto te taima mo nga 
mea katoa. me te vva ano mo nga mcatanga katoa i raro i te 
i-aiiiii." Kei te 4 nga rarangi. "lie \va e tangi ai, he x -\a e 
kata ai, he \va e aue ai, he vva e kanikani ai." No reira no 
tatou euei taonga, no te hunga kei te ora ano. ara te tangi, 
te aue. te kata, te kanikani. Engari te lino kupu mana tatou 
ngakau e peehi ko te kupu te Kai Whakaora i ki atu pa ki 
nga akonga, "Tukua mai nga taiftariki nonohi kia haere mai 
ki ahau. kaua latou e araia atu. No nga penei hoki te pangati- 
patanga te pangi." Na reira. e hoa ma, kei te ora ta tatou 
tamaiti. mokopuna, kei te waahi kua rite mai i te Matua. engari 
te hanga atu i a tatou kia tae atu ai tatou ki reira. Kaati, hei 
konei mutu r.i. na to koutou teina i roto i te Rongopai, 

\A TE POTT!' PENEKUPA. 



l.epetema 22, 1920 iE KARKRL 305 

Ko te Marae le Hui la.i 
K te H u 1 1 <i : 1 Tapu we nga hoa aroha, tenei ahau te tuku atu uei 
1 te ripoata 1 to maua taeuga atu ko E>rata Paapiti, Tumuaki Waikato. 
is t) uga ra Hurae uei, l<i te pa Princess Puea i Ngaruawahia takiwa 
Waikato, ki te wahi ka tu uei to tatou Hui Tau a tenei tau e haere 
niai uei \\)-7. J tae maua ki te titiro i uga mea katoa o taua pa, ki uga 
mea e 11 a 1 ana uio to tatou inn Tau. E ma uga haora o wnakaatu haere 
ana a friucess rnea 1 a maua ki uga mea katoa tana pa. Ko te mea 
tuaiani ku tu luarac ara ko Le paaka. He tino ataahua te marae, <• 
tupu ana uga putiputi, pouga, nikan, harakeke, Die era atu Qiea whaka- 
paipai katoa. J mini iho ka haria maua ki roto i te hooro. Ka kite 
maua i te ataahua o roto o tena hooro. He ''electric light" katoa 
kei roto. Kei vvaeugauui o te "floor'' he "fountain" e rere ana nga 
wai i roto. Ko te rnaha o nga tangata e uru ana i te kainga kotahi i 
roto i tenei hooro e 500. 1 muri iho ka haria maua ki te ''cooking place 
(by steam)." K rile katoa ana nga mea mo te rnahi tunu kai. lo 
meneti e tuiiu ana kua maoa nga kai. I muri ka haria maua kia kite 
a a tetahi vvhare uui ano he moenga mo nga tangata. K 300 aga 
Langata e uru ki roto. I muri i tena ka haria maua ki nga wai kai 
m o le hui. Ko tenei wai e haere mai ana i roto i te pipe no te maung:i 
e .'. n.aero te haerenga mai o tenei wai. I muri ka haria maua kia kite 

i te wahi ka hanga e ia he baker Bhop. LOO rohi e maoa i te tununga 
kotahi. Ko nga Footpath all concrete. I ki mai a Princess Pnea ki 

a maua kia £300 pauna ka Oti katoa nga mea mo tana pa. 1 te mutang:i 
i w hakaahuat ia te pa e maua, tailioa ka kite koutou i roto i Te Kareie. 

\o reirj e te Hunga Tapu, "everything up to the minute.'' No reira 

me lae a tinana mai koutOU kia kite i enei mea katoa a to tatOU Hui 

Tan c heke iho uei IDl'7. I tino aroha mai a Princeai Pnea ki :i maua. 
me tana mihi mai hoki mo to maua taeuga atu ki tona kainga. Heoi, 
kia ora katoa t< Hunga Tapu, na to koutou teina, tungane i roto i te 
Kongo Pai, 

KIO 1 A KA Will II 
o 

He Ripoata no te Mania 

HE POROPOROAKI 

Ki To K.ii'ir. c liofl tona !<<»<• otira kotttou katoa «• noho 
m;ii na i tena waahi, Ueoi te mihi, mahau e panui atu i^i 
Hunga Tapu katoa <• noho marara ana i runga " nga m out ere 
in i ara <> Aotearoa me te Waipounamu, i i« 
Akuhata mi, i te 6.25 p.m ka tu t<> mat an Miutara, n I 
Taurima i whakahaere lie Miutara poroporoaW ki .1 R II 



306 It kakkkk Hepctema 22, 1926 

Anderson, Timuaki no te Pariha te Mahiai 

Poroporoaki tnatahi na Hanitahuri Teira, me tana aroha, 
he tautau wati, hei aroha ki a ia ma nga tangata o te Mahanga. 
Ruka Rarere: lie nui te aroha ki tenei tangata mo ana oiahi 
pai. Whakahe Mateiiga: he nui ana korero aroha 1110 tenei 
tangata, me te tnkn kawhe (cuffs) hei aroha mana, ine nga 
peepi kua manaakitia. Ko etahi enei nga mea i tu ki te 
poroporoaki, ara ko Watene Kara, Henare Taurima, Rina 
Pakimana, Ka Mateiiga, Tihema Taurima. Waiata whakaniutu 
i a Elder Richard Marsh, "God Be With You Till We Med 
Again. ' ' 

Heoi, e te Hunga Tapu, lie nui te aroha mo tenei kaumatua 
kua wehe atu i a matou. Kotahi te tangata me tana tamaiti 
i iriiritia e tenei kaumatua i mua atu i tona wehenga atu i a 
matau, otira he liuhua nga tangata i puta ki vvaho o te Hahi, 
na tona kaha ka hoki mai ano aua tangata. Heoi kia ora 
koutou katoa. E te Hunga Tapu, kia kaha tatau ki te ripoata 
i o tatau aitua, kia mohio ai 011a uri ia wahi ia wahi. Xo 
reira kei te kaha nga Hunga Tapu te Mahia nei ki te 
whakarite i o ratou karangatanga i raro i te mana o Perea 
Reiipeae Timuaki te Peka o te Mahia nei. 

TE MATENGA PIRIPI. 

Panuitia atu ki nga uri o tenei tamaiti, ara kei roto o 
Turanga, kei roto hoki Wairarapa, i te 24 nga ra Akuhata 
nei, i te 3.30 p. in. ka mate a Piripi Matenga. 1 mate ia i 
I'unga i tona mate taumaha ara e kingea ana lie taipo piwa. 
Tino kaha te mate tenei tamaiti, ko 011a tau 15, e 0110 Qga 
wild e takoto ana ia i tona mate, ka hemo. He nui te aroha 
mona. Kua riro ia kei te po, kua ngaro ia i ona haereerenga. 
Koia te tuawha tona whamere kua riro kei te po, me tona 
papa, ara a Repa Matenga. He Hunga Tapu katoa tenei 
whamere. E toru o tona whamere kei te ora, me tona kui, 
ara a Matire Kara. Otira he liuhua nga aitua te Mahia nei, 
ara a Maata Kiira, Hape Tangiora, Henare Tikitini, kotahi o 
Turanga ko Nepia Bartlett, he papa tenei tangata ki a Piripi 
(ara uncle). E hoa ma, kei te kaha te whiu kei te haere 
inaianei, ka nui te aitua kei runga i te mata o te whenua. 

Heoi ra kia kaha e te Hunga Tapu, kia kaha ki te whaka- 



Hepetema 22, 1926 



TE KARERE 



307 



rite i o koutou karangatanga, kia rite ai tera korero e ki ra, 
"Ki te aroha koutou ki a au, kia mau ki aku ture." Koia 
lit'i ana ture, 111 e whakarite koutou karangatanga. Kia kaha 
hold ki te inoi, tena, tena tatau, ki te tono i nga manaaki- 
tanga kua rite mai 1110 tatau. Kua puta hoki te korero a te 
Tiniuaki a te Mihana ara a President Jenkins kua tae tatau ki 
te ahiahitanga o te Hatarei. No reira kia kaha tatau. Tenei 
hold matau kei te inoi mo tatau katoa kia manaakitia. Heoi 
ra kia ova koutou katoa, ria to koutou teina, te tuakana o 
Piripi. 

NA WHAKAIIE MATENGA. 



KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. 





Elder Wayne T. Wiser 



Elder Alviti A. Davis 



ELEER WAYNE T WISER o Levkton, Utah: I tae 
mai a Erata Waiha i te 280 nga ra Pepuere, 1924, a whakr- 
riter ana ki te takiwa o Ha.ki Pei. 1 te 20 o nga ra Aperira, 
192;, ka whakaritea koia hei timuaki mo tana takiwa. 1 te 2X 
nga ra o tiune, 1925, ka nukuhia a W aiha ki te takiwa 
Akarana, a i te 140 nga ra o Oketopa, [925, ka whakaritea 
hei timuaki mo rcira. Lukua honoretia atu i te 17 o nga ra 
Akuhata, 192 \ 

ELDER ALV1N A. DAVIS Weston, Idaho: I tae mai a 
Erata Rev\etj i te 240 nga ra Hanuere, 1924, a ka whaka- 



308 TE KAR ERE Hepetema 22, 1926 

ritea ki te takiwa o Waikato. Ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa o 
Poneke i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1925, a i te I o nga ra o 
Oketopa, 1925, ka nukuhia ano ki te Kareti mo nga mahi rau- 
mati, whakahokia ano ki Poneke i te 15 o Pepuere, 1926, a i 
te 17 o nga ra o Akuhata, 192b, ka tukua honoretia atu. 



He Whakaaturanga mo te Whare o lharaira 

Ki Te ivarere: Tena ra koe e ic inanu iangi pai. Mau e panui atu 
enei korero tawhito rawa o o tatou tupuna, ara re whakaaturanga mo 
te Morehu o te Whare o lharaira,, te iwi Maori. Kaati. 

Tuatahi. — Kei a KewKikuha te 19 nga upoko me te 28 o nga 
raraugi e whakamarama ana mo te Tangihaehae. 

Tuaraa. Kei a Tiuterbnoixix, te 18 o nga upoko, te 10 me te 11 o 
nga rarangi, e vvhakamarama ana mo le main Tohunga me te mahi 
Makuoi. 

Tualoru. Kei a Eewitikuha, te 19 o nga upoko, te 28 o nga rarangi 
e whakamarama ana" mo te mahi Moko. 

Tuawha. Kei a Kenehi ie 28 o nga upoko, te 11 o nga rarangi; 
me te 33 o nga upoko", te 4 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te 
Tangi-a-ihu. 

Tuarima. Kei nga Waiata te 14 o nga upoko, te 40 o nga rarangi 
e whakamarama ana mo te Kai Taiigata. 

Tuaono. Kei a Tiineronomi te 14 o nga upoko, te 1 o nga rarangi 
e whakamarama ana mo te Tauaa ara Tapani i nga Makawe. 

Tuawhitu. Kei nga Tauanga te 20 o nga upoko, te 29 o nga 
rarangi e whakamarama ana 1.10 te Tangi Tupapaku. 

Kati. Na enei whakaaturanga ka tino mohio tatou ko te iwi Maori 
he tino morehu no te Whare o lharaira. Rite tonu nga ahuatanga o 
naianei ki o mua. 

No reira tena koutou katoa e te Morehu o te Whare o lharaira ara 
te iwi Maori e noho nei i tenei wahi o te niaara waina nui o to tatou 
Matua i te rangi. Kati, e h<,a ma, kia kaha tatou ki te pupuri i nga 
tare me te whakatuiuki pai i o tatou karangatanga tapu. 

E kii ana tetahi whakatauki Maori, "E moe ana nga mata hi tuna, 
e ara ana nga mata hi taua/ ' ara e moe ana te hunga whakaarokore, 
e ara ana te hunga whai whakaaro. Ileoi, kia tau iho nga manaakitanga 
ki a tatou katoa, na to koutou tuakana, teina, 

NA REHERI D. PAAPITI. 



-0- 



"Kei mamingatia koutou e te tangata e mea ana ki te 
whakaiti i a ia, ki te karakia ki nga anahera, e pokanoa ana 
ki nga mea kahore nei ia i kite, e whakapehapeha noa ana, 
he mea na tona ngakau kikokiko." Korohe 2:l8. 



^KSaR&»S!^KS^!!^£^S^§^S^S^SM§l 



I 



UTDA 

he "Karcre" ma too 
hoa o waho. 



"UIA tiaho to koutou marama ki te 

aroaro o nga tangata, kia kite ai 

ratou i a koutou hanga pai, kia whaka- 

kororia ai i to koutou Matua i te rangi." 



"HE AO TE RANCI KA UHIA, 

HE HURUHURU TE MANU KA RERE 



^m^^^w^^^^^w^w^w^s^^^s^M 



6 



I 



I 



TE kARERE i lepeiema 22, 1926 



KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HO.CONCA 



Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- 

konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. 
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 

New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather Il-O 

Book of Mormon, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6 

" " " , Half Leather 9-0 

•' " " , Leather 10-0 & 15-0 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-0 

" , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 
MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 

" " , Leather 3-6 

ICo Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 

" " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in 1 11-0 

" " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 

, Leather 15-0 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-0 

" " " " ", Leather 15-0 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 1-0 
SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0 

What Jesus Taught 5-0 

Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 36 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6 

SONC BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 

" " " .Leather 6 6 

Deseret Song Books, Cloth 30 

" " " , Leather 6-0 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-° 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS 

Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3 

Vitality of Mormonism 4-6 

Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 0-0 

Restoration of the Gospel, Widtsoe 4 ° 

Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6 

Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 46 

Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 

Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9 

Bible Ready Reference 2-0 
Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 6-0 

KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A. C KORONGATA. HASTINGS, H. B. 



IfKam* 



Wahanga XX Oketopa 27, 1926 



1 



Nam a X 




Ko te Hooro Nui kei Ngaruawahia 

"Taku hahi kei tt haere mai, ehara i te hahi e utu 
ki te moni, engari he taonga tarewa." 

Tawhio 



1 



"CS KflRSRS" 



n 



KI TE ETITA 



WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 

+ + t 
+ + + 

Wharangi. 



He Matenga 


330 


He Matenga 


32/ 


He Mihi Aroha ki a Te Puea Herangi 


326 


He Ripoata Hui Atawhai 


330 


He Ripoata na Rawiri Kamau 




Hui Pariha i Korongata 


328 


He Matenga 


329 


Te Poari o te Kura 


329 


Ko te Matenga o Ta Timi Kara 


306 



KO NCA RONCO KORERO 

Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona $$z 

KO NOA TUHINGA MAI 

Te Urimi me te Tumime 333 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 333 

MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Concert Recitation 310 

Intermediate Department 315 

Korero a Ngakau 310 

Kindergarten Department 318 

Maori Theological _ 310 

Pakeha Theological 313 

Postlude 309 

Prelude 309 

Sacrament Gem 309 




aron> 



WAHANCA 20 WENERES, OKETOPA 27, 1926. NAMAIO 

fllaori agricultural College Hastings. H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, 

Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. 

Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings. 

Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-). 

KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. 

file matua utu mo tou pepa fca vPhhvhi ai. 

/. H. Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana 
Mariona K. Ewatana, Etita. Tiata Witehrra, Etita Boa Awhina. 

Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha 

Ko nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). 



Wiremu A. Koura 



Rap ita Tanapu 



MAHI KURA HAPATI. 

Prelude. 



Adagio Itgido. 



Eru T. Kupa 



Arr. After Schumann. 
by Edw. P. Kimball. 



pp 



SACRAMENT GBM FOR NOVEMBER, 1926 

"ilis precious blood tie freely spilt, 

His life lie freely gave ; 
A sinless sacrifice for guilt, 

A dying world to save. " 
Postlude. 

PPP lut. 



310 TE KARERE Oketopa 27, iy26 



CONCERT RECITATION FOR NOVEMBER, 1926. 

(James, 5th Chapter, 14th and 15th Verses). 
Is any sick among you? Let him call for the elders of the 
church ; and let them pray over him, annointing him with oil 
in the name of the Lord ; and the prayer of faith shall save the 
sick, and the Lord shall raise him up." 



KORERO A NuAKAl iYlO NOhi\U, 1926. 

Hemi 5: 14-15. 
"Ki te turorotia tetahi i roto i a koutou, me karanga e ia 
nga kaumatua te hahi ; a ma ratou e inoi ki runga ki a ia, 
me te whakawahi ano i a ia ki te hinu i runga i te ingoa o te 
Ariki : A e ora te turoro i te inoi whakapono, ma te Ariki a no 
ia e whakaara ake." 

MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



Ratapu tuataiii, Noerna 7, 1926. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. 

Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori, 
Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- 
turia nei e lhu hei mahi ma tatou. 

Whakaoranga i nga Turoro. 
"A kawea ana e ratou ki a ia nga tangata mate katoa e 
ngaua ana e te tini o nga mate, nga mamae, me te hunga e 
nohoia ana e te rewera, me te hunga haurangi, me nga para- 
rut iki ; a whakaorangia ake ratou e ia." 

E rua nga ahua mahi i mahia e lhu i runga i te whenua, 
a ko Ia anake te tangata i te tino rite mo aua mahi o era atu 
tangata katoa. Tuatahi ko la te Kai Whakaako nui r.ga kai 
ako katoa. Tuarua ko Ia te Kai Whakaora nga turoro. I 
mohiotia la puta noa atu i Huria mo enei mea e rua. No roto 
i enei mea e rua ka tupu ake te kino i nga kai-whakahaere 
tikanga nga Hurai i Hiruharama, me nga Karaipi me nga 
Parihi. Na roto i to ratou kino ki a Ia, me to ratou puhaehae- 
tanga, ka whakamatea Ia. 



Qkeiopa 27, 1920 r.E IvARlke 311 

Ko tenei akoranga e pa ana ki nga whakaoranga i nga 
turoro, a me Ana tauira ki a tatou i roto i enei tu mahi. 

Kua akongia tatou e Ana tauira kia whai whakapono hei 
uiea e vvhakaoratia ai e la nga ahua mate katoa me nga 
mauitiinga te ngakau me te tinana. Kua homaitia e la Tona 
kaha ki nga tangata enei ra ma roto i te Tohungatanga. Kei 
a ratou te tikanga mo te whakaora i nga turoro ma runga i te 
inoi te whakapono. Te tikanga hoki kua whakatakotoria 
1110 te whakawalii ki te hinu e nga kaumatua o te Hahi. Ma 
tatou hoki te tikanga ki te karanga i nga kaumatua kia haere 
mai ki te vvhakawahi i a tatou ahakoa he aha te mate, a me te 
whakapono ki taua tikanga. E pa ana tenei ki nga taitamariki 
me nga kaumatua. Me ako hoki nga tamariki nonohi ki te 
whakaiuahi i to ratou whakapono me te tono ano i nga kau- 
niatua ki te haere mai ki te whakawahi i a ratou. Ma tenei 
whakapono anake ka taea eta hi ahua mate ahakoa kahore e 
v> hakav. ahia, a meite kahore tenei whakapono, hore he painga 
te whakawahi ahakoa he aha te ahua te mate. I te mea he 
whakapono to tatou i roto i te Tohungatanga kahore he take 
o tatou e whakakahore ai i te matauranga kua oti nei te homai 
e te Atua ki te tangata hei v\ hakakahore me te whakaora hoki i 
nga mate. E tika ana tatou me kaua e mahi i nga mahi pohehe 
e ngoikore ai o tatou tinana, a kaua ano hoki tatou e whaka- 
kahore i ta te takuta i ko.rero ai ki a tatou i nga mate unit a 
penei i te ' ' Taipo-Piwa. ' ' 

Tet alii mea ano i meatia tatou kia mahi ki nga mea e 
pupuri ana i te Tohungatanga, he l-apu i nga homaitanga- 
whakaora-turoro, ma roto ratou tiaki i tatou ngakau me 
nga ringaringa kia aiaa, a me te oha alu i a tatou inoi me era 
at ti mahi. A me takatu hoki tatou kia pena ka karangatia ki 
te haere kia whakawahi nga turoro, ahakoa ko tehea taima 
te ra o te po ranei. 

Ratapu tuarua, Noema 14, 1920. 
AKORANGA 31. 

Ko te Rerenga Paora ki Roma. Ka miitu mi 

A. I Merita -Malta) e ono tekau tnaero ki te taha whaka-te- 



312 TE karere Qketopa 27, 1926 

tonga o Hihiri. 

1. Te atawhai o nga tangata taua wahi. Mahi 28 : 1-2. 

2. Ko te merekara o Paora i te talia te ahi. Mahi 28 : 3-6. 
Tirohia tahitia i a Ruka 13 : 1-5. Ko te whakapono te 
Hurai, ki te pa tetahi mate ki tetahi tangata ko tera 
te utu ona hara. Uiuia tenei. 

3. Ko te powhiritanga a Pupiriu, he rangatira te motu. 
Mahi 28 : 7-10. 

4. Ko te nieatanga etahi atu merekara. Mahi 28: 8-9. 
Na ko eriei iwi kaore i te Hahi o te Karaiti. 

B. Ko te tutukitanga o te haerenga o Paora. 

1. Ka rere ano a Paora. Mahi 28 : 11-14. 

2. Ko te powhiritanga Paora i Apiuwhorania (e wha 
tekau maero te matara atu i Roma). Mahi 28 : 15. 

3. Te unga ki Roma. 61 A.I). 

4. Ko te mahi a Paora i roto i nga Hurai Roma. Ko te 
maha nga Hurai i taua \va (61 A.D.) e 60,000. Mahi 
28 : 17-29. 

5. Ko te mahi a Paora i waenganui nga tauiwi Roma. 
Mahi 27 : 8-31. 

Ratapu tuatoru, Noema 21, 1926. 

me te 
Ratapu tuawha, Noema 28, 1926 

(T runga i te mea i tae tureiti mai nga akoranga mo enei 
wiki, na matou enei kaupapa i whakarite hei korerotanga 
ma koutou i roto i enei Ratapu e rua). Nga Etita. 
Ratapu tuatoru, Noema 21, 1926 

Kei te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 89. 

Kei a Raniera, te I o nga upoko. 

Ratapu tuawha, Noema 28, 1926 
Kei te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 119. 
Kei te Whakaatu Tere ano hoki, wharangi 139, ara nga 
karaipiture mo te whakatekau: Rewitikuha 27:30-34; Taua- 
nga l8:2L 26; Kenehi T4:t8-20; Hiperu 7:1, 2. 5; Tiuteronomi 
14:22-25, 22:28-29; Kenehi 28:22; Nehemia 13:10-12; Whaka- 
papa Tuarua 31:5, 6, 9, 10; Maraki 3:8, 10, II; Whakatauki 
3:ro; Matiu 23:23. 



OketOpa 27, I926 TE KARERE 313 





PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL 
"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" 

First Sunday, November 7, 1926. 
FAST DAY TOPIC. 

The Example of Jesus : What it Bids us Do. 
HEALING THE SICK. 

"And they brought unto Him ail sick people that were taken 
with divers diseases and torments, and those which were 
possessed with devils, and those which were lunatick, and those 
that had palsy; and he healed them." Matt. 4:24. 

There are two outstanding characteristics oi' the earthly 
ministry: He was the greatest of all teachers; He was also the 
greatest of healers. In both of these activities He established 
great reputation throughout all Palestine. These activities 
combined to arouse the hatred of the Jewish rulers at Jerusalem 
and of the scribes and Pharisees. It was this hatred and fear 
of His success that lead ultimately to His arrest, trial and 
crucifixion. 

This lesson, however, concerns only Jesus as a healer, and 
v. hat His example in this respect bids us do. 

It bids the child to cultivate implicit faith in the power of 
God to heal both physical and mental ailments. This power, 
having been conferred upon men in this age, is manifest through 
Ihe higher Priesthood, which has authority to heal the sick 
through the prayer of faith. To this end the ordinance of an- 
nointing with oi! by the elders of the Church has been established. 
All members of the Church are admonished to invoke this 
ordinance, together with their own faith, as a menus of recovery 
from ;ill forms of illness. This much applies to both children 
and adults of all Sunday School ages. Young children should 
be taught to exercise ihis faith and to ask their parents to call 
in tli<- elders of the Church in case of need. This faith is in 
itself, in some measure, preventive of some sorts of mental 
affliction, and always a help towards recovery from any sort of 
illness. The admonition io have faith in God's power to lnal 

•hoiild not. however, be regarded as release from the religious 



TE K-ARERE Oketopa >7, 1926 



duty to exercise wisdom and knowledge both in the prevention 
and the treatment of sickness and injuries through accident. 
Intelligence is also a God-given power, thankfulness for which 
should be manifest in its exercise toward the accomplishment of 
worthy ends. This also applies alike to children and to adults. 
In addition, those who hold the higher Priesthood have the 
obligation to seek the gift of healing and to so live as to be 
worthy of it ; also to be willing always, as Jesus was, to respond 
10 calls to relieve the suffering from their afflictions. 

Second Sunday, November 14, 1926 

Lesson 27. The Division of the Kingdom. 

Text : I Kings, chapter 13. 

Objective: To show thai rulers can only rule successfully 
through the practice of religious truths and principles. 

Supplementary References: [I Beacon Lights of History 
{Lord) 239. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: Solomon had 
been a great and wonderful ruler. His son Rehoboam succeeded 
him. The people visited him asking relief from taxation. He 
consul! ed his older counsellors who advised him to grant relief. 
His younger counsellors advised against it. He followed the 
latter advice: The Division of the Kingdom followed. Develop 
through a study of the history of nations how such results always 
follow Also take up the loss of the ten tribes which had its 
beginning in this separation. 

Questions for Teachers. 

L (Jive at least three examples of divisions in a nation 
that have been brought about by the same factors that caused 
the revolt in the kingdom of Rehoboam. 

2. Give an example of what can be accomplished in a nation 
through the application of gospel principles. 

Third Sunday, November 21. I92t> 

Lesson 28. Elijah. 

Text: 1 Kings, chapters 7-22; 11 Kings, chapters 1-9. 
Objective: To show that true service never fails of reward. 
Supplementary References: 11 Beacon Lights of History 



Oketopa 2/, 1926 TK K.ARERE 315 

(Lord) 239. "... ... . . 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: After the 
Division of the Kingdom we find Israel in need of divine guid- 
ance. The appearance of Elijah one of the most unique 
characters in Jewish history. Large of stature with features 
fierce and stern : His great work : Miracles ; Teaching under 
difficulties. Point out how Ahab's dynasty was overthrown 
through failure to heed the warnings of Elijah. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. In your opinion what response would be given a man 
of Elijah's type to-day who came bearing a message of repentance 
with the force he did in his day ? 

2. Is there need for such a man in the world to-day? Give 
your reason for your answer whether "Yes" or "No." 

Fourth Sunday, November 28, 1926 
Lesson 29. Elisha. 

Te::t: 1 Kings 19; II Kings 2-13. 

Objective: To show that (Jod always gives strength to a man 
engaged in His service. 

Suggestions on Preparataion and Presentation: Elisha a 
second prophet to Israel. A gentle and humble man. Compare 
with Elijah. The mantle of Elijah fell upon Elisha.. Explain 
fully and bring out the power of the Priesthood. After receiving 
the authority to act through Elijah point out the force of his 
work through his: Miracles; Teachings. In conclusion portray 
the growth from the lime of his call as he tilled his fields. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. (Jive three reasons why two such different men as Elijah 
and Elisha should follow in teaching a people righteousness. 

2. Give an example of the same thing at it has occurred 
since the establishment of the Church in our day. 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 
"THE BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, November 7, 1926 



310 TE KARERE Gketopa 27, 1926 

UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON. 
Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 313 

General Subject ; The example of Jesus : what it bids us do. 
Adaptation for the Intermediate Department. 

The example selected for this month is that of healing the 
sick.. 

The Uniform Fast Day Lesson is not to be discussed as are 
the other lessons of the month but is to be used to induce the 
class members to bear their testimonies. 

This lesson is especially well adapted to such treatment. 
The teacher might recall some of the healings accomplished by 
Jesus ; then lead members of the class to tell of incidents of which 
they have personal knowledge where healing and health restora- 
tions haA T e been accomplished through faith and the ordinance 
of armointing with oil and administra J ion by the Priesthood. 

A few days before this was written, a boy, ten years of age, 
living in the Highland Park Ward, ran a nail in his foot. The 
foot was bathed and properly dressed. The next day it was badly 
swollen and very painful. The father and mother had been 
Called out. The boy got the consecrated oil, called in brothers 
and sisters around him and after putting some oil on his foot, 
he asked them to join him in a prayer. The next morning his 
foot was much better. His prayer was answered. 

Second Sunday, November 14, 1926 

Lesson 27. Two Mighty Prophets. 

Text: Ilelaman. chapters 10 to i(J. 

Objective: To teach that "Blessed are they who will repent 
and hearken unto the voice of the Lord their God; for they are 
they that shall be saved." (Helaman 12:23.) 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
1. Special Assignment: 

a. Nephi comforted of the Lord (Hel. 10.) 

b. The great famine (Hel. 11:1-10..) 

c. Nephi 's prayer and its answer (Hel. 11:11-18..) 

d. Return to wickedness. (Hel. 11:19-38.) 

e. Signs of Christ's birth and death foretold. (Hel. 15.) 

f. Effect of prophecies upon The people. (Hel. 16.) 



Okciop.. 27, 192o IE K.ARERE 317 

2. Passages to be memorised by all the pupils: Hel. 12:7-23. 

o. The teacher should briefly present the main points in Hel. 13 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Name some of the ways in which Nephi had proven 
himself wonhy of the confidence which the Lord placed in him. 

2. Briefly review the condition of the Nephites as set forth 
in Hel. 13. 

3. in what particulars did Samuel's prophecies regarding 
Christ differ from any others? 

1. Contrast the conditions of the believers and unbelievers, 
set forth in llel. 15th and 16 chapters. 

Third Sunday, November 21, 1926 

Lesson 28. The Night Without Darkness — Victory Over the 
( Jadianton Band. 

Text: 111 Nephi, chapters 1 to 5. 

Objective: To teach that by faith and prayer and righteous- 
ness we may obtain victory over our enemies. 

Supplementary References: History of the Church, Vol. 2, 
pp. 102-105. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
L Special Assignment to pupils: 

a. Threatenings of the wicked. HI Nephi 1:1-9. 

b. Nephi 's prayer. Ill Nephi 10:14. 

e. The sign given and its effect. Ill Nephi 1 :15-26. 

d. Gadianton Band. Ill Nephi 1:27-30; chapter 2. 

e. Giddianhi's letter. Ill Nephi 3:1-10. 

t'. Lachoneus' faith and works. Ill Nephi 3:11-26, 
g. Victory over the robbers. Ill Nephi 4. 
h. Nephites repent. Ill Nephi 5:1-7. 
2 Passages to be memorised by all the pupils: 111 Nephi 
) :12-14; 1 :19-21 ; 4:31. 

1. Discuss the words of the Saviour spoken to Nephi as a 
source of belie 1 " in pro-existence. 

2. Name the outstanding things in Lachoneus thai place 
him among the great Book of Mormon characters. 

3. What value did the answer to prayer which Nephi 
received add to the sn/n which follows.' 



3i8 TH KARERE Gketopa 27, 1926 

Fourth Sunday, November 28, 1926- 
Lesson 21). Signs of the Saviour's Death. 

Text: III Nephi 6-10. 

Objective: To teach that the words of the Lord spoken 
through His prophets are always fulfilled. (See III Nephi 
10:14, 15.) 

Supplementary References: Matthew 27:50-53; Luke 23; 
44, 45. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. The teacher should briefly relate the story told in III 
Nephi, chapter 6, and 7:1-14, to bring vividly before the 
class the power that Satan has to lead us astray. 

2. Special assignment: 

a. Nephi 's great faith and wo;ks. ill Nephi 7:15-26. 

b. A great storm. Ill Nephi 8:1-18. 

. c Darkness upon the land. Ill Nephi 8:19-25. 

d. The voice from heaven. Ill Nephi, chapters 9 and 10. 

3. Passages to be memorised by the pupils: III Nephi, 9:13-22. 

1. Make a contrast between the powers of light and 
darkness as given in III Nephi, chapter 7. 

2. Describe briefly tint great storm and darkness. 

3. Discuss the principal cause assigned by the Saviour for 
the great destruction. 



KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT 
First Sunday, November 7, 1926. 

PAST DAY LESSON. 

General Subject ; The example of Jesus: Avhat it bids us do. 

Special Topic : Healing the Sick. 

Text : M-tt. 4 2! 

Time: Just after the choosing of the four disciples. 

Place : In Galilee. 

Objective : If we recognise and make use of the divine 
healing power that has been given us, we can be healed according 
to our faith. 

Story : How Thor was Healed. ( Adapted by Ina J. Johnson) 



Okelopa 2], 1920 TE KARERE 319 

I. Thor's life. 

1. He lived in Jerusalem. 

a. He was a homeless orphan. 

b. He and his companions lived behind two high walls 
of some buildings. 

c. He earned his living by running after chariots. As 
they passed by he would hold out his hands and beg 
for alms (money). 

d. Nearly every chariot driver would throw money to 
the boys. 

2. Thor hears about a great King who is coming. 

a. Thor watches and waits every day for this Great 
King. 

b. He is told that he is only a poor beggar boy; that 
the King will not come near him. 

c. Thor's faith is strong. He keeps saying he knows 
thai he shall see Him. 

11. A Cruel Day. 

1. Thor runs after a chariot calling for alms. 

2. The cruel driver raises his whip and cut Thor across 
the eyes with the stinging lash. 

3. Thor fell to the earth never to see again. 

a. He lay there until his companions came and helped 
him home, between the walls. 

b. From now on he must stay at home. He could not 
earn his living any more. 

c. He thought more and more of the coming of the 
King. He would say, "When the King comes I 
shall see. ' ' 

d. He was laughed at but he kept on saying it. They 
would tell him he was blind and could not see. He 
would say. "But He will help me to see." His 
faith was strong. 

ill. The King Arrives. 

1. Thor hears great shouting and singing. 

a. liis heart leaps for joy. lie knows the King has 
conic. Now he shall sec. 

b. He feels his way out Prom the v. alls to the road. 

c. Mis companion comes for him, and takes him to 
where the King is healing people. 



32P te kAKKRK Oketopa 27, 1926 

d. Thor sings praises and Hosanna to the King and 
keeps saying, "I shall sec the King" over and over 
again. 
IV. In the King's Presence. 

1. Thor hears voices ; couid feel the great crowds, but could 
not see. 

2. Gentle hands are laid on his head, a gentle voice spoke, 
''Through your faith you shall see." 

3. Thor opened his eyes and beheld Jesus, he King. Tin r 
bows in thanksgiving and gratitude. 
V. Jesus administers to Sick and Afflicted. 

1. Thor follows Him, sees Him heal the lane raise the 
dead, cure people wi J h palsy, and open the eyes of the 
blind. 

2. Thor's little heart overflows with joy and gratitude, 
lie. wants to be like Jesus. 

Faith is the subtle chain that binds us to the Infinite. Faith 
is the true prophet of the soul and ever beholds a spiritual life, 
spiritual revelations, labours and joys. While prayer is the key 
t o open the door. 

"Whatsoever ye ask, ask in faith nothing wavering, and 
ye shall receive." 

A pplication : How we can be helped: 

1. By recognising the Divine Healing Power we have on 
earth to-day. 

2. By having faith and knowing it will be granted if it is 
best for us. 

3. Stimulate children to relate incidents of healing through 
faith and the Power of the Priesthood. Thus 
strengthening both their testimonies and faith. 

-i. i head children to see how blessed we are by having this 

Power in our midst. 
Suggestive Songs: "Jesus Once Was a Little Child," D.S. 
Songs; "Jesus Our Loving Friend," page 59, Kindergarten and 
Primary Songs. 
Gem : 

We love the name of Jesus 
He hears us when we pray, 
He gives us many blessings 
And helps us day by day. 

— Annie Mai in. 



Oketopa 27, 1926 TE KARERE 321 

We may cheer the sick by taking a basket of flowers or fruit 
to a neighbour who is ill. Dramatise the gathering of the fruit 
and flowers and the carrying of them to the sick. We may also 
sing a cheerful song for the sick friend. 

Second Sunday, November 14, 1926. 

Topic : The Precious Record. 

Text : "History of the Church," Vol. 1, pages 15, 16, 18, 71. 

References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," 
Lesson 64. 

Time: Just after the Angel's visit to Joseph. 

Place : At the Hill Cumorah. 

Song and Gem: Same as last Sunday. 

Objective: An earnest effort to prepare one's self for the 
work of the Lord will be rewarded. 

Suggestions : Everything will come in its own due time if 
we wil lonly be patient. Joseph being led to the very spot where 
the records were hid, proves to us that if we would only be more 
willing to be led by the Spirit of God we would be greatly 
blessed. 

By Joseph's faithfulness and obedience in not taking the 
records until the proper time leads us to see that we must be 
faithful although we do not get the desired results at once, we 
must wait until our Father sees fit to give them.. 

Think what the results of Joseph's patience, labour, and 
faithfulness brought to us, in fact, a message was given to the 
whole world. 

Show the books to the children, tell them what they are. 

Third Sunday, November 21, 1926. 

Topic: Jesus' ('nil to the fisherman. 
Time: When .)<-sus began His ministry. 
Place : By the sea of < ialilee. 

Text: Matt, 4:18-22; 10:1-10. 

General Reference: Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, 
Lesson 65. See 1!>'24 Juvenile lesson for October. 

Objective: Those who are obedienl to the Master's call 
become more helpful to their fellowmen. 



3 22 TH KAK KRE Oketopa 2/, i^6 

Suggestions : Peter and James were humble, steady in their 
work. They were faithful workers or Jesus never would have 
chosen them. They were obedient to their parents as boys. 
Helpful and useful, the kind of men they were when Jesus chose 
them proves the kiind of children they were when little. 

If we want to serve our Father when we are old, we must 
begin when small. Obedience to parents, learning to be helpful 
and usful when small w T ill prepare us for any work the Lord 
might see fit to give us when we are older. The Lord always 
selects the faithful member. 

Rest Exercise : Same as for last Sunday. 
Song. ' ' Obedience, ' ' Kindergarten and Primary Songs, 
Thomassen, page 16. 
Gem : 

" Even 1 a little child 
May help someone to-day. 
I can make my parents glad 
If quickly I obey. '* 

Pourth Sunday, November 28, 1926 

T(;p : e: Authority of Christ again restored to the earth. 

T«me: In the bitter day. 

Place : In Nauvoo.. 

Te-:t : History of the Church, vol 1, pages 40-42. 

General Reference : Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, 
lesson 66; 1924 Juvenile lesson for October.. 

Objective: In order to official c in the ordinances of the 
Gospel a man must be called by those in authority. 

Suggestions: People couid not see the need of baptism as 
Joseph Smith taught it. But it was given to Joseph as the 
correct form. Then, too, it was the same manner in which 
Christ was baptised. As Christ set the example, we therefore, 
know -hat it is the correct mode of baptism. 

Again we have the Sacrament. Jesus gave it to His disciples 
just before His departure and told them to meet often and do 
il in remembrance of Him. It was also given Joseph Smith. 
He was told how to administer the sacrament — what to say, and 
what they would use (bread and water) ; also how and when 
they should partake of it. 



Oketopa. 27, 1926 TE .KARERE .323 

The power- o'i healing- the sick and afflicted was given to 
Joseph . also, ..." 

.. ;..S«> ..tOrday we have (he same power 011 earth to help us as 
Jesus used when He was on the earth. How grateful we should 
hag rand to, show, our ..gratitude we should do the will of our 
Heavenly Father and . keep His commandments. 

Help the children to see that if they do these things when 
they are little, they will when they are larger. 

Rest Exercise: Lead the children to suggest what Mother 
Nature is doing to prepare for winter — the flowers are going to 
sleep— the leaves are falling — birds flying to the South, etc. 
Dramatise the. suggestions offered. 

Song: "We Thank Thee, God, for a Prophet," page 102, 
D.S.S. Song Booh. 

MAHI HUi ATAWHAI. 

UORA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. 

AKORANGA MO NCEMA. 

Na Toke Wateiie i whakama'ori. 

Te Wa t) te Taima i Rite ai. 

(Meridian of Time). 

Ko nga Taha e Rua e te Karaiti. 

1. I roto i te wa o Toria malii iiiimta i te ao nei i korero 
te Kai Whakaora 111011a ano ko te "Tama te Tangata" ma 
roto i Tona whaea, ko Tona matua nei no te Whare Rawiri, 
a ko te matua ilm ko te Atua. 

2. E rua nga taha te mihaha lhu. e rua nga putake: 
Tuatalii he Atua ki te whawhai kia taea te mate me te hoko i 
nga tangata, Tuartia kia taunga ai In ki nga mate tangata. 
Ko 1c almatanga ki nga taha e rua <> te Karaiti kei te marama 
i te whakaatu a te Poropiti a A |>i na ii i roto i te Pukapuka a 
Moromoiia. Aloliia L5 : 1*6. 

3. A Meri me Hohepa tokorua raua no te kawei tahi nga 
momo kingi. Ko ta Alatiu whakaatu e whaka-u ana i te momo 
kingitaiiga Hohepa. Ki ta Ruka koki e pera ana ano mo 
Alni te hek< nga iho i nga momo kingi. E kiia ana ano i haere 
a Hohepa raua ko Meri ki Peterehama kia tuhia raua ingoa 
ki rcii-a, no te mea tokorua raua lain no te whare me te kawei 
•jo Rawiri. K ki ana ano tetahi tangata ingoa nui a Canon 



324 TE KAKKKK Okctopa 27, 1926 

Girdlestone, "I te mea e whakaatu ana te anahera ki a Meri 
i te whanautanga o te Tamaiti Tapu i ki la, 'A ka hoatu ki a 
la e te Ariki, e te Atua, te toroiia o Rawiri, tona papa.' 
Mehemea ehara a Meri i te moino toto kingi, penei kua whaka- 
hoki ia, 'Kaore ano au kia marena noa ki a Hohepa.' Ko tana 
whakahoki ia, 'Ehara au i te wahine marena.' A penei ana 
tona tikanga, 'Mehemea he wahine marena au, i te mea i heke 
iho nei au i a Rawiri, e taea e au te mea kia whai tama toku 
toto kingi, engari me pehea e whai tama moino kingi ai i te 
mea kei te puhi (Virgin) tonu au. ' " 

4. Na te taha tinana maori lhu i taea ai e Ia te whaka- 
matautau e nga mea whai tinana. Na Tona taha Atua i taea 
ai e Ia te mea kia kopi te waha Hatana. Matiu 4 : 1-11. 

5. Na Tona taha tinana maori boki i kitea ai Tona ruha- 
tanga i a la i te puna, e tono humarie ana, me Tona whiwhinga 
a ngawaritanga hoki ki tetahi wai-inu Mona i roto i nga ringa- 
ringa o te wahine Hamaria. Na Tona taha Atua i whaka- 
puare ki a Ia nga mea ngaro o tona wairua, i taea ai e Ia te 
whakaatu ki a ia te kapa te oranga tonutanga. Hoani 4: 
7-10. 

6. I runga i te karangatanga o Tona tinana maori i moe 
la i runga i te Moana o Kariri i waenganui i tetahi tupuhi. Na 
Tona taha Atua i homai ki a Ia he mana ki runga ake i te hau 
me nga ngaru. Matiu 8 : 23-27. 

7. Te whakaaturanga ano hoki mo Ona taha e rua i te 
wa i a la i roto i te Kari o Kehemane, a i a Ia hoki i runga i te 
ripeka. Ko Tona tinana maori hoki na ana te karanga, !'E 
Toku Atua, he ana Koe i wareware ai ki a Au!" A na Tona 
taha Atua te kupu i te mutunga Tona whakaherenga, "Kua 
oti. ' ' Hoani 19 : 30 ; Ruka 22 : 41-44 ; Matiu 27 : 46. 

NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE HEI WHAKAUTUNGA. 

1. Kihai a lhu i haere mai ki te whakangaro i te taha 
tinana maori, engari kia meinga la kia ngawari ki te taha 
whaka-te-atua. 

2. Ko te whakaherenga (sacrinee) i whakaotia ki runga 
te ripeka. te hokonga (redemption) ia kaore, engari no te 
aranga mai ra ano. 

3. Homai etahi tauira e whakaatu ana i nga taha e rua 



Oketopa 2J, 1926 TE KARERE 325 

o te Karaiti, i tua atu i nga mea i roto i te akoranga nei. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 

NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

KO ETAHI TIKANGA HERE I NGA MATUA. 

" Kia pehea atu te pai ta riiatou manaaki i a koutou, 

E nga tamariki, me i mohio koutou 
Ki te niamae tona ngakau i te arohatanga, 

Ki te hohonutanga, a ki te pono, 
Ki te mala me te u tonu, 

Ki te manawanui me te kaha, 
Ki te takare tonu mo te pai, me te wehi nui i te kino, 

Ko te aroha tou whaea. " 

1. He tikanga here i nga matua tenei, te aroha tika e 
rite ana mo a ratou tamariki, kia taea ai te whakatakoto nga 
tauira hei haerenga mo ratou i roto i te honore, i te tika, i te 
pono, i te ohaoha, i te manaaki. Alio te waimarie te tamaiti, 
kotiro ranei, e ahei ana te titiro tonu ake ki ona matua hei 
tauira mona. 

2. Ko tetahi whakaaro ko te ako i nga ahuatanga katoa 
te tamaiti, kotiro ranei, me te wliai kia mohio ki tenei ki 
tenei ratou. Kia mohio ki nga takarehanga a te tinana 
uiaori te tamaiti, kotiro ranei, ko te whakarite ranei i te 
aroha, ko te hiahia ranei ki te whakapaipai i te tinana, ki te 
v.'hakahoahoa atu ki nga tamariki tane, kotiro ranei, me era 
atu, a ko te whakarite tika i nga mea e tika ana 1110 ratou. He 
tikanga vvhakaora tena i nga tamariki maha i roto i nga 
pohehetanga taimaha. 

3. Ko te nama a nga matua ki a ratou tamariki, ko te 
whakatakoto i nga tauira papai, kana nga mea kikino. Kia 
tika tonu a ratou whakaakoranga kei taea te whakahe. "Ko te 
whakatakoto i nga mea papai rawa ki mua i Qga tamariki ka 
tipu ake hei tirohaiiga ake ma ratou ki nga mea papai rawa 
c taea ana te wliatoro atu. Ko te kai-\\ hakakaha i te hiahia 
te whakaaro tika, ko te whakatakoto auau tonu ki mua i nga 
tamariki i ir':i mahi o nga tangata me nga wahine nunui o una 
wa katoa. 

4. Tetahi tikanga here ano nga matua kia whakaako 
i te Rongo-pai o llm Karaiti ki a ratou tamariki. i roto i tetahi 



314 



TE RARERE 



Oketupa 27, 1926 



ahuatanga e taea ai to whaka-u kia niau roa i roto i te whaka- 
aro, ara kia taea atu ai ano te whakaaro e ratou, i te ware ware 

rawa. 



KI TE ETITA. 



HE MIHI AROHA KI A TE PUEA HERANGI. 

E hine, tena koe, ara koutou ko ou iwi e noho mai ki 
Ngaruawahia. Tenei matou nga Hunga Tapu te takiwa o 
Waikato te whakamihi atu nei ki a koe me tou iwi mo to 
koutou kaha ki te wliakarite i tenei taonga nui to tatou Hui 
Tau kei Ngaruawahi, takiwa Waikato. 

He nui to matou whakamihi atu ki a koe mo tou kaha ki 
te hapai i tenei taonga nui a to tupuna a Kingi Tawhio, i waiho 
ki tenei ao tona kupu e kii ana ia, ' ' Taku hahi kei te haere mai, 
ehara i te hahi e utu ki te rnoni, engari he taonga tariwa." 
Kua whakatutukitia e koe aua kupu tou tupuna. Ko nga 
tongi kua rite i a koe, ko te Kamureti kua rite i a koe, ko 
Ngaruawahia ko tona turanga waewae, kua rite i a koe. Ko 
tenei Hui Tau kua rite i a koe. 

Koia to matou whakamihi ki a koe me ou iwi ano hoki, 
mo to koutou kaha ki te whakarite i enei take nui katoa. Tena 
koutou ko au iwi. Ma te Atua nui i te Rangi koutou e awhina. 
Na nga HUNGA TAPU WAIKATO. 




Kaati — ko te whakaahua nei koia te wahi tana Hui Tan 
c tu ai, ara te horo nui, ataahua hoki kei Ngr.ir.awalna takiwa 



Oketopa 27, 1926 te rare re 327 

Waikato. 

Tena koe e Te Karere, mau e panui atu enei kupu ki nga 
takiwa katoa e tae ai koe. Heoi ano, na to koutou teina, 
tuakana, na 

REHERI D. PAAPITI. 
0- 

HE MATENGA. 

Panuitia atu ki nga inarae aitua te mateiiga o ta matou 
tamaiti o Richard Watene ki te Hohipera o Xepia i te 13 nga 
ra Hepetema 1926. He tamaiti ia na te Wirihana raua ko 
Kahukore Watene te Peka o te Kirikiri, Hauraki. I pangia 
ia e te mate ki te Kareti (M.A.C.). E toru ona wiki e takoto 
mate ana, ka mauria ia, ki te Hohipera o Nepia. I te mea ka 
tino taimaha rawa tona mate i reira ka waeatia mai ona matua 
kia haere atu. Neke atu hoki i te toru wiki o raua ki reira 
ka mate nei ta raua tamaiti. He nui te pouri i te taenga mai 
te rongo kua mate. He nui atu te tangi o ona whanaunga, 
me ona hapu i hui mai ki te whanga atu i te taenga mai. I te 
kitenga atu o ta ratou tamaiti, mokopuna, e hoki mai ana ki te 
wa kainga i roto i te rakau, me ona matua, i kore ai e taea te 
pupuri mai te rere te roimata. Kihai nei etalii ona 
whanaunga i kite, me nga mea i kite, i te wa i haere atu ai 
raua ko tona tuakana ko Mita Watene, ki te Kareti, he rapu 
i te matauranga, i inohio tera ka penei te ahua o tona hokinga 
mai ki te kainga. 1 tika ia te kupu, "He aha koia to koutou 
oranga? He kohu ra, he iti nei te wa e puta mai ai. na kua 
memeha atu." Hemi 4: 14. 

I te wiki te 19 ka nehua tona tinana. 1 tu hoki he karakia 
whakamaharatanga mona. E3 torn nga kai-korero. Ko Rupata 
Wi Ilongi: "He iti noa iho te wa i tnohio ai an ki tenei tamiti 
i te wa i tae ai an ki te Kareti. Ki toku luohiotanga a rongo 
hoki. ko raua ko lona tuakana ko Mita Watene etalii tamariki 
papai atu te Kareti. Kua haere atu ia ki tua te arai, he 
mahi mana kei reira. I te mea kua kite koutou i tona whaka- 
ahua i roto i Te Karere, koia letalii tlga tneraa te Koroma 
nga Rikona." 

Toke Watene: "K pOUl'i ana au i te mea ko an te Tumnaki 



328 T£ KAKERE Oketopa 27, 1926 

to Miutara tenei peka, ki te pai tenei tamaiti kaha i roto 
i nga mahi o te Mautara, ngawari, ngohengohe, mona kua 
tangohia atu." 

Erata Tarapata : "E koa ana au moku ka whai kupu ano 
ki a koutou i mua o toku hokinga atu. E nga Hunga Tapu, 
e pouri ana hoki tokn ngakau mo ta tatou tamaiti." He nui 
ano hoki nga whai-korero a nga hapu tenei tamaiti ki runga 
ki a ia. A he monio rangatira tonu ano hoki no Ngati Maru, 
he mokopuna ki a Taipari me Hoani Nahe. Ahakoa i hinga 
atu ia ki te ao te tonga, e pai ana, e haere ana i runga i ana 
iwi i a Kahungunu, Porourangi, Kongo whakaatu, Mahaki, Kau- 
kawa, Te Arawa, Tuwharetoa, i ona waka hoki i a Te Arawa, 
Matatua, Kurahaupo, Tokomaru, Takitimu, i runga i ona 
tupuna i a Ngatoroirangi, Poupoto, Toroa, Kongomaipapa, 
Kahukuranui. E kore nei e taea te tuhi iho ona whakapapa 
kei whakakapi i ta tatou pepa. 

Ahakoa kihai i pau i a ia te tau ki te Kareti, a i haere iti 
atu, a ngaro hoki ia ki te ao o te tonga, he ahakoa, i hoki 
rangatira mai, a niohiotia hoki ia ki te iwi, ki te kainga, i tenei 
ra. I tika ai te mihi ake, ''E pai ana e tama, i haere rangatira 
koe, i haere i runga i o iwi, i o waka. Ahakoa na te rapu i te 
matauranga koe i kawe ki runga ki tena huarahi. Haere atu 
i runga i te kupu, "Ko te Matauranga te Kororia o te Atua. " 
Ako. me nga Kawe. 93: 36. E ki ana ano hoki, "He mea 
uaua rawa mo te tangata kia whakaorangia i roto i te kuare- 
tanga." 131: 6. "Ma te Matua nga whakamarama, kaliore 
nei ona putanga ketanga, kahore hoki he atarangi te tahuri." 
(Hemi 1: 17) e tino whakamarama nga ngakau o ou matua, 
whanaunga. Na to koutou teina iti i roto i te Rongo-pai, 
TOKE WATENE (Hekeretari Peka). 

He Ripoata na Rawlri KamEu 

HUI PARIHA I KORONGATA, KEPETEMA 4, 5. 

Nga take roto i tenei Hui Pariha : Tuatahi, i whakaaria 
e te Timuaki Mihana, ae kua whakaaetia kia tu he Temepara 
mo N-iu Tireni nei tae atu ki Ahitereria ki te kaha te Hunga 
Tapu ki te whakarite i nga take katoa e rite ana 1110 tenei 
. i,. : .. ; . pjv, v h^VnT^.T, Ha kahn te Himfra Taran ki te whakarite 



OkeLupa 27, 1926 TE KARERE 329 

i nga whakatekau, i nga noho-puku, ki te whakarite i nga 
whakapapa mo te hunga mate. Ma enei kia tika ka tika ai 
kia tu lie Temepara, ki te kore e kaha, he aha te painga? Ko 
te kaupapa whanui tenei kia takatu te Hunga Tapu, kaua hei 
moe. 

Tuarua : Kua tae inaia ki te taima e tika ana kia moliio 
nga kaumatua Maori katoa i runga i tenei motu i roto i te Hahi 
ki nga tikanga me nga mahi me te whakahua i nga inoi e tika 
ana mo te hoatutanga Tohungatanga ki tetahi i roto i te Tohu- 
agatanga Merekihereke me to Arona. Te whawha nga 
ringaringa me te tu, te ahua nga korero wehewehe i te ahua- 
tanga te mana, i runga i tewhea enei tohungatanga, kia 
kaua ai e takirua whakahuatanga o te mana o Arona Mere- 
kihereke ranei. 

Te nui o nga tangata i tae mai ki tenei hui 310. He nui te 
pai o te wairua i roto i tenei hui. I nga ra i mua atu o te wha 

nga ra lie nui te ua, te hau, te kino nga rangi. I roto tonu 
te tangata whemia i te marangai e mahi ana. No te karakia 
nui i tc 4 nga ra ka whiti te ra. Mutu noa tenei hui i te 
tekau o nga haora i te Mane, ka mutu hoki te hui ka puta 
ano te ua. Titiro ki tenei ahua, ma koutou e whakamaori tenei 
ahuatanga. 

E ono nga karakia i roto i tenei Hui Pariha. Tekau ma 
0110 nga kaumatua i tenei hui. Kore rawa he whakamarama- 
tanga o te Rongo-pai i mahue, i ngaro ranei. Ko nga whaka- 
liiarama i ma line na Timuaki Tinikini i whakamarama. 
TE POARI TE KURA. 

I haere te roopu te Poari ki te tirotiro i te whaama, kitea 
ana e te Poari tino ataahua ana nga taonga me nga malii o te 
Kareti. Te tipu nga oti, te ora hoki a raton mea katoa. 

1 tn hoki te hui a te Poari ko llemi Erekeretana te riwhi 
Nireaha Paewai, koia te hekeretari te Poari te kura M.A.C, 
liiaiaiui 1 paalntia 1 roto 1 tenei lun Poari hei te 1 a ■ 1 1 Ink) he 
raiti mo te Kareti. 

HE MATENGA. 

Kia rnohio mai ai nga whanaungatanga enei tamariki a 

tatou, Otene Tuehu Poniare, kua mate ia 110 roto i enei hapu, 

t^gati Kahungunu, Rakaipaka, Ngati Poporo, Ngati Whatua, 

Ngati Rangitnnc, me era atn «» ona hapu. Rfahue iho i a ia 



330 TE KARERE Oketopa 2/, 1926 

tana wahine me tona tamiti i te ao nei. Tetahi whiunara nui 
hoki nona. Tona mate he kaiakiko. 

Ko Riti Watene no Hauraki, i mate ia ki te Hohipera o 
Nepia. I tae mai hoki tona papa me tona whaea, i mauria 
hoki tona tinana ki Hauraki ra ano. Ko tenei tamaiti i te Kura 

te M.A.C., tona mate kaiakiko ano. He nui te pouri me te 
aroha. Haere e tama, haere, haere ki niatua, tipuna hoki. 

1 mate koe i roto i te Rongo-pai Ihu Karaiti, lie tnea liari 
ki a koe. 



R.M.K. 



-0- 
HE MATENGA. 



Ki Te Karere: Tena koe, panuitia atu e koe te matenga 
o a matou pepe. I mate tetahi i te ono o nga ra o 
Akuwhata, 1926, kotahi marama e waru nga ra te kau natua. 
Na Hemi Pohutuhutu tenei pepe. 

No te 24 o nga ra o Akuwhata ka mate te pepe a Tatana 
Arona, 10 nga marama te kaumatua. He nui hoki te pouri i 
pa mai kia matou i te whehenga atu i a matou o enei tamariki. 
Na tenei wahi i whakamarama o matou ngakau ki te kupu a 
te Karaiti ki Ana akonga i a Maka i te 10:13. Kua tae atu 
raua kei te Kai Hanga. Heoi, ma te Atua koutou e tiaki e 
manaaki i nga wa katoa. Heoi ano. 

Na Tamati Honetana, Tumuaki Peka, 
Hoeotainui. 



He Ripoata Hui Atawhai 

Ki Te Karere, e hoa tena koe. E haere na ki nga marae, 
ki nga pukepuke, ki nga awaawa, ki te rua o nga kamaka, 
ki te tirotiro i nga morehu, tena koe. 

Tenei matou etahi morehu kua kitea e te Hui Atawhai. 
No te 4 o Hune ka whakaturia to matou Hui Atawhai e Erata 
Paapiti ki Frankton takiwa o Wa'kato. E 6 nga mema Mai 
o reira ki tenei wa, kei te nui te hihiko o te wairua ki nga 
mahi, kei te nui te pai o a matou mahi a ringarmga He nui 
hoki a matou mea kua hokona atu. Kei te cumanako te nga- 
kau kia tiaho te maramatanga o nga mahi a te Hui Atawhai. 
Heoi, kia ora nga Hunga Tapu me nga Hui Atawhai katoa. 
Heoi ano, 

Na Mihi Ormsby, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. 



Okctopa 2/, 1926 TK KARERE 315 



Ko te Matenga o Sir James Carrol 

K.ua maie a Ta Timi Kara, K.C.M.G., M.L.C. Pa mai te 
aroha me te tangi ki nga kainga o te iwi Maori me nga hoa 
Pakeha. E mohiotia ana tenei tangata e nga marae i runga i 
te Ika a Maui. I whanau ia i te 20 o nga ra o Akuhata i te tau 
1857. He tama ia na Hohepa Kara (he pakeha) o te Wairoa. 
Ko tona whaea no Ngati-Kahungungu. 1 kurangia i te kura 
Maori o te Wairoa i muri iho ki te kura a Mr. Thompson i Ne- 
pia. I te tau 1870 i te whawhai ki a Te Kooti ka riro mai i a 
ia te honore nui ara te New Zealand Medal i roto i te ropu ho- 
ia a Hamlin. Koia te karere maumau re. a ki nga kaiwhaka- 
haere o ia ropu o ia ropu. I muri iho ka whakaritea ia hei 
Komihana mo te takiwa o Haki Pei. Ka mohiotia ia e Sir 
Donald McLean te tangata naana i hoko nga whenuaote iwi 
Maori ki te karauna i taua wa. Tukua ana ia ki te tari mo te 
tana Maori, 12 marama ia ki leira. I muri iho ka noho ia hei 
kai-whakamaori i nga Kooii Whenua Maori. I te tau 1879 ka 
whakaritea ia hei kai-whakamaori mo roto i te whare o raro i 
te paremata tae noa ki te tau 1883. 1 te tau 1884 ka whakama- 
tautau ia ki te noho hei mema, riro ia Wi Pere te pooti i ta- 
ua tau. I te tau 1887 ka hinga a Wi Pere ka riro koia hei me- 
ma. I te 1892 ka whakaritea ia hei mema mo te ropu o te 
uiha Maori. Ka noho Minita ia i te tau 1893 ki te tau 1912 
mo te Karauna i te wa ko te Hetana, ko Hooro, ko Hoone me 
te VVaari te kawanatanga. 1 whakaritea ia hei Pirimia Kai- 
a^hina mo Niu Tireni i te wa i haeie ai a teWaari ki Ingara- 
ngi ngaro atu ai mo tetahi wa. i noho ano ho* i ia hei Kai-ti- 
aki mo nga \\ . e ma Maori o te Tairawhi.i. 1 a ia e noho ana 
hei minita 1.0 te ta.a Maori, naana i whakamarie etahi nga 
rarurarr. nunui 1 pa ki te VYhakatohea i Ruaioki. 1 te tau 191 1 
ka meinga ia hei knight ara hei K. C. M. G. I te tau 1919 ka 
hinga ia i tona tunga n.ema mo '1 manga. 1 whakaritea ki te 
Whare Ariki i te tai 19?!. I tona tamai ikitanga he toa ia ki 
te oiiia, k; .v peke ta^epa me e.a .i a ma nga mahi takoro. 

I m:>e ia i te moenia oa i : ■ 8 nga haora i te po te 
Mane, 18 o nga ra o oketop . ki Akarana. Ko tona tinana 
i haria mai na runga tima, a n > 1 ;. 1 i te I ait •, ka u mai ki 
Turanga. Kua tae a Ngati Kahungunu ki runga i tona aitua 

Poroporoaki, ha re ra e koro e! Haerj ra i roto i t e 
kakahn nga tipnna kua wciic atu ki te po. II iere, \\ aiho 



332 



TE KARERE 



Oketopa 27, j 9^6 



ko te aroha me te mamae o te ngakau, me au mahi papai, 
hei'hoa i muri nei. Kua ngaro koe i nga marae maha o tou 
Iwi Maori. Heoi ano na 

To Ao Wirihana 








Ko te tiima tuarua tenet te M.A.C. whiitn-paoro, ara 
te Third Grade. 



KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. 



Ko Erata EZRA H. ANDERSON (Anihana) o Bingham, 
Utah. 1 tae mai a ia i te 2 o nga ra o Hune 1923 a ka whaka- 
ritea ki te takiwa o Waikato. 1 te [30 nga ra o Mei 1924, ka 
whakaritea ko : a hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa. I te 15 o nga 
ra o Hurae ka nukuhia atu a Anihana ki te takiwa o Mania, 
hei tumuaki mo reira. Tukua honoretia atu i te 28 o nga ra o 
Hepetema 1920. 

Ko Erata ARNEL J. TALBOT (Tarapata^ o Lewiston, 
Utah. I tae mai a Tarapata i te 23 o nga ra o Pepuere 1924 a 
i whakaritea ki te takiwa o Hauraki. I te 23 o nga ra o Aku- 
hata 1925 ka whakaritea hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa. I mahi 
ia hei tumuaki mo reira tae noa mai ki ce wa o tona hokinga 
atu ki tona kainga. Tukua honoretia atu i te 28 o nga ra o 
Hepetema '926. 

Ka panuitia o raua whakaahua ki Te Karere o Noema. 



Okelopa 27, 1926 TE KARERE __ 333 



Te Urlmi me te Tumlne. 

Loia nei nga mea whakamiharo i taea ai e Hohepa Mete te whaka- 
maon te Pukapuka a Moromona. I te whakaatu raai a te Anahera a 
Moron ai ki a Hohepa Mete i peiiei tana ki: 

1 ' Kei reira ano hoki etahi kohatu e rua, i te mowhiti hiriwa — a 
ko enei kohatu i whakamana ki roto i tetahi arai uma, i karangatia 
nei ko te Urimi me te Tumine." Tuhituhinga a Hohepa Mete 2: 35. 

I te wa i vvhakamaori ai ia i te Pukapuka a Moromona, titiro ai 
ia ina roto i nga mowhiti nei ki nga whakairo i runga i nga papa koura, 
ka kite hoki ia i te kupu e rite ana mo ia ahua whakairo, koia ki te 
korero atu i tana kupu ki tona kai-tuhi ki a Oriwa Kautere. Ko te mea 
whakamiharo o tenei mahi whakamaori o raua, ka mau tonu te kite 
Hohepa Mete i taua kupu, kia oti ra ano te tuhi, kia tika hoki, katahi 
ano taua kupu ka ngaro, ka puta mai hoki ko nga kupu o muri iho. 

Ko tenei Urimi rne te Tumime he mea hoatu ki te teina Iarere 
i runga i te maunga, i a ia i korero ai ki te Ariki he kanohi he kanohi. 
( Akoranga me nga Kawenata 17: 1.) He Urimi ano he Tumine i a 
Aperahama. Ina hoki tana korero: "Na, i a au i Aperahema te Urimi 
me te Tumine i homai ai ki a au e te Ariki, e te Atua, i te whenua 
Uru o nga Kariri. " Aperahama 3: 1. 

- He pera ano i a Arona i tona turanga tohunga. "Me whakanoho 
ano hoki e koe nga Irimi rne nga Tumine ki te kouma whakarite 
whakawa a hei te ngakau Arona aua mea, ina haere ki te aroaro o 
Iaowa." Ekoruhe 28: 30. 

I te wa i whakaritea ai a Hohua hei kai whakahaere mo te whanau 
a Iharaiia i muri mai i a Mohi: "A ka tu ia ki te aroaro Ereatara 
tohunga, ko tent ano he kai tono whakaaro mana, i ta te Urimi e whaka- 
rite ui i te aroaro o Ihowa. ' ' Tauanga 27: 21. 

L te matenga o liamuera Poropiti kua kore katoa i a Haora uga 
v\ aka Atua me nga rapa maori o te whenua, "i huihui mai hoki nga 
Pirihitini noho ana ki Tunema i huihuia ano e Haora a Iharaira katoa 
ki Kiripoa. A, te kitenga o Haora i te taua a nga Pirihitini, ka wehi, 
pawera rawa tona ngakau. A, te uinga a Haora ki a Ihowa, hore rawa 
he kupu a .Ihowa i whakahokia ki a ia e nga moe, e nga Urimi, e nga 
poropiti." I Hamuera 2H: 3-6. 

I ui a Rawiri ki te Ariki ma roto i te Urimi me te Tumine. 
(I Hamuera 30: 7-8.) 

I nga ra o Hairuha kingi Pahia i tahuri ia ki te whakahoki i nga 
Hurai ki Hiruharama, i riro nei i nga whakaraunga ki Pupurona, otira 
i te kohinga i a ratott, ka kitea i roto <> nga tama a nga tohunga, kua 



334 TE KARERE Okelopa 2/, 1926 

ngaro te pukapuka whakapapa tupuna, 110 reira poke ana ratou, mutu 
ake to ratou tohungatanga.-.v^'Katahi to kaw.ana ka mea ki a ratou, 
kia kaua ratou e kai i nga mea tapu rawa, kia ara ake ra ano tetahi 
tohunga kei a ia nga Urimi me nga Turnine.-" Etera 2; 62-63. 

E ki ana te Pukapuka a Moromona: '- Na, te tangata kei a ia nei 
enei mea, e karangatia ana ia he matakite.'' Mohi. 28: 16-. .'-.-'- 

Ka kite tatou koia nei tetahi nga ahua whakakite mad a te Atua 
i Una whakaaro puku ki Ana pononga ki nga p^ropiti, ki. nga matakite, 
ma roto mai i te Urimi me te Tumime: penei me larere, me Aperahama, 
me Arona, me Ereatara, me Kawiri, me Hohepe Mete. Ko enei Urimi, 
Tumime, he tauira iti no nga mea nunui o te Atua. Te Hakarameta he 
tauira whakamaharatanga mo te matenga o te Karaiti mo nga hara o 
te ao." Ko nga ra te wiki mai i te Mane ki te Ratapu, he tauira mai 
no nga mano tau i hanga ai e te Atua te ao. Ko ta tatou taima he 
mea whika mai i te huringa porotaka o te whenua, te raunatanga i te 
ra; ko ta te Atua he mea whika ke i nga mea nunui i roto i te Kikuraiigi 
ara i Korapa. Ko Korapa e rite ana ki te tauira a te Ariki, ki Ona 
taima ki Ona wa, i to reira takahurihuri ; ara kotahi takahuritanga 
kotahi. ra ki te Ariki. i runga i Tana ritenga • tat.au, a kotahi mano tau 
e rite ana ki te taima i whakaritea mo te whenua e tu nei tatou i 
runga. Ko te ra kotahi ki a Korapa he mano tau ki a tatou. 

' ' Mehemea t'era etahi mea e rua, a kei runga atu ano tetahi i era, 
a tera ano he mea 7iui kei runga atu i era no reira ko Korapa te mea 
nui rawa o era atu -Kokaupima kua kit-ea na- e koe, no te mea koia ra te 
mea tata mai ki a au.-" Aperahama 3: 13-16. 

"' Na'.eriei wnakVaiuranga tatou ka mohio, ko nga mea nunui te 
whenua he tauira iti no nga mea kei te aroaro te Atua. 

'" ' "Ko te wahi hoki e achia ana e te Atua he Urimi he Tumime tino 
nui rawa. Ko tenei ao. ina tae ki tona ahua e v.iiakatnpua, e mate 
kore ai, ka meinga and he kafaihe tona rite, ka meinga hei Urimi hei 
Tumime ki te hunga e noho ana i runga, 111c reira hoki c Avhakaatu ki te 
hunga e noho ana i reira nga mea katoa o te kingitanga i rare iho i a 
.ia, ara o nga kingitanga katoa kei aro iho i a ratou; a hei reira -tenei 
ao riro ai i a te Karaiti." Akoranga me nga Kawenata 130: 8-9. 

NA ERU T. KUPA. 



"Haere ki te popokorua, e te tangata mangere, mataki- 
takina iho ona ara, kia nui ai ou whakaaro." Horomona, 

"Tama tu, tama ora; tama noho, tama mate kai." 

Whakatauki Maori 

- "Waihoki ' ko te whakapOno, ki te kahore ana mahi, he 
•mea mate, koia anake hoki." Hemi. 



Okjtopa j;\ 192J 



TE KARKKE 



335 



3 



S 
^ 

h 

$ 




Oketopa 27, 1920 



TE K ARK RE 



Ki Te Karere, tena koe e te manu hari atu i nga whaka- 
aro o nga marae o te Ika o Maui. Ko nga ingoa enei e whai 
ake nei o nga kai-kauwhau o Waikato me nga wahi i kara- 
ngatia ai ratou mo nga marama e rua, mo Noema me Tine- 
ma. 



Hoani Ormsby 


\ Matakowhai 


Tetahi Kaumatua 


j 




Tamati Honetana 


1 Tahuna 


Wiki tuarua 


Raite Te Hira 




Hamiora Pohutuhutu 


1 Tauhei 


Wiki tuatoru 


Totana Arona 




Te Awe Ponga 


! Taupiri 


Wiki tuatoru 


Ngaha Rotana 




Hongi Rawhiti 


I Kawhia 


Kotahi wiki 


Tetahi Kaumatua 




Henare Maiho 


1 Pukekohe 
J Puketapu 


Wiki tuarua 


Hemi Paki 




Hokio Tarawhiti 


1 Ngarua- 
j wahia 


Wiki tuarua 


Karena Takoro 




Tu George Stockman 


\ Okahukura Wiki tuarua 


Richard Lovett 


J 




Winiata Kapinga 


1 Aria 


Wiki tuatoru 


Te Whetu Warahi 




Mipi Tangihaere 


1 Piopio 


Wiki tuawha 


Wanahi Tangihaere 




Here Tangihaere 


\ Matiere 


Wiki tuatahi 


Tupu Waaka 




Te Whare Hetaraka 


}• Weraroa 


Wiki tuatahi 


Te Whatu Apiti 


1 Waitatuna 


L 


Tom Reti 


Wiki tuarua 



Tena ra koutou e oku tuakana aroha, e nga kai-kauwhau 
i nga tikanga o tenei Rongopai o tatou. I nga marama kua 
pahure ake nei, i a au e haere ana, kua kite ahau, kua kore 
etahi o nga kai-kauwhau e kaha ki te whakarite i o ratou ka- 
rangatanga. E hoa ma, ehara tenei i te ahuatanga pai mo kou- 
tou ara mo Waikato. Kua oti ra te korero, "Me pehea hoki e 
rongo ai ki te kahore he kai-kauwhau?" No reira e kite ana 
tatou he mahi nui whakaharahara ta tatou ara te kauwhau- 
tanga 6 te Rongopai ki nga iwi e noho ana i roto i te pouri- 
tanga. Kati, "E moe ana nga niata hii tuna, e ara ana nga 
mata hii taua." No reira, kia kaha, kia toa, kia manawanui 
i nga wa e takoto inai nei. Ma te Atua koutou e awhina, 

Na to koutou teina na 
Reheri 1>. Paapiti 



TE KARERE Oketopa 2/, tv,26 



KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA 



Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- 
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Aiickt.i '<l. 
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 

New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather iiu 

Book of Mormon, Cloth 26 & 7-6 

" V " .Half Leather 9-0 

.Leather 10-0 & 15 o 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-o 

" " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leaner 9-0 
MAO^I BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 

" " " , Leather 3-0 

Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 

" " ". " Me Nga rlimene, Leather 3 in 1 ll-o 

" Pukapuka a Moromona. Cloth 5-0 

, Le ith'er 15-0 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Niii, Cloth 5-0 

" " " " '*, Leather 13 o 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer l o 
SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0 

What Jesus Taught .SO 

Kindergarten Plan Book. Kesler & Mo. ris 3-6 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-0 

SONG BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 

" " .Leather 

Deseict Song Books, Cloth 3-0 

" , Leather o 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WOrtKS 

.Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Tahimge 0-3 

Vitality of Mormonism 4-O 

Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 6-0 

Restoration of the Gospel, W/ idtsoe 40 

Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-0 

Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6 

Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 

Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9 

Bible Ready Reference 2-0 

Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, M01 ris 0-0 

KO J. H. FINIKIN? TE KAJ TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. II. R. 




few 




Ko tctahi o nga Ropu Whakatangitangi o te 
Kareti (M.A.C.), ara te Saxophone Band. 



jg " ^^^S^^^^MW^^rm^t^g^^ & \ui S02 ffl ;& Xffi T£ Sffi Tu : :• • 



44 C& KflR&RS" 



WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO 



Kl TE ETITA 



Wharangi. 



He Ripoata Whakawhitinga Moana 364 

Hui Pariha o Manaia 343 

KO NGA RONCO KORERO 

Ko nga Hokinga Atu VI Hiona 367 

Ko nga Kai-Wh?.kaako o te M.A.C. 368 
Ko nga Mahi Whakatangitangi o te Kareti 36I 

KO NCA TUHINCA MAI 

He Tika Ranei nga Hahi Katoa? 356 

Ko te Kari o Erene 363 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 354 

MAHI KURA HAPATI 

Christmas Program 338 

Concert Recitation 344 

Intermediate Department 349 

Karakia Kirihimete 342 

Korero a Ngakau 344 

Kindergarten Department 318 

Maori Theological 344 

Pakeha Theological 347 

Postlude 337 

Prelude 337 

Sacrament Gem 337 




!QK3W 



WAHANCA 20 WENEREI. NOEMA 24, 

filaori Mgriculiural Cc liege 



1926. NAMAII 

Hastings. H. B. 



E tukua atu ana ia marama e te JViihana o Niu Tireni, 

Hahi o ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o riga Ra o Muri Nei. 

Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita c Te Knrere, M.A.C., Hastings. 

Ko te uiu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-). 

KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. 
file matua utu mo tcu pepa ka vchivhi ai. 

j. H. Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana 
Mariana K. Ewutana, htita. Tiata Witctuia, Etita Boa Awhina. 

Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha 

Ko n ga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). 



Wiremu A. Koura 



Rapita Tanapu 



Eru T. Kupa 



MAHI KURA HAP ATI. 
Prelude. 



Adagio legato. 



Arr. After Schumann. 
by Edw. P. Kimball. 



^fgpPl^p^^iip^^i 






Efg^E JgE*E J£ 



SACRAMENT GEM FOR DECEMBER, I92(j 
"Purify our hearts, our Saviour, 
Let us go not far astray; 
That we may be counted worthy 
Of Thy Spirit, day by day." 
Postlude. 



PPP Hit. 



33^ TH KARKRE Notma 24, 1926 



Christmas Program, December 26, 1926 

A suggestive program lias been prepared and is herewith submitted, 
to be followed us closely us possible by the Sunday Schools of the 
Church in New Zealand; the judgment of the Superintendents will guide 
them in utilizing those itcu . s vtiih c mi best be presented by their 
respective schools. 

We all desire to honor and reverence with the people of the world 
the wonderful, self-sacrificing life of Jesus the Christ, and our best 
efforts will be required if we are to show that we appreciate to the full 
the Love which the Eternal Father manifested in sending His Only 
Begotten Son to ihe earth, to be the Savior, Redeemer and Prince of 
men. 

Then we do honor to the Prophet of Latter Lays — he to whom so 
much was entrusted — whose devotion to duty and love for his fellow- 
men gained for him his faithful brother, martyrs ' graves. 

The regular class work will be dispensed with, and it is expected 
that each Officer und Teacher will exert every energy to make the 
program a most inspiring and successful one. As soon as notice of the 
program is received, all Officers and Teachers should arrange and assign 
the items to the pupils and have them learn thoroughly their assign- 
ments before the Third Sunday in Lecember. 

Remember: "Preparation means progress; practice makes perfect." 

The Program submitted by the Mission Superintendent is as 
follows: — 

Organ prelude at 10.25 a.m. sharp. All in seats. 
10.30 a.m.: Abstract of Minutes. 

1. Congregational Song: No. 221, Les. S.S. — "When Christ was Born in 
Bethlehem' '; or No. 101, S. of Z. — "Christmas Carol. " 

2. Invocation by member of Maori Theological Class. 

3. Sacramental Song: No. 12'.), S. of Z. — "Behold the Great Redeemer 
Die." 

4. Administeration of the Sacrament: Prelude, Sacrament, Gem, Post- 
hide, Administering Emblems, Passing Sacrament. Organ accom- 
paniment. 

5. Concert Recitaion conducted by Intermediate pupil. 
Book of Mormon, I. Nephi, 11: 13-18-20, 21. 

"And I beheld the city of Nazareth: and in the city of Nazareth 
I beheld a virgin, and she was exceeding fair and white. And 
(the angel) said unto me, Behold, the virgin whom thou seest 
is the mother of the Son of God after the manner of the flesh. 
And I looked and beheld the virgin again, bearing a child in 
her arms. And the angel said unto me, Behold the Lamb of 
God, yea. even the Son of the Eternal Father." 



Nbema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 339 

6. Singing Practice: No. 4, S. of Z. — "A Poor Wayfaring Man of 
Grief." 

7. Recitation by Primary or Kindergarten Pupils (one verse each): 

' ' CHRISTMAS. ' ' 
While shepherds watched their flocks by night, 

All seated on the ground, 
The angel of the Lord came down, 

And glory shone around. 

"Fear not,"" said he, for mighty dread 

Had seized their troubled mind; 
"Grlad tidings of great joy I bring 

To you and all mankind." 

" to you in David's town this clay 

Is born of David's line, 
A Savior, who is Christ the Lord, 

And this shall be the sign. 

"The heavenly babe you there shall find 

To human view, displayed. 
All meanly wrapt in swathing bands, 

And in a manger laid. ' ' 

Thus spake the seraph, and forthwith 

Appeared a shining throng 
Of Angels, and praising God, and thus 
Addressed their joyful s.>:ig. 

"All glory be to God on high, 

And to the earth be peace; 
Good will, henceforth, from heaven to men, 

Begin and never cease." 

8. Duet or Quartette (selected): No. 28, D.S.S. — "A Stranger Star O'er 
Bethlehem"; or No. 81, S. of X. — "Far, Far Away, on Judea 's 
Plains. " 

i>. Speech by member of Maori Theological (Mass (10 minutes): "The 
Mission of Jesua Christ in the World." 

Outline: 1. The Effects of the Fall (Transgression) of Adam 
and Eve. 
i 1 . The Atonemenl of Christ. 

(a) Overcomes physical death. 

(b) Overcomes spiritual death. 

10. Song by the Kindergarten Pupils: "Luther's Cradle Hymn." 

(No- 248, s. of 'A., and No. 21 I, D.8.S.) 

11. An Acrostic, ".lesus Christ," by Intermediate Pupils. (Each Pupil 
bears a large letter; it the class is small, each pupil could take two 



\o 






TH KA 


RERL 


Noema 24, i^»2( 




letters.) 








1. 


J 


is for JUSTICE 


Pupil 


recites Jeremiah 23: 5-6. 


2. 


E 


» 


EQUALITY 


„ 


Mark 1G: 15-16. 


3. 


S 


„ 


SALVATION 


„ 


Acts 4: 10-12. 


4. 


u 


» 


UNITY 


„ 


Galatians 3: 26-28. 


5. 


s 


» 


SERVICE 


„ 


Matthew 22: 37-40. 


6. 


c 


„ 


CHARITY 


„ 


Matthew 5: 43-44. 


7. 


H 


„ 


HUMILITY 


„ 


Matthew 23: 11-12. 


S. 


R 


>y ) 


, RIGHTEOUSNESS 


„ 


Matthew 5: 19-20. 


9. 


I 


„ 


, IMMORTALITY 


„ 


P. of G.P. Moses 1:39 


10. 


S 


» > 


SINCERITY 


>y 


Matthew 15: 7-9. 


11. 


T 


„ > 


TRUTH 


„ 


John 8: 31-32. 



All Students then recite in unison the 1st and 2nd Articles of Faith. 

12. Song by Choir or Congregation: No. 8 S. of Z. — "An Angel from on 
High. ' ' 

13. Speech (10 minutes) by member of Pakeha Theological Class: — 
"The Teachings of Joseph Smith and Their Effect on Mankind." 

Outline: 1. Spiritually; references, D. and C. 6: 13; 18: 22; 
sec. 20; sec. 7(5. 

2. Morally; D. and C. 42: 22-20; 03: 10-18; 88: 07-09- 

121. 

3. Intellectually; 55: 4; 88: 118: 90: 15; 93: 30; 131: 0. 

4. Physically; 88: 124; sec. 89. 

5. Serially; 20: 2; 42: 12; 51: 4-5; 60: 13; sec. 132 

(marriage): 
iiei'erciioes given to help speaker in preparing speech.) 

14. Recitation by members of Intermediate Class- — 

1 « PRAISE TO THE BOY. ' ' 
(By Bertha A. Kleinman.) 

Praise to the Boy who communed with Jehovah, 

Millions shall honor his memory to be; 
To me he is nearer and dearer in childhood, 

When he was a boy, young and trusting, like me. 

I love to remember him happy and playful, 

Joining the games that were honest and square, 

Leading and loyal to every companion, 
Everyone's playmate because he was fair. 



I love to remember him kind and obedient, 
Honoring parents as every boy should, 

Thoughtful of others, especially his mother, 
Blessing his household with service and good. 



Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 341 

To me, best of all, is his mother } s own story, 
Of love and devotion no heart could withstand, 

A hero in pain and a scout in affliction, 

When a victim he lay to the scourge of the land. 

His sister restored, it was Joseph who languished, 
His boyish form tortured again and again, 

Aud watching and helping, 'twas Hyrum who tended 
(Companions in childhood, twin martyrs as men). 

No potion to ease through the grim operation, 

No ether to deaden in slumber J s relief; 
They proffered him wine, but he kindly refused them, 

Submitting to all in his matchless belief. 

Ho conquered: he lived to commune with Jehovah; 
To honor his parents in joy and distress; 

All praise to the hero — his childhood has taught me 
Tiiat I. too, have parents to honour and bless. 
lo. Reading by member of Pakeha Theological Glass: — 

"A Tribute, by Josiah Ouincy, Mayor of the City of Boston, U.S.A., 
1845-1849." 

May 15th, 1844:— "It is by no means improbable that some 
future text-book for the use of generations yet unborn, will 
contain a question something like this: What historical Ameri- 
can of the nineteenth century has exerted the most powerful 
influence upon the destinies of his countrymen? And it is by 
no means impossible that the answer to that interrogatory may 
be thus written : Joseph Smith, the Mormon Prophet. And the 
reply, absurd as it doubtless seems to most men now living, 
may be an obvious commonplace to their descendants. History 
deals in surprises and paradoxes quite as startling as this. The 
man who established a religion in this age of free debate, who 
was, and is to-day, accepted by hundreds of thousands as a 
direct emissary from the Most High — such a rare human being 
is not to be disposed of by pelting his memory with unsavory 
epithets. . . . Joseph Smith, claiming to be an inspired 
teacher, faced adversity such as few men have been called upon 
to meet, enjoyed a brief season of prosperity such as few men 
have ever attained, and finally, forty-three days after I saw him, 
went cheerfully to a martyr's death. When he surrendered his 
person t<> Governor Ford, in order to prevent the shedding of 

"blood, the Prophet had a present iment of what was before him. 

"I am going like a lamb to the slaughter," he is reported to 
have said, "but I am as ealm as a summer's morning. I have 
u conscience void of offence, and shall die innocent.'' 
16. Concluding remarks by Superintendent. 



342 TE KARERE Noeina 24, 19^6 

17. Congregational Song: Xo. 102, "We Thank Thee, O God, for a 

Prophet." 

18. Benediction by member of Intermediate Class. 

Karakia Kirihimete, 26 o Tihema, 1926 

Na te Tumuaki o nga Kura Hapati o te Mihana o Niu 
Tireni na Wiremu C. Kaa tenei karakia Kirihimete i whaka- 
rite hei mahinga ma tatou. Ma te) tumuaki o ia kura e 
tirotiro ko ewhea ranei o enei nama (items) e taea ana e tona 
Kura Hapati te mahi. I te mea hoki ko etahi o nga kura 
nunui e ahei ana te mahi i te katoa, ko etahi kia ono kia 
waru ranei nga nama ka pau, no te itiiti hoki o nga tangata. 

E rua nga tino take nunui e whakaritea ana i roto i tenei 
karakia. Tuatahi he whakanui i te Ra Whanau o te Karaiti, 
tuarua he whakahonore i te ra whanau a to tatou Poropiti a 
Hohepa Mete. Kia kaha tatou katoa ki te whakarite i to 
tena to tena wahi. Kaore he mahi karaihe i whakaritea mo 
tenei ra, no reira ma ia tangata, wahine, tamariki, e whaka- 
pau tona kaha kia tino pai ai to tatou karakia Kirihimete. Te 
taenga atu o nga Karere ma nga kaiwhakaako (apiha) e tuku 
atu ma tena ma tena o nga mema e whakarite tona wahi i 
roto i te karakia. A ma nga mema e mahi o ratou wahi kia 
tino rite i mua atu o te Ratapu Tuatoru. 
KARAKIA 

10:25 a.m. ma te kai-whakatangi-okena e ata whaka- 
tangitangi te okena kia mutu ai te turituri. 

10:30 a.m. ka timata te karakia, ma te hekeretari e panui 
nga meneti ara te "abstract." 

1. Himene No. 101 Pakeha. 

2. Whakatuwheratanga ki te inoi, ma tetahi o te Maori 
Theological. 

3. Himene Xo. 129 Pakeha. 

4. Ko te Hakarameta. 

5. Korero a Ngakau, ma tetahi o nga tamariki rarahi e 
whakahaere. 

1 a I Niwhai 11:13, 18, 20, 21. 
"A ka kite ahau i te pa o Nahareta; ka kitea hoki e ahau 
i roto i te pa o Nahareta he puhi, ataahua rawa, Ma tonu ia. 
Na ka ki mai (te anahera) ki a au, Nana, ko te puhi e kite na 
koe, ko te whaea ia o te Tama a te Atua, ki to te kikokiko 
ritenga. A ka titiro atu ahau, ka kite ano i te puhi, e okooko 
ana i tetahi tamaiti. A ka mea mai te anahera ki a au, Na, te 



Noema 24, [926 TK KARERE 343 

Reme a te Atua, ae ra, te Tama a te Atua Ora Tonu!" 

6. Paraketihi Himene, No. 4 Pakeha. 

7. Korero Ngutu-kau, ma nga tamariki pakupaku, "Kiri- 
himete." 

8. Waiata, ma nga tangata tokorua, iokowha ranei. 

9. Kauwhau ma tetahi o te Maori Theological (kia 10 
meneti te roa). 

Putake: Ko te Mihana o te Karaiti i tenei Ao." 

1. Ko nga whiunga mo te hara o Arama raua ko 
Iwi. 

2. Ko te whakamarietanga a te Karaiti, ona ahua- 
tanga 

(a) Taea ana e la te mate tinana. 

(b) Taea ana ano hoki te mate wairua. 

10. Waiata ma nga tamariki pakupaku. 

11. Tu-a-rarangi ma nga tamariki rarahi, me nga reta, 
"J-E-S-U-S C-H-K-l-S-T," me te korero a tena a tena i tana 
rarangi. 

12. Himene ma te koaea ma te katoa ranei, No. 8 Pakeha. 

13. Kauwhau (kia 10 meneti te roa) ma tetahi o te Pakeha 
Theological. 

Putake: "Nga Whakaakoranga a Hohepa Mete me 
nga Hua i Puta mai." 

14. Korero Ngutu-kau ma nga tamariki rarahi. 

"Whakamoemititia te Tamaiti." 

15. He korero pukapuka ma tetahi o te Pakeha Theolo- 
gical. "He Whakahonoretanga." 

16. He kupu whakamutunga ma te Tumuaki kin a Hapati. 

17. Himene, 102 Pakeha, 17 Maori. 

18. Inoi whakamutunga. 



Hui Pariha o Manaia (Waiokura) 

He powhiri atu tenei ki te iwi Maori me nga Hunga Ta- 
pu o nga motu nei. me nga hoa aroha ano hoki, kia haere 
mai ki te Hui Pariha o Taranaki ka tu nei ki Manaia (Waio- 
kura) a te 8 me te 9 o nga ra o Hanuere 1927. Ki nga iwi, ki 
nga hapu, ki nga reo, ki nga huihuinga tangata e noho mai 
na koutou i nga kainga 00 koutou tipuna, kuia, tena koutou, 
kia ora, ka huri, kia tae tinana mai koutou ki ta matou Hui 
Pariha. Mauri a mai nga kupu nunui, kia kai ta hi a tatou 
taringa i nga nica wairua. Haere mai. 

Ran M. Kina, I imnia k i Takiwa 
Turaki Manuirirangi, fumuaki Peka 



544 TIi KARERE Noema 24, iy26 



CONCERT RECITATION FOR DECEMBER, 1926. 

(Mark 10th Chapter, 14lh and 15th Verses.) 

"... Jesus . . . said unto them, Suffer little children 

to come unto me, and forbid them not ; for of such is the kingdom 

01 God. Verily I say unto you, Whosoever shall not receive the 

kingdom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein." 



KORHRO A NGAKAU MO TIHEMA, 1926. 

- Kei a Maka 1 o: 1 4.- 1 5. 
"A, te kitenga o Ihu, ka riri, ka mea ki a ratou, Tukua 
nga tamariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau, kaua hoki ratou 
e araia atu: no nga penei hoki te rangatiratanga o te Atua." 



MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



Ratapu tuatahi, Tihema 5, 1926. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. 

Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. 
Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- 
toi-ia nei e Ihu hei mahi ma tatou. 

Ko Ihu me nga Tamariki Nonohi 

"Na ka kawea ki a ia etahi tamariki nonohi, kia pa ai ia 
ki a ratou, otira ka riria e nga akonga te hunga nana i kawe. 
A, te kitenga o Ihu, ka riri, ka mea ki a ratou, Tukua nga 
tamariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau, kaua hoki ratou e 
araia atu: no nga penei hoki te rangatiratanga o te Atua. He 
pono taku e mea nei ki a koutou, Ki te kahore e rite te tango 
a tetahi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua ki ta te tamaiti nohi- 
nohi, e kore ia e tomo ki roto. Na okookona ana ratou e ia, 
whakapakia iho ona ringa ki a ratou, manaakitia ana ratou." 
Maka 10:13-16. 

I whakaaria e Ihu te matauranga nui i roto i tana mahi, 
me te aroha nui mo te katoa tae atu ki nga tamariki nonohi> 
kahore nei e mohio ki te hara me te riper.eta. Na tona aroha 
ki nga tamariki nonohi ka whakaaria e la te kaha o Tona 
aroha me te matauranga. 1 kite Ia i te tika o nga tamariki 
nonohi, a me te nui atu o nga mea e taea e la te ako ki nga 
tamariki i nga kaumatua. He aha te tikanga nui o tenei tau- 
ira a Ihu e mea ana i a tatou kia mahi? E tika ana me aroha 



1920 Tl£ KARF.RK 345 



tatou ki a Ihu, te take e aroha ana ano hoki la ki a tatou. Me 
ako tatou i a tatou tamanki tera a Ihu e aroha ana ki a ratou, 
a me te hiahia kia tika ratou. Me tarai tatou ki te pei i nga 
tohetohenga me nga puhaehaetanga me nga whakamana- 
mana o o tatou ngakau kia rite ai tatou ki nga tamariki no- 
nohi. We mahi tatou i nga mahi pai he mea e tiaki tika ai 
tatou a hei mea hoki e aru tika ai a tatou tamariki i a tatou 
tauira pera ano me ta Ihu hiahiatanga kia aru tatou i a la. 

Ko nga Pukapuka a Paora 

Na Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rapata Tanapu i whakarite. 

He kupu whakamarama ki nga kai-w hakaako me nga 
mema o tenei karaihe: Kei nga tuhituhinga a Paora o tatou 
akoranga hou. Timata mai i Teharonika ka haere o tatou 
rehana a kia pau ra ano nga tuhituhinga a Paora. Ko etahi 
o nga pukapuka ka pau i roto i te Ratapu kotahi, ko etahi 
kia wha kia rima pea nga Ratapu ka pau. Ka whakamutua 
tenei wahanga o o tatou akoranga ki a Timoti. Ka penei te 
haere o o tatou rehana: 

1. I Teharonika 8. Korohe 

2. 2 Teharonika 9. Epeha 

3. 1 Koriniti lu. Pirimona 

4. 2 Koriniti II. Taituha 

5. Karatia 12. Hiperu 

6. Roma 13- • Timoti 

7. Piripai 14. 2 Timoti 

Ratapu tuarua, Tihema 12, 1926. 

Akoranga 32 

Ko te Hani i Teharonika 

Te whakaatu: Kei Nga Mahi 17:1-3, kei a I Teharonika 
hoki. 

A. Ko te ahua o te Hahi, ara o te Hunga Tapu. 

1. Ko te aroha, te whakapono, te manawanui hoki i roto 
i nga whakamatautauranga. 1 Teharonika 1:3-6; 3-5-7- 

2. Ko te whakatakoto i nga tauira pai ki te hunga wa- 
ho ma runga i ratou mahi. 1 I eharonika i:/- c ); 4- 1() > 
Matiu 5:16. 

3. Ko te vvhakamanawanui i a ratou ano ki nga tiikino- 
tanga, he whakaaro hoki ki a te Karaiti. I Teharonika 
2:14-15; Nga Mahi E7:5-9- 

B. Te rrahi a Paora n e ona hoa i Teharonika. 



34° i E KARERK na 24, 1920 

1. O niton kauwhautanga me nga tukinotanga i puta 
mai. 1 Teharonika 2:2-16; Mahi f 6:22-23. 

2. Ko nga tauira i waihotia e ratou. 

(a) Ko te ngakau mahaki. 1 Teharonika 2:3-8. 

(b) Ko te ngakau whakawhetai. 1 Teharonika 2:13, 
19, 20; 3:9-10. 

(c) Ko to ratou kaha ki te mahi, kaore ratou i pai kia 
taimaha tetahi atu tangata i to ratod mahi. I Teha- 
ronika 2:9; 2 Teharonika 3:8-9. 

C. Kia aroha tetahi ki tetahi. 

I. Ta Paora whakatupatoranga. 1 Teharonika 3:12-13- 
Whakaritea ki te Akoranga me nga Kawenata 88:123- 
125. 

Katapu tuatoru, Tihema 19, 1926. 

Akoranga 33 

I Waenganiii i ng:i Teharonika 

A. I tohutohungia te Hunga Tapu kia rite o ratou meatanga 

katoa ki o te Karaitiana tika. 

1. Ko te tinana kia ma. I Teharonika 4:3-5; Hakopa 
2:28 (Pukapuka a Moromona); Akoranga me nga Ka- 
wenata 42:22-26. 

2. Kaua e tinihanga. i Teharonika 4:6, 12. 

3. Kia aroha. 1 Teharonika 4:9; 5:14; 1 Koriniti 13:1-7. 

4. Ko te haere tika (order), te kolahiianga o nga whaka- 
aro, me te kaha tonn ki te mahi. I Teharonika 4:11; 
Akoranga me nga Kawenata 42:42; 88:124. 

5. Kia nui te whakaaro ki nga tangata kei a ratou nei te 
mana o te Atua. 1 Teharonika 5:12-13. 

(6. Whakaritea nga whakahauhau kei a I Teharonika 
5:15-25 ki te tekau ma lorn o nga Tikanga o te Wha- 
kapono. 

B. Ko te aranga mai te hunga mate me te haerenga tuarua- 

tanga mai o te Karaiti. 

1. Ko to tatou Atua kola ano te Atua o te hunga ora, me 
to te hunga mate hoki. Mahi 10: j. 2 ; Ruka 2<:37-38. 

2. Ko te hunga e moe ana i roto i te Karaiti e ara tuatahi 
mai. I 'Teharonika 4:14; I Koriniti 15:23; Akoranga 
me nga Kawenata 88: 97-98. 

3. Ka toe ko te hunga ora. 1 Teharonika 4:15; Akoranga 
me nga Kawenata 8^:96; 76:102. 



Noema 24, L920 TE KARERE 347 

4. Ka heke mai a lhu i te rangi. I Teharonika 4:16; Ma. 
tiu 16:27; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 88:98. 

5. "Ano he tahae i te po." I Teharonika 5:2-10; 2 Pita 
3:10; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 45:44. 

Ratapu tuawha, Tihema 26, 1926 
Karakia Kirihimete, tirohia wharangi 338 



-0- 



PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL 
"GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS'* 

First Sunday, December 5, 1926. 

I XI FORM FAST DAY LESSON. 

The Example of Jesus: What it Bids us Do. 
Jesus and the Little Children. 

And they brought young children to him, that he should 
touch them; and his disciples rebuked them that brought them. 

"But when Jesus saw it, he wns much displeased, and said 
them not, for of such is the kingdom of God. 

'• Verily, I say onto you, Whosoever shall not receive the 
kingdom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein. 

"And he took them up in his arms, put his hands upon 
unto them. Suffer tin 1 little children to come unto me and forbid 
them, ami blessed them." Mark 10:13-16. 

Jesus throughout His ministry showed keen Intelligence, 
greal wisdom and discernment; tie also showed great power of 
reeling, compassion bolh for the innocent but impotent, and for 
the repentant sinner; His love and appreciation of little children 
showed His great power of mental acumen and of righteous 
emotion. He bolh fell and appreciated the characteristics and 

the future possibilities of childhood. What do these character- 
istics of Jesus bid us do.' In the child, especially, it should call 

Cor a responsive love and appreciation. Tins all adults should 
already have; in the child ii remains to be developed. In the 

lower classes emphasis should be placed upon the divine, loving 

and lovable personality of Jesus so .-is to call forth In the child 

faith in am! love for Him. Tins should lead to desire to ku.iw 

oihI io Follow i!is teachings It should lead children also to a 
.sense of the sae redness of then- own personalities, and faith in 



il KARERE Noema 24, 1926 

their future possibilities for good. This attitude to 

should, v( i-y naturally, be extended to their childhood friends and 

ciates. 

All of these appreciations of childhood should be manifested 
by adults, in addition, adults should exercise their superior 
knowledge and wisdom in the proper protection and guidance 
0!' children; at the same lime, in child-like faith and innocence 
of evil intentions (hey arc to he as little children. 

Tips regard for children and emulation of some of their 
characteristics should not he in words only. Mere lip service 
here is no better than to honour God with one's lips only. it 
is real, helpful service of head, heart and hand in the interests 
of child development in agreement with the Christ ideal that 
the example of Jesus bids us all to freely give. 

Second Sunday, Ikcunibci' 12, 1026 

Le son 30. Isaiah a Prophet of liepentance. 

Tex1 : l><>ok of ls;iiah. 

Objective: To show that God's purpose is to save His people 
and lie always gives them repeated warnings of His punishments 
before execut ing them. 

Supplementary References: II Beacon Lights of History 
I Lord) 287. This is a wonderful chapter and should be read 
by all teachers. 

Suggestions on Preparation and, Presentation: Discuss the 
following points : Isaiah a prophel of Judah as Elijah and 
Elisha had been 1<> Israel. Judah had turned from worshiping 
God lo ungodliness, tsiah born 760 B.C. teaches repentance. 
Had wife and two sons; lived to the age of 84 and according to 
tradition suffered martyrdom. A man of good breeding, greal 
dignity, experience and wisdom. His message was to his nation 
at a time when drunkness was a national vice and immorality 
rampant. He was a hopeful man and his condemnations of theii 

tlways concluded with promises of forgiveness if the people 
would repent. 

1. Compare the people of Israel just before their fall with 
ihf people of Judah at the time of Isaiah. 

2. Name three attributes of character that made Isaiah a 
: prophet of repentance. 



Noema 24, 1926 TE karere 349 

Third Sunday, December 19, 1926 

Lesson 27. Solomon, as a Man Leaving off Serving God. 

Text: 1 Kings 7: 11. — Book of Ecclesiastes. 

Objective: To show that as .Solomon left off serving God ho lost his 
power and his self-respect. 

He completed Ins temple and dedicated it; His prayer, 1 Kings, 8; 
His biess.ng on his people; both acts approved by the Lord; his downfall, 
1 Kings 11. Following this, he wrote Ecclesiastes. Contrast his attitude 
and spirit as therein expressed with his attitude as expressed in his 
Proverbs. 

Note: Through an error, the lesson, "Solomon, as a Man Leaving Oil' 
.Serving God, ,; was omitted from the schedule published. To be in 
order it should be numbered '11, the other lessons following in regular 
sequence: — Lesson 28, '•'The Division of the Kingdom"; Lesson 29, 
"Elijah"; Lesson oO, ' ' Elisha ' ' ; Lesson 31, "Isaiah, a Prophet of 
Kepentanee. ' ' 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Point out two lessons to be had from Solomon's life. 

2. Can you analyze the kind of life a man leads by his outward 
action/ If so, explain how. 



Fourth Sunday, December 26, 1926. 
Christmas Program, see page 338. 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 

THE HOOK OF MORMON" 

I irst Sunday, December 5, 1920 

FAST DAY LESSON. 

Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 317 

Second Sunday, December 12, 1926. 

Lesson 30. Uhrisl Minister** unto the Nephites, 

Texl .11! Ncphi 1 Ith to L4tb chapters. 

Objective: T<> teach the reality of the resurrection of Jesus 
Christ. I Note particular!} Ill Nephi 1 1 .'' I I 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
l. Genera] assignraenl of all the texl to lie read by < 

member of the class. 



355 l l KARERE i 192) 

2. Special assignment ■ 

a. The Saviour appears. HI Nephi 11:1-17. 

1>. Power given to baptise. MI Nephi 11:18-41.. 

c. The Holy Ghost promised. Ill Nephi L2:l, _.. 

(1. The Beatitudes. Ill Nephi 12:3-12. 

The salt, the light, and the Law. HI Nephi L3-20. 

I Thy brother and thee. Ill Nephi 12:21-26; 38-48. 

g. Purity commanded. Ill Nephi 12:27-37, 

h Prayer, alms, fasting, and treasures. Ill Nephi 13:1-24. 

i. Instructions to Twelve. Ill Nephi 13:25-34 

j. Instruction on many things. Ill Nephi, chapter 14. 

Note: The nine pans given above for special assignment 
should be eareiully assigned to those who would be able to 
memorise most of them. Thus each part could easily be given 
ir. four minutes or less. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1 Briefly state why yen think the Xephite knew "of u 
orety" thai Jesus was the Christ. 

'.!. Whai added evidence is given in this lesson that baptism 
is ;> necessary ordinance J 

.'). Mention some teaching made clearer to our under- 
standing by reading [Tl Nephi 12th !o 14th chapters. 

Third Sunday, December 19. 19'Ju. 

Lesson 31. Jesus Continues His Minis Lrations. 
Trxt: III. Nephi, 15th to 18th chapters. 

Objective: To teach that the Savior imparts many blessings to those 
w lio have fail h in Him. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation; 
1. special assignments t<> pupils: 

(a) The Law of Moses. 111. Nephi 15: i-10. 
Other sheep. 15: 1 1-24; 16: 1-5. 
Blessings on the Gentiles. 16: 6-20. 

(.1) The sick healed. 17: L-10. 

H') Blessing the children. 17: 1 1-25. 
(t) The Sacrament, 18: 1-13. 

a I 'raver. 1S : U-23. 

b - Parting instructions. 18: 
l'. Passages to Mark and Memorize: III. Nephi. 15: I): 18: 15-19. 
Encourage the pupils t-> whom special assignments are made to 
orize their parts. 



Noeina 24, lyiG TE KARKRE 351 

Questions for Teachers. 

.1. Review briefly the teachings of the Savior in this lesson in 
regard to the lost sheep of the house of Israel, the Gentiles and the 
Sac rain cut. 

'1. Compare the story told in Matthew 19: 13-15 with that in III. 
Xephi 7: 11-25. 

Fourth Sunday, December 29, 1926 
Christmas Program, see page 338. 



KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT 

I irst Sunday, December 5, 1926. 
Uniform Fast Day Lesson. 

Topic: The Blessing of Little Children. 
Time: Just after Christ foretold His death. 
Hace : On the coasts of Judea. 

General Reference: Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, 
Lesson 4o ; Jesus the Christ, pages 475-476. 

Objective: All who are honest and pure in heart shall 
i( urn to the presence of their Father. 
i. Jesus was preaching on the coast of Judea. 
! Mothers bring their children to be blessed. 
a. The disciples want to scud them away. 
}). Jesus rebukes the disciples and asks them to bring 
the children to Him. 
( 1 ) He told them the kingdom of God was composed 

of children. 
(2) Those who could no1 receive the kingdom of God 
as a Little child should not outer in. 
2. The children are brouphl to Jesus. 

;i. JeHUS lakes t liom and places His hands on iheir heads 
h. They go away rejnieiiw 

! I. Blessings received to day 

1 Blessed and named when babies. 

2. Blessed when ill. 

3. Blessed when sent on missions, 

4. Every one should live to enjoy the blessings given him 

5. Blessinirs come Prom God. 



te KARERh Noema 24, 1926 

Rest Exercise: Teach and dramatise the song, "Clouds of 
Grey, " Patty Hill's Song Book.. 1 Have every child participate 
in the dramatisation.) 

Suggestive Song: "Nature's Good-night" Patty Hill. 

Gem : 

'"When I run aboul all day 
When I kneel at night to pray, 

God sees. 

Need I ever know a fear ! 
Might and day my Father's near — 

God sees." 

— May Mapes Dodge. 
Second Sunday, December 12, 1926 

Topic: A missionary call and experience. 

Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten"; also "My 

First Mission,"' George (±. Cannon. 

Time: When Elder Cannon was on a mission. 

Place: in the mission field of Hawaii. 

Objective: Sacrifice through love for the Gospel brings 
spiritual blessings. 

jestions : Tell the children of the experiences Elder 
Cannon had, and how he sought the Lord for help on every 
occasion. How and why he was blessed. We never need to be 
afraid if we obey the teachings of our Heavenly Father and do 
what we know is right. 

"Seek ye first the kingdom of Heaven and all else will be 
added." Oh. if ye could only realise the importance and full 
meaning of that statement There would be less dishonesty and 
more righteousness in the world to-day. There is nothing on 
1 his earth that can give us the joy and happiness like the Spirit 
ot our Heavenly Father. Why. not, then, seek for that which 
gives us the greatest joy and happiness on this earth and fits 
us for the life to come? 

Any missionary experience where faith, faithfulness, and 
I rayerfulness has saved, or helped, may be used to illustrate 
the thought desired to he put over. 

Rest Kxereise: Sing and dramatise "Clouds of Grey." 

Review previous songs learned during the month or teach 



Noema 24, 1920 TK karere 353 

and sing iast verse of "Jesus Wants Me for a Sunbeam,' ' page 
211, D.S.S. Songs. 
Gem : 

"Kemember your prayers, little children, 
Both morning and evening each day, 
The Lord is e'er ready to hear you 
He loves all His children to pray. 

Third Sunday, December 19, 1926 

Topic: Why I should use all my time profitably. 

Text : Titus 3; James 1 and 2 chapters; Hebrew: 5. 

Objective: To teach that if we desire eternal life we must 
work tor it. 

Suggestions: Tell the story of ''How Bessie Became a 
Wonderful Woman," and apply to the life of the Kindergarten 
children.. 
1. Bessie as a child in the home. 

1. tier parents were very poor. 

a. Bessie helped in the home when only four and five 
years old. 

1 1 ) Washed, wiped and put away dishes. 

(2) Dusted. 

(3) Cared for the baby. 

b. Bessie at play. 

1 1 ) Took good care of her doll. 

(2) Kepi her playhouse clean ami tidy. 

(3) Took care of her toys and put them away when 
through playing. 

e. Obedient to parents. 

When mother or lather called she put her doll down 
and went cheerfully to help. 
[I. When Bessie grew up. 

1. Bessie had Learned to work and to do her work well by 
doiiiLi things the right way when a child. 

2. Everybody wanted Bessie t<» help them. 

:; Besssie was so cheerful and happy, always willing tu 

help. 
1. Bessie Learned, "Whatever you do. do with your might. 

for 'Inn'-, dune by halves, are never done right " she 



354 rn KARKKE Noema 24 

also learned thai when you have learned to do things and 
do them right everybody wants you to help them. 
Exercise: Le1 the children show you how they would 
put their toys away, their clothes at night, the dishes, etc., let- 
ting the teacher suggest only when they need some help in putting 
things jusl the way they ought to be. 

Fourth Sunday, December 26, I92<> 

Christmas Program, see page 338. 

o 

MAUI HUI ATAWHAI. 

KORA s. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. 

He Whakaaturanga ki nga Hui Atawhai 

Na Toke Watene i whakamaori. 

I te mea ka tae tureiti mai te Pukapuka Hui Atawhai ara 
magazine mo etahi marama ka whakaaro au me whakarere 
kotahi marama ano ki muri te magazine. He tureiti raw a 
te taenga mai i tenei marama kia whakamaoritia mo Te Ka- 
rere. No reira e hiahia ana an ki nga teina me nga tuakana 
e whakahaere arra i te Pukapuka Hui Atawhai, kia tango 
i tenei akoranga i roto nei i Te Karere, mo runga i te lnoi ) 
kia whakahaere i tenei, a kia ata waihotia te mea i rot) i te 
pukapuka (magazine) mo Hanuere. 

Ko te take o tenei kia kotahi katoa ai tatou e whakahaere 
tahi ana i roto i te akoranga kotahi ia marama. 

AKORANGA MO TIHEMA 
KO TE INOI 

A. He aha te inoi? 

Ko te inoi te tino hiahia te ngakau 
I whakapuakina, i whakapuakina koretia ranei 

He tohn ra no te ahi huna 
K wiri.ra i roto i te uma. 

Ko te inoi te ahuatanga ngawari atu o nga whai kupu 
E taea ana e te n'gutu tamariki te whakamatau. 

Te inoi te rongo nui e tae 
Ki te Kingi i runga ra. 

He mea hoki te inoi e ahei ai te tangata ki te korerorero 



Noema 24, [926 TE KARERE 355 

tahi me te Atua. 

B. Te wa hei inoitanga. 

1. I te po i te ata o nga ra katoa. 

(a) He tono atu mo nga manaakitanga e hiahiatia 
ana. 

(b) He tuku whakawhetai atu mo nga manaaki- 
tanga kua liro mai. 

2. I te wa o te raruraru, o te rawakoretanga ranei. 

(a) "Ki te hapa tetahi o koutou i te matauranga 
me inoi ia ki te Atua e homai nui nei ki te katoa, kahore 
hoki ana tawai mai, a ka hoatu ki a ia. Otira me inoi wha- 
kapono ia, kaua e ruarua. le tangata ruarua hoki, tona rite 
kei te ngaru o te moana e puhia ana e te hau, e akina ana." 
Hemi 1:5-6. 

(b) "Ki te turorotia letahi i roto i a koutou, me 
karanga e ia nga kaumatua o te hahi. a ma ratou e inoi ki 
runga ki a ia, me te whakawahi ano i a ia ki te hinu i runga 
i te ingoa o te Ariki. A e ora te turoro i te inoi whakapono, 
ma te Ariki ano ia e whakaaia ake, a ki te mea kua mahi 
hara ia, ka miuua tona hara." Hemi 5:14-15. 

(c) He tokomaha nga Hunga Tapu kua whiwhi ki 
nga whaaturanga whakamiharo i te Ariki, he whakautu ki 
nga inoi, me nga whakawahinga ki nga turoro. 

3. 1 mua te paanga ki te kai. 

(a) Ko te whakawhetai ki te Atua mo taua mea, 
me te tono atu ki a la kia whakapaingia hei painga ki 
tatou tinana. 

4. I te timatanga me te whakamutunga nga kara- 
kiatanga. 

(a) Mo Tona Wairua, v arahi ai i nga mea katoa 
e k ore rot i a ana e mahia ana. me te whakarite i nga hine- 
ngaro mo te hopu i te pono. 

(hi Hei mea hoki e tiakina ai tatou ina hoki atu 

tatou ki o tatou kainga i te mutunga nga karakia. 
('. Mr pehea te alma o te inoi? 

1. "Me inoi whakapono ia." Hemi 1:6. 

2. Kua homai te Inoi a te Ariki hei tauira 1 roto i te 
ngawaritanga me te pono. 

Kaua e malia nga kupu ki mua i te Atua 111,1 inoi, he 
mea kia rangona r nga tangata. Matin 6:5-14, 

3. Kia iitc te inoi ki ta te Karaiti i a i roto 1 te kail Q 

Kehemane. "Kaua e waiho i taku i pai a 1 , engari i tau." 

Matin 26:39. 



356 i e karere Noema 24. [9^6 

Korerotia nga take e whai ake nei. 

Te inoi a tiohepa Mete me tana kitenga tuatahi. 

Me heme a kei te tika ta Matin i te 6:8. He aha te take 

te inoi? 

Nga painga e puta ake ana ma roto i te whakarite i nga 
inoi a te whanan (family). 

Te rereketanga i waenganui i te inoi whakatuwhera, a 
whakamutunga hoki. 

Homai etahi ahuatanga i puta he whakautu ki te inoi. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 

NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. 

Nga Mahi ma nga Matua Hunga Tafu 

1. Ko te ako i a ratou tamariki i roto i te huarahi e haere 
ai ratou. Ako. me nga Kawe. 68:25. 

2. Ko te whakaako-a-tanira, a kaua ma roto i te huhua 
korero. 

(a) "Kia mahara ki te Ra Hapati kia whakatapua. " 
Ako. me nga Kawe. 68:29. 

(b) Ko te haere ki nga karakiatanga. 

(c) Ko te utu whakatekau me te whakaako i nga 
tamariki ki taua tikanga. 

(d) Ko te pupuri i te Kupu te Matanranga. 

(e) Ko te ako i a ratou ki te inoi i ma roto i te inoi a 
te whanan (family) me te tono atu i a ratou kia whai mahi 
tahi i roto. 



He Tika Ranei nga Hahi Katoa ? 

E tika ana ranei nga hahi katoa. ara no te Atua katoa 
ranei ratou? Laku whakautu puta noa ki nga pito e wha o te 
ao. kahore i te tika te katoa, ara kotahi ano te mea tika i roto 
i nga haahi katoa i runga i te mata o te whenua, ko te Hahi 
o Jhu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu nga Ra o Mini Nei. Koia te 
hahi e kiia nei e te ao he Moromona. E koa ana ahau mokn 
i whakamohiotia e te Wairua o te Atna i te tan 1900 koia nei 
te hahi tika 

Kei roto i tenei hahi he apotoro, he poropiti, he kai- 
whakaako, he merekara, he whakaora turoro, he hoa mahi, 
he kai-whakahaere tikanga. Tirohia I Koiiniti 12:28, "Kua 
whakanohoia ano e te Atua etahi i roto i te hahi; nga apoto- 



Noema 24. lojj TE KARERE 



lj k[ nn.a; ti.arua ko nga poicpiti; tuatoru ko nga kaiwhaka- 
akj, muij iho ko nga meiekara; me i reira ko nga mana wha- 
kao A a ko r.ga hoa mahi, ko nga kai-whakahaeie tikanga, ko 
nga *eo ke." Kei ioto i te Hahi o te iwi Moromona enei apiha 
o te hahi peia i te wa i r.^a ai otcio i rung a i te w henua, i te 
taa jj A.D. ki te tan too A.D. 

Ke : ioto i ienei hahi te mana o Meiekihereke me te mana 

te 1 cliunjiatanga o Aror.a. Ko er.ei mana nunui e kore e 
riro nca i te tangata, engan ka riio i te tangata e wkakaritea 
e te Ati a kia riro i a ia. lirohia hiperu 5:4, '*E koie ano 
hoki tetahi e tan^c i tei ei honor e ki a ia ano, engari te ta- 
ngata e kaian^atia e te Atia, e peratia ai a me Aiona." He 
mea ka/ar.ga a Aiuna ma roto i a Mohi. 

1 te is'2o ka inbi ake a Hohepa Mete ki te Atua ko tehea 
te Laahi tika lei urunga atu mona. Te whakautu ki a ia 
kaua ei.ru atu ki tetahi o ratou no te mea ko a ratou whaka- 
akoranga he w hakahaunga ia te tangata. Ko te ahua o te 
kaiak'a kei a iatou ko tor.a kaha ia whakakahoretia iho. I 
tenei wa o te k >re kaha o nga karakia, me te taenga ki nga 
wa o nga kingitanga kotahi tekau i tae ai ki o ratou ra e tu 
ai. ka Luiihia atu ki a Hohei a Mete te whakahaere i te Ro- 
ngopai o Ihu Karaiti me te hanga ake i te Kingitanga o te 
Karaiti. I irohia Raniera 2:44, "N'a i nga ia o enei kingi, 
ka whakaturla e te Atua o te rangi he kingitanga e kore e 

1 ; a,u Na e kcie le ki r gitanga e waiho mo tetahi atu iwi; 
engari ko tera hei wahi, hei whakamoti i enei kingitanga 
katoa, ko ia ano ka tu tonu a ake ake." 

I hoatu e te Atua he v\ hi kakaunj. a kia w 1 akatuiia te 
Hahi lhu Kaiaiti, kia hanga ake te Kingitanga i korerotia 
nei e Raniera, ki a Hohepa Mete i te 1830. 1 te wa 14 ona 
tau i tutuki ta Hakaraia poropiti i mea ai (2:4). "Xa ka ki 
mai teva ki a ia. Ke.e ..tu, ka korero atu ki te tainaiti nei, 
mea atu. Ka nohoia a Hiruharama ka rite ki nga pa taiepa- 
kore, i te tini o te tangata, o nu r a kararehe 1 ioto." 

Ka homai ki a Hohepa Mete te mana mo te kauvshau i te 
Rongopai pono. Kei nga Whakakitenga 14:6, "A i kite ano 
ahau i tetahi . 01 anahera e rere ana i *aenganui <> te rangi, 
kei a ia te rongopai mau tonu hei kauwhau mana ki te hunga 

e noho ana i te whenu;i. ki nga iwi katoa. ki nga hapu. ki 

nga reo, ki nga huihuinga tangata." 

Kei liea te hahi i rite ki tenei te rite ki te hahi 1 nga ra >» 
nga apol >ro? Kei l ea te hahi kua ara ake he poropiti i muri 
mai i ii".. 1 apol no hei whakatutuki i te kupu .1 Paora i a 



fE KARERE Noema 24. 1^20 



ma 12:6, "Na ka rere ke nei nga mea i homai ki a tatou, he 

mea e rile ana ki te aroha noa i homai ki a tatou, ki te mea 
he mahi poropiti, kia rite ki nga tikanga te whakapono," 
penei me te Hahi Moromona e haere ana i te akoranga te 
Paipera? Kei hea atu o te ao he iwi i tukinotia. i peia i o 
ratou pa nui, a i patupatua mo to ratou whakapono ki to 
ratou Atua, penei i nga Moromona? Kei hea te iwi i peneitia 
e te Atua i roto i nga ra o muri nei, i arahina ki te waahi hei 
okiokinga mo ratou, me te hanga i to ratou pa tino ataahua 
i te ao katoa, penei i te arahinga mai te Hunga Tapu e te 
Atua i Winita Koata i te 1847, i homai nei e la (e te Atua) ki 
a Pirikamu Iaanga, te kai-rrataki i tenei haerenga, mo nga 
maero 1000? Kei hea te iwi e hanga temepara ki runga ki te 
tihi o nga maunga penei i te Hunga Tapu kua hanga i tetahi 
ki taua pa hou a te Pa Tote kei Amerika penei i te whaka- 
aturanga a Mika 4:1-2. "Na tenei ake kei nga ra whaki.mutu- 
nga ka whakapumautia te maunga i to Ihowa whare ki te 
till i o nga maunga, ka whakanekehia ake ano ki runga i nga 
pukepuke, a ka rere nga iwi ki rei±a. Ka haere hoki nga iwi 
maha, ka mea, haere mai, tatou ka haeie ki runga ki te mau- 
nga o Ihowa. ki te whare te Atua o Hakopa, a mana tatou 
e whakaako ki ana ara, ka haere hoki tatou i ana huarahi; no 
te mea ka puta mai te ture i Hiona. me te kupu a Ihowa i 
Hiruharama." Koia tonu tenei ko te ako a te Moromona ko 
te ako i nga whakahaunga kua korerotia e te poropiti. 

Kei hea atu te iwi kua hanga i te temepara pera i te mea 
kua ki ake ra i tae nga tau i hanga ai ki te 40 tau ka oti, hei 
jriiri i nga tupuna kua matemate i nuia atu o te taenga mai o 
te Rongopai hei whakarite i ta Paora (1 Koriniti 15.291. "Pe- 
nei ka aha te hunga e iriiria ana hei whakakapi mo te hunga 
mate, ki te kore rawa te hunga mate e ara? he aha hoki ratou 
ka iriiria ai hei whakakapi mo te hunga mate?" 

Kei hea te iwi penei i nga hunga Moromona kua hanga 
tapenakara, pera i nga ra i a Mohi e arahi ana i a Iharaira? 
Kua oti nei i a ratou te hanga tetahi, koia tetahi nga tape- 
nakara nui kei te ao katoa, kua hanga e te iwi o te Atua hei 
koropikotanga atu ki a la. Ko te roa o te whare e 250 putu, 
ko te whanui 15c putu, e 80 putu te teitei, e 44 nga pou ko- 
liatu hei pupuri ake i te aata o te tuanui, e 5 nga tau i hanga 
ai ka oti. Ko te okena kei roto, koia tetahi o nga okena nui 
i te ao katoa. ko te whanui e 60 putu, ko te hohonu e 33 putu, 
e 48 putu te teitei. e 8000 nga paipa, e 270 nga stops. Ko te 
uira (electricity) hei whakatangi. Ko te hau hei pupuhi i nga 



Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 359 

paipa he mea huri e nga mihini (engines) e wha, e 32 hoiho 
te kaha o te puhipuhi hau. 1 1 tau te whakahoutanga o te 
okena e kore e he mo nga tau maha kei te haere mai. Ko te 
maha o nga kai-waiata kei te taha o te okena o ratou noho- 
anga e 400 e waiata ana no te kore utu. Ko te hunga e uru 
ana ki loto i te tapenakara 10,000 (tekaii mano). 

Kua oti enei mea i te iwi e mahi pono ana ki to ratou 
Atua. Kua rite te kupu a te Poropiti Ehekiere (37:26-27), "Ka 
whakaritea ano e ahau he kawenata mo te rongo mau ki a 
ratou; hei kawenata mau tonu tena ki a ratou, ka whaka- 
nohoia ano ratou e ahau, ka whakanuia, ka whakaturia ano 
e ahau toku wahi tapu ki waenganui i a ratou a ake ake. Na 
ki a ratou toku tapenakara: a ko ahau he Atua mo ratou, ko 
ratou ano hei iwi maku." 

Kei hea atu te iwi penei i nga kai-kauwhau o te Hunga 
Tapu? Kua whakarerea atu o ratou whare papai me nga 
maara, me nga whaea, tuahine, wahine, tamariki, me a 
ratou mahi e puta ai nga moni tinitini ki a ratou. Ko te take 
ko ratou he pononga pono na te Karaiti. Matiu 19:29, "A ki 
te mea kua mahue i tetahi he whare, he teina, he tuahine 
ranei, he papa, he whaea, he wahine, he tamariki, he maara, 
he whakaaro hoki nona ki toku ingoa, ka tataki rau nga mea 
e riro i a ia, a e whiwhi ano ia ki te ora tonu." Ko enei kai- 
kauwhau, 8 mano maero te tawhiti mai i o ratou kainga kua 
mahuetia atu ki muri. Ko ratou nga kaumatua Moromona no 
Uta, ara no Amerika. E rua mano ratou kei te ao katoa e 
kauwhau ana i te Rongopai i runga i te utu kore. Pera i a 
Paora Apotoro (I Koriniti 9:18). 

"Na, he aha koia te utu rnoku? ara ka meinga e ahau 
kia kore e utua te rongopai o te Karaiti, ina kauwhautia e 
ahau; kei he i ahau nga tikanga o te rongopai kua tukua ki 
ahau." 

! le pera ano t;i te Ariki kupu * 1 akaari mo nga kai-kau- 
whau (Matiu 10:7-8), "Me kauwhau haere hoki, me ki. Kua 
tata te rangatiratanga o te rangi. Whakaorangia nga turo- 
ro, whakamakia nga repera, wl akaarahia nga tupapaku, 
peia nga rewera; ka riro noa nei i .1 koutou, me hoatu noa e 
koutou." E hoa ma, ko te mahi kauwhau i te Rongopai te 
mea e kii;i atu nei me kauwhau noa atu, kaua e utu, a 1 riro 
noa atu hoki i a ratou te mana nui mo te ra mai i runga 1 te 
utu kore. Eng. ri kua rite i te Atua he utu tino nui ki nga 
kai-kauwhau, ko te whiwhi ki te kororia me te haringa nui 
i roto i Tona Kingitanga mo nga tau kotahi mano. 



rE karere Noema 24, iqjs 

K<> te tino putake nui i taea ai enei mahi kei roto i nga 
Hunga Tapu te Aroha, te i umanako, te VVhakapono. Ko 

enei ahua e toru hore kau i te hunga hore ano i whanau hou. 
Ma te whakapono anake ki te Rongopai Ihu Karaiti, me te 
whakarite i nga tikanga, katahi ano ka taea. 

E te Hunga Tapu, e nga tuakana, e nga tuahioe, tena 
koutou. Tenei ahau to koutou pononga i roto i tenei Rongo- 
pai o to tatou Ariki, i te tuhi nei ki Te Karere hei mea e tino 
neke ake ai a tatou mahi pono i roto i tatou karangatanga 
i runga i te mea kua kite nui tatou i te tino tika tenei take 
ara to tatou whakapono. Koia te mea tino kaha, tino nui, 
i roto i te ao katoa, lie mahi na to tatou Matua i te rangi. 

Me whakamarama atu e ahau mo tenei wahi o to tatou 
whakapono ara o nga tikanga 1 te rarangi 10, "E whakapono 
a na matou ki te huihuinga katoatanga Iharaira, ki te wha- 
kahokinga mai ano hoki o nga hapu kotahi tekau, ki te 
hanganga o Hiona ki tunga ki tenei tuawhenua (ki Amerika) 
ki te kingitanga tangatatanga o te Karaiti ki te whenua, ki 
te rironga hoki i a ia tona kororia pararaiha." E te Hunga 
Tapu, e rua nga wahi whakamiharo kei roto i tenei wahi o to 
tatou whakapono. He mea tino nui rawa tera e kite nga iwi 
katoa te ao. Ko enei mea e rua kei roto tonu i enei wa, no 
reira, e te Hunga Tapu, kia noho reri i nga wa katoa. Tua- 
tahi, ko to tatou kohinga. Ki te tae mai te kupu a te Tumu- 
aki Tuatahi o te Hahi kia kohikohia atu kia haere tena iwi, 
tena iwi o te Hunga Tapu i nga wahi o te ao, me ratou 
hepara ara me nga kaumatua, kaua e ki me pehea e tae ai te 
haere. E hoa ma, he tino pakeke ke atu te tae atu i konei i a 
an nei ki Kaikohe i to tatou tae ki Hiona a te wa e poto ai te 
kohikohi aua hapu kua kiia ake ra, ko reira hanga ai te pa 
nui e korerotia ra e Etere (1 j:«), "No reira ka hanga te toenga 
o te whare o Hakopa ki runga ki tenei whenua; a ka waiho 
ia hei whenua tupu mo ratou; ka hanga hoki e ratou he pa 
tapu ki te Ariki ka pera n.e te Hiiuharama onamata; a ka- 
hore ratou e whakapoauautia ano, kia tae mai ra ano te nm- 
tunga. e pah em o ai te whenua." A te wa e hanga ai taua pa 
ka heke iho i te rangi te pa i kitea ra e Hoani Whakakitenga 
(21:2), ara te pa o Enoka i tangohia atu ra e te Atua ki te 
rangi i nga ra i a Enoka. Ka whakahokia mai taua pa, ka 
hanga tahitia kia kotahi raua ko te pa kua tuhia ake ra. A- 
koranga me nga Kawenata 84:100, 

"Kua whakaputa mai te Ariki i Hiona i runga. 

Kua whakaputa mai te Ariki i Hiona i raro." 



Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 361 

64:41, "No te mea, nana ka mea atu nei ahau ki a koutou, 
ka tupu kaha te whenua o Hiona, a ka tau te kororia o te 
Ariki ki runga ki a ia." 

64:43, "A ka puta mai te ra e tuwiri ana nga iwi katoa o 
te ao, mona te take, a ka wehi mo aua mea nanakia kua 
whakapuakina e te Ariki." 

I mohio a Aperahama ki tenei pa, koia te putake o tona 
noho manene. Hiperu 1 1 : 10, "I tatari hoki ia ki te pa whai 
turanga, ko te Atua nei te kaihanga, te kaimahi." 

Koia nei to tatou tumanako e ki mai ra 2 Pita 3:13, "Heoi 
kei te tumanako tatou ki nga rangi hou, ki te whenua hou, ki 
tana i whakaari mai ai, kei reira te tika e noho ana." 

Ka hanga i mua tata o te taenga mai o te Ariki. Kia oti 
ka whakatapua te whenua ka whakahoutia. Whakakitenga 
21:1, "L kite ano ahau i te rangi hou, i te whenua hou: kua 
pahemo hoki te rangi tuatahi, me te whenua tuatahi; a ka- 
hore atu he moana." 

E te Hunga Tapu koia nei te whakamarama ki te ao 
katoa o te pono kotahi ano hahi o te Atua: ko te Hahi Mo- 
romona. Kei a ratou te matauranga ki nga mahi a te Atua, 
me to ratou i rongo hei mahi i Ana mahi nunui. Kei nga 
hahi katoa oti tenei matauranga Kore rawa atu, ko to ratou 
matauranga no te tangata. 

E te Hunga Tapu tcna koutou, na to koutou teina, tu- 
ngane i roto i te mahi pai a te Atua, 
Mangonui NGAPUH1 RENATA 

Ko nga Mahi Whakatangitangi o te Kareti 

Kei te tupu tonu te mahi whakatangitangi i te Kareti 
(M.A.C.). Kua hokona mai etahi pu whakatangitangi hou i 
Amerika, ara he saxophone, he koronete, he baritone, me 
etahi atu. Ka nui hoki te hihiko O nga tamariki kura ki te 
ako i roto i nga ropu whakatangitangi, ropu waiata, 1 whaka- 

turia nei hei ako i a ratou ki te waiata me te purei. Na to 

ratou kai-whakaako na Erata Tipene 1 whakatu he concert 
me te kanikani ki te hooro i Hehitingi i te 22 nga ra He- 
petema i hori ake nei. Ka nui te whakamihi nga tangata 
i tae. Ka nui hoki nga moni i riro mai i a ratou hei whaka- 
hou i ratou pu (instruments). 

Te wliak.il.au a te rumuaki Mihana, kia kaha ia tamaiti 
ia tamaiti tae atu hoki ki ratou matua ki te whakawhaiti 
hereni, hei utu mo ratou kura 1 tenei tau e tu mai nei. No te 



362 



TE KARERE ma 24. ll,20 



mea kahore e pai kia whakctaumaha ano nga tamaiiki i te 
Kareti, i to ratou ko:e mor.i. 




Ko te M.A C. Band, nga kai-whakahaere ko Hori 
Henihana ran a ko Huriana Tipene 




Ko te Saxophone Band, kai-whakahaere ko Tipene 



Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 363 



Ko te Kari o Erene 

Ki Te Karere, tena koe. Tenei ano etahi kupu hei pa- 
nuitanga mau ki nga wahi e tae ai koe. 

Kaati, i runga i te whakaaturanga a te Pakeha mo te 
Kari o Erene i Ahia (ara Asia), no reira ka hiahia ahau ki te 
whakaatu i te whakaaro o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri 
Nei. E ki ana ratou kna oti te whakaatu ki to ratou Poropiti 
ki a Hohepa Mete te whenua i tu ai taua kari. Otira me 
waiho marire tena no te mea ka taea e te ao te mea he teka 
te whakaaturanga ki a Hohepa Mete, engari me whakatepe 
mc.i e ahau i te timatanga. 

Ka hanga e te Atua te whenua me nga mea katoa, nga 
kaiarehe me era atu. Katahi hoki ka hanga te tangata hei 
rangatira mo aua mea. Ka hanga te Kari Erene. Ka oti 
enei mea katoa ka meinga nga mea kia hua kia tini, kia kapi 
te ao. Ka timata te tupu o nga kararehe o nga tangata i 
runga i te wahi kei reira ra te kari. Tae noa mai ki a Noa 
kahore ano he whakaaturanga kua haere nga tangata i tua 
atu i te wahi kei reira te kari. Engari no tenei wa tonu ka 
whakahaua e te Atua kia hanga he kaipuke e Noa no te mea 
ka whakangaromia te ao me nga mea katoa ki te waipuke. 
Ka oti te kaipuke ka utair.a takirua o ia ahua o nga mea o te 
whenua me nga tangata tokowaru ki runga. Ka mutu ka 
tukua iho te ua tino kaha a maanu ana te kaipuke a puhia 
ana hoki e te hau. 

Na kua mohio tatou kua maanu i runga i te whenua i te 
kari nei, ara ka mahue iho te whenua te Kari Erene, a u 
ana ki tetahi atu whenua. Ko te whenua i u ai te kaipuke e 
kiia ana ko Ioropi (Europe) ina hoki koia anake tera ko te 
whenua i ki i te tangata, a i reira ka marara haere ki nga 
tini motu o te ao nei. Na kua mohio tatou ehara i Ahia te 
whenua i reira te Kari Erene no te mea ko Ahia kei roto 
te rohe luropi. A mehemea hoki i reira te kaipuke e maanu 
ana e kore e ahei kia tau iho ano ki taua wahi no te hum c 
ki ana i maanu a i puhia hoki e te hau. 

No reira ka whakaponohia e tc Hunga Tapu te whaka- 
aturanga a to ratou poropiti e: i An erika te Kari o Erene. 
Kati nei ano te whakamarama, kia ora te Etita, ma te 

Atua koe e tautoko. Heoi aim na to teiiia. 

Paepae VV, Whehira 



364 



TE KARKRK 



Noema 24, 1920 



-; ; - 



He Ripoata Whakawhitinga Moana 




Ki Te Karere, tena koe. Mahau 
e panui nga korero o ta maua haere 
me a maua tamariki e toru, ko Ra- 
hera, ko Arihi, ko Manahi Nitama. 

Ki te Iwi Maori: E nga morehu 
tena koutou e noho mai nei i rung a 
i nga moutere o te moana, ara i ru- 
nga i Aotearoa me te Waipounamu. 
Tenei ahau kei te whenua o te kupu 
whakaari e tuhi atu ana i taku rete. 
Na te aroha me nga whakaaro me 
Nireaha Paewai nga mahara, i tuhi atu ai enei ko- 
rero hei korero ma koutou. 

Tetahi, kua kite ahau i te man te aroha nga kauma- 
tua kua hokihoki mai i Niu Tireni. Kei a ratou koutou 
whakaahua me a koutou taputapu aroha. 

No te rua tekau ma iwa o Hurae i wehe mai ai maua me 
a maua tamariki i Tahoraiti i te peka Tamaki. 1 te torn o 
nga ra o Akuhata ka wehe mai matou i Niu Tireni i runga 
i te Aorangi. E torn nga ra ka tae matou ki YYhiti (Fiji). E 
ono nga haora e haereere ana i te taone Suva ka hoki ma- 
tou ki runga tima. 1 te ono i te ahiahi ka mahue i a matou a 
Whiti. I te pai te moana tae noa matou ki Hawaiki, e whitu 
nga ra e haere ana ka tae matou. Ka u matou ki te whenua, 
ka tae mai te tama a Wiremu Karaka Ngatiporoua me 
tona kotiro Hawaiki me nga matua o te kotiro. Ka mutu te 
ruru ka mauria matou ki to ratou kainga. Te hahi o te iwi 
nei ko te pekanga o te hahi Moromona, te ingoa ko te "Re- 
organized Church" or "Josephite." Te taenga ki te kainga 
he "luao" e takoto mai ana, ara ki te Maori he hakari. Ka 
mutu te kai ka tae mai nga kaa e toru. Ka riro matou ki te 
matakitaki whenua a pau noa tena ra. I te po ka rere ano 
to matou tima a "Aorangi." E whitu nga ra e rere ana ma- 
tou i runga tima ka u matou ki te whenua o Amerika ki te 
taone o Vancouver. I te ata ka tukutuku matou ka tutaki 
ahau ki nga kaumatua te Hahi. Ka mahue tooku hoa me 
nga tamariki ki tetahi nga kaumatua, ka haere maua ko te 
tumuaki ko Elder Whiting te ingoa, ki nga kai-tirotiro o 
Amerika i mua i te urunga a te tangata ki Amerika. Katahi 



Noema 24, 1926 Ti£ KARI.RE 365 

ka ki mai te kai-tirotiro kahore tooku hoa me a maua tama- 
riki e whakaaetia kia haere tahi me al.au ki Amerika. Ka- 
tahi ka piira ahau ki te kawanatanga o Amerika, katahi ka 
whakahokia mai, me tuku tooku hoa me a maua tamariki kia 
whai i ahau ki te whenua o Amerika. E ma wiki e noho 
ana i a Vancouver katahi ano matou ka puta. 

No te 5 o nga ra o Hepetema ka tae ki te Pa Tote, e toru 
nga ra e rua nga po e haere ana i runga tereina. Ka tuku- 
tuku maua me nga tamariki i te teihana, i reira a Matiu Kau- 
ri, a Nitama, Hokarana, Pene Katata, a Leo B. Sharp, a 
Birkenshaw, a Patrick, a Jorgenson, me etahi atu, me a 
ratou wahine, e vvhanga ana ki a matou. Ka miuu te rum 
me te mini ka mauria matou ki te kainga o Leo B. Sharp. Ka 
noho matou i reira, e rua nga wiki ki te Pa Tote, te mahi he 
haeieere ki te matakitaki, ko nga kaumatua o Niu Tireni ki 
te mau haere i runga i o ratou moto kaa. Te moto kaa tua- 
tahi no Leo B. Sharp; tuaiua no te Tumuaki o te Hahi, he 
Packard, ko Alex Anderson te kai-arahi, nana matou i mau 
ki Saltair. Tuatoru, ko te kaa o Matiu Kauri, he Ford. I 
mauria matou e ia, me tarna wahine me ta raua pepi, ki E- 
migration Canyon. Kpia nei te waahi i eke mai ai a Pirika- 
mu laanga me tana ropu tuatahi ki te Pa Tote, i karanga 
i i ia, "This is the place." Tuawha ko te kaa o Erata Mor- 
rison, nana matou ko tooku whanau i nan ki Provo. 1 mauria 
matou ma American Fork Canyon and Provo Canyon. 1 kite 
ahau i a VViremu Pakimana, me Manaro Horopuruku, me 
Mac Roundy, me Lester Taylor, me Pecker, me te wahine a 
Jesse Knight me taana tama i Lenei waahi. 1 te Taite ka tae 
matou, i te po a te Hataiei ka w hakahokitia matou ki te Pa 
Tote e te papa o Roundy i runga i te Chrysler, 

1 te ata o te Ratapu ka mauria matou e Erata Hebei C, 
Jex ki Rokana (Logan). 1 reira ka kite matou i a Erata Teo 
More re me Erata Moser. 1 te po ka haere matou ki Lewiston 
ki te kainga <» Wiser me Westover. I kite matou i a Waiha, 
no innri ia i hoki mai ai i Niu 1 ireni i a matou, engari no 
muri a ia i tae ai. I moe matou ki te kainga << Erata Moser. 

I te ata ka l.< ki ki te 1'a I oh', i te laiarahi ka peke matou ki 
te kainga a limuaki Kaiti, a ki tana toa hoki. Naana te toa 
inn 1 kite ai ahan. Nga nr.i katoa i hiai.ia ai te tan-ala km 

roto, men's mercer, ladles' department, furniture department, 
ladies and men 1 boot department, butcher and fish depart 
ment, cafe, fanc> goods department, candies department 
and many othei thing kua wareware ahau. I \..\rw matou 



366 te karkrk Noema 24. 19 jo 

ki Ogden Canyon i reira tona wahine e takoto ana i te mate. 
Kua wliati tetahi nga iwi tona peke. I taka iho i rung a 
pikitanga (stairs), engari kei te 1 >a i haere tona peke, taihoa 
ka pai. Ka ahiahi ka hoki matou me Erata Heber C. Jex me 
taana wahine ki te Pa Tote E rua o matou po ki te whare 
o Jex ka hoki niaua me a maua tamariki ki te whare Sharp. 
E rua nga po o tenei wiki i mauria ai maua me nga tamariki 
ki te purei. Te po tuatahi na Jex, he drama, te po tuarua he 
vaudeville, na Erata Bird i man matou. 1 kai hoki matou ki 
toona whare i te po te Paraire. 1 te Hatarei ka maua a 
maua pouaka e te rore Sharp & Co. ki te teihana, ma te 
t ere in a e mau ki Rokana. i hoko maua i nga mea e rite ana 
mo te kitini i te toa a Sharp \- Co. 1 homai e taua toa mo te 
wholesale price a maua taputapu mo to maua whare, S43 te 
iwa nga pauna) te utu. I tina maua ko Erata Alex Ander- 
son ki te Hotel Utah, he hiahia noona kin kite ahau i tera 
waahi i te cafeteria. I reira maua, ka kite ahau i a Ruw 
K. Haari me tana wahine. 1 hongi rawa maua. Ka kite hoki 
ahau i a 1 imuaki Romeni me taana wahine. 1 te po ka tu he 
hakari ki Liberty Park, he titi he waata kirihi he taewa nga 
kai. No Niu 'I ireni rtga titi, na maua i mau mai ma nga 
kaumatua. Te take i mauria nun ai, na Matiu Kauri i tuhi 
ki a Takana, ka ki, "Kahoie pea a Amerika i te whenua te 
kupu whakaari, erigari a Niu Tireni, he titi hoki kei kora." 

I te ata ka mauria matou e Leo B. Sharp ki Rokana i 
runga i tona kaa, e eo maero te tawl.iti atu i te Pa Pote ki 
reira. Ko te waahi hoki tenei hei kuratanga mooku. Ko te 
taone tenei o Erata Moser, Erata Morere, me Erata Ewatana. 

E te Hun^a Tapu, kei ko noa atu i enei korero nga ma- 
naakitanga a nga kaumatua ki a maua me a maua tama iki. 
A kei puhaehae koutou, ka ki he whakahi nooku i panui ai 
ahau enei manaakitanga ki a koutou. Kahoie. Engaii he 
tohu tenei i te aroha nui o tenei iwi ki a koutou mo a koutou 
i manaaki i a ratou me a ratou tamariki i a ratou i Niu Tire- 
ni. Kahore aku nei painga ki a ratou, no enei ra tonu nei 
ahau i uru ai ki te Hahi, no reira he aha te take kia manaaki 
ratou i a matou? Maaku e kii ki a koutou, he aroha ki te iwi 
Maori. No reira kia mau ki a koutou tohu pai. 

E te Morehu o Lharaira, He kupu whakamarama hei 
whakamutu i taaku reta ki a koutou. ! te hui i tu ki Tiki- 
tiki ki te takiwa ki Ngati Porou, ka rongo ahau ki a Paraire 
Tomoana, koi a tetahi ropu, te ingoa ko te "Maori Purpose 
Control Fund Board," he ropu tautoko i nga tamariki hiahia 



Noema 24, 1920 



TE KARERE 



W 



ki te kura. Katahi au ka whakaaro, pai atu ko ratou hei 
matua mooku i ahau i te kura. Kua kore ahau e titiro ki a 
koutou ki te Moromona, te take kei te ki etahi o koutou he 
tangata wawata, he tangata moemoea ahau. Heoi ia, ko 
taaku inoi kia kauaka ahau e moemoea e wawata, engari kia 
kohatutia tenei haere, kia puta he painga ki a koe ki te 
Maori. Ko taaku inoi tenei ki a koutou i ter.ei ra haere ake 
nei, tukua a koutou tamariki matau ki nga kura nunui, ki te 
kimi i te matauranga. "Ko te matauianga hoki te kororia o 
te Atua." Heoi na ta koutou taina, tamaiti, 

Nireaha Paiwai 

KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. 





Elder Ann I J. Talbot 



Elder Ezra II. Anderson 



Tirohia te 332 o nga wharangi Te Karere moOketopa, 



"Te tangata e haere atu ana, <• pokanoa ana ki te wha- 
whai ehara nei nana, tona rite kei te tangata e hopu ana i 
nga tarings te kuri." 

"Ki te kahore he wahie, ka mate te ahi, ki te kahore ano 
he kaikawe korero, ka mutu te ngangare " 

"Te tangata i krria ;ii te ma, ka t;ika ano ki rotOJ ka 
hoki inai ano te kohatu ki tona kaitnn . 

"He- pono ki te akina te wai u, ka puta he pataj ki te 
akina te ihu ka puta he toto; ki te akina ano te riri, ka puta 

he wha w hoi." I Ioioinona 






Ik KAKERE 



na 24, 1926 




KO NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO O TE M.A.C. 

Kei runga: ko Erata Tua i, mahi whika (Mathmatics). 
Erata Taaka, Reo [ngarihi; Erata Paraone, mahi kamura; 
Erata Hokena, Chemistry; Erata Piringihata, Hekeretari me 
te ma'ni whutu paoro; Erata Tipene, mahi whakatangitangi. 

Kei raro: ko Erata Ewatana, Te Karere; Sister Tinikini 
me Hoani; Erata Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana; Sister Heera 
me Meri; Erata Heera, Tumuaki o te Kareti. 



Noema 24, 1926 



TE KARERE 



Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau Pei Whairangi 



Ki Te Karere: Tena koe, mau enei ingoa e panui atu 
kia mohio ai nga tangata katoa koia enei nga kai-kauwhau 
o te Pei Whairangi mo nga marama e toru mo Tihema mo 
Hanuere mo Pepuere. 



Kawe Apiata 


) Waimate 


A 


Hori Hami 




Wiremu Mokaraka 


1 Punakitere 


2 


Hori Ruwhiu 




Hoori Mapi 


1 Niu Tireni 


3 


Witana Henare 




Mokaraka Mohitaka 


1 Okorihi 


1 


Paepae Witehira 




Hetaraka Anaru 


| Te Kaahu 


1 


April Wiremu 


i 




Kaimana 




Manihera Kauwhata 


\ Matauri 


2 


Kawhena Waa 


I 




Ruru Hohaia 


\ Ngawha 


4 


Nuku Apiata 




Tame Wiremu 


\ Omapere 


3 


Peita Kauwhata 




Mahuika Otene 


\ Waihou 


3 


Peneha Rii 




Pera Wi Hongi 


I Te Kaahu 


3 


Jona Wi Hongi 




Takawira Henare 


I Ngawha 


2 


Hamiora Wi Hongi 




John Ngakuru 


\ Mangamuka 


2 


Mairangi Ngakuru 




Paikairaihe Otene 


1 Utakura 


3 


Nopera Otene 




Hare Herewini 


\ Whirinaki 


4 


Wiremu Ruka Rawiri 




Paul Witehira 


I Kaikohe 


3 


Hirini Wik;iira 


1 




Tane Wikaira 


\ Mataraua 


2 


Ma a nu Wikaira 


• 




Wirihana Pepe 


) Otaua 




Wiremu I e l Lau 




1 [emi Whautere 


1 Tautoro 




1 [eremaia Kaw ere Noa 


1 





in karerk Noema 24, 1926 

Rameka Wikaira 1 Waima 2 

Wirenui Ngakuru I 

\ fohepa He peri j Kaikohe 1 

Pita Heperi I 

Ngapuhi Renata 'N^a wahi tata 

Pita Heperi 1 Noata 

Tetahi Kaumatua I 

Wirihane Pepe 1 E rua wiki 

Tetahi Kaumatua I 

Tane Wikaira j E rua wiki 

Tetahi Kaumatua ) 

Rameka Wikaira I E rua wiki 

Tetahi Kaumatua ' 

E koutou, oku hoa mahi, tena ra koutou. Kua karanga. 
tia koutou hei kai-kauwhau i te Rongopai o Ihu Karaiti. E- 
hara hoki enei i nga karangatanga kore take, engari koia 
tenei hei mahi ma koutou kia taea e koutou te awhina i te 
whakawhanuitanga atu i te mahi a te Atua. Hoi ano nga 
kai-kauwhau o tera toru marama, ko nga mea i whakaritea a 
ratou karangatanga i tera atu toru marama. Otira, i te mea, 
mo te tau hou enei karangatanga, kua karangatia katoatia 
ano koutou. Kia mahara tatou, "Ka rite hoki ki ta koutou e 
rui ai, ta koutou e kokoti ai." Kia whiwhi he mahi mo tera 
kuata, me whakarite e koutou te mahi kua oti te homai mo 
enei marama. E haere mai ana te ra ka hari tatou, ka pouri 
ranei, kei te ahua o ta tatou mahi te tikanga. "Ka kai ku_ 
kupa, ka noho kaka me te ngetengete." Ko nga pononga a 
te Atua e hapai na i enei karangatanga, ka tapiritia nga 
karangatanga nunui atu, whaihoki nga manaakitanga e rite 
ana. 

Ma te Atua koutou e manaaki, e tautoko, kia whai kaha 
ai koutou ki te rui i nga purapura papai, kia hari ai te nga- 
kau i nga ra e haere mai nei. 

Na to koutou teina, 

Ralph R. Stevenson 



Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 

Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau te Mahia 

Ko nga ingoa enei o nga kai-kauwhau o te Mahia mo 
nga marama e toru e heke mai nei, ara, mo Tihema, mo 
Hanuere, mo Pepuere. 



iriparete Pomare 
Henare Taurima 
Whakahe Matenga 
Tihema Taurima 
Te Amo Tengaio 
Ruka Rarere 
Perea Reupena 
Tungane Reupena 
Runga Tengaio 
Rangi Tengaio 
Ora Noa Tengaio 
Raiha Tengaio 
Hirini Christy 
W i Mete 

Hohepa Te Kauru 
Hoani Kemara 
Paora Hapi 
Waaka Toroaiwhiti 
Tere Waerea 
Hirini Kemara 
Tieme Mete 
Paraere Pirihi 
Tamihana Pere 
Miria Kamau Pere 
Potiki Kahuroa 
Keita Kahuroa 
Pita Reihana Pene 
Hori Haere 
\ leremia Maehe 
Epeniha Kaihote 
Hetekia Pirihi 
Areta Kerei 
Piripi I e Kauru 
Ray P. I hompson 
Tena ra koutou e 1 



I Taupata 3 

/ Whakakii, Wairoa 
I Nuhaka 4 

/ Taupata, Whakakii 
I Tuahuru 4 

) Nuhaka, Waikokopu 
1 Waikokopu 3 

J Tuahuru, Nuhaka 
I Iwitea 2 

I Waikokopu, Oraka 
I Whakakii 4 

I Oraka, Wairoa 
I Waikokopu 3 

I Iwitea, Tuahuru 
I Wairoa 2 

i Waikokopu, Whakakii 
I Whakakii 3 

j Wairoa, Waikokopu 
\ Oraka 3 

f Whakakii, Iwitea 
I Jwitea 4 

/ Tuahuru, Oraka 
1 Wairoa 4 

f Waihu, [witea 
I Waikaremoana 2 

( Nuhaka, Waihua 
I Nuhaka } 

I Mohaka, Whakakii 
1 Whakakii 3 

1 Mohaka, Waihua 
1 Mohaka 4 

• Waihua, IV Reinga 
1 Waihua 

1 Nuhaka, Waikaremoana 
ku hoa mahi aroha i roto i tenei taki- 



wa te maara waina te Ariki. Kei te whakamihi atu nei 
ahau ki a koutou mo koutou ku.i whiwhi nei i tenei karanga- 
tanga tapu hei mahi ma koutou. 
"Ka rite hoki ki ta koutou e rui ai, ta koutou e kokoti ai. M 
Na reira kia takare tonu koutou ki te whakarite 1 .1 kou- 
tou mahi tapu, kia noho tonu ai te \\ airua, 

Kia ora ra koutou. Hoi ano ra, na ta koutou teina, 

Na Rinehi K. famati, fumuaki fakiwa 



11. KARERE na 24 1926 



KO NCA PUKAPJXA HEI HOXONGA 



ko enei etahi o nga pukapuk.i c t.ikoto ana kei le lari o te Mihana hei 1 o- 

konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te lioko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki elalii o 

enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secret dry. Box ,"-• Auckland. 

STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leatl er. 25-0 

New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather ... >v it u 

Book of Mormon, Cloth 2b i \j-t> f | 

' , Half Leather -90 I 

, Leather 10-0 & 15 o 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth.. 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth *-o 

" " , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 
MAO.?l BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Maori Read) Reference, Cloth 20 

, Leather 3-0 

Ko Te Kawenata Hon, Cloth 1-9 

" Me Nga riimene, Leather 3 i» I n-o 

'• Pukipuka a Moromona . Cloth 5-0 

, Leather 13-11 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-j 

", Leather 15 u 

Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 1 o 
SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BDOK3 

The Restoration of the Gospel 40 

What Jesus Taught .1 o 

Kindergarten Plan Book. KesUr & Morris 3 b 

Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, X'orto.i ... 4-0 

SONG BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-.; i 

, Leather .00 

Deseret Song Books, Cloth ... 30 i 

" , Leather b 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book ^-o 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE W02KS 

Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Tabling* ' S j 

Vitality ot Worm on ism 4-0 

Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson o-o 

Restoration of the Gospel, II iJtsoe 4 

Joseph Smith's Teachings >o 

Life of Christ for the Young. Weed 4 o 

Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 

ntials in Church History. Smith 6-9 

Bible Ready Reference 2-0 

Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 0-0 

KO J. H. riNIKINl TE KAI TA ME TE KA1 PAM 1 HOKI 
M. \.r KORONGATA HASTINGS. M. R. 




: j^n>n> 



Wt 



"Wdhanaa 20 



Cihema 22. 1926 



llama 12 



I 



tfaua c matafcu: ta te mea be ikai^ 
fcauwbau tenet abau kt a koutou 
mo te bari nm, meahe puta mat hi 
te iwi katoa. 

Ttonatanet boki i wbanau at be 
1kai*wbakaora mo houtou t te 
pa o "Kawiri, ara a te Ikarattt, te 
Hnki. 

Ruba 2:10-11 



<*&> 






« 



"CS KflRSRS" 



+ + 

WHAKAEMINCA O 


NGA 


KORERO 


+ + + 
+ + + 

Kl TE ETITA 




Wharangi. 


He Ripoata na Nireaha Paewai 


396 


KO NGA RONCO KORERO 






Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona 
Ko nga Manita o te M.AC. 


394 
392 


KO NCA TUHINGA MAI 






I roto i nga "Momona" 




387 


MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 




393 


MAHI KURA HAPATI 






Concert Recitation 




3/0 


Intermediate Department 
Korero a Ngakau 
Kindergarten Department 
Maori Theological 
Pakeha Theological 
Postlude 
Prelude 
Sacrament Gem 




376 
370 
379 
370 
374 
369 
369 
369 


NATE ETITA 






He Mihi Kirihimete 




395 




Ko Ilohcpa Mete, Poropiti 




ari>rj> 



WAHANGA XX 



"Ki te Iwi Maori, te Morehu o te Whare o Iharaira.' 



MlHANA O NlU TlRENI 

HAHI O 1HU KARAIT1 O TE HUNGA TAPU 

O NGA RA O ML'RI NEI 



H1PA J. KARANATA, TUMUAKI o IF HAHI 
HOANI H. T1NIK1M, TUMUAKJ MlHANA 

M. K. EWATANA, E HI A 

J. R. TlPENE, I ETITA HOA AWH1NA 

T.W. WlTEHIRA f 



MAORI AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE 
Hastings. New Zealand 
1926 




(ftw 



WAHANCA 20 WENEREI, TIHEMA 22, 1926. NAMAI2 

Maori Agricultural College Hastings. H. B. 

E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, 

Hani o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri i\ei. 

Tukua jnai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings. 

Ivu le ulu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereui (5/-). 

KO TE TIKANUA TENEI. 
Ilie matua uiu mo icu pcpa ka vPhiwhi ai. 

J. H. Tmikim, TumuuKt Mihana 
Mariana K. Ewatana, hum. 'l.um h Hi In/ a, httta Hon A whin a. 

Ko te Kui-Ripoata Te Tuati Melia 

Ku nga Kai Tuhi Alai (Special Writers). 
Wiremu A. kuura fctapta ianHpu tru T. kupa 



i\lAHI KURA HAPATI. 

Prelude. 



Adapted from Handel, 
by Edw. P. Kimball. 



:Mr /r ^ilp^pliii 



mf 



w e^^ m *=#4=$= *= gg^^ 



SACRAMKNT (iHM FOR JANUARY, 1927 
'/Purify our hearts, our Saviour, 

Let us «4(> not far asl ray, 
Thai we may be counted worth} 

Of Thy Spirit. «la\ by (lav." 
Postlude. 



i£gipi3iiipiiiip§r: i p 



=j^a 






\'-'" ■ \- -■*■ \ n 



370 ikkarerk rihcma 22, iy26 



CONCERT RECITATION FOR JANUARY, 1927. 

(Doctrine and Covenants, Section 59, Seventh Verse) 
" Thou shalt thank the Lord thy God in all things." 



KORERO A NGaKaU MO HANUERE, 1927. 

Akoranga me nga Kawenata 59:7. 

"I roto i nga mea katoa me whakawhetai atu koe ki 

te Ariki, ki tou Atua." 

-o 

MAORI THEOLOGICAL. 



Katapu tuata.ii, iianuere 2, 1927. 
HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. 

Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. 

Putake: Ko nga wliakahauhau a tc tauira i whakatako- 
toria aei c Iliu hei oiahi ma tatou. 

hote Ngakau Whakawhetai 

I roto i te ioo o nga Waiata ka kite tatou i tetahi whaka- 
puakanga pai o te whakawhetai. 

"Kia hari te hamama ki a Ihowa, e nga whenua katoa: 
mahia ta Ihowa i runga i te koa, waiata ha ere ki tona aroaro. 

"Kia matau ki a Ihowa, koia te Atua: nana tatou i ha- 
nga, ehara hoki i a tatou; ko tana iwi tatou, ko ana hipi e 
hepara ai. 

"Tomokia ona tatau i runga i te whakawhetai, ona marae 
i runga i te whakamoemiti: whakawhetai ki a i;\ whakapai- 
ngia tona ingoa. He pai hoki a Ihowa, pumau tonu tana 
mahi tohu: a kei nga whakatupuranga katoa tona pono." 

Ka kite tatou he maha nga wahi i roto i nga karaipiture 
e korero ana i a Ihu e tuku whakawhetai ana. I te wa o to 
ratou kainga i te Kapenga, i te whangainga o nga mano, me 
era atu wa i tuku whakawhetai ai a Ihu mo nga mea i riro 
mai i a la. I whakawhetai la ki Tona Matua mo te pono kua 
oti raka te whakaari, a mo nga akonga papai hoki kua kitea 
raka e la hei awhina i a la. 

E korero ana nga kai-tuhi katoa o te Kawenata Hou tera 
e tika ana tatou me whai whakawhetai o tatou ngakau mo 
nga mea a te Atua e homai ana ki a tatou. 



Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 37 1 

E rite ana tenei tikanga ma nga tangata katoa e hiahia 
ana ki te whakahari i te Atua, tae atu hoki ki nga mea hore 
kau he hahi. Koia tenei ko tetahi o nga tikanga tuatahi o te 
koropiko pono, a he tohu hoki i waenganui o nga tangata o 
te tino rangatira. 

Ahakoa ko wai koe, a keihea ranei koe e noho ana, e 
tika ana koe me whakawhetai koe ki nga mea na ratou nei 
koe i awhina, ki o matua, ki o hoa, ki o tupuna kua mate 
raka i nga tau maha kua huri, a ki te Atua ano hoki. 

Tukua ma nga mema o te karaihe e whaki o ratou hine- 
ngaro, te whakawhetai o o ratou nei ngakau mo nga mea kua 
riro mai i a ratou. 

Ko nga Pukapuka a Paora 

Nu Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rupata Tanapu i whakarite. 

Raiapu tuarua, Hanuere 9, 1927. 

Akoranga o4 

1 Waenganui i nga Teharonika. He roanga atu. 

Te VVhakaatu: Kei a 2 Teharonika, I, 2, 3 o nga upoko. 

A. Ta te Atua whakawakanga. 

1. Ko te whakangaromanga o te hunga kino. 2 Teharo- 
nika 17-9; Maraki 3:1; 4:1. 

2. Ko te whiunga mutunga kore. 2 Teharonika 1:9; Ako- 
ranga me nga Kawenata 19:3-12. 

B. Ko te Takanga Atu me te kingitanga o te Anatikaraiti. 

1. Hei te Ra Nui o te Aiiki. 

2. Ka puta mai tuatahi ko te Takanga Atu. 2 Teharoni- 
ka 2:3; 1 Timoti 4:1. 

3. Ko te tangata o te hara. 2 Teharonika 2:3-4. 

4. Hei te mahi te Anatikaraiti a taua wa. 2 Teharonika 
27; 1 Eioani 2:18; 4:3. 

5. Ka taea a Hatana «.• te ha <> te Atua. 2 Teharonika 
2:8; Whakakitenga 20:2, 10; 2 Niwhai 9:16. 

C. Ta Paora whakatupatoranga ki te Hunga Tapu. 

1. Kia mawehe ke 1 nga tangata mahi he, 2 Teharonika 
3:0-7; Whakakitenga 18:4-5; Ak<>. me nga Kawe. 133:5. 

2. Ka riria te mangere. 2 Teharonika 3:1 C- 1 2; Ako. me 

nga Kawe. 88:124) (10:13; 4J:42. 



17} Tt KARBRE Tihema 22, 1926 

Ratapu tuatoru, Hanuere 16, 1927. 

Akoranga 35 

Te llahi Koriniti, Whenua Makeronia 

Hei Tirohanga: Nga Mahi iS:i-i8; 1 Koriniti; 2 Koriniti. 

A. Te whakariteritenga te Hahi o te Hunga o Koriniti. 

1. Nga whakahuringa o nga Hurai. Mahi 18:2, 8, 17. 

2. Ko te kauwhautanga o Paora i nga mahi a te Karaiti 
ki nga Hurai. Nga Mahi 18:4-6. 

3. Te whakatetenga o nga Hurai. Mahi 18:12-17. 

4. Nga whakahuringa o nga Tauiwi, te iriiriringa. Mahi 
18:8; I Koriniti 1:14-16. 

5. To ratou tiakanga e Kario, he kawana no Roma. Nga 
Mahi 18:12-16. 

Tirohia i Nga Mahi 18:3 e whakaatu ana i reira i te 
kaha Paora ki nga mahi mi ha n a. Tirohia 
ano 2 Koriniti 1 1:7-9 

B. Ko te pukapuka a Paora ki nga Hunga Tapu. 

1. He whakatupato kia kaua e noho wehewehe i roto i te 
Hahi. I Koriniti 1:10-13. 

2. Te kauwhauranga o te ripeka. I Koriniti 1:17-24. 

3. Ko te matauranga o te hunga mohio e ngaro. I Ko- 
riniti 1:25-3 !• Whakaritea ki te Pukapuka a Moromo- 
na, Arami 10:13-18; Ako. me nga Kawe. 100:5-8. 

Kia mau tenei: Ko te pukapuka tuatahi a Paora ki te 

Hunga o Koriniti, i tuhituhia atu e ia i Epeha i 

te paunga o te toru tau i noho ai ia i reira, 

i te tau 57, 58 ranei o to tatou Ariki A.I). 

Ratapu tuawha, Hanuere ?3, 1927. 

Akoranga 3ti 
Ka Tohutohu te Apotoro i te Hahi 

Hei Tirohanga: I Koriniti 2, 3, 4 o nga upoko. 

A. A Ihu Karaiti me Tona ripekatanga. 

1. I puakina i roto i te ngoikoretanga. I Koriniti 2:1-4. 

2. Te matauranga o te Atua. I Koriniti 2:5-16. 

3. He kohungahunga i roto i a te Karaiti. I Koriniti 
3:1-2; Nga Hiperu 5:12-14. 

4. Na te Atua i tupu ai. 1 Koriniti 3:3-8. 

B. Te hanganga a te Atua. 

I. Te kaupapa, ko Ihu Karaiti. Epeha 2:20; Mahi 4:12; 



Tihema 22, 1920 TE karere 373 

Ako. 11. e nga Kawe. 20:29-51. 

2. Me hanga nga tangata ki rung a i tenei kaupapa pono. 
1 Koriniii 3:9- 5- 

3. Kia ma nga tinana. I Koriniti 3:16-17; Ako. me nga 
Kawe. 88:1.24. 

C. Nga mate o nga Apotoro. 

1. Purutia te whakatauranga he. I Koriniti 4:3-5; Matiu 
7:1-5. 

2. Ko o ratou mamaetanga mo te Rongopai. I Koriniti 
4:9- 1 [. 

j. Ka tukua a Timoti hei whakahaere. l Koriniti 4:17. 

Ratipu tuarima, llanuere 30, 1927. 

Akoranga M 

Ko te Akoranga a Paora mo te Ma te Ngakau 

Hei Tirohanga: 1 Koriniti, 5 me te 6 o nga upoko. 
A. Ko nga ahuatanga i roto i nga hunga o Koriniti. 
j. Koriniti he pa nui hokohako taonga no Roma. 

2. Ko te koropikotanga o nga tangata ki tenei atua wa- 
hine ki a Aporite (Aphrodite); e whakaaetia ana e t° 
ratou whakapono nga mahi kikinoi nga karakiatanga. 

3. lie poke te ahua o te hunga o Koriniti. 

4. Ko te kauwhautanga a Paora ki nga mahi kikino, ara 
ki te puremu, ki te moe tahae. 

P>. Ko nga whakahauhaunga a nga Apotoro. 

1. Ko te Puremu me tona ahua. I Koriniti 5:1. 

2. Ko te whakaritenga i te whakawhiu mo te hunga 
takahi i nga hire. 1 Koriniti 5:2-5. 

3. I raro i te ture a Mohi, he mate tona whakawhiunga. 
Tirohia Rewitikuha 18:29; 20:11. 

4. Kia kaua te Hunga I'apu e piri ki te hunga mahi ki- 
no. I Koriniti 5:9-13; Ako. me nga Kawe. 42:20-28, 

C. Ka tukua te whakawakanga ki te Hunga TapU 

i. Ko nga ahua tutu, ngangau, ma te Hunga Tapu e 
titiro. 1 Koriniti 6: 1 8; .Ako. me nga Kawe. [34:10, 

2. Ko nga Kooti O te i ika i roto i te llahi. Matin [8:1$- 

17; Mahi 15:2-22; Ako. me nga Kawe. 107 .-68 -83; 42 
85. 

3. Ko nga mea kahore he whenua. 1 Koriniti 6:9 10- 
Whakakitenga 2l;8. 

4. Ko te tika te ma mo te tinana. 1 Koriniti 6:13-20, me 



\74 il KARERH lihema 24, 1920 

lie Panui: Tuhaina i nga tirohanga hei ako 
ma tenei ma tenei nga mema, he korero- 
tanga hoki me waiho te wa o te karaihe 
hei uiuinga. 



PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL 
"GREAT BIBLICAL 1.!a!<aII Li<:/' 

First Sunday, January 2. I9i7. 
1 XJLFORM FAST DAY LESSON. 

The Example of Jesus: Whal ii Bids us Do. 

Ii temporal and spiritual, 
Ls weil expressed in ciic lOOdi I'saim, "Make a joyful uoii>e unto the 

ith glad 1 - ; 1 me b< fi it his pr< si a< <• \\ iih sing- 
ing, know ye ihal the Lord he is God j i! is he thai hath made as 

heep of His pasl ure. I . 
e> w'.di thanksgiving, and into His courts with praise; be 
i His name. the Li rd is good; His 

I His 1 11. h ei dui cth i u all general ii 

Le Lord's Supp« i . in feeding t he 

- .'r us gave thanks and blessed what 

11 v men had provided. He also gave thanks on various 

occasioi i for ttie truth Uod hud revealed and I r the disciples that had 

given Him. His habit of gratitude or thankfulness to God and 

fur al wed by Him is reflected in all the Ne* TestamenJ 

cd in the Doctrine and Co> enants. The oblig . 

ii .11 - both religious and in ral, both divine and human. 

lamental element in worship and also in good manners oi 

1 us of nil _ - .•" d «-.■!.•' i 1 i ns may \\ ell culth ate 

toward all bencfaeti rs towar I immedii it- asso- 

mote human benefactors, i ward humanity and 

hearing i a\ well relate to any phi ■ of this important, 
glei ted, quality of chai icter- gratitude. 

Second Sunday, January i), 1927. 

Lesson 32. Jeremiah. 

Text : Book of Jeremiah. 

• God 's inten ention, men and 
n:it ions esti ucl ion. 

Supplcm •• i Referent s: Q. "Beacon Lights of History" (Lord), 



Tihema 22, 1926 te karere $75 

327. 

Jeremiah called to be a prophet about 627 B.C., when a young man. 
His ministry extended over a period of 50 years*. A very sorrowful and 
gloomy man, a prophet of judgments to come. He saw the people, th&ir 
leaders and the priests and prophets fall away from the worship of God. 
lie saw Jerusalem fail, but remained. He was later carried into Egypt, 
and tradition says was slain there by fellow exiles. 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. Compare Isaiah and Jeremiah and the work they did for Judah. 

2. What in the life of Jeremiah will help you to something better 
and a desire to render greater service? 



I bird Sunday, January 16, 1927. 

Lesson ll;. Daniel. 



Texl : Book of Daniel. 

Objective: To show that a great faith in God will prepare one to 
L.eet every difficulty in life. 

Daniel a prophet and leader to his people in captivity. Discuss the 
most remarkable blessings that came to him as a result of his faith. 
Discuss his fearlessness in reading God's condemnation at the Croat Feast 
in Babylon, if time permits and you can thoroughly prepare' the sub- 
ject, discuss the dream of the great image. (See Restoration of the 
( uspei, Chapter 4.) 

Questions for Teachers. 

1. How may one build a faith for himself such as Daniel exempli- 
fied .' 

2. What three attributes besides his faith will most affect the lives 
of the young people in the church! 

lourth Sunday, Jam ary 23, 1927 
LESSON 54. DANIEL (Continued) 

Text! Book of Daniel; "Old Testament studies" (Tanner.) 
Objective: To show thai a great faith in God will prepare one to 
n i <-t every difficulty in life. 

Note: There are so man} Interesting period! La the life of Danial it 
is suggested that the subject be continued. Teachers may select any or all 
of the following itemi for discussion: Daniel In Captivity; Nebuchad 
iiezzar'a Dream, The Fiery Furnace, Dream of the Tree, Writing on the 
\ v :iii, in tin- Lion's Den, Effect of Daniel'* Writings. 

Que ;1 

1. In what wa\ • 1 1 < I Daniel Observe what is now failed the ''Wor.l 

of Wisdom I* ' 



Tt KAKKKh i ihenia t2 

2. What La your understanding of the meaning of the dream of the 

Gnat Image? 

Fifth Sunday, January 30, 1927 
Review Questions. 

1. Wliu was Solomon 1 

U. Ildu old was Solomon when h*j became K; 

Why did Solomon grow in wisdom and power during the hue part 
of his life/ 

I. What caused the division of the kingdom of K boboam, son ol 
Bolomonf 

o. Give an example of a more modern people's action under similar 
conditions f 

6. What type of man was Elijah? 

7. What type of man was Elishaf 

8. To what people did Elijah and Eli aha cornel 
( .i. To what people was Isaiah a prophet 1 

10. What was the condition of those people f 

II. V\ hat did h< preach 1 

12. '1 o what people was Jeremiah a prophet 1 

L3. What i. iaii,ii i hi' man was he I 

11. Was he able to save the people by his teaching 1 
15. W'nat happened to them! 

hi. What happened to Jerusalem, their city? 
17. Where did Daniel first appear? 
L8. What called attention to him most? 

lit. Did the Lord save Daniel in cause of his faith and obi dull.- .' 
Name two times? 



INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT 
THE BOOK OF MORMON" 

First Sunday, January 2, 1927 

FAST DAY LESSON. 

Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 374 

The buys and girls of the Intermediate Department are old enough to 
have experienced that feeling of joy which comes to one when apprecia- 
tion and gratitude are shown liy those for whom some kindness or service 
has been d me. 

In the assignment urge the members of your class to reflect upon the 
blessings they enj y; the privilege of having been born in this progres- 



Tihema 22, 1920 TE KARERE 377 

give age; the opportunities afforded by the restored Gospel, science, etc. 

The}- can then, on Fast Day, arise and express their thankfulness to 
their Heavenly Father for these things. The lesson can carry over in 
that they can express to teachers and parents their gratitude for their 
love, devotion and service. 

One likes to do for those who accept his services with gratitude. 

SvCond Sunday, January 9, 1927. 

Lessen .02. The Savior's Parking Blessings and Instructions. 
Text: III. Nephi 19th to 30th chapters. 

Objective: To teach that according to our faith so shall we receive. 
(See fit. Nephi 19: 35, 36.) 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 

1. Special assignment to pupils: 

(a) Preparation for Jesus' second visit. III. Nephi 19: 1-14. 

(b) Jesus prays. 19: 15-36. 

(c) The Sacrament again administered. 10: 21-10. 

(d) A commandment to search the Scriptures. 23: 1-11. 

(e) The Savior expounds all things. 26: 1-11. 

(f) Mormon's summary. 26: 12-21. 

(g) The name of the Church. 27: 1-12. 

(h) The Twelve granted their hearts' desires. III. Xephi 28. 

2. Chapters 21, 22, 24, 25, 2i», 30 should all be read at home by the 
pupils. If the teacher sees lit, he might mention some of the 
important points in the prophecies quoted by the Savior. 

.;. Passages to be memorized: ill. Xephi 24: 16, 17; 25: 2; 27: 8, 19. 

Questions for Teachers. 
l. What more marvellous blessing did the Nephites receive because 
of their greater faith than did the people iii Palestine 1 

Third Sunday, January 16, 1927. 

Lesson 33. The Power of God and the Power of Satan. 
Text: IV. Xephi, Mormon, Chapters 1-6. 

Objective: To teach that living the (iospel of Christ brings true 

happiness (see ~ . Nephi l: 10), while unrighteousness leads to misery 

(see Mormon 2: 13 15). 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 
1. Special assignments to pupils: 

(a) Two centuries of righteousness. IV. Nephi L: l 22. 

(b) Satan again gains power. IV. Nephi 1: 2.: 19, 
Mormon, i righteous youth. Mormon, Chaptei i. 

(d) Mormon as i leader. Mormon, Chapter 2. 



$7$ 1 h KAKKRJi 1 ihema 22, 

N* ophites boaal in their own strength, Mornion 3: l lt">. 
Continual warfares Mormon -1; 5: 1-7. 
Pinal struggle between Nephitea and Lamauites. Mor 
moji G. 
2. Passages fur all the pupils to memorize: I V. Nephi 1: 2; 1: 15-17; 

Mormon -i: 5. 
Make q special point of memorizing in these lessons. 
Questions for Teachers. 

1. Mention as many as you can of the blessings that the Nephitea 
enjoyed during the 200 years following Christ's visit. 

2. What qualities are outstanding in Mormon to make him equal 
with other great Bo k of Mormon characters 1 



Fourth Sunday, January 23, 1927. 
I.l.ssn.N 34. MORON] FINISHES THE NEPHITE ttECOBD. 



Text: Mormon, chapters 8 and !>, Mm ni 1-10. 

Objective: To teach that we should cullivate the power of God "for 
he worketli by power according to the t'ailli of the children of men, the 
same to-day, to-morrow, ami forever." Moroni 10:7. 

Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation : 

1. Sp< cial assignment to pupils: 

a. Moroni left alone. Mormon 8:1-11, 

!). The record to come forth. Mormon 8:12-32. 

c. Moroni foresees tin- apostasy. Mormon 8:33-41. 

d. Moroni toadies faith in God. Mormon 9:1-20. 

2. The contents of the ]'»ook of Moroni might lie briefly stated by the 
teacher, but the whole book should be read by the pupils, and they 
might be called upon to give the parts they understand and which 
they think to be the most inteiest ing. 

.".. Passages to memorise: Mormon 9:27, 28; Moroni 10:4, --i. . 

Questions for Teachers. 
1. Point out some of the precious things that might not have been 
i:: the Book <>f Mormon had Mormon finished the record himself. 

_. Iteviow Moroni's teachings in regard to faith, hop.-, charity, infant 

. 

Fifth Sunday, Jaiiuay ki), ! l J27. 
Review Questions. 

1. What was the sign given to the Nephitea of the Saviour's death! 
Ik What Lamanite prophet testified of these things shortly before 

they happened! 
'.'-. What did the Saviour say to Nephi when he was praying mightily 

for the sign to be given so that his people might not be destroyed 



Tihema 22, 1920 T£ KARKRE _ 379 

because of their faith? 

4. What was the sign given on this land of the Saviour's death? 

5. What caused the great darkness? 

6. What cry was heard among the people who were spared? 

7. Whose voice was heard speaking? 

6. When the darkness cleared away, where did the people gather? 

9. Wl-ose voice did they hear at this time? 

10. From whence did Jesus come? 

il. What did the multitude do when they saw Him? 

12. Hew did they know it was actually the Saviour who had been 

crucified? 
l;;. To whom did Jesus give power to baptise? 

14. How many times was the Sacrament administered during His visit / 

15. What wonderful blessings did the children receive? 

lti. How long did the people remain righteous after the visit of the 
Saviour? 

17. What were the causes of their growing wicked again? 
IS. Who was the last great leader of the Nephites? 
L9. Who was the last prophet to have charge of the records 1 
20, How was the brother of J a red blessed of the Lord? 



KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT 
First Sunday, January 2, 19Z7. 
Uniform Fast Day Lesson. 

(JenuruJ Topic: "The hixaiuple < f .lesus: What 1' lib's Us Do." 
Special Topic: ''Gratitude." 
Text: New Testament, i'salm lot). 

Objective: to become happier and better children, w e must show 
gratitude. 

Suggestions to Teachers; Before preparing this Lesson let us ask our- 
selves these questions: What have 1 to be thankful for/ Am 1 as thank 
ful as ['Should be/ Do 1 show my gratitude,' ('-latitude brings a con 
tented spirit. Have I one/ How can I best teach this Lessonl 

Outline of Story: 
I. Tommy 's Home. 

1. Tommy runs into the house. 

Bister Peters has given him a ball for his birthday. 
'i. His mother asked if he thanked her. 
i a ) He had forgotten t<>. 
1 1. 1 ihs mother wondered if he liked the ball. 

(c) He does; it was just what he wanted. 

(d) Hut he didn't thank Siller |V|eis; B OM WO uld >he know 

he liked n .' 

.'I. 'rummy ran to thank Si>ter Peters, 



3So te karere Tihema 24, 19^0 

Peters, Bitting 00 the doorstep, Looks iad t.> 

Tommy. 

(b) Hi' slips up and tells her how thankful he is. 

(c) sister Peters' faec tightens up a* she draws Tommy 
close t<> her. 

nl) She said Bhe didnM think In- cared. 
4. A little bird >ings. 

(a) Tommy and Sister Peters watch and listen. 

(I.) Sister Peters asks if Tommy knows what the bird is 

doing, 
(c) Tommy replies, giving thanks to the Father. 
(fl) They name the things it has to lie thankful for. 
(e) Tommy found that little birds never forget to say thanks 
— a lesson for all of us. 
1 I. How to Give Thanks. 

1. Tommy found ways of giving thanks 
(ai By singing praises, hymns, etc. 
( 1) ) By doing kind dec d... 
(c) By saying ''Thank you.'' 
1 d) By being cheerful. 
-. Tommy wants to know who taught as to be thankful. 
.'!. Sister Peters tells him Jesus set the example and told us to thank 
our Heavenly Father. 

(a) .Jesus thanked His Father for food, clothes, home, friends 
helpers, etc 

[it) J n SUa sang B< QgS of praise. 

(e) Jesus did kind deeds. (Name some, i 
f d ) Jesus was nappy. 
4. Tommy names people to whonl we should show gratitude or 
give thanks. 

(a) Heavenly Father. 

(b) Parents. 

(c) Friends, neighbours. 

(d) All who do for us in making clothing, food, homes, etc. 
A happiness comes over Tommy. 

(a) He wants to sing "Father of All" and "Father, We 
Thank Thee." 

(b) They snug the songs. 

(e) Leaned over close to Sister Peters and whispered he was 
always going to say "Thank You" the four ways every 
day. and he would be like the little bird. He wouldn't 
forget. 

Memory (Jem: "For the Lord is good. Serve the Lord with 

gladness. 
Rest Exercise: Let the children suggest things they could do to show 
people they arc thankful for what is done for them. Then let the 



Tihema 22, 1920 te karere 381 

children do the things they suggest. For instance, what can we do for 
the cow to show her we are thankful for the milk? Give her food and 
water. What can we do for our parents, etc.? 

Suggestive songs for month — to be from Pa It}- Hill's Song Book. 
(Select the ones you know and sing the one most appropriate. "God's 
Work," p. 71. "God's Love," p. 72; also pages 10, 17, IS, 19. 

Second Sunday, January 9, 1927. 

Topic: "The First Thanksgiving in Utah." 

Text: "History of Utah (Whitney), Vol. 1, p. 380; "Sunday Morn- 
ing in the Kindergarten," Lesson 70. 

Time: After the first crops were gathered. 

Place: Salt Lake City. 

Objective: The Lord is pleased when we show our gratitude in deeds 
as well as in words. 

Suggestions for Teachers: Lead the children to see that instead of 
Mary crying and making others unhappy when she left her home and 
p aymatcs, she could have tried to find something else to take their 
p.ace. Let us learn to try when that which is near and dear to us is 
taken from us, instead" ci : wasting time by grieving, to turn our attention 
to something else. Let us Learn to love everything in nature; then no 
matter where we are we can be happy. There is no better way of showing 
gratitude than by being happy, no matter when' we are or what we are 
doing, and by being thankful tor what we have even it it be ever st) little. 

Le1 us get the habit of sharing with those less fortunate than we arc. 
by making others happy, m,. omy i n Thanksgiving Day, but every day 

in the year. 

Memory Gem: Use same as last Sunday, unless yem And a better 
selection. 

Lest Exercise: It's Thanksgiving, and mother is getting ready to 
have grandfather, grandmother and the rest of the family. Let's think 

of all the things that we could do to help get things ready. As the 
Children suggest let them art it out. After that lead them to see how 

many things they have for their dinner, l wonder whai they oould do 

to Bhow the Heavenly Lather that they were thankful. Yes. by thanking 
Mini ami by sharing with Others, so lei's li\ a nice basket and take it 

tn i Mine poor | ersou or someone \\ ho is ill. 

Third Sunday. January 16, 1027. 

Topics A Home in the Mountains. 

Mi itorj of Utah I Wnitney >. Vol I. pp. ■ 

"Sunday Morning In the Kindergarten," Le 18, 

Time: At tin- time the Mormons were persecuted, 



382 i>. KAKERE I lhema -2. 1926 

Place: On the Lrail to Salt Lake Valley. 

Objective: We should not only show our gratitude in words, i>u t also 
by our deeds. 

Suggestions to Teachers: While telling the itory emphasise the 
thought that no matter what happens or what people do to us, we Bhould 
not hold feelings toward them nor say mean things aboul them. We all 
more or less get into the habit of finding fault. Lei us break ourselves 

«it' the habit, and remember that we are not responsible for their actions. 

hould pity them and pray for them. We should pray for strength 

.»• might .101 full into the same rut they are in, but ask for help, 
that we might Btretch forth our hand and help them OUt. This is one way 
of showing gratitude toward our Heavenly Father. By being kind to 
others and by helping others show greater gratitude than uttering mere 
words. 

Memory Gem: 

'* For health and food, for love and friend*, 
For everything His goodness sends 
We thank the Heavenly Father." 

— Mary J. Garland. 
Best Exercise: Let the children prcte:id they are going to move to a 
new place, where sage brush grows. Let them suggest how they can help 
make a new home. Let them dramatize the things they suggest. 

fourth Sunday, January 23, 1927. 

Topic: ''The Crickets and the (hills. " 
Theme: During the Early Pioneer Days. 
Place: salt Lake Valley. 

Text: "History of I'iah" (Whitney), Vol. 1, pp. I'.ll-'MV "; "Sunday 
Morning in the Kindergarten,'' Lesson ()!>. 

Objective: We would show our gratitude by deeds as well as words 

for the many blessings received. 

Suggestions to Teachers: Help children to see that no matter what 

trouble or danger they are confronted with, they can receive help from 
their Heavenly Father if they but seek Him in Faith, nothing wavering. 
We must not doubt when we seek for help. We must know it will be 
given. Also lean the children to show reverence by caring for the bird> 
that were given to us to he'p jir toct our crops from enemies. When Our 
Father in Heaven sees us caring for His creations He is pleased, and will 

bless us. 

Memory Gem: Same as last Sunday. Songs to be selected from list 
suggested in First Sunday's lesson. 

Rest Exercise: Let the children pretend they are feeding the Sea 
Gulls. Let them run here and there to throw food to the birds who do' so 
much. Lei them care for them in other ways, like making bird houses. 



Tihema 22. 1920 TE K.ARI£RE 383 

Fifth Sunday, January 30, 1927. 

Topic: The Birth of Jesus. 
1 :,.-. : rod's reign. 

Pla< . : In I' tlili lie .:, Judea. 

Text: Matt. L:18-2f); Luke L:26-28; 2:1-7; [saiah 7:14; 9:6-7. 
References: ''Sunday Morning in tin Kindergart a,' 3 Lesson 71. 
'•Jesus the Christ, ' ' pp. 79-92, 102. 

Objoctiv< : The more we love the more we are willing to serve, and 
the greal i our rev\ ard. 

■ Sugjj ■■>{'■•;,. : Lead the children to see the wonderful love Heavenly 
i- u . and of the waj He had of showing it by sending His 
Onh i down to earth to show us how to lov< One at 

i. w t b k nI. Lf we are willing to follow 11 is exam] 

can return to oui Heavenly Father with out hearts full of joy and happi- 
i --. Uso lead children to tell of many things they can do to help others 
., Heavenly Father that we are grateful for His blessings and 
kindness. 

M inory Gen;: ''Bettei than all the Christmas -'ft- that any of us 
i-.; 'i k.o.v, is the (iit't of Jesus to the world, many, man} years ago.*' 

. ■• Luthei 's ' a 11 Hymn," D.S.S. S * B k, p. 21 l. "Once 
Wl" thin the Lowly Stable, ' Pattj I 1 11 Soi g Bo 1-. p. 33. 

.. . rcisi : L i pi ;. i.si the I \ ith the unfortunate, 

such as decorating a tree foi I i sick in th hospital, sharing 
Lave children suggest what tht\ can put on the Lree, such as decorations 
a.. 1 a little gift of love. 



MAKI HUI ATAWHAI. 
HORA s. TIMKINI. Tumuaki Bui Atawhai. 

AKORANGA MO HANUERE 
Nil Toke Watuiie i vvhakamaori. 

KO ETAHI WHAKARITENGA 1 ROTO 

1 1 I, ( )KANGA ll.l KARA] • 1 

/. Ko te Hnihtthiga hei whakamiinga / te Whakatakotoranga 

o (< I .uniii o /( If 'lit mill. 
Ko tciK'i whakaritenga i lupono ki te ao wairua, a he 
wa haringa nui hoki i roto i te rangi. No mua lata atu tenej 
i te tukunga iho <> te whawhai nui, i hinga ai .1 pana atu ana 
mi a Kutiwha me tana ope, le wahi tuatom i l ,0 <» nga rangi 
katoa. I reira hoki .1 te Kaiaiti, n 1 una hoki 1 whiriwhiria 
ai ko la hei Kai Hoko mo tenei ao. biopa v s : 1 -7. 



384 TE KARERE ma ?4, I926 

J. A Ihu .'< MilUiih r;. 

Timata ake i te tekau ma rua o ( >na tan i whakakitea te 
whakaaro nui o Ihu i roto 1 te Hakari o te Ka ent?a, hei 
kamahar; tang 1 nei mo te whakaputanga mai [haraira i 10- 
n> i te whakaponongatanga a n-i Ihipiana. 

Ko Tana merekara Luatahi i mea ia i te hakari marena - 
tanga i tetahi pa, ko la nei tetahi o nu;i manuhiri. 

A he manuhiri whakahonore 1 roto i te whaie Haimona 
repera. I konei tana whakawahinga a Meri i a la ki te hinu 

roto i tetahi pouaka kohatu, ko te utu e lite ana ki te utu 
mo te kotahi tan e mahi ana. Maka 14:.}; Ruka 7:]/. 

.?. A I/ni ic tangaia kaingit. 

Ko te kairma taro i te koraha, e rima mano nga tangata 
i whangaia ki n^ r a taro e rima me nga ika e rua. 1 whaka. 
akona c thu i ko:^ei: 

He ttkoranga i runga i tc iilanga tc rAe (order). 
Ko te whakanohoanga e 30 i roto i te ropu. 

//<• ctkoranga i runga ; U ttkanga ■ hopohjpo (rev rencc). 

1 Tana tangohanga ake i taro me riga ika tiro' anga ake ki 
te rangi, a tukunga w] akawhetaii in ja atu hoki mo ana mea. 

He akoranga . riniga 1 u t.k.mja ttaki taonga 1 economy). 
"Kohikohia nga toenga o nga vvhatiwhaiinga, kei maumauria 
tetahi w ahi." 

// akorungti i runga 1 te tikar.ga nga 

dhuatanga uhiika-tc-otua. 
He whakaatu i te kaha te mana Atua ki te wl \ k; hau iho 
ki nga mea o te whenua, a hohoro tonu te w! akaritenga, te 
tupu, nga mea maori, Ruka 9 I: '7; Hoani 6:5-:4; puka- 
puka Jesus the Christ na Talmage, w N .iarangi ;5~. 
4. 7. Hapa a te Ariki. 

E ai ki ta nga w anga ko te kainga whakamutu- 

nga a te Kai Whakaora i roto i rona tinana matemate. Te 
wahi, i roto i to runga ruma nui i f-iiruharama. Te wa, i te 
ahiahi o te Taite Ko nga mea i reira, ko te Karaiti me te 
Tekau ma Rua. Ko nga kai, lie taro he miiti he waina. Ko 
ana putake nei tera e taea te whakahaere i raro i n^a whakr- 
upokotanga tekau ma tahi. 

1. Ko te whakaaturanga whakatuwheratanga. Ruka 22: 

IS- 

2. Ko te whakawhetainga me te hoatntan^a o te taro. 
Ruka 22; 1 9. 

3. Ko te whakawhetainga me te hoatutanga o te waina. 
Ruka 22:20 



Tihema 22, 1926 TE karere 385 

4. Ko te whakakitenga o te takahanga o te whakapono 
o Hura. Jesus the Christ, wharangi 599. 

5. Ko te kupu whakaari ki te Tekau ma Rua. Ruka 22:29- 

3 • 

6. Ko te tautohenga mo te tikanga kai-arahi. Ruka 22:27. 

7. Ko te tikanga horoinga o nga waewae he tino tikanga 
whaka-u ki runga i nga mahi. "Ki te kore ahau e horoi i a 
koe, kahore au wahi i roto i a au." Hoani 13:8. 

8. Ko te haerenga atu o Hura. Hoani 13:27. 

9. Ko te kauwhau a Ihu i te wa o te Hapa. Hoani 13:34- 

35- 

10. Ko Tana inoi whakamutunga i te hakari, (Hoani 17: 
25-26) i whakaako tuatahi ai a Ihu i te whai tikanga o te 
inoi i runga i Tona ingoa. Hoani 16:23-24; 17:1-2. 

11. Ko te waiatatanga o te himene. Matiu 26:30. 

5. Ko te kainga parakuihi i muri te Aranga Mai. 

Te wahi, i tahatai o te moana o Kariri i te atatu. Ko 
nga kai he ika tunu, me te taro. I kai tahi a Ihu me nga 
.Apotoro, i hao ika nei i te po katoa a kaore he ika i mau. 

6. I whakaatu te Kai Whakaora ki te Poropiti ki a Hohepa Mete- 

Ka tu ropu tahi la a te huihuinga ki runga ki te whenua 
me te nui o nga poropiti o onamata me nga apotoro. Ako. me 
nga Kawe. wahanga 27. 

Ko te whakaturanga i nga hakari (celebrations) tetahi 
wahanga o te oranga nui noa atu i korerotia ra e te Kai 
Whakaora i a Hoani 10:10. 

NGA PATAI 

1. Pehea ta Hopa whakatuturutanga tera a 11m i tae 
ki te whakanuinga o te whakaotinga o te tauira tenei ao? 

2. He aha ta nga tangata i mea ai ki tc whakarite ki a 
Ihu i muri tc kainga i whangaia c la tc 5000? Hoani (x!5. 

AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. 
NGA KUPU I KOREROTIA E IHU 

Ki te aroha koutOU ki ahau, k in man ki aku turc. Hoani 
14:15. 

Te tangata kci a ia nei akn tine, e puritia ana hoki e ia t 
ko ia tc aroha ana ki ahau: ki te aioli.i tetahi ki ahau. k.i aro 

haina ia e toku Matua, a ka aroha ahau ki a ia. ka whakaatu 

i ahau ki a ia 1 loani I ,}:2I . 

Ka rnea a Mm ki a ratou. ko ahau te taro te ora: ki te 



i: KARERii i ihema 22, iy2C 

haere mai tetahi ki ahau, e kore raw a ia e hiakai; ki te wha- 
kapono hoki tetahi ki ahau. mutu ake tona mate-wai. Hoani 

6:35. 

He rua o nga pokiha, he kohanga nga manu te rangi; 
tena ko te Tama a te tangata hore ona waha e takoto ai tona 
matenga. Ruka 9: 58. 

Kahore he tangata e pono te mahi ki nga rangatira toko- 
rua: ka kino hoki ki tetahi, ka aroha ki tetahi; ka u ranei ki 
tetahi, a ka whaka'.iawea ki tetahi. E koie e pono ia koutou 
te mahi ki te Ai.ua, ki te taonga. Matiu: 6:24. 

Houhia te rongo, a e houhia ano te rongo ki a koutou. 
Ruka 6:37. 

Ka koa te hung a tohu tangata: e tohungia hoki ratou 
Matiu 57- 

Ki te whaka/erea noatia iho hoki e koutou nga he te 
tangata, ka whakarerea noatia iho ano koutou e to koutou 
Matua i te rangi. Matiu (.114. 

A ki te hara tou teina ki a koe, haere, korerotia tona ha- 
ra ki a ia, korua anake: ki te whakarongo ki a koe, ka riro i 
a koe tou teina. Matiu 18:15. 

Te whakawhiwhi, nui atu te hari i to te whiwhi. Mahi 

20:35. 

Hoatu. a ka homai ki a koutou; he n ehua pai, pehi raw a, 
purena tonu ta ratou e homai ai ki te kokoiu 00 koutou kaka- 
hu. Ko te mehua hoki e mehua ai koutou, hei mehua ano tena 
ki a koutou. Ruka 6:38. 

He ture hou laku ka hoatu nei ki a koutou, kia aroha kou- 
tou tetahi ki tetahi; kia rite ki toku aroha ki a koutou, wai ho- 
ki kia aroha koutou tetahi ki tetahi. Hoani IJ:34- 

Ma konei ka matau ai te katoa, he akonga koutou naku, 
me ka aroha koutou tetahi ki tetahi. Hoani 13: ,5. 

Na ko taku kupu tenei ki a koutou e whakarongo mai 
nei, Arohaina o koutou hoa whawhai; kia pai te mahi ki te 
hunga e kino ana ki a koutou. Ruka 6:27. 

Ko ta koutou e pai ai kia meatia e nga tangata ki a kou- 
tou, meatia ano e koutou ki a ratou. Ruka 9:31. 

Kia a hakapaua tou ngakau, tou wairua, tou hinengaro, ki 
te aroha ki te Ariki. ki tou Atua Ko te tuatahi tenei, k) te 
kupu nui. E rite ano l:e tu.irua ki tenei, kia aroha koe ki ou 
hoa tata, ano ko koe. Kei runga i enei kupu e rua e iri ana 
te ture katoa me nga poropiti. Matiu 22:37-40. 

Kia n.au te w hakapono ki te Atua. 11:22. 

Kia rite ki to koutou whakapono te meatanga ki a kou- 



Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 387 

tou. Matiu 9:26. 

Ko ahau te aranga, te ora: ko ia e whakapono ana ki a- 
hau, ahakoa kua mate,e ora ano. Hoani 11:25. 

I haere mai ahau kia whiwhi ai ratou ki te ora, ina tona 
nui noa atu. Hoani 10: 10. 

Haere mai ki ahau, e koutou katoa e mauiui ana, e tai- 
maha aua, a maku koutou e whakaokoki. Matiu 11:28. 

E pahemo te rangi me te whenua; ko aku kupu ia e kore 
e pahemo. Ruka 21:33. 



I roto i nga "Momona" 

He mea tuhi e Capt. Gilbert Frankau. a na 
Rapata Tanapu i whakamaori. 

I panuitia enei korero e whai ake nei ki te Sunday Pic- 
torial, koia nei tetahi o nga nupepa nunui o Ranana, Inga- 
rangi. Na ratou tenei tangata a Kapene Kiripata Paranikau 
i tono ki Uta me etahi atu takiwa o Amerika *ki te tuhi i 
nga tino ahuatariga i kitea ai e ia. — Nga Etita. 

He korero pono mo te Pa Tote, mo te IVToe Punarua. 
Na Kiripata Paranikau enei korero i te wa i toro ai ia i 

Amerika. E ki ana ia ko te Pa Tote tetahi taone 

ataahua, pai hoki ona whakahaere, i nga taone 

katoa kua kite ia. Ko tenei tangata ehara i 

te "Momma." 

"Ko te wahi tenei, e Pirikamu laanga." 

Me titiro iho koutou i a au e titiro iho ana inanahi i te 
taha o nga hiwi nui, e kiia nei ko te Wasatch, i te wahi nei 
kei reira te kohatu whakamaharatanga a Pirikamu laanga e 
whakairoa nei ki ana kupu, "I his is the place," na e whaka- 
ae hoki koutou na ko Pirikamu laanga, kai-hanga Uta, he 
ahakoa tekau ma ivva ana wahine. e rima tckau ma ono ana 
tamariki, koia he tino kai-arahi i nui ke atu i nga tangata 
katoa e whakatupuria ana e te whenua i tenei ra. haunga 
hoki a Muhorini te kai-arahi nui Itari. 

I te wahi turanga o tana kohatu, kaore nei ano kia hi pa 
te v am tekau tail tana tunga tuatahitanga i taua wahi, ka 
kite koutou i nga malii a ona ringaringa. a tenei kai-arahi 
nu! kua mate nei. 

Ko te wharau te Mnana Tote i ata whiriwhiria nei e 
karapotia ana e nga maunga e tiohoia nei e te huka. 1 ko atu 

ko nga tarangi maunga Oka, a kei raro ko te Moana fote 



388 TE tCARKKJ THhema j_\ 

e kanapanapa ana mai i te tonga o te ra ano he hiriwa. I te- 
nei taha o te roto ko te Pa I »te, punga o te iwi ''Mom on a, 
a o nga korero whakakinokino hoki o nga ta fata m i ratou 
i nga ra kua pa K i te nuinga o nga korero kikino mo 

te iwi "M >m m, ■■."" he paj u katoa Ko nga whare e 1 >ngo 
nci koutou hei nohoanga wahine, k >re i a ko- 

tahi e kitea i tenei Eiiona hou. Kua koie te t< ngala e moe 
maha i te wahine. 

Ko Hiona i te lei ra, he pa kua tupu nui ie rangi marie, 
kua tino pai hoki te whakahaere o \ na iure, tac a.u ana hoki 
ki te ahua o nga mahi o te hahi. Ko nga whaie he kohatu te 
nuinga, ko nga tirifci he tino whanui, e tupuria ana tetahi 
taha me tetahi taha e ona rakau hei wh&kapaipai. 

Whakarongo mai koutou ki nga korero mo le whaka. 
tun.ua o tenei pa. 1 haere ra ou ki k nei, ara a Pirikamu 
Iaanga me etahi o ana iwi, k >tai i rau e v> ; a teka-u ma t >ru 
nga tane, e toru nga Wahine, me nga tamariki e rua. Ko 
ratou he mea pei mai i a nga hunga kohuru i Nawu, lie taone 
tera na ratou (na nga ".M.niona"/ i w akatu ki te takiwa o 
Irinoi. Heoi, ko to ratou hekenga mai ki Le wahi e noho nei 
ratou i rung a i a ratou kaata okiha, ko etahi na runga mai 
i te hoiho, Tino whakamomori ratou kia tae ki Hiona, he 
ahakoa te tekau ma torn ran o nga maero hei haerenga mo 
ratou, i nga koraha, i nga wahi poup >u, kore raw a ratou i 
noho mai. Tino kino te wera o nga koraha i haere ai ratou, 
a ko nga wheua pawharo i hora haere ana i aua koraha, ma 
tonu i te n^aunga a te ra. Ko etahi o ratou i tuhituhi ki nga 
mahunga pawharo hei whakaatu ki nga mea to mini o ratou 
ki te ara e tika ai te haere ki Hiona, penei nga korero, "i 
haere matou ma tenei ara, ka nui te ora. Hune 2')." Heoi ko 
te haerenga mai i muri i a ratou o etahi mano tangata, ko nga 
mea rawa kore kaore nei i whiwhi ki te okiha, ki te hoiho ra- 
nei, i hari mai i a ratou taonga i runga i nga kaata to ki te ri- 
ngaringa. He nui hoki nga mea o ratou i mate i te haerenga 
mai ki te whenua o te kupu whakaau, heoi ko nga kaiolj 
(kuri mohoao) o nga mania i mohio ki to ratou tokomahata. 
nga (nga mea i mate nei) me nga ahuatanga i pa ki a ratou 
i muri mai. 

Kua hauhakena ke noatia atu e nga Paeonia a ratou 
taewa, a kua oti ke te whakatakoto o te mapi o te tacjne, i 
mua o te taenga mai o te hunga too kaata. I tana w a tae 
noa mai ki naianei kaore ano nga tangata i mohio ki te wha- 
katakoto taone pera i a Pirikamu Iaanga. I timata mai i te tau 



Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 389 

1847 nga mahi nunui a Pirikamu Iaanga a tae atu ana ki te 
tau 1880. Oti pu i a ia he taone ki te koraha, a whakanohoia 
ana ki tetahi iwi matau, rangatira hoki. Ka tupu haere nei 
hoki ona taone ki te wahanga ki Uta, pera ano me lngarangi 
te nui. Ka mahi ia, ka ahu i te whenua, ka whakatupu hua 
rakau, ka keri i nga waro, i era atu mea o te whenua. Ka 
tupu nui nei hoki ia me tona iwi, me te mana hoki o to ratou 
hahi. Engari no muri mai, i te wa o te whakanuinga o Kuini 
Wikitoria, mo te rima tekau tau ona e kuini ana, ka timata 
te kino a nga tangata o waho o te hahi ki te moe punarua a 
te iwi "Momona." Na, ka puta te whawhai tino nui, i te mea 
hoki kua tino whakapumautia te tikanga moe punarua roto i 
te iwi nei, e rua ano nga whakatupuranga i kawe i tenei 
tikanga, he ahakoa kihai i mahia nuitia e nga tane katoa o 
te hahi, i noho pea ki te wha nga tane "Momona" i roto i te 
kotahi rau (4 per cent), i moe punarua. 

Ko te moe punarua, kia mahara koutou, ehara i te wahi 
nui rawa o nga tikanga o te whakapono o te iwi "Momona." 
I te pahitanga o te ture whakanoa i te moe punarua a te "Mo- 
mona," ka meatia ko nga wahine tuatahi anake hei moe to- 
nu, ko etahi katoa atu kaore e maharatia he wahine pono 
i runga i te aronga o te ture. I- te kaha o te whakaaro o nga 
tane ki a ratou wahine, ka wehea i a ratou i runga i nga 
mahi a te kooti whakawa, katahi ka piiratia ki te Hupirimi 
Kooti me i kore e taea te whakakore o te ture nana nei i wehe 
a ratou wahine. Heoi ka whakaaetia e te Hupirimi Kooti 
kia whakahaerea taua kehi, no te whakahaeretanga ka hinga 
nga 'Momona. " Kore rawa nga tane i pai ki te whakarere 
i a ratou wahine, ka mea he pai ke to ratou haere ki te whare 
herehere i te wehea o a ratou wahine, i a ratou tamariki 
i whanau tika i roto i to ratou hahi. 

1 te tatanga pau o te ono tau nga tau nga "Momona" 
e tukinotia ana ka murua nga whenua katoa te Hahi. Heoi 
ka mate nei hoki. Ko nga wahine me nga tamariki a nga 
tane, i mua atu o te ture whakanoa i te moe punarua, ka 
whakaaetia e te ture, me he me a ka whakamutua iawatia e nga 
"Momona" i muri mai te moe punarua. 

1 te timatatanga te 1890 ka whakamutua rawatia te 

moe punarua e te iwi "Momona," a haere nei, kua tino tatu 
te whakaaro o te Kawanatan.ua Amerika kua iiuilu tera 
mahi. Ki te kitea ana nga mea e moe punarua ana e te hahi 
ka tapahia ki waho o te hahi, he tino mea kino raw. 1 lenei kj 
a ratou inaianei, B kaha ana an ki te ki e IcOTC yaw a <• kitea 



390 te KARERE Tihema 22. 1936 

e tetahi tangata nana ki te rapu, i roto i tc Pa Tote tetahi 
tangata e moe punarua ana. I tutaki au ki eta hi wahine 
i moea punaruatia i mua te whakanoatanga tana mahi, 
tino ngahau au ki nga korero mo ratou, engari ki te nuinga 

o te ao kua peneitia hei korero tara ma ratou. 

Kei te tupu rawa atu te hahi te "Momona," kei te man 
tonu hoki ona iwi ki ona ritenga, me te tahuri inai ano hoki 
o nga iwi waho ki to ratou hahi, me te mamae tonu 
ratou ngakau i nga mahi tawai mo ratou i nga wa mua. 

Kia whakaatu au ki a koutou, e whakaaetia ana e nga 
"Momona" kia kauwhau nga tauiwi ki roto i ratou whare 
karakia. Ko ahau i tu ki te whai korero i roto i to ratou Ta- 
penakara nui whakaharahara, ko te nui o nga tangata e uru 
ki taua whare tekau nga mano. Kei roto i taua whare he 
okena e kiia ana ko tetahi o nga okena tangi pai i runga i te 
mata o te whenua. 

I ahau i reira ka haere mai ki a au tetahi apiha no nga 
taua a Ingarangi, ara o te Norfolk Regiment, raua ko tana 
tuahine ataahua whakarere. Ko te tuahine o te tangata nei 
katahi ano ka uru ki te hahi "Momona." Ka titiro mai ki a 
au te wahine nei, ka minemine ki te kata, me te w ha k a uru 
ano o nga tohu o te riri ki ona mata moana. Katahi ia ka 
oha noa mai ki a au. ka whakaatu mai i tona ingoa, heoi 
whakarongo tonu atu au. Koia nei ana korero ki a ahau. 

"Kua rongo pea koe i nga korero moku. Ko ntja nupepa 
o te takiwa ki toku kainga kua ki tonu i nga korero no toku 
urunga ki te hahi "Momona." Ka meatia i roto i ana nupepa 
he mea kawhaki au, na i te rangonga o taku whaea, ko tona 
rerenga mai ki te whakaora i ahau. No tenei hahi hoki taku 
whaea. Haere kau mai taku whaea he toro i tenei wahi. Ka 
noho maua ka kata noa iho ki nga korero parau i taia ai ki te 
nupepa Kia rereke hoki enei mahi? Ka nui taku hiahia 
kia mutu te ta i enei mea parau, e whakaiti nei i te hunga e 
noho ana i runga i te rangimarie." Heoi ano nga korero a 
taua kotiro. 

E takoto noa iho ana te tono a te "Momonatanga," ko to 
ratou whakapono penei nei ano i o etahi nei. Engari kore 
rawa au e whakapono ki tona wahi nui i puta te Atua Matua 
me te Tama ki tetahi tamaiti kuare noa iho ki a Hohepa 
Mete, i Ingarangi Hou i etahi tau torutoru i mini iho o te 
whawhai ki Wataru (Waterloo). Kaore ano hoki au e wha- 
kapono ko nga iwi "Momona," atawhai nei i a au, e pupuiu 
ana mo tonu ake atu i te Tohungatanga o Merekihereke. E- 



Tihema 22. 1926 TE KARERE 391 

ngari ki te tirohia ratou i runga i a ratou mahi, e whakatika- 
ia ana ratou ki te aroaro o te ao katoa. 

He iwi pukumahi tenei iwi te "Momona," na me titiro e 
tatou, na ratou i tu ai te takiwa o Uta, a kaore ano hoki e 
mutu mai ta ratou whakapai i taua wahi, e tupu nui nei i te- 
nei ra i tenei ra. 

Tino pai o ratou ritenga, ko nga mahi kikino katoa kao- 
re e whakar.etia ana kia mahia e o ratou tangata, ko to ratou 
Pukapuka o te Matauranga e puru ana i nga mahi kaipaipa, 
kaiwaipiro, korero tinihanga, kohukohu, me nga mahi purei 
hoiho, petipeti hoki. 

Ko te iwi "Momona," he nui atu to ratou manawanui, to 
ratou manaaki ki era atu o nga whakapono, he maha hoki nga 
hahi o nga iwi ke i roto o Uta, e koropiko ana ki to ratou 
Atua, kaore e whakararurarua ana e nga "Momona," engari 
e waihotia ana kia mahi ana i runga i te rangimarie. 

I te unga tuatahitanga atu o te Hahi Katorika ki te Pa 
Tote ka tae a Pirikamu Iaanga ka hoatu noa i tetahi wahi o 
tana whenua, me te kotahi rau pauna hei awhina i a ratou. 

Ko te Kawana o Uta i enei ra, pootitia ai penei ano i a 
tatou e pooti nei ki nga mema o te paremete, he tangata no 
te whakapono Katorika, engari ko te nuinga o nga tangata 
pooti ki a ia he "Momona." 

Ko te iwi "Momona" e utu ana i tetahi wahi whakatekau 
o a ratou moni, hei whakatu whare karakia, hei atawhai i te 
hunga rawa kore, i nga mea ano hoki e tika ana kia aroha- 
tia. Kaore hoki ratou i te whakaae ki nga whakahaere rere- 
ke pera i te Bolshevism Ruhia. 

Ko a ratou kaumatua e haere mai ana ki a tatou ki Inga- 
rangi ko ratou ano ki te utu i a ratou kai, kakahu. rerewe, i 
nga pukapuka hoki o te hahi e tuhaina nei e ratou. 

He ahakoa te kore e rite o ago tatou whakaaro ki ago 
nga "Momona," e mahi nei i nga mahi ta ratou ha hi i runga 
i te whakapono kua puta he whakakitenga hou ki a ratou. 
lie pai rawa me mutu a tatou mahi whakakinokino ki te iwi 
kaore nei he hara ki a tatou. 

Na ki te kore te tangata e whakapono ki aku korero 1 ro- 
to i tenei pukapuka, ka ki tonu atu au ki .1 ia, he pai rau a 
lo haere ki te Pa Tote kia ata kite ai koC 1 te jH.no .. ;iku ko. 
rero. E kiia ano hoki ko te mahi a nga miliinare i tukua ki 

[ngarangi he poapoa i nga wahine takakau, ka hari ki 

ratou whare hei wahine ma ratou. Me haereere e koe Qga 
tiriti o tenei pa, ka at.i matakitaki ai i 11^.1 tam.iliine ataahna 



392 



IE KARERE 



Tihema 22, 1920 



a tenei iwi a te "Momona," he tino ataahua, tini hoki ana 
tamahine. A kia pena ka timatatia ano te moe punarua, ka 
pera ano i to te "Momona" aroha i timatatia i o ratou ake 
kainga, e kore ratou e haere ke ki Ingarangi ki te tiki wa- 
hine ma ratou. 



Ko nga Manita (Monitors) o te M.A.C. 




Tiata Witehira Vili Purcell 

John Tuita Pauliasi Pikula 

Herbert Brunt Faafeu'u Taua 

Ki te Hunga Tapu me nga hoa aroha katoa, he whakama- 
haratanga tenei ki a koutou ko nga mahi o te kura o te M.A. 
C. inaianei keite piki haere tonu. I te tau kua huri ake nei i wha- 
katungia e te poari o te kareti etahi o nga tamariki hei kai- 
whakahaere i nga mahi katoa o te kura, hei awhina ana hoki 
i nga kai-whakaako o taua kura ki te whakatipu i tenei mea 



Tihema 22, 1926 



TE KARERE 



393 



I 










394 [ ' KARERK Tihe na 22. iy26 

i te pai, te rangimnrie, ki waenganui i nga tamariki katoa. 
E hoa ma, he ropu whiriwhiri tenei i nga take, i n?a ahuata- 

nga katoa e pa ana ki te ku.a, ki 11 jj;a tamariki ano hoki. he 
whakapiki i nga mahi o te kura, ara ma ratou ano e whaka- 
haere nga mahi waho o te kura. 

No reira he honore tenei ki nga tamariki kei runga i tenei 
turanga, no te mea he tamariki ratou e whakariuingia ana e 
nga mahita, e nga tangata katoa ano hoki. He mea hari, he 
mea koa tenei ki nga matua enei tamariki. n 1 te m >a kua 
tu a ratou tamariki hei kai-whakahaere, liei ma'.iu.iga au ho- 
ki mo nga tamariki taua kareti. 

Koia tenei ko to koutou hiahia ki a koutou tamariki i tu- 
kuna mai ai e koutou ki te kura kia whiwhi i te matauranga, 
i te whakaaro-nui, no reira hei matakitaki ma koutou i te pai, 
i te ataahua o nga mahi o te kura. 

Ko enei tamariki kua mohio ki te whakahaere tikanga no 
te mea kei a ratou te mana whakahaere; ina hoki atu ratou ki 
o ratou kainga e kaha ana ratou ki te whakahaere tikanga i 
waenganui i o ratou iwi katoa E te Hunga Tapu, e nga hoa 
aroha, koia tenei ko te huarahi e whiwhi ai a koutou tamariki 
ki te matauranga me te whakaaro nui, no te mea ko te kororia 
o te Atua ko te matauranga. Na to koutou teina i te Rongopai. 

Pita Kere 



KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. 

Ko ELDER A. WRIGHT GRANT Spokane, Washing- 
ton. 1 tae mai a Erata Karanata ki Akarana i te 8 o nga ra 

Tihema, 1924, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Akarana. 

1 te I o nga ra o Maehe 1925 ka tu koia hei Hekeretari Kai- 
awhina te Mihana. Ka nukuhia i te 21 o Oketopa [925 ki 
te takiwa o Poneke, a i te 4 o nga ra o Aperira 1929 ka nuku- 
hia ano ki te takiwa o Waikato mo te taha Pakeha o reira. 
Tukua honoretia atu i te 25 o Oketopa, 1926. 

Ko ELDER LESTER S. THOMSON Rexburg, Idaho. 
1 tae mai a Tamihana te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1 92 4, a ka 
whakaritea ki te Takiwa o Hauraki mo te taha Pakeha. A i 
te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1924, ka nukuhia ki Akarana. Ka 
nukuhia ano ki te takiwa o te Tai Rawhiti i te 3 o Hepetema 
1924 a i te 26 o nga ra o Hurae 1925 ka whakaritea koia te tu- 
muaki mo reira. I tukua honoretia atu ia i te 23 o nga ra o 
Noema 1926. 



Tiheina 22, 1926 



TE KARI.RE 



395 





Elder Lester S. Thomson 



Elder A. Wright Grant 



NA TE ETITA. 



E te Hunga Tapu, tena koutou. Tenei te tuku atu nei i te 
'Karere" whakamutunga mo te tan 102,). Kua whakaritea 
hoki e matou he maramataka mo te Tan lion, kia kore ai 
koutou e wareware ki to koutou manu i nga marama e takoto 
ake nei. Heoi, kia ora koutou katoa i roto i te Kirihimete me 
te Tau lion Kotahi ano te kui)ii a Te Karere ki a koutou i 
tenei wa, Whakaritea nga ture a te Atua, me o koutou kara- 
ngatanga i roto i te Kingitanga. Ma tenei huarahi anake e 
whivvhi ai koutou ki te ora, ki te hari. ki te koa. Kaua hoki c 
penei, "He pakeke, he uaua, nga ara te Tika," engari kia 
niahara ki te kupu a te Karaiti (Matin l !:.>(•). '"Me ngawari ho- 
ki taku ioka, he mama taku pikaunga." \o reira kia peia 

atu nga hiahia taikaha o te kikokiko, kia ngakau tapatahi 

tatou katoa i roto i nga mahi a te Ariki. Whakaritea te Kupu 

o te Matuaranga kia poke kore ai u tatou Temepara, whaka- 
ritea te Whakatekau me nga takoha kia whai hea ai koutou i 
roto i te kingitanga me nga manaakitanga a te Atua, kia pu- 
rangatia he taonga ma tatou ki te rangi. Meri Kirihimete me 

te Hap] Xuia ki a koutou kato.i. ma te Atua tatOU kato.i e ma- 
naaki i roto i te lau I lou. 

X.i o koutou inn. 1 iti r.iw .1, 
\.i nga Etita 



39° TE karkki. fihema 22, iy26 



He Ripoata na Nireaha Paewai 

Ki nga etita Te Karere, e hoa ma tena korua e noho 
mai nei me tooku iwi e aroha nuitia nei e ahau i te po i te 
ao, mai i te Waipounamu tae noa mai ki te Aotearoa. 

E te Iwi Maori, tena ra koutou. Ka nui te tangi atu te 
ngakau i te nui o te mokemoke, i te kore Maori. Heoi. 

Kei te kura ahau inaianei o te U.A.C. Ka nui te pai o 
tooku noho i reira, tooku kaha ki te ako, a, kei te mau etalii 
o nga whakaakoranga, kei te kore eta hi e mau. Ko te nuinga 
pea kei te mau. Ka nui te pai o nga kai-whakaako ki ahau, 
te tiaki, te tautoko, me te awhina i a ahau, me to ratou pi- 
rang] ki te korero ki a ahau me te patai mo te whenua o a in 
Tireni. 

E rua nga kaumatua i hoki mai i \iu Tireni i te mi/iana 
ko Hori Henihana raua ko Erata i^redrickso.n kei konei e 
kura ana. 

E te iwi kua tae niaua ko to >ku hoa me a maua tamariki 
ki te Hui Tau i tu i te 2, 3. 4, 5, nga ra Oket >oa, 1925. 1 
te tahi o nga ra i te po, ka tu te huihuinga o nga kaumatu 1 o 
Niu Tireni. I reira ka kite ahau i nga kaumatua kua hoki- 
hoki mai i Niu Tireni. Ko Harihana, Hoijpuruku, Romeni, 
Matin Kauri, Pene Katata, Leo B. Sharp, SJ. ote^e, A lire J, 
Parry, Austin, Morrison, Garff, Miller. Patrick, ^\ e t )ver, 
Xitama, me etahi atu kaumatua kua warewaie ahau ki nga 
ingoa. Nuku pea i te waru tekau nga kai niatua. i reira 
hoki nga wahine. 

1 te 2 o nga ra he Ratapu, a i te ata i te tekau ka tu te 
karakia nui. I reira te Tunuiakitanga le Hahi. i reira nga 
Apotoro Tekau ma Rua, te Petariaka, nga 1 inuaki nga 
Whitu Tekau, me te Hunga Tapu, 12,000 pea, kii tonu le 
Tapenakara, te Assembly rial 1, me nga tatau. me nga ma- 
rae (lawns) i te tangata. 

1 ahau e whakarongo ana ki te Poropiti e kor ro ana ka 
hoki atu nga whakaaro ki te kainga, me tooku wawata kia 
rongo hoki koutou i tenei tangata e korero ana, e whakaro- 
ngo ana te Iu,030 tangata i tana wa ano. 

1 tenei ata i korero a I imuaki Niperi raua ko Timnaki 
Ivins. 1 te ahiahi i korero ana a Apotoro Rihara, a Apotoro 
Reel Smoot, a Apotoro Raimana, a Apotoro Melvin J. Ball- 
arJ. Ka mutu i enei tangata ki te kore .0. I ahau e whaka- 
rongo ana ki enei tangata e koiero ana ko oku hoa noho ko 



Tihema 22, 1920 TE KARERE 397 

Wiremu Katene raua ko Hugh Geddes. 1 moe a Hiu raua ko 
toona hoa wahine me ta raua tama a Mohi me tona wahine 
i to maua whare i te po o te Paraire kua pahure ake nei. I 
tenei ra ka tutaki ahau ki to tatou apotoro, a Apotoro Rawiri 
Makei me toona hoa wahine. I pohiri ia ki a maua kia haere 
ki tona whare ki te kai, kia patai ano ia ki a maua mo te 
ahua. I runga i te mea kua tae mai te waka hei whakahoki 
i a maua ki Rokena 90 maero te tawhiti kahoro i taea te 
haere ki tona tono i tenei wa. Otira i toku kitenga tuatahi- 
tanga i a ia ka korero ahau mo te ahuatanga o te Maori me 
te take o tooku haere, he awhina i te Maori. Ka tae tooku 
korero mo te pai o te Poari o te Kawenatanga ki te tautoko 
i ahau i runga i ooku whakaaro. Ka tae hoki ooku korero 
mo te Hui ki Tikitiki, mo te Kura Moromona, mo tooku kupu 
ki a Ngata me te iwi i te hui, tukua te Kura Moromona kia 
haere ana i te taha o te Kura o Te Aute. Kahore e pai ko 
tetahi e ora, a ko tetahi e mate, me ora tahi. Heoi kahore 
ahau i kite i te mutunga, i hoki ahau i te po o te Ratapu ki te 
kura. 

Kaati, he take ke tenei, e pa ana ki te whutu-paoro o 
Amerika. I te pureitanga o to matou kura U.A.C. ki Colo- 
rado, na te timuaki o te kura ahau i mau i runga i toona mo- 
tokaa. I purei ki te Ogden, te taone a Timuaki Angiha T. 
Raiti, a i kite hoki ahau i a ia. Kahore ahau i pai ki tenei 
purei, he patu tangata te mahi. Tekau ma tahi nga tangata 
ki te taha kotahi. 1 te mutunga o te purei, tekau ma rua pea 
nga tangata i matemate nga tinana. I waimarie i wiini ai 
i a matou. Mehemea he Maori te iwi e purei nei, kua mate- 
mate nga Pakeha. Te take, mehemea kahore te pooro i te 
tangata e ahei ana tetahi atu ki te tuki i tana tangata, ka- 
hore ra te pooro i a ia. No reira ahau i ki ai kahore e pai 
ma te Maori he purei i tenei ahua purei, he toa hoki te Maori 
ki te tuki i te tangata. Ko enei ano oku korero ki te iwi nei. 
Kati nei enei korero hei korerotanga ma matOU ma nga tai- 
tama: iki. 

He wa pooti tenei mo nga mema par em ate Amerika, a 
i konei a Matin Kauri e kauh.au ana mo te taha ki a Senator 

(Apostle) Reed Smoot, Republican. I konei hoki a Erata 
Hoani Tatana. Kua maeriwe ke matou ka tae mai. Na i ki 
mai i Niu Tireni a ia e kauhau ana. Nana hoki a Takana 

raua ko Takare i marena, me eta' 1 atu. Ka )G nga tail ina- 

ianei i tona taenga ki kona. 

(Tana te roanga) 



39« 



l E KARERE 



1920 




Erata Hon Henihano Erema Pitihana "Nik" Paewtii 
(Tumuaki te U.A.CJ 



Ko te Whakaeminga o nga Korero 



KI TE 


EXIT A 






Ko 


nga Mahi Hui Tau 








He Mihi Aroha ki Te Puea Heran ;i 




3-6 




Ko te Marae te Hui Tau 




3^5 




Powhiri 




66 




Ripoata 




[98 


Ko 


n^a Powhiri Hui Pariha 








Haki Pei 


244, 


266 




Hauraki 




244 




Ngapuhi 




3} 




Pei Whairangi 




244 




Tai Rawhiti 


33, 


266 




Taranaki 




343 




Waikato 




32 


Ko 


nga Ripoata Hui Atawhai 


268, 


W> 


Ko 


n^a Ripoata Hui Pariha 








Haki Pei 


63. 


328 




Hauraki 


61, 


269 




Tai Rawhiti 




92 




Waikato 


27 


, 99 


Ko nga Ripoata Kauwhau Haere 








Ani Paki 




30 




[riparete Pomare 




J 27 



Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 399 

Paepae W. Witehira 274 

Tu Geo. Stakman 59 
Ko nga Ripoata K.ura Hapati 

Mo te Ra nga Whaea 203, 204, 205 

Ko nga Ripoata Matenga, Tanumanga 

Hoani Tiu Ratima 30 

Kahukore Karaka Pairama 267, 304 

Katene Poutu Penekupa 64 

Koro Waerea 206 

Metapere Matai 161 
Nga Peepi a Hemi Pohutuhutu me 

Tatana Arona 330 

Otene Tuehu Pom are 329 

Piki Waerea 233 

Piripi Matenga 306 

Richard Watene 327, 330 

Ta Timi Kara 315 

Te Paea Cunningham 274 

Tepara Christina Reti 304 

Tepora Ruru 162 
Ko nga Whakamihitanga 

Ki a Ngapuhi Renata 174 

Ki a Te Puea Herangi 320 
Ko nga Ripoata Mo te Ahuatanga nga Takiwa 
He Kotiro Aroha 

He Manaakitnga ' 201 

He Marenatanga 162 
Ko nga Ripoata no Hiona 

"Ma nga Hua ka Mohiotia ai" 206 

Nireaha Paewai 364, 396 
Ko nga Ripoata Poroporoaki 

Ma hi a 305 

KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA 

140, 203, 268, 307, 1S2, 307, 394 

KO NGA TUHINGA MAI 

E Mahi ana Tatou 1110 te Aha? 209 

1 le Kupu Whakaatu 100 

He Kauwhau Pai 90 
He Morehu no te Whare Iharaira 18, 54, to8 

He T i ka ranei nga Hani Katoa? 356 
He Whakaahua Pai 200, 235, 207 
I It- Whakaaturanga mo te W hare [haraira 

I rotO i nga "Momona" 387 

Ko nga Mahi a te Kura I lapati 

hei Painga ma Tatou jo;. 236 
Ko nga Pukapuka < Inamata 
Ko te Aranga Mai 



400 TE KARERE Tihema 22, 1926 

Ko te Kari o Erene 363 

Ko te Maaka Tuarua 21 

Ko te Merekara o nga Karoro 177 

Ko te Nama a te Atua 242, 262 

Ko te Takanga Atu i te Rongopai 163 

Me Pehea? 2^8 

Ta te Manawa Akoranga ki a Tatou 137 

Te Aranga o te Hunga .viate 57 

Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti 138, 168 

Te Urimi me te Tumime 33 * 

KO NGA RONGO KORERO 

Ko te Hui Nui o Ngati Porou 96, 129, 165 

Ripoata mo te Kareti 

70, 131, 171, 233, 279, 329, 361, 368, 392 
MAHI KURA HAPAT1 

Christmas Program 338 

Karakia Kirihimete 342 

Concert Recitation 2, 40, 72, 112, 144, 

180, 212, 246, 282, 310, 344, 370 

Intermediate Department 10, 47, 80, 121, 

151, 187, 222, 235, 294, 315. 349, 376 

Kindergarten Department 14, 49. 82, 1 23, 154, 

190, 225. 258, 297, 318, 351, 379 

Korero a Ngakau 2, 40, J2, 112, 144 

180, 212. 246, 282, 310, 344, 370 

Maori Theological 2, 40, 72, 115, 144, l8o, 

212, 246, 282. 310, 344, 370 

Mothers' Day Program 112 

Pakeha Theological 7, 44, 76, Ii8, 

147, 183, 217, 249, 28S, 313, 347, 374, 

Postlude, Prelude, Sacrement Gem I, 39, 70, 

III, 143 179, 211, 245, 281, 309, H7> 369 

Significance of Partaking the Sacrament 53, 88 

MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 34, 66, 103, 132, 

158, 194, 229, 261, 300, 323, 354, 383 

NA TE ETITA 

Bound Volumes 66 

E Ono nga Take mo te Whakatekau 174 

He Mihi 174 

He Mihi Kirihimete 395 

Ripoata Hui Tau 172 

KO TE MUTUNGA 



TE KARERE Tihema 22 1926 





IHAIA 9:6 

"Kua whanau nei hoki he tamaiti ma tatou, kua homai 
he tama ki a tatou." 

I te ahiahi o te Ratapu, i te 5 o nga ra o Tihema, 1926, 
ka puta mai he tama hou ki a Tumuaki Hoani H. iinikini 
raua ko tona hoa wahine. Ka nui te ora o te peepi nei, me 
tona mama hoki. Kahore ano Ida kitea he ingoa mona i te_ 
nei tuhinga. Ka nui te hari me te koa i puta mai ki o raua 
nei ngakau, i te mea hoki kua oti ke te whakapuaki e nga 
takuta o Amerika e, kua kore te wahine nei e kaha ki te 
whakawhanau tamariki. Ma tenei ka mohio tatou tera he 
matauranga e nui atu ana i to nga takuta, i to nga tangata 
matauranga. 

Kia ora koe e Sister Tinikini korua ko to peepi, kia ora 
hoki koe e te Tumuaki. Ma te Atua koutou ko a korua ta- 
mariki e manaaki e tiaki i roto i te Tail Hou. Mere Kirihi- 
mete me te Hapi Nuia ki a koutou katoa na nga Etita o Te 
Karere. 



Hui Pariha ki Waipawa 

E te Hunga Tapu, tena koutou. Kua tae atu te rongo 
te pai o nga hui o te.takiwa o Heretaunga nei mai i te Wai- 
pounamu tae noa atu ki te pito te Hiku. Na, i te mea kua 
whakaritea kia tu te Hui Pariha ki Waipawa a te IS me te 16 
nga ra o Hanuere 1927, maku e whakahau atu ki te Hunga 
Tapu e noho tata ana kia haere mai ki te whakarite i tenei 
take. Kaua e riro ma Poneke, ma Ngapuhi ranei e whakaki 
t > tatou whare. Han*.' mai ki te whakarongo ki to tatou tu- 
muaki e whakamarama ana i te m, pi. Haere mai ki te ako 
i te tauira e mohio ai tatou ki te haere tika ki te (Drang . rb- 
nutanga, no te mea "E roa a ram, g tata a runga," 1 te mea 
hoki kua oti te whakamarama e te tumuaki kua tino tat 1 te 
wa inaianei te haerenga kororia mai to tato 1 Ariki. 

Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai. Haere mai e te Hu- 
nga Tapu, haere mai hoki koutou e nga hoa aroha. He< 
to kout< »u U'in.i, 

Na l\ in >i B. I leke, rumua ki rakiwa 

( I e lu. id Meha, l umua k 1 Peka ) 



Tihema 22. 1920 



1 E K ARK RE 



MO TE HUI TAU 
E te Hunga Tapu, 

Tena koutou, me o tatou whanaun^a, hoa-tata, me Qga 
hoa aroha. Kia tan nga manaakitanga a te Atua ki a koutou— 
kia u, kia matau, kia ngohengohe ki te Rongopai. Heoi nga 
mihi. 

I tu te hui a te komiti Hui Tau i te Hui Pariha i hori ake 
nei o te takiwa o Heretaunga (H.B.) i tu ki Korongata. I taua 
hui i te marama e mate ana nga awhina Hui. Ka motini te 
Tumuaki Mihana (Pres. J. Howard Jenkins) kia whakahaua 
te Hekeretari, kia tuhi inoi ki nga Takiwa o te Mihana kia 
tiri (tou makamaka) riwai (taewa, parareka) nga mema o aua 
Takiwa e whaiwhakaaro ana ki te awhina i te Hui Tau. Ko 
nga hua o aua tiringa riwai hei awhina i nga kohi Hui Tau 
e tera tutuki mo te Hui Tau ka tu ki Waikato, i te tau e heke 
iho nei. Heoi, nga whakamarama. 

Tenei ahau te inoi etu nei ki a koutou (ki nga Takiwa, 
Peka, mema, ara. ki te Hunga Tapu katoa o Aotearoa) i ru- 
nga i taua whiriwhiringa whakataunga kua huaina ake nei, 
kia wehe i tetahi, i etahi rarangi ranei o a koutou tiringa ri- 
wai, mo tenei take whaiwhakaaro. (Ko nga hua o aua rara- 
ngi me tuku ki te makete, ko nga moni e tuku mai.) 

E whakahau atu ana ano hoki kia kaha ki te whakarite 
i tenei take. Ki te whakaaro, ma enei tu whakahaere e ora 
ai nga Hui Tau, ara te Hui Tau ki Waikato e heke iho nei. 

WILSON PAEWAI. 

Wawahanga o te Kohi Tau, Hui Tau X200 



Bay of Islands 


15 





Tamaki 


20 


East Coast 






Te Hauke 


17 10 


(Gisborne, etc) 


10 10 





Taranaki 


10 


Going, P. 


2 





Wairarapa 


10 


Hauraki 


12 10 





Waipounamu 


600 


Korongata 


10 10 





Wairoa 


10 


Moawhango 


5 





Whangarei 


15 


Manawatu 


5 





Waikato 


20 


Mahia 


5 





Waipawa 


500 


Nuhaka 


15 











Porirua 


6 







£200 



Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 



A t€ 1 nga ra Pepuere, 1927 

Ka timata ano te mahi kura a te 

MAORI AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE 



Tukua mai o hereni inaianei, kia tino whaiti 
ai a te timatanga o te kura. 

KO TE TIKANGA, utua katoatia i mua i to urunga 

KO NGA EKEPENIHA 

Mo te kai, ruma, hopi, kanara, etc. £16 

Mo te takuta, rongoa, etc. 10 

Mo te Kakahu Kura (Uniform) 2 2 

Mo te rakau, neira etc. (ma nga mea 

anake e ako nei ki te mahi kamura) I 

Mo nga pukapuka, pene rakau, mangu- 

mangu, etc. e tata ana ki te 2 

Me etahi atu pauna hei hoko kakahu mo te Ratapu, 
hei utu hoki i te pikitia, kanikani, rare, etc. 




TE KARERK i 'ihcmii 22, 1926 



KO NGA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA 



Ro enei etahi rma pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei bo- 
konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o 
enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Auckland. 
STANDARD CHURCH WORKS 

Teachers Bibles, with Ready Refereru e, Leather 25-0 

New Testament & Kead\ Reference-, Leather n-0 

Book of Mormon, Cloth ... 2-6 & 7-6 

. Half Leather go 

, Leather IO-0 & 15 

Pearl of Great Price, Cloth. 2-0 

Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0 

,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 

MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS 

Mauri Ready Reference, Cloth 2 o 

.Leather ... 3*6 

Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 

" " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in 1 11-6 

" Pukapuka a Moroni ona, ("loth ... 5-0 

, Leather 15-0 

Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata $ Peaia UtU Nui, Cloth $-0 

', Leather 1$ 

Combination of A,B, & C Traits. Leather, Spec. Offer I 

SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS 

The Restoration of th 4-0 

What Jesus Taught 5-0 

Kindergarten' Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 36 

Sunday- Morning In the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6 

SONC BOOKS 

Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 

Leather ..66 

Deseret Song Books. Cloth ... 3-0 

" , Leather ... 00 

Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 

DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS 

Articles of Faith, Limp Leather. Med. Size, Talmige 8-3 

Vitality of Mormonism " 4-0 

Scientific Aspects ol Mormonism, Nelson o-o 

Restoration of the Gospel, If idtsoe 4 o 

losenh Sn ; »!i's Teachings ;-6 

he Young, Weed 4 6 

tlmnge H-q 

b-Q 
2-0 

Smith & Their Fulfillment. Morris 0-0 

KO J. H. TINIKINJ TE KAJ TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI 
M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. B.